JP2019000538A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To display accurate information.SOLUTION: A game machine includes a shooting device for shooting game media to a game area and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player, based on satisfaction of advantageous conditions. The game machine includes: detection means capable of detecting the game media shot to the game area; variable winning means changeable to an open state in which the game media shot to the game area can be won; putout means for putting out the game media, based on satisfaction of predetermined conditions; determination means capable of determining whether a state is an advantageous state; and information display means capable of displaying predetermined information calculated based on the number of game media detected by the detection means in a predetermined state differing from the advantageous state and the number of game media put out by the putout means in a predetermined state. The variable winning means is changed to an open state, based on satisfaction of an advantageous condition, and the determination means determines that a state is an advantageous state from the time, a predetermined time before the variable winning means is changed to an open state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 88

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  Conventionally, as shown in Patent Document 1, a gaming machine that displays information on the number of balls (the number of hit balls) and the number of winning balls (base value) has been proposed.

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 10-118314

  However, there is a possibility that accurate information cannot be displayed.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to display accurate information.

The gaming machine of means C1 is
A launching device (for example, a hitting ball launching device or the like) for launching a game medium (for example, a game ball or the like) to a game area (for example, the game region 10 or the like) is provided, and an advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, first or second) The special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are used for deriving and displaying a definite special symbol that will be a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol, deriving and displaying a definite decorative symbol that will be a big hit combination in the image display device 5, and passing a game ball in a specific area). A game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state, a probability variation state, a short-time state, etc.) advantageous to the player based on
Detecting means capable of detecting game media launched into the game area (for example, a fire ball detector (FIG. 85) provided on the guide rail, and fire ball detectors 701 and 702 (FIG. 96) provided in the game area) Etc.) and
Variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball apparatus 7 or the like) that can be changed to an open state in which the game medium launched into the gaming area can win a prize;
Predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, a normal winning ball device 6A serving as a first starting winning port, a normal variable winning ball device 6B serving as a second starting winning port, general winning ports 50A to 50D serving as general winning regions, A payout means (for example, a ball payout device, a payout mechanism, etc.) for paying out a game medium based on winning a special variable winning ball device 7)
Determination means capable of determining whether or not the player is in the advantageous state (for example, the CPU 103 that determines whether or not the gaming state is based on a probability change flag, a time-shortage flag, etc.);
The number of game media detected by the detection means in a predetermined state different from the advantageous state (for example, a normal state or the like, specifically, a probability variation flag, a time reduction flag, a round game flag is all off, etc.) For example, predetermined information (for example, the number of balls to be struck) and the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state (for example, the number of winning balls by winning in each winning mouth) 83. For example, it is provided with information display means (for example, display monitor 1130 in FIG. 110) capable of displaying (for example, performance display is possible).
The variable winning means is
Change to the open state based on the establishment of the advantageous condition (for example, as shown in FIG. 95 and FIG. 98, based on the fact that the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed at timing t1, The door changes from closed to open)
The determination means includes
A predetermined period before the variable winning means changes to the open state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 95 and 98, a time T3 before the timing t3 at which the big prize opening door changes from the closed state to the open state). From the timing t2 etc.), it is determined that the player is in the advantageous state (for example, as shown in the state control processing of FIG. 88), the round game flag is turned on at the timing t2 when the state change switching waiting time (time T2) elapses. Etc.).
According to this, accurate predetermined information (performance information) can be calculated.

The gaming machine of means C2 is
A gaming machine of means C1,
Variable display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the image display device 5, etc.) for performing variable display and deriving and displaying the display results;
The state (for example, the state at the timing t2) before the predetermined period from the change to the open state is
A special state after the display result of the variable display executed by the variable display means is derived and displayed (for example, a state where a fanfare effect is executed in the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. 95 and 98, etc.) It is.
According to this, accurate predetermined information (performance information) can be calculated.

The gaming machine of means C3 is
A gaming machine of means C1 or means C2,
The detection means is detachable (for example, as shown in FIG. 96, the first launch ball detector 701 and the second launch ball detector 702 include the first launch ball detector 701 and the second launch ball detector 702, respectively. The portion above the broken line P is detachable.
According to this, even if it does not have a detection means, it can respond. In addition, maintenance becomes easy.

The gaming machine of means C4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means C1 to C3,
The detection means includes
It is configured as a unit that can be placed on a game board (for example, game board 2 or the like) that forms a game area (for example, the first launch ball detector 701 and the second launch ball detector 702 are shown in FIG. 96). The portion above the broken line P is configured as a unit).
According to this, maintenance becomes easy. In addition, different models can be used in common.

The gaming machine of means C5 is
A gaming machine of means C4,
The game area includes
There are a left game area (for example, the left game area 10A, etc.) and a right game area (for example, the right game area 10A, etc.) as areas through which the game medium launched by the launching device can pass,
The unit (for example, a part above the broken line P in FIG. 96)
Left-side detection means (for example, the first launch ball detector 701) that detects game media that passes through the left game area, and right-side detection means (for example, second launch) that detects game media that passes through the right game area. Sphere detector 702).
According to this, even if it is fired in any of the game areas, it can be detected.

The gaming machine of means C6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means C1 to C5,
The detection means includes
It is provided upstream of any winning area provided in the gaming area in the flow path of the game medium (for example, as shown in FIG. 85, the launch ball detector 700 includes the normal winning ball apparatus 6A, It is provided above the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B, the general winning ports 50A to 50D, and the special variable winning ball device 7. Also, as shown in FIG. The detector 702 is provided above the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the general winning ports 50A to 50D, and the special variable winning ball device 7).
According to this, it can detect reliably.

The gaming machine of means B1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) Machine 1),
Variable display when a game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative pattern) Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5) for executing
A granting unit (game control microcomputer 100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
Predetermined conditions (effective start winning or first starting winning opening, reaching to the second starting winning opening, reach in a specific period (1 minute, 2 minutes or 5 minutes after the general winning) after the game medium enters the general winning area When the state is established), there is provided an effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) for executing a specific effect (specific effect F (prefetching notice effect), specific effect G (variation result notice effect)). This is a characteristic gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 1 in a 47th effect form to a 49th effect form).
According to this, it is possible to be interested in whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied in a specific period after the game medium enters the general winning area, and the specific effect is obtained after the gaming medium enters the general winning area. It is possible to increase interest until it is executed.

The gaming machine of means B2 is
A gaming machine of means B1,
Execute a notification effect to execute a notification effect that identifiable that the state after the game medium has entered the general winning area (any one of the characters A to C appears immediately after winning the general winning opening) A gaming machine further comprising means.
According to this, it is possible to make the player recognize that the game medium has entered the general winning area.
In addition, as the notification effect for informing that the state after the game medium has entered, it is possible to determine whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed since the game medium entered the general winning area. Includes an effect that is difficult to grasp and an effect that makes it easy for the player to grasp whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed since the game medium entered the general winning area. For example, as the former effect, there is an effect of outputting a sound effect for a relatively short period of time (for example, about 0.5 to 2 seconds) immediately after the game medium enters the general winning area, and as the latter effect, the general winning area There is an effect in which the character is continuously displayed on the image display device until a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute) elapses immediately after the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means B3 is
A gaming machine of means B2,
The notification effect is an effect of notifying whether or not it is the specific period (the specific period (character display period) varies depending on which of the characters A to C is displayed).
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, the interest of the game until the specific effect is executed can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of means B4 is
A gaming machine of means B2 or means B3,
The specific period varies depending on the form of the notification effect (the display period when the character A appears is 1 minute, the display period when the character B appears is 2 minutes, and the display when the character C appears) (The period will be 5 minutes)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, interest can be improved by paying attention to the aspect of the notification effect.
The configuration of the gaming machine according to the means B4 may be as follows, for example.
First, based on the fact that the game medium has entered the general winning area, the effect control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) has a predetermined time period (for example, 1 minute, 2 minutes, and 3 minutes). Any specific period is selected, and an effect mode (for example, the type of character to be displayed on the image display device 5) is determined based on the selected specific period, and a notification effect (character is specified for the specific period) is determined. The effect to be displayed) is executed.
For example, when the first specific period (for example, 1 minute) is selected, the first effect mode (for example, display of the character A) is performed more than when the second specific period (for example, 2 minutes) is selected. It is better to increase the determined ratio. In addition, when the second specific period (for example, 2 minutes) is selected, the second effect mode (for example, display of the character B) is more effective than when the first specific period (for example, 1 minute) is selected. It is better to increase the determined ratio.
In addition, when the specific period and the effect mode of the notification effect correspond to one to one (if character A is fixed for 1 minute, character B is 2 minutes, character C is fixed for 3 minutes) ), Based on the fact that the game medium has entered the general winning area, the effect control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) determines one of the predetermined effect modes. The notification effect (the effect of displaying the character for a specific period) may be executed according to the determined effect mode.

The gaming machine of means B5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B1 to the means B4,
The variable display means is based on a start condition based on the entry of a game medium into the start winning area (when the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, a game ball wins the first start winning opening (effective start winning). ), The start condition (controlled by the big hit game state) is established after the game ball wins (effective start win) at the second start winning opening when the second reserved memory number does not reach the upper limit. The variable display is executed based on the fact that the special display game is not executed).
The effect executing means corresponds to a variable display game to be notified in the start winning memory display area 5H for notifying the display result of variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. A gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 1 in a 47th effect form and a 49th effect form) characterized in that a hold change effect that changes a display part from a normal mode to a special mode is executed as the specific effect.
According to this, the game medium enters the general winning area by creating an interest of notifying the display result of the variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied when the gaming medium enters the general winning area. It is possible to further enhance the interest until the specific performance is executed.

The gaming machine of means B6 is
A gaming machine of means B5,
Holding information corresponding to variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied (the display color is changed in response to the existence of a variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied) Display information) on the display device (image display device 5).
The notice effect is for notifying the display result of variable display corresponding to the hold information according to the form of the hold information (if the start winning determination result specifying command is a command that specifies “big hit”, The display part corresponding to the command is a pending change effect in which the normal mode (for example, blue or red) is changed to the special mode (for example, gold) at a higher rate than the command for designating “out”. It is a gaming machine.
According to this, it is possible to further enhance the interest of notifying the display result of the variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B7 is
A gaming machine of means B6,
The effect execution means displays the object (characters A to C) on the display device so as to be able to specify that the state after the game medium has entered the general winning area is specified (to the general winning opening) (Any of the characters A to C appear immediately after winning)
The notice effect is an effect that the player can recognize when the object changes the mode of the hold information (the display portion corresponding to the special game that is held by the displayed character performing some action) The game machine is characterized in that the production is changed from a normal mode to a special mode.
According to this, it is possible to suggest the entry of the game medium into the general winning area and the advance notice of the display result of the variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied by the common object, and the game to the general winning area It is possible to further enhance the interest from the entry of the medium to the execution of the specific performance.
Specifically, it is possible to recognize that the player can recognize when the object changes the mode of the hold information by creating an effect in which the mode of the hold information also changes with a change in the display mode of the object (for example, a predetermined action). Become.

The gaming machine of means B8 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B1 to the means B7,
In the gaming machine, the specific effect is not executed unless the predetermined condition is satisfied in the specific period (the specific effect F and the specific effect G are not executed unless the predetermined condition is satisfied within the character display period). is there.
According to this, it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied in the specific period.

The gaming machine of means B9 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B1 to the means B8,
There are a plurality of the general winning areas (four from the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D),
The specific period varies depending on the general winning area in which the game medium has entered (if the first general winning port 50A or the second general winning port 50B has been won, one minute, two minutes, or five minutes are specified from the general winning point) It can be a period (characters A to C can appear), but when winning in the third general prize 50C or the fourth general prize opening 50D, only a 5 minute period from the general prize can be a specific period (only character C It is a gaming machine characterized in that it can appear)).
According to this, interest can be improved by making attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

  Moreover, the form which implements the invention mentioned later includes the invention which concerns on the means B10-means B21 shown below.

The gaming machine of means B10 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) Machine 1),
Variable display when a game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative pattern) Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5) for executing
A granting unit (game control microcomputer 100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
Motion detection means (operation button 30 and CPU 120 for effect control) capable of detecting the player's motion;
A specific effect (cut-in notice effect, pseudo-continuation effect) is detected when the player's motion (continuous hitting operation, each symbol stopping operation, all symbol stopping operation) is detected by the motion detecting means after the game medium enters the general winning area. A game machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 50th effect form to the 53rd effect form) characterized by comprising effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a notice effect and a chance eye notice effect) .
According to this, after the game medium enters the general winning area, the specific effect is executed in response to the player's action, so that it is possible to enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B11 is
A gaming machine of means B10,
It is informed in a identifiable manner that the game medium has entered the general winning area (in the 50th effect form and the 51st effect form, the button icon 4000 is increased each time the general winning a prize is won, 52nd In the production form and the 53rd production form, a notice effect (“cut-in”, “pseudo-run”, “chance eye”) that can be executed every time a prize is awarded to the general winning opening is determined, and the character 4000a corresponding to the determination result is determined. The game machine further includes notification effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) for executing a notification effect.
According to this, the player can recognize that the game medium has entered the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B12 is
A gaming machine of means B11,
Depending on the type of action (continuous hitting operation, each symbol stop operation, all symbol stop operation) for enabling execution of the specific effect, the notification effect mode ("cut-in" character 4000a, "pseudo ream" The gaming machine is characterized in that the characters 4000b and 4000c) of “chance eyes” are different.
According to this, the player can recognize which type of operation can perform the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means B13 is
A gaming machine of means B11 or means B12,
There are a plurality of general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D),
The rate at which the notification effect is executed differs depending on which general winning area the game medium has entered (in the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form, the first general winning port 50A of the left game area 10A or (In the case of winning in the second general winning opening 50B, notification is made at a higher rate than in the case of winning in the third general winning opening 50C or the fourth general winning opening 50D in the right game area 10B). It is a gaming machine.
According to this, interest can be improved by making attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means B14 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B11 to the means B13,
There are a plurality of general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D),
Depending on which general winning area the game medium has entered, the mode of the notification effect is different (in the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form, the first general prize opening 50A or the second general prize opening 50B is awarded). In this case, it is possible to display either the “cut-in” character 4000a or the “pseudo-continuous” character 4000b, and when winning in the third general winning opening 50C or the fourth general winning opening 50D, One of the characters “cut-in” 4000a and the “chance” character 4000c can be displayed).
According to this, interest can be improved by making attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means B15 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B11 to the means B14,
The rate at which the notification effect is executed differs depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (in the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form, the general winning a prize was won in the normal state). In the case (when winning in the first general winning opening 50A or the second general winning opening 50B in the left game area 10A), when winning in the general winning opening in the probability changing state or the short time state (the first game area 10B in the right game area 10B) 3) the general winning opening 50C or the fourth general winning opening 50D)) is notified at a higher rate)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it becomes possible to make an interest differ appropriately according to the state of a game.

The gaming machine of means B16 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B11 to the means B15,
The form of the notification effect varies depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (in the 51st effect form and the 53rd effect form, the characters “cut-in” 4000a and “pseudo” in the normal state. ("Ream" character 4000b can be displayed, and "Cut-in" character 4000a and "Chance eye" character 4000c can be displayed in the probability variation state or the short time state.)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it becomes possible to make an interest differ appropriately according to the state of a game.

The gaming machine of means B17 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B10 to the means B16,
The effect execution means can execute the specific effect when the predetermined action is performed after the game medium has entered the general winning area a plurality of times (in the 50th effect form and the 51st effect form, (Pseudo-announcement effect can be executed when winning more than 2 times in the prize opening, and chance-notice effect can be executed when winning more than 3 times in the general prize opening)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to give interest to the number of game media entering the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B18 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B10 to the means B17,
There are a plurality of general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D),
The execution ratio of the specific effect differs depending on which general winning area the game medium has entered (in the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form, the first general prize opening 50A or the second general prize opening 50B). When winning, the notice effect is executed at a higher rate than when winning in the third general winning opening 50C or the fourth general winning opening 50D)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, interest can be improved by making attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means B19 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B10 to the means B18,
There are a plurality of general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D),
Depending on which general winning area the game medium has entered, the types of specific effects that can be executed differ (in the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form, the first general prize opening 50A or the second general prize opening). When winning 50B, either a cut-in notice effect or a pseudo-continuous notice effect can be executed. And any chance chance notice effect)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, interest can be improved by making attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means B20 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B10 to the means B19,
Depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area, the execution ratio of the specific effect varies (in the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form, when a general winning opening is won in the normal state) In the case of winning in the first general winning opening 50A or the second general winning opening 50B in the left gaming area 10A), in the case of winning in the general winning opening in the probability changing state or in the short time state (third general in the right gaming area 10B) (When winning at the winning opening 50C or the fourth general winning opening 50D), a notification is made to enable execution of a specific effect at a higher rate)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it becomes possible to make an interest differ appropriately according to the state of a game.

The gaming machine of means B21 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B10 to the means B20,
The types of specific effects that can be executed differ depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (in the 51st effect form and the 53rd effect form, in the normal state, the cut-in notice effect and the pseudo-continuous effect). Any one of the notice effects can be executed, and in the case of the probability change state or the short time state, either the cut-in notice effect or the chance eye notice effect can be executed)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it becomes possible to make an interest differ appropriately according to the state of a game.

  Moreover, the form which implements the invention mentioned later includes the invention which concerns on the means B22-means B28 shown below.

The gaming machine of means B22 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) Machine 1),
Variable display when a game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative pattern) Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5) for executing
A granting unit (game control microcomputer 100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific effect (specific effect C: point giving effect, specific effect A: variation result notice effect, specific effect B: prefetch notice effect),
The general winning area when the variable display is being executed (within the period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed, within the period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed or has been decided to be executed) When the game medium enters and when the variable display is not executed (the variable display of the special symbol is not executed and is determined to be executed during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed) The gaming machine (27th effect form to 30th effect form pachinko) characterized in that the ratio of the specific effect to be executed differs depending on when the game medium enters the general winning area during the period when the game is not performed. A gaming machine 1).
According to this, when the variable display is executed and when the variable display is not executed, the execution ratio of the specific effect is different, thereby enhancing the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area. Can do.

The gaming machine of means B23 is
A gaming machine of means B22,
Advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol). ,
The specific effect is an effect not related to the display result of the variable display (specific effect C: point grant effect). In the gaming machine (27th effect form, 29th effect form pachinko gaming machine 1) is there.
According to this, even when variable display is not executed, it is possible to appropriately enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B24 is
A gaming machine of means B22,
Advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol). ,
The specific effect is an effect related to the display result of the variable display (specific effect A: change result notice effect, specific effect B: prefetch notice effect), and the general winning area when the variable display is not executed This is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 28th effect form and the 30th effect form), which is not executed when a game medium enters.
According to this, when variable display is executed, it is possible to further enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B25 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) Machine 1),
Variable display when a game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative pattern) Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5) for executing
A granting unit (game control microcomputer 100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific effect (specific effect C: point giving effect, specific effect A: variation result notice effect, specific effect B: prefetch notice effect),
The general winning area when the variable display is being executed (within the period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed, within the period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed or has been decided to be executed) When the game medium enters and when the variable display is not executed (the variable display of the special symbol is not executed and is determined to be executed during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed) A different specific effect is executed when a game medium enters the general winning area during a period when the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a 31st effect form and a 32nd effect form. ).
According to this, when the variable display is being executed and the case where the variable display is not being executed are different different specific effects, it is possible to enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area. .

The gaming machine of means B26 is
A gaming machine of means B25,
Advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol). ,
When a game medium enters the general winning area when the variable display is executed, effects related to the display result of the variable display (specific effect A: change result notice effect, specific effect B: pre-read notice effect) Is executed as the specific production,
When a game medium enters the general winning area when the variable display is not executed, an effect not related to the display result of the variable display (specific effect C: point giving effect) is executed as the specific effect. This is a characteristic gaming machine (the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 31st effect form and the 32nd effect form).
According to this, when the variable display is executed, the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area can be further enhanced, and also when the variable display is not executed, the general winning area It is possible to appropriately enhance the interest when a game medium enters the game.

The gaming machine of means B27 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B22 to the means B26 (27th effect form to 32nd effect form pachinko gaming machine 1),
Depending on the state when the game medium has entered the general winning area when the variable display is executed, the ratio of the specific effect to be executed is different (for example, a special game at the time of winning a general winning opening) Whether or not the game is executed, the number of reserved memory at the time of winning the general prize opening, and the gaming state at the time of winning the general prize opening is the normal state, or the probability change state or the short time state Depending on the classification of whether or not, etc.)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it becomes possible to give interest to the state when the game medium enters the general winning area, and it is possible to further enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B28 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B22 to the means B27 (the 27th effect form to the 32nd effect form pachinko gaming machine 1),
When the variable display is executed, different specific effects are executed according to the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (for example, a special game is executed when winning the general winning opening) Whether the game is in the normal state, the probability change state, or the short-time state. Depending on the category, etc., different types of specific effects are executed)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it becomes possible to give interest to the state when the game medium enters the general winning area, and it is possible to further enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

  Moreover, the form which implements the invention mentioned later includes the invention which concerns on the means B29-means B39 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-139628 (FIG. 33), a winning rate at a start winning opening in a gaming machine is calculated, and a character wearing clothes of different colors according to the calculated winning rate. A gaming machine that executes an effect display to be displayed has been proposed. However, it is necessary not only to display information on the number of game media that have entered the entry area such as the start winning opening on the information display means, but also to make the information more easily visible. The invention according to the means B29 to the means B39 is made in view of the above circumstances, and is to make it easy to visually recognize information relating to the number of game media that have entered the entry area.

The invention according to means B29 is
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) having an entry area (a first start winning port, a second starting winning port, first to fourth general winning ports 50A to 50D, etc.) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. And
Information that can display entry information relating to the number of game media that have entered the entry area (for example, the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening, the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening) Comprising display means (image display device 5);
The information display means displays effect information (for example, a decorative pattern and a fourth pattern) different from the entry information in an area where visibility of the entry information is not hindered (as exemplified in FIG. 42), Is displayed in a second area β) different from the first area α in which the number of winnings is displayed.
According to this, it is easy to visually recognize entry information regarding the number of game media that have entered the entry area.

The invention according to means B30 is
A gaming machine of means B29,
The information display means can display the approach information regardless of the aspect of the effect information (as illustrated in FIG. 42, whether or not the decorative symbol is variably displayed and the fourth symbol is also displayed. Regardless of whether or not is variably displayed, the number of wins to the general winning opening, the number of winning to the first starting winning opening, the number of winning to the second starting winning opening, etc. are displayed in the first area α. In addition, the number of winnings displayed can be updated according to the winnings at each winning award)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, approach information can be visually recognized irrespective of the aspect of effect information.

The invention according to means B31 is
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) having an entry area (a first start winning port, a second starting winning port, first to fourth general winning ports 50A to 50D, etc.) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. And
Error detection means (abnormality detection sensor group 26) for detecting errors (for example, magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, radio wave abnormality, etc.);
Information that can display entry information relating to the number of game media that have entered the entry area (for example, the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening, the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening, etc.) Display means (image display device 5),
The information display means sends error information (for example, an error message) for notifying the occurrence of the error to an area where visibility of the entry information is not hindered (as illustrated in FIGS. 42 and 43). Is displayed in a second area β) that is different from the first area α in which the number of winnings is displayed.
According to this, it is easy to visually recognize entry information regarding the number of game media that have entered the entry area.

The invention according to means B32
A gaming machine of means B31,
The information display means can display the entry information even when the error information is displayed (as illustrated in FIG. 43, regardless of whether an error message is displayed or not) The number of winnings, the number of winnings at the first start winning opening, the number of winnings at the second starting winning opening, etc. are displayed in the first area α, and are displayed according to the winnings at each winning opening. The number of winnings can be updated)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, the entry information can be visually recognized even when the error information is displayed.

The invention according to means B33 is
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) having an entry area (a first start winning port, a second starting winning port, first to fourth general winning ports 50A to 50D, etc.) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. And
Information that can display entry information relating to the number of game media that have entered the entry area (for example, the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening, the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening) Comprising display means (image display device 5);
The information display means displays a display result of variable display (for example, a display result of a final decoration symbol (final stop symbol) or a fourth symbol) executed based on the fact that the game medium has entered the start area, and the entry information. Is displayed in a region where the visibility of the game is not hindered (as illustrated in FIG. 42, the second area β different from the first area α in which the number of winnings at each winning opening is displayed). It is.
According to this, it is easy to visually recognize entry information regarding the number of game media that have entered the entry area.

The invention according to means B34 is
A gaming machine of means B33,
The information display means can display the entry information even when the variable display is being executed (as illustrated in FIG. 42, whether or not the decorative symbol is variably displayed, Regardless of whether or not the 4th symbol is variably displayed, the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening, the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening, etc. are displayed in the first area α. Displayed and the number of winning prizes displayed can be updated according to the winnings at each winning award)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
This makes it possible to visually recognize the entry information even when variable display is being executed.

The invention according to means B35 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B29 to the means B34,
Operable operation means (operation button 30);
Display setting means for setting whether or not to display the entry information on the information display means in accordance with the operation of the operation means (as shown in FIG. And a presentation control CPU 120 for setting whether or not to display the winning information related to the number of winnings in the first area α.
According to this, it becomes possible to arbitrarily set whether or not to display the entry information.

The invention according to means B36 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B29 to the means B35,
Operation means (operation button 30) that can be operated by the player;
A total period setting means for setting the total period of the entry information in accordance with the operation of the operation means (production control CPU 120 for setting the total period based on the setting by the operation button 30 as illustrated in FIG. 46); A gaming machine characterized by further comprising:
According to this, the total period can be set according to the player's judgment.

The invention according to means B37 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B29 to the means B36,
It further comprises a game state control means (game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling a game state (a big hit game state, a probability change state, a short time state, a low base state, a high base state, etc.)
The information display means can display the entry information according to the gaming state (as illustrated in FIG. 45, the number of winnings in the low base state and the number of winnings in the high base state can be displayed separately. Is)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to grasp the entry information corresponding to the gaming state.

The invention according to means B38 is
A gaming machine of means B37,
Variable display means for performing variable display (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure) based on the fact that the game medium has entered the start area (first start prize opening, second start prize opening) (First special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B),
The gaming state control means includes a low-frequency state (a low base state in which high opening control for the second starting prize opening is not executed) and a high-frequency state (first 2) A high base state in which high opening control for the start winning a prize is being executed)
The information display means includes the entry information relating to the period controlled to the low frequency state (such as the number of general winnings in the low base state illustrated in FIG. 45) and the entry relating to the period controlled to the high frequency state. It is a gaming machine that can display information (such as the number of general winnings in the high base state illustrated in FIG. 45).
According to this, it is possible to grasp the entry information according to the low frequency state and the entry information according to the high frequency state.

The invention according to means B39 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B29 to the means B38,
Notification is made when the entry information satisfies a predetermined condition (as exemplified in FIG. 46, when the set number of winnings per total period does not satisfy a predetermined reference value, the fact is notified) A gaming machine further comprising a notification means (image display device 5) for displaying a message.
According to this, it becomes possible to easily grasp that the entry information satisfies a predetermined condition.

  Further, modes for carrying out the invention to be described later include inventions related to means B40 and means B41 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-139628 (FIGS. 32 and 33), when a player receives a game start by inputting a password, the winning rate at the start winning opening in the gaming machine is calculated. There has been proposed a gaming machine that executes an effect display for displaying a character wearing clothes of different colors according to the calculated winning rate. However, it has not been possible for only a person other than the player (for example, a store clerk in the game hall) to confirm information relating to the entry of the game medium into the entry area such as the start prize opening. The invention according to the means B40 and the means B41 is made in view of the above situation, and is intended to enable only a person other than the player (for example, a store clerk in the game hall) to confirm the information.

The invention according to means B40 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) having an entry area (for example, a first start winning opening, a second starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D, etc.) into which a game medium (for example, a game ball) can enter. A gaming machine 1),
A granting unit (for example, the game control microcomputer 100) for granting a gaming value (for example, a prize ball) based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the entry area;
Specific operation means (for example, a mode changeover switch 31 and a reset button) that are disabled by the player;
Informing means for informing cumulative value information (for example, the number of payouts of each general prize port, the number of payouts of each start prize port, and the total number of payouts shown in FIG. 17) related to the accumulated value of the game value given by the giving means ( For example, an image display device 5)
The notifying means notifies the cumulative value information based on the operation of the specific operation means (for example, the information of the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device when the mode changeover switch 31 is operated to enter the maintenance mode). 5)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, only a person other than the player (for example, a shop clerk) can confirm the information.

  The “specific operation means that cannot be operated by the player” may be any means that can be operated by, for example, a game shop clerk or a game machine inspector / inspector.

The invention according to means B41 is
A gaming machine of means B40,
Providing effect execution means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) for executing effects related to games
The notifying means notifies the cumulative value information in a manner corresponding to the aspect of the effect executed by the effect executing means (for example, the character appearing during the notice effect or the reach effect uses the information in the winning number management table). Display aloud or output sound)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to easily recognize which type of gaming machine information is based on the notification mode.

  Further, the modes for carrying out the invention to be described later include inventions related to means B42 to means B51 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-73187 (FIG. 67), when a game ball enters a normal winning opening (general winning area), the number of balls entered is counted up on the effect display device. A gaming machine has been proposed in which, when the counted number reaches the number of execution triggers determined by lottery, the player is informed that a memory in the memory is generated. In the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-73187, the number of entered balls is uniformly counted up by one by entering the game balls into the normal winning opening. Therefore, in a gaming machine having such a general winning area, there is room for further enhancing the interest when a game medium enters the general winning area. The invention according to the means B42 to the means B51 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to increase the interest of games in gaming machines having a general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B42 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) Machine 1),
Variable display when a game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative pattern) Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5) for executing
A granting unit (game control microcomputer 100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific effect (specific effect D for gradually increasing the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 from the lowest 0 level to the maximum 10 levels) that changes the performance mode in stages according to the entry of the game medium into the general winning area. Specific execution execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) that can be executed,
According to the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (a distinction between a period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed and a period during which the special symbol variable display is not being executed, etc.) The rate at which the effect mode changes in the effect is different (the rate at which the effect of increasing the filling region 2100a in the gauge image 2100 by one step is different).
This is a gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 33rd effect form to the 37th effect form).
According to this, the interest rate when the game medium enters the general winning area is increased by changing the ratio of the change in the production mode in the specific effect according to the state when the game medium enters the general winning area. Can do.

The gaming machine of means B43 is
A gaming machine of means B42,
The variable display means (image display device 5) executes the variable display (variable display of decorative symbols) for a predetermined period (variable display period corresponding to the variation pattern designation command received by the effect control CPU 120). Is what
Depending on the remaining period of the variable display when the game medium enters the general winning area (the case where the remaining time until the definite decorative symbol is derived and displayed is 10 seconds or more and the case where it is less than 10 seconds) The gaming machine (the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 34th effect form) characterized in that the ratio of the effect mode changing in the specific effect is different.
According to this, according to the remaining period of the variable display when the game medium enters the general winning area, the ratio of the effect mode changing in the specific effect is different, so that the interest of the specific effect can be further enhanced.

In the gaming machine of means B43,
The remaining period of the variable display executed when the game medium enters the general winning area (the case where the remaining time until the fixed decorative symbol is derived and displayed is 10 seconds or more and the case where it is less than 10 seconds) ) And the display result of the variable display executed when the game medium enters the general winning area (a jackpot symbol, an off symbol), the rate of change of the production mode in the specific effect is made different. May be. Specifically, when the remaining time of the variable display of the special symbol executed when the game medium enters the general winning area is within a predetermined range (for example, less than 10 seconds), the display result of the variable display is Accordingly, the rate of change of the production mode in the specific production may be different (for example, it changes at a high rate when it becomes a big hit symbol, and changes at a lower rate when it becomes a loss symbol). .

The gaming machine of means B44 is
A gaming machine of means B42 or means B43,
The variable display means (image display device 5) ends the variable display based on the start condition (previous start winning) after the game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening). And the variable display (the variable display of the first special figure, the variable display of the second special figure, the variable display of the decorative design) is executed based on the fact that the game is not controlled even in the big hit gaming state) ,
When the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol), advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player;
A notice effect (prefetching notice effect) for notifying that the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result is executed before the start condition of the variable display is satisfied (variable display as a target of the prefetching notice effect). Further comprising a notice effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) executed before)
A period from when the game medium enters the general winning area until the variable display that is the target of the notice effect is executed (when the effect control CPU 120 receives the general prize opening designation command, the target of the pre-read notice effect) The ratio of the change in the effect mode in the specific effect varies according to the variable display count until the variable display is executed), and the pachinko gaming machine of the 35th effect form 1).
According to this, depending on the period from when the game medium enters the general winning area until the variable display that is the target of the notice effect is executed, the ratio of the change in the effect mode in the specific effect varies. The entertainment of the production can be further enhanced.

In the gaming machine of means B44,
A period from when the game medium enters the general winning area until the variable display that is the target of the notice effect is executed (when the effect control CPU 120 receives the general prize opening designation command, the target of the pre-read notice effect) Effect in the specific effect depending on the variable display count until the variable display is executed) and the display result of the variable display that is the target of the notice effect (big hit symbol, off symbol) You may make it the ratio in which an aspect changes differ. Specifically, the variable display count until the variable display (variable display that is the target of the pre-reading notice) is executed within a predetermined range when the game medium enters the general winning area is executed. In the case of being within (for example, 2 times or less), the rate of change in the effect mode in the specific effect differs depending on the display result of the variable display that is the target of the notice effect (high in the case of a big hit symbol) It may be changed at a rate, and when it becomes an outlier symbol, it may be changed at a lower rate).

The gaming machine of means B45 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B42 to the means B44,
Reach effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) for executing a reach effect in association with the variable display (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative pattern),
When a game medium enters the general winning area before the execution of the reach effect (when the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening is before the reach state in the reach change), and after the execution of the reach effect When the game medium enters the general winning area (when the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is after reaching the reach state in the reach variation), the rate of change of the production mode in the specific effect is different. A pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 36th effect form.
According to this, when the game medium enters the general winning area before execution of the reach effect, and when the game medium enters the general winning area after execution of the reach effect, the effect mode changes in the specific effect. Different ratios can further enhance the interest of specific effects.

The gaming machine of means B46 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B42 to the means B45,
A plurality of the general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D);
Depending on the general winning area where the game medium has entered (when the game ball has won one of the second general winning opening 50B and the third general winning opening 50C, and the first general winning opening 50A and the fourth general winning opening 50D). The gaming machine (the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 37th effect form) is characterized in that the ratio of the effect mode changing in the specific effect is different.
According to this, the interest rate of the specific effect can be further enhanced by changing the ratio of the change of the effect mode in the specific effect according to the general winning area where the game medium has entered.

The gaming machine of means B47 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) Machine 1),
Variable display when a game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative pattern) Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5) for executing
A granting unit (game control microcomputer 100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific effect (specific effect D for gradually increasing the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 from the lowest 0 level to the maximum 10 levels) that changes the performance mode in stages according to the entry of the game medium into the general winning area. Specific execution execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) that can be executed,
According to the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (a distinction between a period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed and a period during which the special symbol variable display is not being executed, etc.) The stage in which the production mode changes in production is different (the number of stages (+1 to +3) for increasing the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 is different).
This is a gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 38th effect form to the 42nd effect form).
According to this, depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area, the stage in which the production mode changes in the specific effect is different, thereby enhancing the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area. Can do.

The gaming machine of means B48 is
A gaming machine of means B47,
The variable display means (image display device 5) executes the variable display (variable display of decorative symbols) for a predetermined period (variable display period corresponding to the variation pattern designation command received by the effect control CPU 120). Is what
Depending on the remaining period of the variable display when the game medium enters the general winning area (the case where the remaining time until the definite decorative symbol is derived and displayed is 10 seconds or more and the case where it is less than 10 seconds) The gaming machine (the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 39th effect form) characterized in that the stage in which the effect mode changes in the specific effect is different.
According to this, depending on the remaining period of the variable display when the game medium enters the general winning area, the stage in which the effect mode changes in the specific effect is different, and thus the interest of the specific effect can be further enhanced.

In the gaming machine of means B48,
The remaining period of the variable display executed when the game medium enters the general winning area (the case where the remaining time until the fixed decorative symbol is derived and displayed is 10 seconds or more and the case where it is less than 10 seconds) ) And the display result of the variable display (a jackpot symbol, a loss symbol) executed when the game medium enters the general winning area, the stage of changing the presentation mode in the specific effect is different. May be. Specifically, when the remaining time of the variable display of the special symbol executed when the game medium enters the general winning area is within a predetermined range (for example, less than 10 seconds), the display result of the variable display is Accordingly, the stage in which the production mode changes in the specific production may be different (for example, the number of stages changes when the jackpot symbol is changed, and the number of stages changes when it becomes a loss symbol). good.

The gaming machine of means B49 is
A gaming machine of means B47 or means B48,
The variable display means (image display device 5) ends the variable display based on the start condition (previous start winning) after the game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening). And the variable display (the variable display of the first special figure, the variable display of the second special figure, the variable display of the decorative design) is executed based on the fact that the game is not controlled even in the big hit gaming state) ,
When the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol), advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player;
A notice effect (prefetching notice effect) for notifying that the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result is executed before the start condition of the variable display is satisfied (variable display as a target of the prefetching notice effect). Further comprising a notice effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) executed before)
A period from when the game medium enters the general winning area until the variable display that is the target of the notice effect is executed (when the effect control CPU 120 receives the general prize opening designation command, the target of the pre-read notice effect) The stage in which the production mode changes in the specific production differs according to the variable display frequency until the variable display is executed), and the pachinko gaming machine of the 40th production form 1).
According to this, the stage in which the production mode changes in the specific production varies depending on the period from when the game medium enters the general winning area until the variable display that is the target of the notice production is executed. The entertainment of the production can be further enhanced.

In the gaming machine of means B49,
A period from when the game medium enters the general winning area until the variable display that is the target of the notice effect is executed (when the effect control CPU 120 receives the general prize opening designation command, the target of the pre-read notice effect) Effect in the specific effect depending on the variable display count until the variable display is executed) and the display result of the variable display that is the target of the notice effect (big hit symbol, off symbol) You may make it the stage in which an aspect changes differ. Specifically, the variable display count until the variable display (variable display that is the target of the pre-reading notice) is executed within a predetermined range when the game medium enters the general winning area is executed. In the case of within (for example, 2 times or less), the stage in which the production mode changes in the specific production varies depending on the display result of the variable display that is the subject of the announcement production (for example, when it becomes a big hit symbol) It is also possible to change the number of stages, and change the number of stages to a smaller number if the pattern is out of place.

The gaming machine of means B50 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B47 to the means B49,
Reach effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) for executing a reach effect in association with the variable display (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative pattern),
When a game medium enters the general winning area before the execution of the reach effect (when the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening is before the reach state in the reach change), and after the execution of the reach effect The stage in which the production mode changes in the specific effect is different when the game medium enters the general prize area (when the timing when the game ball wins the general prize opening is after reaching the reach state in the reach variation). Is a gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 1 in a 41st effect form).
According to this, when the game medium enters the general winning area before execution of the reach effect, and when the game medium enters the general winning area after execution of the reach effect, the effect mode changes in the specific effect. Different stages can further enhance the interest of specific effects.

The gaming machine of means B51 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B47 to the means B50,
A plurality of the general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D);
Depending on the general winning area where the game medium has entered (when the game ball has won one of the second general winning opening 50B and the third general winning opening 50C, and the first general winning opening 50A and the fourth general winning opening 50D). The game machine (the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 42nd effect form) is characterized in that the stage in which the effect mode changes in the specific effect differs depending on whether the game ball is won in any of the above.
According to this, the stage in which a production | presentation aspect changes in a specific production differs according to the general winning area | region where the game medium approached, and can further enhance the interest of a specific production.

  Moreover, the form which implements invention mentioned later includes the invention which concerns on the means B52-means B56 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-73187 (FIG. 67), when a game ball enters a normal winning opening (general winning area), the number of balls entered is counted up on the effect display device. A gaming machine has been proposed in which, when the counted number reaches the number of execution triggers determined by lottery, the player is informed that a memory in the memory is generated. In the gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 1, an effect (a count-up display) is executed every time a game ball enters the normal winning opening. In a gaming machine having such a general winning area, when a game medium does not enter the general winning area, it is necessary to grasp this, but this is not considered in the prior art. The invention according to the means B52 to the means B56 is made in view of the above situation, and it is possible to grasp that the game medium does not enter the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B52 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) Machine 1),
Variable display when a game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative pattern) Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5) for executing
A granting unit (game control microcomputer 100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
When the number of game media entering the general winning area in a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number (when the number of winnings in the general winning opening in 10 minutes in which a game is detected is 0, A special effect (when there are less than 3 winning prizes in the general winning opening in 30 minutes, which is detected as being in the middle) and an image imitating the form of the general winning opening and "There is no general winning prize." A game machine comprising: a specific effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific effect E) for displaying a notification image 2200 including characters on the image display device 5.
According to this, it is possible for the player and the game hall to grasp that the number of game media entering the general winning area is less than the predetermined number.

The gaming machine of means B53 is
A gaming machine of means B52,
Setting means for setting whether or not execution of the specific effect by the specific effect execution means is permitted (an effect of determining whether or not to execute the specific effect E based on the game field setting and the player setting in the display setting table) Control CPU 120),
Clerk operation accepting means (display changeover switch 32) for accepting a setting operation by the clerk,
When the setting operation is accepted by the store clerk operation accepting unit, the setting unit performs setting to permit execution of the specific effect (the specific effect E (notifying that there is no general prize) based on the setting of the display changeover switch 32). , Notification that the number of general prizes is small)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, the intention of the game hall can be reflected as to whether or not to execute the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means B54 is
A gaming machine of means B52 or means B53,
Storage means (a winning number counter area formed in the RAM 122) for storing the number of game media entering into the general winning area (winning number for 30 minutes);
The number of entries stored in the storage means is not held at the time of power interruption (the value of the winning number counter area is erased by power interruption).
According to this, it is possible to reduce the control burden for maintaining the memory of the number of entries at the time of power interruption.

The gaming machine of means B55 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B52 to the means B54,
Depending on the state of the gaming machine, the rate at which the specific effect is executed is different (for example, the specific effect E is executed at a different rate between the normal state and the probability variation state or the time-short state).
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, the interest of specific production can be further enhanced.

The gaming machine of means B56 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B52 to the means B55,
Different specific effects are executed according to the state of the gaming machine (for example, the specific effect E is executed in a different manner depending on whether it is in the normal state or in the probability variation state or the time-short state).
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, the interest of specific production can be further enhanced.

  Moreover, the form which implements the invention mentioned later includes the invention which concerns on the means B57-means B64 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2015-80531 (FIG. 83), during the execution of a big hit game, the number of prize balls (given value) obtained by entering the game medium into the big prize opening, There has been proposed a gaming machine that executes an effect of displaying a numerical image that distinguishes the number of prize balls (given value) obtained when a game medium enters a normal winning opening (general winning area). In a gaming machine having such a general winning area, the intention of the game hall or the player is not reflected as to whether or not an effect is executed when a game medium enters the general winning area. The invention according to the means B57 to B64 is made in view of the above situation, and reflects the intention of the game hall and the player as to whether or not the presentation is executed when the game medium enters the general winning area. The purpose is to make it possible.

The gaming machine of means B57 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) Machine 1),
Variable display means for variably displaying identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative design) when a game medium enters the start prize area (first start prize opening, second start prize opening) (First special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5);
A granting unit (game control microcomputer 100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
When a game medium enters the general winning area, a specific effect (displays information in the winning number management table in the maintenance mode based on the setting of the mode changeover switch 31 and the setting of the display changeover switch 32 and the operation button 30. Based on the setting, the object is increased every time the game ball enters the general winning opening, the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the big hit gaming state is displayed, the specific effect A: the change result notice effect, the specific effect B: the look-ahead Notification means (image display device 5) capable of executing a notice effect);
A gaming machine comprising: setting means (mode change switch 31, display change switch 32, and operation button 30) for setting whether or not execution of the specific effect is permitted by the specific effect executing means. .
According to this, it is possible to reflect the intention of the game hall or the player regarding whether or not to execute the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means B58 is
A gaming machine of means B57,
It further comprises clerk operation accepting means (mode changeover switch 31 and display changeover switch 32) for accepting a setting operation by the clerk,
The setting means performs a setting for permitting execution of the specific effect when a setting operation is received by the store clerk operation receiving means (a winning number management table in the maintenance mode based on the setting of the mode switch 31). Based on the setting of the display changeover switch 32, the object is increased for each entry of the game ball into the general winning opening, the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the big hit gaming state is displayed, the specific effect A : Enables execution of change result notice effect, Specific effect B: Enables prefetch notice effect)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, the intention of the game hall can be reflected as to whether or not to execute the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means B59 is
A gaming machine of means B57 or means B58,
A player operation receiving means for receiving a setting operation by the player;
When the setting operation is accepted by the player operation accepting means, the setting means performs a setting for permitting the execution of the specific effect (based on the setting by the operation button 30 during the demonstration screen display, Based on the setting by the operation button 30 in the demonstration screen display, which increases the object every time the game ball enters the game, the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the big hit gaming state is displayed. Can be executed, specific effect B: pre-reading notice effect can be executed)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to reflect the player's intention regarding whether or not to execute the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means B60 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B57 to the means B59,
The specific effect informs the number of game media entering the general winning area in a predetermined period (a period controlled to the big hit gaming state) so as to be able to be specified (the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls to the big winning opening) The game machine is characterized in that the number of winning balls corresponding to the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls in the general winning opening and the number of winning balls corresponding to the number of winning balls are displayed separately.
According to this, the playability in a predetermined period can be improved.

The gaming machine of means B61 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B57 to the means B60,
The specific effect executing means executes the specific effect (executes the effects of the 25th effect form and the 26th effect form) when the number of game media entering the general winning area reaches a predetermined number. It is a featured gaming machine.
According to this, it is possible to give interest to the number of game media entering the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B62 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B57 to the means B61,
The specific effect executing means executes different specific effects according to the number of game media entering the general winning area (executes the effects of the 25th effect form and the 26th effect form). It is.
According to this, it is possible to give interest to the number of game media entering the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B63 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B57 to the means B62,
The specific effect is an effect of notifying the number of game media entering the general winning area in an identifiable manner (increasing the object each time a game ball enters the general winning port)
When a game is not being performed on the gaming machine (the decorative symbol variable display is not executed, and the start winning port specifying command, the general winning port specifying command, and the big winning port winning command are received for a predetermined period of time. An effect control CPU 120 that makes a game end determination based on the absence of the game medium, and in a specific effect, informs that it is possible to specify that the number of game media entering the general winning area is 0 (game end determination is made In the event that the object corresponding to the number of winnings in the general winning opening displayed on the image display device 5 is deleted)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to prevent other players from grasping the number of game media entering the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B64 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B57 to the means B63,
The specific effect is a gaming machine characterized in that display information (an object corresponding to the number of winnings in a general winning opening) corresponding to the number of entering game media into the general winning area is displayed.
According to this, it becomes possible to easily grasp the number of game media entering the general winning area.

  Moreover, the form which implements the invention mentioned later includes the invention which concerns on the means B65-means B77 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-200305 (paragraph 0208, FIG. 59), when a game ball wins a general winning opening during a big hit, one aspect of the start memory display changes, and the start memory There has been proposed a gaming machine that notifies whether the special figure variation display game corresponding to the display is “winning” or “out of game”. In a gaming machine having such a general winning opening, there is room for further enhancing the interest when a game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening. The invention according to the means B65 to the means B77 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to enhance the interest of the game in a gaming machine having a general winning opening.

The gaming machine of means B65 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) Machine 1),
Variable display means for variably displaying identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative design) when a game medium enters the start prize area (first start prize opening, second start prize opening) (First special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5);
A granting unit (game control microcomputer 100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) for executing a specific effect (specific effect A: variation result notice effect),
When the game medium enters the general winning area in the first gaming state (normal state) and when the game medium enters the general winning area in the second gaming state (probability change or short-time state) , The ratio of executing the specific effect is different (in the normal state, the specific effect is executed at a higher rate than the probability change or the short-time state)
This is a gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 1 having a first effect form to a fourth effect form).
According to this, it is possible to improve interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B66 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) Machine 1),
Variable display means for variably displaying identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative design) when a game medium enters the start prize area (first start prize opening, second start prize opening) (First special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5);
A granting unit (game control microcomputer 100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) for executing a specific effect (specific effect A: variation result notice effect, specific effect B: prefetch notice effect),
When the game medium enters the general winning area in the first gaming state (normal state) and when the game medium enters the general winning area in the second gaming state (probability change or short-time state) , Execute different specific effects (specify the specific effect A in the normal state, and execute the specific effect B in the probability change or short-time state)
This is a gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 1 in the fifth effect form to the twelfth effect form).
According to this, it is possible to improve interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B67 is
A gaming machine of means B65 or means B66 (pachinko gaming machine 1 in the second effect form to the fourth effect form, the tenth effect form to the twelfth effect form),
In the first game state (normal state), the specific effect is executed when the number of game media entering the general winning area becomes the first entry number,
In the second game state (probability change or short-time state), the specific effect is executed when the number of game media entering the general winning area becomes a second entry number different from the first entry number. It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to give interest to the number of game media entering the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B68 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) Machine 1),
Variable display means for variably displaying identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative design) when a game medium enters the start prize area (first start prize opening, second start prize opening) (First special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5);
A granting unit (game control microcomputer 100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) for executing a specific effect (specific effect A: variation result notice effect),
When the game medium enters the general winning area during the first period (after reaching reach state of reach change) and when during the second period (before reach reach state of reach change or reach change) The rate at which the specific effect is executed differs depending on the game medium entering the general winning area (after the reach fluctuation state is established, it is specified at a higher period than the reach fluctuation period or before the reach fluctuation state is established. Production is performed)
This is a gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 1 in a thirteenth effect form to a sixteenth effect form).
According to this, it is possible to improve interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B69 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) Machine 1),
Variable display means for variably displaying identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative design) when a game medium enters the start prize area (first start prize opening, second start prize opening) (First special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5);
A granting unit (game control microcomputer 100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) for executing a specific effect (specific effect A: variation result notice effect, specific effect B: prefetch notice effect),
When the game medium enters the general winning area during the first period (after reaching reach state of reach change) and when during the second period (before reach reach state of reach change or reach change) Different specific effects are executed when the game medium enters the general winning area (the specific effect A is executed after the reach state is established, and the specific effect B is executed before the reach state is established. The specific effect A is executed, and the specific effect B is executed during a period other than the reach change or before the reach state of reach change is established)
This is a gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 1 having a 17th effect form to a 24th effect form).
According to this, it is possible to improve interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B70 is
A gaming machine of means B68 or means B69 (14th effect form to 16th effect form, 22nd effect form to 24th effect form pachinko gaming machine 1),
During the first period (after the reach state of reach variation is established), the specific effect is executed when the number of game media entering the general winning area becomes the first entry number,
During the second period (a period other than reach fluctuation or before reach reach is reached), the number of game media entering the general winning area is a second entry number different from the first entry number. In some cases, the specific effect is executed.
According to this, it is possible to give interest to the number of game media entering the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B71 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means B65 to the means B70 (second effect form, sixth effect form, tenth effect form to twelfth effect form, fourteenth effect form, eighteenth effect form, and twenty-second effect form) Pachinko machine 1)
A plurality of the general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D);
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific effect is executed when a game medium enters each of the plurality of general winning areas.
According to this, it is possible to give interest to which of the plurality of general winning areas the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means B72 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B65 to the means B71 (pachinko gaming machine 1 in the fifth effect form to the twelfth effect form, the seventeenth effect form to the twenty-fourth effect form),
The variable display means includes a start condition (the variable display based on the previous start winning is completed and the big hit gaming state after the game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening). The identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative design) is variably displayed based on the fact that
When the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result (big hit symbol), the advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 100 for controlling to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player) )When,
Pre-start determination means for performing a pre-start determination to determine whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state before the start condition is satisfied (control to a big hit gaming state based on a big hit determination random number extracted at the time of starting winning) And a game control microcomputer 100) for determining whether or not to perform,
The specific effect executing means is
Based on the pre-start determination, an effect (pre-reading notice effect) for notifying that it is controlled to the advantageous state is applied to the specific effect (specific effect B) before the start condition for the variable display to be targeted is satisfied. It is a gaming machine characterized by being executed as
According to this, it is possible to give more interest to the specific effect by notifying that the advantageous state is controlled before the variable display start condition is established.

The gaming machine of means B73 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B65 to the means B72 (pachinko gaming machine 1 in the first effect form to the 24th effect form),
The variable display means includes a start condition (the variable display based on the previous start winning is completed and the big hit gaming state after the game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening). The identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative design) is variably displayed based on the fact that
When the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result (big hit symbol), the advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 100 for controlling to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player) )When,
Start determination means for determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state when the start condition is satisfied (starting determination means for storing a big hit determination when starting variable symbol variable display) A game control microcomputer 100) for determining whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state based on a random number,
The specific effect executing means is
The gaming machine is characterized in that, based on the determination at the start time, an effect of notifying that it is controlled to the advantageous state (a change result notice effect) is executed as the specific effect.
According to this, it is possible to give more interest to the specific effect by notifying that it is controlled to the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means B74 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B65 to the means B73 (the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the third effect form and the fifteenth effect form),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the execution ratio of the specific effect varies depending on the frequency of entry of the game medium into the general winning area (the number of winnings within 120 seconds from the first winning to the general winning opening).
According to this, it is possible to give interest to the frequency of game media entering the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B75 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B65 to the means B74 (pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 11th effect form and the 23rd effect form),
The game machine is characterized in that a specific effect is executed according to the frequency of entry of game media into the general winning area (the number of winnings within 120 seconds from the first winning to the general winning opening).
According to this, it is possible to give interest to the frequency of game media entering the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B76 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B65 to the means B75 (4th effect form, 8th effect form, 12th effect form, 16th effect form, 20th effect form, 24th effect form pachinko gaming machine 1) Because
A plurality of the general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D);
The specific effect executing means is
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific effect is executed based on the fact that the order of entry of game media into the plurality of general winning areas is a predetermined order.
According to this, it is possible to give interest to the order in which the game media enter the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B77 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means B65 to the means B76 (4th effect form, 8th effect form, 12th effect form, 16th effect form, 20th effect form, 24th effect form pachinko gaming machine 1) Because
There are other winning areas different from the general winning area (first starting prize opening, second starting prize opening),
The specific effect executing means is
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific effect is executed based on the fact that the order of entry of game media into the general prize area and the order of entry of game media into the other prize areas is a specific order. .
According to this, it is possible to give interest to the order of entry of the game media into the general winning area and other winning areas.

  Moreover, the form which implements invention mentioned later includes the invention which concerns on the means A1-means A9 shown below. Conventionally, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117576, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a windmill and a large number of game nails are provided on the surface of the game board to change the flow direction and speed of the game ball. In this type of gaming machine, the passing rate of the winning opening and the passing gate varies depending on the adjustment of the game nail provided on the game board, and the game ball payout rate is designed by adjusting the game nail or the like. Sometimes. However, since it was not possible to recognize from the outside of the gaming machine what adjustments were made to the game nails and the like, it was difficult to determine whether or not the payout rate was as designed. The invention according to the means A1 to the means A9 has been made in view of the above situation, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of recognizing what adjustment has been made.

The gaming machine of means A1 (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine, etc.)
Predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, a normal variable winning ball device 6B serving as a second start winning opening, a special variable winning ball device 7 serving as a large winning opening, a normal winning ball device 6A serving as a first starting winning opening, a general winning area, and the like. A game value (for example, a game ball, a slot machine medal, etc.) is paid out by winning a prize to the general winning openings 50A to 50D and displaying a predetermined symbol combination on the active line of the slot machine. Predetermined information (for example, combination (relation ratio), combination ratio, machine discount, etc.) relating to the game value provided on the main board (for example, the main board 11, the main board of the slot machine, etc.) that controls the game. ) Can be displayed (for example, display monitor 29, slot machine display monitor, etc.), and the door frame (for example, gaming machine frame 3, slot machine door frame, etc.) is opened. The display of the predetermined information is limited (for example, the display of the role combination (relation ratio) is stopped, depending on the occurrence of a possible error (for example, an error requiring opening of the door such as error 1 to error 7 shown in FIG. 65). ).
According to the above configuration, it is possible to recognize what adjustment has been made. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the predetermined information when the error is canceled when the door frame is opened.

The gaming machine of means A2 is
A gaming machine of means A1 (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine, etc.),
When the error (for example, an error requiring opening of the door such as error 1 to error 7 shown in FIG. 65 or the like) occurs, the restriction (for example, the display of the role combination (connection ratio) ratio, for example) is performed.
According to the above configuration, the player can be prevented from seeing the predetermined information.

The gaming machine of means A3 is
A gaming machine of means A1 (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine, etc.),
When the door frame (for example, the frame 3 for a gaming machine, the door frame of a slot machine, etc.) is opened after the error (for example, an error requiring opening of the door such as error 1 to error 7 shown in FIG. 65) occurs. In addition, the restriction (for example, the display of the role combination (relation ratio) role ratio is stopped, for example) is performed.
According to the above configuration, the player can be prevented from seeing the predetermined information.

The gaming machine of means A4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to A3 (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine, etc.),
The information display means (for example, the display monitor 29, the display monitor of the slot machine, etc.) is provided on the condition that the error (for example, an error requiring opening of the door such as error 1 to error 7 shown in FIG. 65, etc.) has not occurred. The predetermined information (for example, a combination (connection ratio), a combination ratio, a machine discount, etc.) is displayed.
According to the above configuration, the player can be prevented from seeing the predetermined information.

The gaming machine of means A5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to A4 (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine, etc.),
A predetermined time (for example, a measurement time t measured by a measurement timer in the display restriction confirmation process of FIG. 63, etc.) after canceling the error (for example, an error requiring opening of the door such as error 1 to error 7 shown in FIG. 65). ) Elapses, the predetermined information (for example, a combination (combination ratio), a combination ratio, a machine discount, etc.) is displayed.
According to the above configuration, the player can be prevented from seeing the predetermined information.

The gaming machine of means A6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to A5 (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine, etc.),
The information display means (for example, the display monitor 29, the display monitor of the slot machine, etc.) is configured to display a plurality of the predetermined information (for example, a combination (relation ratio), a combination ratio, a machine ratio, etc.) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds). It is possible to switch and display each.
According to the said structure, the increase in a member can be suppressed.

The gaming machine of means A7 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to A6 (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine, etc.),
The information display means (for example, the display monitor 29, the display monitor of the slot machine, etc.) uses a predetermined unit (for example, the number of prize balls) as the predetermined information (for example, a combination of consecutive (continuous ratio), a ratio of roles, a machine discount, etc.). Information for every 60000).
According to the above configuration, the numerical value of the period corresponding to the predetermined unit can be easily recognized.

The gaming machine of means A8 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to A7 (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine, etc.),
The information display means (for example, the display monitor 29, the display monitor of the slot machine, etc.) is information for each predetermined unit (for example, for example, a combination (relation ratio), a combination ratio, a machine discount, etc.). The short-term service group (run ratio) and the short-term role ratio) and cumulative information (for example, the cumulative service group (run ratio), the cumulative role ratio) are switched and displayed.
According to the said structure, the information for every predetermined unit and cumulative information can be compared.

The gaming machine of means A9 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to A8 (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine, etc.),
The information display means (for example, the display monitor 29, the display monitor of the slot machine, etc.) includes the main substrate (for example, the main substrate 11, the main substrate of the slot machine, etc.), and is caulked substrate case (for example, substrate case) 201, 202).
According to the above configuration, fraud can be prevented.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. (A) The figure which shows the winning number information managed by the winning number management table, (b) The figure which shows the winning number information managed by the display control table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between game hall setting and player setting. It is explanatory drawing in the case of performing a display setting with the operation button which a player can operate. It is explanatory drawing in the case of displaying the object corresponding to the winning to a general winning opening. It is explanatory drawing in the case of displaying the number of wins to the general winning opening in the big hit gaming state. It is explanatory drawing which shows each production performed according to a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a fluctuation result notice effect and a prefetch notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a 1st effect form-a 4th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 5th production form-the 8th production form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a 9th effect form-a 12th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 13th effect form-the 16th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 17th effect form-the 20th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 21st effect form-the 24th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 25th effect form and the 26th effect form. It is a figure which shows the number-of-wins information managed by the number-of-wins management table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a point provision effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 27th effect form-the 30th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 31st effect form and the 32nd effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a gauge update effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 33rd effect form-the 36th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 37th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 38th effect form-the 41st effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 42nd effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a non-winning alert | report effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 43rd effect form-the 46th effect form. It is a figure which shows the appearance ratio of character AC in the 47th production form-the 49th production form. It is a figure which shows the display period of character AC in the 47th effect form-the 49th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 47th production form-the 49th production form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the pending | holding change effect in the 47th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the change result notice effect in the 48th effect form. It is a timing chart which shows the execution timing and execution period of each production in the 47th production form and the 48th production form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 50th production form and the 51st production form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of continuous hit operation alerting | reporting and cut-in notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of each symbol stop operation alert | report and pseudo | simulation continuous notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of each symbol stop operation alert | report and pseudo | simulation continuous notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of all the symbol stop operation alerting | reporting, and a chance eye notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of all the symbol stop operation alerting | reporting, and a chance eye notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution ratio of each announcement effect for every general winning opening in the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the display area of each production | presentation information in the setting which displays winning number information. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the display mode of an error message. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the display area of each production | presentation information in the setting which does not display winning number information. It is explanatory drawing which shows the item example of the number-of-wins information which can be displayed on a 1st area. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the setting method of a total period. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other example of the display area of each production | presentation information in the setting which displays winning number information, and the setting which does not display winning number information. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other example of the display area of each production | presentation information in the setting which displays winning number information, and the setting which does not display winning number information. It is a block diagram which shows in detail the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine. (A) is the front view which simplified the main board | substrate, (B) is explanatory drawing explaining the display content of a display monitor. It is a figure which shows the structure of a part of storage area in RAM of a main board | substrate. It is the figure which showed the memory map of CPU in a main board | substrate. It is the figure which showed the memory map of the built-in ROM area in CPU. It is a figure which shows the structure of the use area program area and non-use area program area in a built-in ROM area. It is a table | surface which shows the calling instruction used in a built-in ROM area. It is a figure which shows the other structure of the use area program area and non-use area program area in a built-in ROM area. (A) is a diagram conceptually showing the processing procedure of the first interrupt processing, (B) is a diagram conceptually showing the processing procedure of the second interrupt processing, and (C) is a processing procedure of the third interrupt processing. FIG. (A) is a time chart which shows the display time of the item displayed on a display monitor, (B-1)-(B-5) is explanatory drawing explaining the change of the display content of a display monitor. It is explanatory drawing explaining the movement of the data memorize | stored in the storage area of the ring buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a combination (ream ratio) and ratio related process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a role combination (ream ratio) and role ratio display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a display restriction confirmation process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a display switching control process. It is a table | surface which shows the kind of error in a gaming machine. (A) is a time chart showing the relationship between the signal flow when the third interrupt processing is executed and the display state of the monitor, etc., and (B) is the signal flow and monitor when the first interrupt processing is executed. It is a time chart which shows the relationship with display states, such as. It is a figure which shows arrangement | positioning of each LED of the display part in a display monitor. It is a perspective view of the main board | substrate with which the display monitor is arrange | positioned by the 1st display monitor arrangement | positioning aspect. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the frame for game machines to which the main board | substrate was attached open | released from the outer frame. (A) is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the second display monitor arrangement mode, and (B) is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the third display monitor arrangement mode. (A) is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the fourth display monitor arrangement mode, and (B) is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the fifth display monitor arrangement mode. (A) is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the sixth display monitor arrangement mode, and (B) is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the seventh display monitor arrangement mode. (A) is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the eighth display monitor arrangement mode, and (B) is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the ninth display monitor arrangement mode. It is a front view of a gaming machine provided with a blade-type variable winning ball device. It is the front view which looked at the variable winning ball apparatus provided in the game board from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the counter of the total number of acquired balls, the number of acquired bonuses, and the number of consecutive acquired bonuses. (A)-(D) are the front views which simplified the modification of the main board | substrate. It is explanatory drawing which showed the example replaced with the ring buffer format as a totaling and calculation method of the information regarding a game winning. It is explanatory drawing which showed the example replaced with the ring buffer format as a totaling and calculation method of the information regarding a game winning. It is explanatory drawing which showed the example replaced with the ring buffer format as a totaling and calculation method of the information regarding a game winning. It is explanatory drawing which showed the example replaced with the ring buffer format as a totaling and calculation method of the information regarding a game winning. It is explanatory drawing which showed the example replaced with the ring buffer format as a totaling and calculation method of the information regarding a game winning. It is explanatory drawing regarding performance information. It is explanatory drawing regarding performance information. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special figure process (special figure process process). It is a flowchart which shows an example of a state control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit release pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit release process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big prize opening determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of processing after big hit release. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot end process. It is explanatory drawing explaining a state change switching waiting time. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing explaining a state change switching waiting time. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a state control process. It is explanatory drawing explaining a state change switching waiting time. It is a structural example of an out sphere detector. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an error alerting | reporting process. It is an example of the display mode which alert | reports an error. It is an example of the display mode which alert | reports an error. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a performance information update process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a performance information update process. It is an example of the arrangement position of an out sphere detector.

  As described above, the entry of the game medium into the general prize area has an effect on the game as compared to the entry of the game medium into the start prize area where a special symbol is variably displayed when the game medium enters. Is low. Further, when the display result of the special symbol variable display becomes the specific display result, it is controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player. In this advantageous state, the game medium can be entered into the specific winning area where the game medium can enter. Compared with the approach, the player's interest is low and it is difficult to enhance the interest. Under such circumstances, game nails may be maintained on the game hall side so that entry of the game media into the general winning area is substantially difficult.

  However, on the gaming machine manufacturer side, it is usual to design the game board surface so that the game medium enters the general winning area at a predetermined frequency (passes the test). Therefore, it is desirable that the game nail is in a maintenance state where the game medium enters the general winning area (passes the test) at a predetermined frequency on the game site side. In this case, it is necessary to raise the player's interest in the entry of the game medium into the general winning area and to make the player aware of the frequency of the game medium entering the general winning area.

  Therefore, in a gaming machine having such a general winning area, there is room for further enhancing the interest when a game medium enters the general winning area. In a gaming machine according to an embodiment to be described later, it is possible to enhance the interest of gaming in a gaming machine having a general winning area.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 3a formed in a frame shape that is provided on the gaming machine frame 3 so as to be opened and closed. The gaming machine frame 3 is attached to the outer frame by a hinge mechanism so as to be opened and closed. This outer frame is fixed to a so-called game island in which a plurality of pachinko gaming machines are arranged in parallel. By opening the gaming machine frame 3 with respect to the outer frame, a store clerk or the like can visually recognize the back side of the gaming machine frame 3 or the inside of the gaming island.

  The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area 10 surrounded by guide rails. In this game area 10, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven. The game area 10 includes a left game area 10A and a right game area 10B. The game area 10 is an area through which a game ball can pass on the game board 2. The left game area 10 </ b> A on the left side and the right game area 10 </ b> B on the right side with respect to the center of the game area 10.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area 10). Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes). Special symbols (also referred to as “special graphics”), which are a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be displayed, are variably displayed (variable display). For example, each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. It is not limited. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". . There may be one special symbol display device.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 5, the first special symbol variable display by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol variable display by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game respectively correspond to the variable display. For example, in a decorative symbol display area serving as a variable display section divided into a plurality of parts such as three, decorative symbols which are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) each identifiable are variably displayed. This variable display of decorative designs is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. In response to the start of either the first special symbol change by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol change by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special game, ”,“ Middle ”, and“ right ”decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variation of decorative symbols (for example, vertical scroll display) is started. Thereafter, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 are displayed. Then, the finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. As described above, in the display area of the image display device 5, the special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or the special special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. In synchronization with the figure game, a variable display of a plurality of types of decorative patterns that can be identified is performed, and a fixed decorative pattern that is a variable display result is derived and displayed. Deriving and displaying the display result means that identification information such as a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as a complete stop display or a final stop display) and the variable display is ended.

  In the image display device 5, as the display areas to be the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, three areas may be provided so that they can be bonded or separated, or can be bonded and separated. . The display operation in the image display device 5 is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. When the first special symbol display device 4A is executing variable display of the first special diagram, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to perform effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol is displayed. When the variable display of the second special figure is executed on the display device 4B, the effect display is executed on the image display device 5 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped.

  The decorative symbols variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R include, for example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese characters). There are numbers “1” to “8”, English letters “A” to “H”, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, characters or symbols and character images, etc. Can be, for example, a decoration image showing a person or an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or any other figure. In addition to these eight types of decorative symbols, decorative symbols (designs that consist of the characters “Accuracy”) and blank symbols (which are also known as “2R probable big hits”) and blank symbols ( A symbol that does not constitute a jackpot combination) may be included. A corresponding symbol number is assigned to each of the decorative symbols. Note that the number of decorative symbols is not limited to eight, and may be any number as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a jackpot combination or a combination that is lost can be configured (for example, seven types or nine types).

  During the change of the decorative symbol, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right”, for example, from the smallest to the largest symbol number, sequentially from the top to the bottom. When the scrolling display is performed and the decorative symbol having the largest symbol number (for example, “8”) is displayed, the decorative symbol having the smallest symbol number (for example, “1”) is subsequently displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L), the symbols are scrolled from the largest symbol number to the smallest symbol symbol. When the decorative design having the smallest number is displayed, the decorative design having the largest design number may be displayed.

  In the lower right part of the display screen of the image display device 5, there are provided fourth symbol display areas 5A and 5B for displaying a fourth symbol after a decorative symbol, a special symbol and a normal symbol which will be described later. In this embodiment, the 4th symbol variable display for the first special figure is displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special figure, and the display result of the variable display is derived. The 4th symbol display area 5A and the 4th symbol variable display for the 2nd special symbol are displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the 2nd special symbol, and the display result of the variable display is derived. A fourth symbol display area 5B for the second special figure is provided.

  In this embodiment, the variable display of the decorative design is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special design. (However, to be precise, the variable display of the decorative design is specified by the CPU 120 for effect control. This is performed by measuring the variation time recognized based on the command.) When performing an effect using the image display device 5, for example, an effect in which the effect content including the variable display of the decorative pattern disappears from the screen for a moment. There are a variety of effects, for example, and effects such that the moving object shields all or part of the screen are performed. For this reason, even when looking at the display screen on the image display device 5, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not it is currently in a variable display state. Therefore, in this embodiment, whether the current state of variable display is being performed by confirming the state of the fourth symbol by further performing variable display of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the image display device 5. It is possible to reliably recognize whether or not. Note that the 4th symbol is always variably displayed with a constant operation and does not disappear from the screen or is not shielded by a shielding object, so that it can always be visually recognized.

  The 4th symbol for the first special figure and the 4th symbol for the second special figure are sometimes collectively referred to as the 4th symbol. The 4th symbol display area 5B for illustration may be collectively referred to as a 4th symbol display area.

  In the variable display (variable display) of the 4th symbol, the 4th symbol display areas 5A and 5B are displayed in a predetermined display color (for example, the 4th symbol display area 5A for the first special symbol is white, and the second special symbol is used for the second special symbol). This is realized by continuing the blinking state in which the four symbol display area 5B is black) and is repeatedly turned on (displayed) and turned off (not displayed) at predetermined time intervals. The variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 5A for the first special symbol. The variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 5B for the second special symbol. Synchronous means that the variable display start time and end time are the same, and the variable display period is the same.

  Further, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the fourth symbol display area 5A for the first special symbol is lit (displayed) in a display color (for example, red) reminiscent of the big hit. Will remain. Note that the display color may be varied depending on the type of jackpot. In addition, when the off symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the fourth symbol display area 5A for the first special symbol is lit (displayed) in a display color (for example, blue) reminiscent of off. Will remain. As described above, the display result of the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display) in the fourth symbol display area 5A.

  Further, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the fourth symbol display area 5B for the second special symbol is lit (displayed) in a display color (for example, red) reminiscent of the big hit. Will remain. Note that the display color may be varied depending on the type of jackpot. Further, when the off symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the fourth symbol display area 5B for the second special symbol is lit (displayed) in a display color (for example, blue) reminiscent of off. Will remain. As described above, the display result of the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display) in the fourth symbol display area 5B.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, a start winning storage display area 5H is arranged. In the start winning memory display area 5H, a hold memory display for displaying the variable display hold number (special figure hold memory number) in an identifiable manner is performed. Here, the holding of the variable display occurs when a game ball enters (starts winning) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B. To do. That is, the start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game or a variable display of decorative symbols has been established, but a variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. When the start condition for starting the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Done.

  As an example, the start winning storage display area 5H is provided with a plurality of display parts whose display colors are changed from left to right in order from the variable display game in which the start condition is established based on the occurrence of the start winning. Yes. Then, when the start condition (the first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is established based on the game ball entering the first start winning opening, it is not displayed. One of the display parts in the mode (transmission color) (for example, the leftmost display part in the display part in the non-display mode) is changed to blue display. In addition, when the game condition of the special game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied (second start condition) based on the game ball having entered the second start winning opening, it is not displayed. One of the display parts which are the modes is changed to red display. Thereafter, when one of the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure and the start condition (second start condition) of the special figure game using the second special figure is established, for example, The display at the leftmost display part is removed and the display at each display part is moved leftward one by one. At this time, one of the display parts that have changed to blue display or red display (for example, the display part at the right end of the display part whose display color has changed) returns to the non-display mode.

  That is, when a start winning is generated, in the start winning storage display area 5H, holding information (an object indicated by a round shape in FIGS. 1 and 31, etc.) corresponding to a special game executed based on the start winning is provided. Display control to be newly displayed is performed. For example, the hold information is displayed in order from the left according to the order in which the start condition of the special figure game corresponding to the hold information is satisfied (in the above example, it is also the order in which the start condition is satisfied). When a new start prize is generated when n pieces of hold information are displayed (when n special figure games are put on hold), the (n + 1) th hold information from the left corresponding to the new start prize Will be newly displayed. When the start condition for the special figure game being held is satisfied, the leftmost holding information corresponding to the special figure game is deleted, and the nth (n ≧ 2) holding information from the left is left one by one. Shifted to the (n-1) th display.

  The order in which the start conditions for the special figure game are satisfied is not limited to the order in which the start conditions are generated, but the start condition for the special figure game for the second special figure is greater than the start condition for the special figure game for the first special figure. It may be established with priority (so-called special figure 2 priority fluctuation). On the other hand, the start condition of the special figure game relating to the first special figure is established in preference to the start condition of the special figure game relating to the second special figure (so-called special figure 1 priority fluctuation). Anyway.

  In the start winning memory display area 5H, a number indicating the special figure reserved memory number may be displayed so that the player or the like can recognize the special figure reserved memory number. In addition to the start winning memory display area 5H or in place of the start winning memory display area 5H, a display for displaying the number of special figure reserved memories may be provided. In the example shown in FIG. 1, together with the start winning memory display area 5H, the first hold for displaying the special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. A display 25A and a second hold display 25B are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number as the effective start winning ball number that has entered the first start winning port formed by the normal winning ball device 6A so as to be specified. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number as the effective start winning ball number that has entered the second start winning port formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B in an identifiable manner. Each of the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B has, for example, a number (for example, four) of LEDs corresponding to an upper limit value (for example, “4”) in each of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. It is comprised including. A movable accessory 1000 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5.

  The movable accessory 1000 has a built-in motor and lamp for operating a star-shaped member. The movable accessory 1000 operates (rotation operation and lighting) when an effect of notifying a big hit, for example, a later-described change result notification effect or a prefetch notification effect is executed.

  Below the image display device 5, an ordinary winning ball device 6A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning opening that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B has an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state in a vertical position and an expanded open state in a tilt position by a solenoid 27 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided to form a second start winning opening. As an example, in the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 27 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, so that the game ball does not enter or enters the second start winning opening. It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the game ball enters the second start winning opening by tilt control in which the movable blade piece is tilted when the solenoid 27 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state. Easy to open and open.

  A game ball that has entered the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. A game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, a second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first reserved memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). ) If the following, the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second reserved memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). ) If so, the second start condition is satisfied. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 28 for the large winning opening shown in FIG. Forming a mouth. As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 28 for the special prize opening door is in the OFF state, the special prize opening door closes the special prize winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 28 for the special prize opening door is in the ON state, the special prize opening door opens the special prize opening. A game ball that has entered a special winning opening formed in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is detected by, for example, a count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Thus, although the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied, the special figure game started earlier is being executed, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state. When the start condition for starting the figure game is not satisfied, variable display is suspended. For example, if the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not satisfied when the first start condition is satisfied, the first hold memory The number is incremented by 1 (incremented), and execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. If the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is not satisfied when the second start condition is satisfied, the second holding memory is stored. The number is incremented by 1 and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the first reserved memory number is decremented by 1 (decrement), and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started. When this is done, the second reserved memory number is decremented by 1 (decremented). The added value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number may be the total reserved memory number or the special figure reserved memory number.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols. Is displayed (variably displayed) in a variable manner. Such variable display of normal symbols is called a general game (also referred to as “normal game”). The normal symbol display 20 variably displays, for example, a plurality of types of normal symbols composed of numbers indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, and the like. The normal symbol display 20 is not limited to the one that variably displays the numbers indicating “0” to “9” or the symbols indicating “−” as normal symbols. For example, “O” and “X” are displayed. Ordinary symbols are variably displayed by alternately lighting the decorative lamps (or LEDs) to be displayed, or by lighting a plurality of decorative lamps (or LEDs) such as “left”, “middle”, and “right” in a predetermined order. It may be a thing. Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general-purpose hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general-purpose hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passage gates 41A and 41B.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the big winning opening, for example, four general winning openings 50A to 50D which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. A winning area is provided.

  The general winning ports 50A to 50D are constituted by ball receiving members that project forward (player side) from the game board surface. The ball receiving member receives the game ball flowing down from above from the opening, and the horizontal length (horizontal width) of the opening of the ball receiving member is larger than the diameter of one game ball, but the game ball 2 It is smaller than the diameter of the piece. Therefore, two or more game balls are arranged in the horizontal direction so as not to pass through the opening of the ball receiving member. Further, the interval between the ball receiving members provided with the respective general winning ports 50A to 50D is an interval through which at least one game ball can pass. Also, a winning ball device for switching the opening / closing of the openings of the general winning ports 50A to 50D (for example, an accessory corresponding to the normally variable winning ball device 6B for switching the opening / closing of the second start winning port) is not provided. It is always open. Further, even if a game ball wins the general winning openings 50A to 50D, neither the special-game variable display start condition nor the normal-game variable display start condition is established based on the win.

  In this embodiment, a predetermined number of prize balls are given to the player as a specific value based on the fact that the game balls have won the general prize opening. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Along with the winning of a game ball in the winning opening, a variable winning ball apparatus, for example, a normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B for performing opening / closing control of the second start winning opening, or a special variable for performing opening / closing control of the large winning opening. It is good also as the specific value provided when a game ball wins a general winning opening to make the winning ball apparatus 7 actuate and to make a game ball easy to win a 2nd start winning opening or a big winning opening.

  Further, the specific value given to the player may be made different depending on the general winning opening, for example, 5 when the game ball wins the second general winning opening 50B or the third general winning opening 50C. 10 prize balls are awarded when a game ball is awarded to the first general prize opening 50A or the fourth general prize opening 50D (that is, a specific value having a different size is given). May be given). The specific value given when a game ball wins the second general winning opening 50B or the third general winning opening 50C is a predetermined number of winning balls, but the first general winning opening 50A or the fourth general winning opening. When a game ball is won in 50D, the normal variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 7 may be operated (that is, a different type of specific value is given).

  In addition, different effects may be executed according to the specific value given in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening, for example, according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening And a case where the variable winning ball apparatus operates according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening (that is, when the specific value type is different), so that different effects are executed. Also good. In addition, when 10 prize balls are awarded according to the winning of game balls to the general prize opening, and when 5 prize balls are awarded according to the winning of game balls to the general prize opening. Different effects may be executed (that is, when specific values have different magnitudes).

  As shown in FIG. 2, the first general prize corresponding to each of the first general prize opening 50A, the second general prize opening 50B, the third general prize opening 50C, and the fourth general prize opening 50D is shown in FIG. It is detected by the mouth switch 24A, the second general winning port switch 24B, the third general winning port switch 24C, and the fourth general winning port switch 24D. When a game ball is detected by the first general prize port switch 24A, the second general prize port switch 24B, the third general prize port switch 24C, and the fourth general prize port switch 24D, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected. Will be paid out as a prize ball.

  As described above, in this embodiment, a winning ball switch corresponding to each of the four general winning ports 50A to 50D is provided. In addition to the above, it is also possible to detect which general winning award the game ball has won.

  In addition, it is not restricted to the structure in which a different general winning opening switch is provided for every general winning opening, and a common general winning opening switch may be provided for a plurality of general winning openings. For example, a common prize port switch (a switch for detecting that a prize has been won in a general prize opening provided in the left game area 10A) is provided for the first general prize opening 50A and the second general prize opening 50B. A common winning award switch (a switch for detecting that a winning has been made in a general winning opening provided in the right game area 10B) is provided for the third general winning opening 50C and the fourth general winning opening 50D. Anyway. In addition, a common winning port switch (a switch for detecting that a winning has been made to any of the general winning ports) is provided for all of the first winning ports 50A to 50D. You may be allowed to.

  In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken. The game balls taken into the out mouth are collected on the game island via a ball collection passage (not shown) communicating with the out mouth. The game balls won in each winning opening (the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the big winning opening, the first to fourth general winning openings) are collected through a winning ball collecting box (not shown) It is to be collected on the amusement island via the collection passage. An out ball detector (not shown) is provided in the ball collection passage. As a result, in the out ball detector, a game ball that has been driven into the game area 10 (a game ball guided to the out port without winning any of the winning ports, and a winning ball set by winning in any of the winning ports) Game balls collected in a cage) All game balls are detected. Each time a game ball is detected by the out-ball detector, a detection signal is input to the effect control board 12, so that the effect control CPU 120 counts the number of game balls that have been shot into the game area 10, that is, the number of outs. It is possible. When the out-ball detector is configured to include a counter whose value increases by 1 each time a game ball is detected, the effect control is performed every time the counter value increases by a certain number (for example, 10). The out number increase signal may be output to the substrate 12 so that the number of outs can be tabulated in a certain number unit (for example, 10 units) on the effect control CPU 120 side.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 is provided at the periphery of the game area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 3a, there is an upper plate 60 that holds (stores) a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. Is provided. For example, an operation button 30 that can be operated by the player by a pressing operation or the like is provided at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate 60.

  A key hole 61 of a locking device (not shown) is provided on the right side of the upper plate 60. By inserting a key corresponding to the key hole 61 into the key hole 61 and rotating the key in one direction, for example, counterclockwise, it is possible to open the front of the glass door frame 3a with respect to the gaming machine frame 3. Further, by inserting the key into the key hole 61 and rotating the key in the other direction, for example, clockwise, the gaming machine frame 3 can be opened forward with respect to the outer frame. In the locking device, a spring is built in the key hole 61, and when the key is released and pulled out after inserting the key into the key hole 61 and rotating it counterclockwise or clockwise, the direction opposite to the direction in which the key hole 61 is turned. Turn around to return to the neutral position. When the keyhole 61 is in the neutral position, the glass door frame 3a can be closed and locked with respect to the gaming machine frame 3, and the gaming machine frame 3 can be closed and locked with respect to the outer frame. Is possible. In addition, maintenance of the game board (gauge board including game nails and winning holes) 2 (for example, measures to eliminate clogging) by opening the glass door frame 3a forward with respect to the frame 3 for the gaming machine. Alternatively, a mode changeover switch 31 and a display changeover switch 32 described later can be operated.

  A lower plate 62 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the upper plate 60 is provided directly below the upper plate 60, and a game ball as a game medium is directed to the game area on the lower right side of the upper plate 60. A hitting operation handle (operation knob) 63 is provided which is operated by a player or the like for firing. For example, the hitting operation handle 63 adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the driving of a shooting motor included in the hitting ball shooting device.

  The operation button 30 is a jog dial that can be pressed and rotated. The operation button 30 is not limited to a button that can be pressed or rotated, and may be a button that can be touched or pressed, such as a touch panel, or tilted like a lever-type switch. It may be operable, or may be capable of being pressed and tilted like a joystick. Further, instead of the operation button 30, a sensor that can detect a predetermined operation action by the player, such as an infrared sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, may be used. In other words, the operation button 30 only needs to be configured so that a predetermined operation action by the player can be detected mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. The player's operation performed on the operation button 30 includes a press detection switch (not shown) that detects pressing of the operation button 30 and a rotary encoder that detects the rotation direction and amount of the operation button (jog dial) 30. (Not shown).

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game balls that have passed through the first passing gate 41A provided in the left gaming area 10A and the second passing gate 41B provided in the right gaming area 10B are transferred to the first passing gate 41A shown in FIG. The normal symbol start condition for executing the variable symbol display on the normal symbol display 20, such as detection by the corresponding first gate switch 21A and the second gate switch 21B corresponding to the second passing gate 41B, is as follows. After being established, the normal symbol game 20 is started by the normal symbol display device 20 based on the fact that the normal symbol start condition for starting the variable symbol normal display is satisfied, for example, that the previous normal symbol game has ended. The

  In this normal game, after the normal symbol change is started, when a predetermined time as the normal symbol change time elapses, the fixed normal symbol that is a variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol), such as a number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “ordinary loss”. Become. Corresponding to the fact that the normal symbol variable display result is “per standard”, the expansion / release control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable tulip of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted. The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  The special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is caused by the fact that the game ball that has entered the first starting winning port formed in the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting port switch 22A shown in FIG. After the first start condition is satisfied, the process is started on the basis that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the big hit game state. In the special game by the second special symbol display device 4B, a game ball that has entered the second start winning port formed in the normal variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second start port switch 22B shown in FIG. After the second start condition is satisfied by the above, it is started based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the last special figure game or the big hit gaming state.

  In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, after the special symbol variable display is started, the special symbol variable display result is obtained when a predetermined time as the special symbol variable time elapses. A definite special symbol (a special graph display result) is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes “big hit” as a specific display result, and if a special symbol other than the big hit symbol (out of line symbol) is stopped and displayed, " The specific special symbol (big jackpot symbol) as the confirmed special symbol is different depending on the type of jackpot, for example, the confirmed special symbol is different between the probability variation big hit and the non-probable variation big hit. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the game is controlled to the big hit game state as a specific state in which a round game advantageous to the player (also simply referred to as “round”) is executed a predetermined number of times.

  In the big hit gaming state controlled after the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the opening / closing plate of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 has a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) or a predetermined number. A round game in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player is executed by opening the large winning opening in a period until (for example, nine) winning balls are generated. The In this way, the opening and closing plate that opened the grand prize opening during the execution of the round game receives the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2 and then closed the grand prize opening, thereby providing a special variable prize ball device. 7 is changed to the second state which is disadvantageous to the player, and one round game is completed. In the big hit state, the number of executions of the round game, which is the opening cycle of the big winning opening, is, for example, 15 times. Note that a plurality of types of jackpot types with different numbers of round games may be provided.

  After the big hit state is over, as one of the advantageous states advantageous to the player, time shortening control is executed in which the variable symbol variable display time (special figure fluctuation time) in the special figure game is shortened compared to the normal state The time-short state is controlled, and the probability variation state in which the probability variation control (probability variation control) is performed together with the time reduction control is controlled.

  Here, the normal state is a normal state as a gaming state different from a specific state such as a big hit gaming state, a short time state, or a probability variation state, and the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed) Thus, the same control as in the state in which the initialization process is executed after power-on is performed. On the other hand, the time-saving state is when a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) a special-figure game is executed and the variable display result is “big hit” is met first. You just have to finish. Also, in the probability variation state, the variable display result in each special figure game and decorative symbol variable display will be “big hit”, and the probability of being further controlled to the big hit gaming state will be higher than in the normal state and the short-time state. improves. Such a probability change state continues until the next variable display result becomes “big hit”, or until a predetermined number of times (for example, 8 times) a special game is executed.

  The jackpot (type) that is controlled to the probability variation state after the jackpot gaming state is ended is also referred to as a probability variation jackpot. The big hit (type) that is controlled to the short-time state without being controlled to the probability variation state after the big hit gaming state is ended is also referred to as a non-probability variation big hit.

  In the probabilistic state or the short time state, the normal symbol display unit 20 controls the normal symbol in the normal symbol game so that the variation time of the normal symbol (ordinary symbol variation time) is shorter than that in the normal state. Control for improving the probability that the display result is “per normal figure” than in the normal state, and tilt control of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the variable display result is “per normal figure”. The second start condition is such that the game ball can easily enter the second start winning opening, such as a control to make the tilt control time for performing longer than that in the normal state and a control to increase the number of tilts than in the normal state. Control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility of establishment. It should be noted that any one of these controls may be performed in the probability variation state or the short time state, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. As described above, the control that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening in the probability changing state or the short-time state is also referred to as high opening control. By performing the high opening control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening becomes the expanded opening state is higher than when the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is easily established, and the special figure game can be executed frequently. In addition, the time until the variable display result becomes “big hit” is shortened. Therefore, in the probability variation state and the short time state, it becomes easier to enter the big hit gaming state than in the normal state. The period during which the high opening control can be executed is also referred to as a high opening control period. A state in which the high opening control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which the high opening control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and In response to the start of one of the special symbol games using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B, the decorative symbol variable display is started. The period from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the end of variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R Then, the variable display state of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach state. Here, the reach state means a decorative symbol (“reach variation symbol” which has not been stopped yet when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 forms part of the jackpot combination. Is also a display state in which the variation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, in some of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) in advance. The remaining decorative symbol display area (for example, “medium”) that has not yet been stopped when the decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol indicating the alphanumeric character “7”) that constitutes the determined jackpot combination is stopped. In the symbol display area 5C, etc., the decorative pattern is changing, or in all or part of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. This is a display state that changes in synchronization while constituting all or part of the combination.

  Further, in response to the reach state, the decorative pattern fluctuation speed is reduced, or a character image (an effect image simulating a person) different from the decorative pattern is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or changing the display mode of the background image, playing and displaying a moving image that is different from the decorative design, or changing the variation mode of the decorative design, performing a different rendering operation than before reaching the reach state May be. Such effect operations such as display of the character image, change of the display mode of the background image, reproduction display of the moving image, and change of the decorative pattern change mode are referred to as reach effect display (or simply reach effect). In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the image display device 5 but also the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation (flashing operation) in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9, and the like are in the reach state. An operation mode different from the previous operation mode may be included. As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Each reach mode has a different possibility of “big hit” (also referred to as “reliability” or “big hit reliability”). That is, it is possible to vary the possibility that the variable display result will be a “hit” depending on which of the multiple types of reach effects is executed. As an example, in this embodiment, reach modes such as normal reach and super reach are set in advance. When the super reach reach mode appears, the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” (big hit reliability) is higher than when the normal reach reach mode appears.

  During the variable display of decorative designs, unlike the reach production, the decorative display variable display state may become the reach state and the variable display result may be a “hit”. There may be a case where a variable display effect for notifying the player is given by a variable display mode of the symbol or the like. In this embodiment, variable display effects such as “pseudo-continuous” and “slip” can be executed, and each effect operation is executed in response to a change pattern being determined on the main board 11 side. Or not is determined.

  Unlike variable reach effects such as reach effects or “pseudo-ream” or “slip” during decorative display of decorative symbols, for example, displaying effect images such as predetermined character images and message images. Notifying the player that the decorative display variable display state may reach a reach state and that the variable display result may be a “hit” due to a presentation operation different from the variable display operation of the symbol. A notice effect may be executed.

  If a special symbol that will be a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol variable display state will not reach the reach state after the variable symbol variable display starts. There are cases in which a fixed decorative symbol that is a non-reach combination is stopped and displayed. Such a decorative display variable display mode is referred to as “non-reach” (also referred to as “unreach loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol that becomes a losing symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, it corresponds to the fact that the decorative symbol variable display state has reached the reach state after the decorative symbol variable display has started. Then, after the reach effect is executed, or when the reach effect is not executed, a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined reach combination (also referred to as a reach-losing combination) may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the decorative design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variable display result is “losing”. It should be noted that the fixed decorative symbol that is a non-reach combination and the fixed decorative symbol that is a reach-losing combination are collectively referred to as a fixed decorative symbol of a lost combination (non-specific combination).

  When a special symbol that becomes a big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, a predetermined reach effect is executed in response to the variable display state of the decorative symbol becoming the reach state. At a later time, for example, a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. Here, for example, the symbol number that is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 is the determined decorative symbol that becomes the big hit combination. ”To“ 8 ”, any one of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the“ left ”,“ middle ”, and“ right ”decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Anything is acceptable.

  In addition, after the decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived and displayed, a pre-reading that notifies and informs that the pending data whose special figure display result is “big hit” is stored during the round in the big hit gaming state. A notice effect may be executed.

  As described above, the game area 10 includes the left game area 10A and the right game area 10B, and the player adjusts the operation amount (rotation amount) of the hitting operation handle (operation knob) to thereby adjust the left game area 10A. It is possible to switch between left-handed shots that launch game balls toward the right and right-handed shots that fire game balls toward the right game area 10B.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball is launched into the left game area 10A (when a game ball enters the left game area 10A), the right game area is arranged by arranging a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown). The game balls are awarded at the first start winning opening at a higher rate than when the game balls are fired at 10B. Also, when the gaming state is the normal state, the normal symbol has a longer variation time (ordinary diagram variation time) than when the gaming state is the probability variation state and the short-time state, and the normal symbol variable display result is “per regular diagram”. Therefore, the rate at which the game balls launched into the left game area 10A in the normal state win the second start winning opening is extremely low as compared to the rate at which the first starting winning opening wins. Yes.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball is launched into the right game area 10B (when a game ball enters the right game area 10B), the left side of the pachinko machine 1 is arranged by placing a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown). Compared to the case where a game ball is launched into the game area 10A, the percentage of game balls winning at the first start winning opening is extremely low, or the game ball does not win at the first starting winning opening. Yes. Therefore, even if the player hits the right hand in the normal state, the percentage that the game ball wins the start winning opening (either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening) left-handed in the normal state. It is extremely low compared to the rate at which game balls sometimes win the start winning opening (either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening). Therefore, the player will make a left strike in the normal state.

  In addition, the proportion of the game balls launched into the right game area 10B passing through the second passage gate 41B is the same as that of the game balls launched into the left game area 10A due to the arrangement of a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown). It is higher than the rate of passing through the 1-pass gate 41A. The percentage of the game balls launched into the right game area 10B in the opened second start winning opening is determined by the arrangement of game nails or game ball guiding members (not shown) and the like. It is higher than the rate at which the ball wins the second start winning opening in the open state.

  In the probability variation state and the short-time state, the variation time of the normal symbol (ordinary symbol variation time) is shorter than that in the normal state, and the probability that the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “per regular diagram” is higher than in the normal state. Therefore, the rate at which the game ball wins the start winning opening (either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening) when the player makes a right turn in the probability changing state and the short time state is left in the probability changing state and the short time state. It is higher than the rate at which the game ball wins at the start winning opening (either the first start winning opening or the second start winning opening) when hitting. Therefore, the player makes a right turn in the probability variation state and the short time state.

  In addition, the ratio of the game balls launched into the right game area 10B to the open big prize opening is that the game balls launched into the left game area 10A due to the arrangement of a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown). It is higher than the percentage of winning in the open big opening. Therefore, the player makes a right strike in the big hit gaming state. In this way, the player makes a left strike in the normal state, switches to the right strike with the occurrence of the big hit gaming state, continues the right turn in the probability change state or the short time state after the big hit gaming state, and returns to the normal state. With the transition (for example, the probability change state without the big hit gaming state or the end of the short-time state), it will return to the left-handed.

  In addition, the ratio of the game balls launched in the left game area 10A to the first general prize opening 50A or the second general prize opening 50B provided in the left game area 10A is the first general prize opening 50A and the second Depending on the position where the general winning opening 50B is provided and the arrangement of a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown), the game ball launched into the right game area 10B is the first general winning opening 50A or the second general winning opening. It is higher than the rate of winning 50B. On the other hand, the ratio of the game balls launched in the right game area 10B to the third general prize opening 50C or the fourth general prize opening 50D provided in the right game area 10B is the third general prize opening 50C and the fourth Depending on the position where the general winning opening 50D is provided and the arrangement of a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown), the game ball launched into the left game area 10A is the third general winning opening 50C or the fourth general winning opening. It is higher than the rate of winning 50D.

  It should be noted that only a plurality of game balls launched into the left game area 10A for a part or all of the plurality of general game openings (first general prize opening 50A and second general prize opening 50B) provided in the left game area 10A. The game balls that can be won and are launched into the right game area 10B may be configured not to win, and a plurality of general prize holes provided in the right game area 10B (the third general prize opening 50C and the fourth general prize opening). 50D), part or all of the game balls launched into the right game area 10B can be won, and the game balls launched into the left game area 10A may not win.

  Thus, since the left hand is made in the normal state, the probability that a game ball will win the first general winning port 50A and the second general winning port 50B out of the four general winning ports is high, and the jackpot gaming state, In the probability variation state and the short-time state, right-handed is performed, and therefore, there is a high probability that the game ball will win the third general winning port 50C and the fourth general winning port 50D among the four general winning ports. In accordance with the game state and the like, as the game area where the game ball is launched changes, the general winning opening where the game ball is easy to win also changes. In the left game area 10A in which the game ball enters in the normal state, a general winning opening is provided at a position where the game ball is easy to win, and the right game in which the game ball enters in the big hit game state, the probability variation state and the short time state. In the area 10B, a general winning opening may be provided at a position where it is difficult for a game ball to win (or vice versa), and the winning frequency for the general winning opening may be changed according to the gaming state.

  Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a power supply board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The power supply board is a board that supplies power to the boards such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition to the main board 11 and the effect control board 12, the power board is connected to other boards such as the audio control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the relay board 15 to supply power. The power supply board is provided with a power switch. When the power switch is turned on, power is turned on, and power supply from the power supply board to each board is started. Further, the power supply to each board is stopped by turning off the power switch. The main board 11 includes a payout control board. The payout control board may be provided separately from the main board 11. The payout control board is a board that controls the payout of prize balls, and is equipped with a payout control microcomputer. The payout control board includes a ball payout device (not shown) in response to receiving a prize ball number command in which data indicating the number of prize balls is set (transmitted as a control signal from the main board 11). The payout mechanism (mechanism for paying out prize balls) is driven to pay out the prize balls.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. Variable display of a predetermined display pattern such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 or controlling the variable symbol display of the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinction / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a function to control. The main board 11 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 that receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits the detection signals to the game control microcomputer 100, and the game control microcomputer 100. A solenoid circuit 111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 27 and 28 is mounted.

  The switch circuit 110 takes in a signal from the abnormality detection sensor group 26 (details will be described later) and transmits the signal to the game control microcomputer 100. As will be described in detail later, the abnormality detection sensor group 26 is for detecting an abnormality that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R. In addition, various circuits for controlling the production operation by the production electrical parts such as the game effect lamp 9 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 provides effects such as the display operation in the image display device 5, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, and all or part of the on / off operation in the game effect lamp 9. A function of determining the control content for causing the electrical component to execute a predetermined performance operation is provided.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. For example, a processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and is turned on / off in the game effect lamp 9 and the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. A lamp driver circuit for driving is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the main board 11 includes a first gate switch 21A, a second gate switch 21B, a first start port switch 22A, a second start port switch 22B, a count switch 23, and a first general prize port switch 24A. Wiring for transmitting detection signals from the second general winning opening switch 24B, the third general winning opening switch 24C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 24D is connected.

  The first gate switch 21A, the second gate switch 21B, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the count switch 23, the first general winning port switch 24A to the fourth general winning port switch 24D are, for example, What has an arbitrary configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor, may be used. In addition, the main board 11 includes a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display device 20, a first hold display device 25A, a second hold display device 25B, and a general drawing hold display device 25C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected. The main board 11 is connected to wiring for transmitting signals from the abnormality detection sensor group 26.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The main board 11 is provided with a main board side connector corresponding to, for example, the relay board 15, and an output buffer circuit is connected between the main board side connector and the game control microcomputer 100. The output buffer circuit can pass a signal only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15, and prevents the signal input from the relay board 15 to the main board 11. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 12 or the relay board 15 side to the main board 11 side.

  The relay board 15 only needs to be provided with a transmission direction regulation circuit for each wiring for transmitting a control signal from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, for example. Each transmission direction regulation circuit includes a diode having an anode connected to the main board connector corresponding to the main board 11 and a cathode connected to the presentation control board connector corresponding to the presentation control board 12, and one end connected to the cathode of the diode. And a resistor having the other end connected to the ground (GND). With this configuration, each transmission direction regulating circuit can prevent the signal from being input from the effect control board 12 to the relay board 15 and pass the signal only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 12 side to the main board 11 side. In this embodiment, a transmission direction regulating circuit is provided for each wiring for transmitting a control signal in the relay board 15, and an output buffer circuit is provided between the game control microcomputer 100 and the main board side connector on the main board 11. By providing this, it is possible to prevent an illegal signal from being input to the main board 11 from the outside.

  The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used for controlling sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And a lamp control command used for controlling the lighting operation of the decoration LED and the like.

  Such effect control commands include, for example, a gaming state designation command for designating a gaming state (normal state, probability variation state, or short-time state), a variation start command for designating a variation start in a special game, and a special game in a special game. A variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a design variation time or a design pattern on the image display device 5, a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special design or a design design, and a design design for the image display device 5. A decorative ball stop command for specifying variable display stop, a jackpot start specifying command for specifying the start or end of a jackpot gaming state, a jackpot end specifying command, or a game ball having won a first start winning port or a second starting winning port Start winning command that is sometimes output, general winning opening that is output when a game ball wins a general winning opening Constant command, gaming ball into the special winning opening includes special winning opening winning command or the like which is output when the prize.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a control program by executing a game control program, and updates numeric data indicating random values independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 to perform and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided. As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores the various fluctuation data. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  As described above, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the game control program stored in the ROM 101 to perform the game control, so that the game control microcomputer 100 (or CPU 103) executes the following ( Specifically, this means that the CPU 103 executes control according to a program. The same applies to a microcomputer mounted on another board different from the main board 11.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area for the effect control CPU 120. Random number for updating numerical data indicating random numbers independently of the RAM 122, the display control unit 123 for executing processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, and the effect control CPU 120 A circuit 124 and an I / O 125 are mounted. As an example, in the effect control board 12, when the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect control program read from the ROM 121, a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores the data, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 120 for receiving the input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the presentation control CPU 120 for I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

  In the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 13, Wiring for transmitting an electrical decoration signal as an information signal indicating lamp data to the lamp control board 14, wiring for transmitting a control signal to the movable accessory 1000, and the like are connected. In addition, an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the operation button 30 has been detected is sent to the effect control board 12 from a press detection switch (not shown) and a rotary encoder (not shown). Wiring for transmission is also connected. Further, the effect control board 12 has a wiring for transmitting a signal corresponding to the position (first position or second position) of the operation unit in the mode changeover switch 31 described later, and an operation in the display changeover switch 32 described later. Wiring for transmitting a signal corresponding to the position of the part (first position or second position) is also connected.

  The ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 includes a light emitter such as the image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, game effect lamps 9 and decorative LEDs, operation buttons 30, a movable accessory 1000, and an effect accessory. A plurality of types of pattern data constituting the effect control pattern are stored in advance in order to control the effect operation using the effect device (effect electric component) including the movable member included in the.

  The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 120. For example, the display control unit 123 executes various types of effect display such as variable display of decorative symbols and effect display in reach effects by determining the switching timing of effect images to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Control. The display control unit 123 may be configured to include a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), an LCD drive circuit, and the like.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 confirms, for example, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, the operation detection signal transmitted from the press detection switch and the rotary encoder, and the state of the mode switch 31. Including an input port for capturing various signals such as a signal to be enabled and a signal for enabling confirmation of the state of the display changeover switch 32, and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12. Composed. For example, from the output port of the I / O 125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 5, a command (sound effect signal) transmitted to the sound control board 13, and a command transmitted to the lamp control board 14 A command (driving signal) or the like transmitted to the movable accessory 1000 is output.

  On the voice control board 13, for example, an input / output driver, a voice synthesis IC, a voice data ROM, an amplifier circuit, a volume, and the like are mounted. As an example, in the voice control board 13, the sound number data indicated in the sound effect signal transmitted from the effect control board 12 is input to the voice synthesis IC via the input / output driver. The voice synthesis IC generates voice and sound effects corresponding to the sound number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit. The amplifier circuit outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume to the speakers 8L and 8R. The voice data ROM stores control data corresponding to the sound number data, and the voice synthesis IC reads out the control data corresponding to the sound number data to generate voice and sound effects. The data stored in the audio data ROM may be composed of data indicating the output mode of audio and sound effects in a predetermined period in time series.

  For example, an input / output driver and a lamp driver are mounted on the lamp control board 14. As an example, in the lamp control board 14, the electrical decoration signal transmitted from the effect control board 12 is input to the lamp driver via the input / output driver. The lamp driver amplifies the electric decoration signal and supplies it to the game effect lamp 9 and the like.

  In this embodiment, when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the abnormality that has occurred is notified by voice by controlling the speakers 8L and 8R via the voice control board 13, or the lamp control board 14 is displayed. Via the light by controlling the lighting / extinguishing drive of the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED through the display, and an abnormal notification image (error message) in the display area of the image display device 5 through the display control unit 123. It is displayed and notified. The abnormality includes a magnetic abnormality, a vibration abnormality, a radio wave abnormality, and the like, and is detected using the abnormality detection sensor group 26 and the like.

  The abnormality detection sensor group 26 includes one or more sensors for detecting an abnormality that occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The abnormality detection sensor group 26 is not limited to a sensor, and may include a circuit for detecting an abnormality, various detection switches that do not correspond to the sensor, and the like. The abnormality detection sensor group 26 only needs to be configured to detect abnormality. One or more sensors or the like included in each of the abnormality detection sensor groups 26 are prepared according to the type of abnormality. What the abnormality detection sensor group 26 specifically includes may be determined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. An abnormality that occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a phenomenon that does not occur or is extremely unlikely to occur in a normal game performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a magnetic abnormality, a vibration abnormality, And a phenomenon that may hinder the progress of the game, and particularly a phenomenon that requires notification to the player or the employee of the game hall (pachinko store, etc.).

  Examples of the abnormality detection sensor group 26 include a magnetic sensor that detects magnetism, a vibration sensor that detects vibration, and a radio wave detection sensor that detects a predetermined radio wave (such as a radio wave in a predetermined wavelength band). For example, these sensors may be included in the abnormality detection sensor group 26. In addition, the detection of abnormality can utilize a well-known method suitably. When the game control microcomputer 100 detects a magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, radio wave abnormality or the like based on an output signal from the abnormality detection sensor group 26, an abnormality detection designation command for designating that an abnormality has occurred is the main board. 11 is transmitted to the production control board 12 and an error has occurred due to the display of an error message on the image display device 5, the output of a warning sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, the light emission mode at the time of occurrence of an abnormality in the game effect lamp 9, etc. Notification is performed. For example, when an abnormality has occurred, an image of the characters “An error has occurred” is displayed in the error message display area of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG.

  Here, not only an abnormality has occurred by the notification means such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9, but any type of magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, radio wave abnormality, and front door opening. You may make it alert | report so that it is identifiable whether the abnormality of this was detected.

  The magnetic abnormality notification is an abnormality notification that is performed when a magnetic abnormality (abnormality that the magnet is in the vicinity of the pachinko gaming machine 1, in this case, there is a possibility of fraud) is detected. There are fraudulent acts in which a game medium is moved by a magnet to win a prize opening, or a predetermined area is clogged with a game medium to guide the game medium to the prize opening. By notifying the magnetic abnormality, it is possible to prevent such an action from occurring. For example, a magnetic sensor for detecting magnetism is provided as one sensor of the abnormality detection sensor group 26. The CPU 103 determines whether or not there is a magnetic abnormality by determining whether or not the signal from the magnetic sensor indicates a magnetic force equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold (indicating magnetic force → there is a magnetic abnormality). When a magnetic abnormality is detected, an abnormality detection designation command for designating the occurrence of the magnetic abnormality is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 and the magnetic abnormality is notified in the image display device 5 or the like. For example, in the error message display area of the image display device 5, an image of characters “Magnetic error has occurred” is displayed.

  The vibration abnormality notification is, for example, an abnormality notification that can be executed in a pachinko gaming machine or the like provided with the special variable winning ball apparatus 7. There is a fraudulent act that intentionally shakes the pachinko machine to change the flow direction of the game medium closer to a winning opening such as a big winning opening. By notifying the vibration abnormality, it is possible to prevent such an action from occurring. For example, a vibration sensor for detecting vibration is provided as one sensor of the abnormality detection sensor group 26. The CPU 103 determines whether or not there is an abnormality due to vibration (vibration abnormality) by determining whether the signal from the vibration sensor indicates vibration having a strength greater than or equal to a predetermined threshold (stronger than a predetermined threshold). Shows vibration of vibration → vibration is abnormal). When a vibration abnormality is detected, an abnormality detection designation command for designating the occurrence of the vibration abnormality is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, and the vibration abnormality is notified in the image display device 5 or the like. For example, in the error message display area of the image display device 5, an image of characters “Vibration error has occurred” is displayed.

  The radio wave abnormality notification is an abnormality notification performed when a radio wave abnormality (abnormality in which a predetermined radio wave reaches the pachinko gaming machine 1, in this case, there is a possibility of an illegal act) is detected. By applying radio waves to the start port switches (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23, etc., these switches are switched on / off, etc. There is a cheating to get. By notifying the radio wave abnormality, it is possible to prevent such an action from occurring. For example, a radio wave detection sensor for detecting a predetermined radio wave (such as a radio wave in a predetermined wavelength band) is provided as one sensor of the abnormality detection sensor group 26. The CPU 103 determines whether or not there is a radio wave abnormality by determining whether a signal from the radio wave detection sensor indicates reception of the predetermined radio wave (indicating reception of a predetermined radio wave → presence of radio wave abnormality). When a radio wave abnormality is detected, an abnormality detection designation command for designating that the radio wave abnormality has occurred is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, and a radio wave abnormality is notified in the image display device 5 or the like. For example, in the error message display area of the image display device 5, an image of the characters “A radio wave error has occurred” is displayed.

  Each of the mode change switch 31 and the display change switch 32 is configured by a DIP switch (Dual In-line Package switch) and is provided outside the game area of the game board 2. The mode changeover switch 31 and the display changeover switch 32 configured by DIP switches are configured by switching the operation unit between the first position and the second position (for example, in the case of a slide type, the position of the knob is changed to one end side and the other end). By switching to the side), the process (control program) executed by the effect control CPU 120 can be switched. In a state where the glass door frame 3a is closed with respect to the gaming machine frame 3, the glass door frame 3a covers the front surface of the game board 2, so that the player cannot operate the mode switch 31 and the display switch 32. It has become. It should be noted that the mode change switch 31 and the display change switch 32 are provided by the player via the glass door frame 3a when the glass door frame 3a is closed with respect to the gaming machine frame 3 (the state shown in FIG. 1). Since it is installed at a position where it cannot be visually recognized, it is not shown in FIG.

  As described above, the store clerk of the game hall inserts the key into the key hole 61 to open the locking device (not shown) and opens the glass door frame 3a forward with respect to the gaming machine frame 3, Operation of the mode switch 31 and the display switch 32 provided on the game board 2 (switching of the DIP switch) becomes possible. When the operation of the mode switch 31 and the display switch 32 is completed, the glass door frame 3a is returned to the closed state with respect to the gaming machine frame 3, and a key is inserted into the key hole 61 to lock the device (not shown). )) Is closed.

  When the operation part of the mode changeover switch 31 is in the first position, the voltage at the mode changeover terminal of the CPU 120 for effect control is in the low state, and when the operation part of the mode changeover switch 31 is in the second position, the effect control. The voltage of the mode switching terminal of the CPU 120 is in a high state. When the voltage of the mode switching terminal is Low, the effect control CPU 120 indicates that the operation unit of the mode switching switch 31 is in the first position, that is, information for the player (for example, a demonstration) The game mode for displaying a screen or the like is specified, and information of a winning number management table described later is not displayed on the image display device 5. On the other hand, when the voltage of the mode switch terminal is High, the effect control CPU 120 indicates that the operation unit of the mode switch 31 is in the second position, that is, the image display device 5 has information for the store clerk (for example, It is specified that the maintenance mode is for displaying the number of winning prizes to each winning mouth and the like, and information on the winning number management table described later is displayed on the image display device 5.

  When the operation part of the display changeover switch 32 is in the first position, the voltage of the display changeover terminal of the effect control CPU 120 is in the low state, and when the operation part of the display changeover switch 32 is in the second position, the effect control. The voltage of the display switching terminal of the CPU 120 becomes High. When the voltage at the display switching terminal is Low, the effect control CPU 120 indicates that the operation portion of the display changeover switch 32 is in the first position, that is, the image display device 5 indicates the number of winnings to the general winning opening. By specifying that display is not permitted, it is prohibited to display information based on the display control table described later (information that can specify the number of winnings in the general winning opening) on the image display device 5. On the other hand, when the voltage of the display switching terminal is High, the effect control CPU 120 indicates that the operation unit of the display switching switch 32 is in the second position, that is, the image display device 5 receives a prize for the general winning opening. Permission to display the number is specified, and information based on the display control table described later (information that can specify the number of winnings in the general winning opening) is allowed to be displayed on the image display device 5. To do.

  In this embodiment, the mode changeover switch 31 and the display changeover switch 32 are provided on the front side of the game board 2 (the surface facing the player), but the mode changeover switch 31 and / or the display changeover switch 32 are The game board 2 may be provided on the back side (game island side). In the case of such a configuration, the mode changeover switch 31 and / or the display changeover switch 32 provided on the back surface side of the game board 2 by rotating the gaming machine frame 3 forward with respect to the outer frame. Can be operated.

  The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 includes the start winning command as described above. The start prize command includes a start prize designation command indicating whether a start prize has occurred with respect to either the first start prize opening or the second start prize opening, or a first start prize opening or a second start prize opening. There are a start winning determination result designation command and the like indicating a jackpot determination result and a jackpot type determination result at the time of winning a game ball.

  The CPU 103 makes an effective start winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening, that is, the game ball to the first starting winning opening in a state where the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first start winning opening is less than the upper limit value. When winning is detected, the big hit determining random number and the big hit type determining random number are extracted from the random number circuit 104, and the extracted big hit determining random number and the big hit type determining random number are stored in the first special figure random number storage area. A command for designating the “first start prize opening” is set as a start prize opening designation command while being stored in a storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number (the first reserved memory number after addition including the valid start prize). In addition, the CPU 103 determines that the extracted (stored) jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value stored in the jackpot determination table corresponding to the current gaming state (normal state, time saving state, or probability variation state). Whether or not the start winning prize is determined is determined.

  In this starting prize determination, if the big hit determination random number does not match the big hit determination value of the big hit determination table, a start winning determination result designation command for designating “out” is set. When the jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table, the extracted (stored) jackpot type determination random number is further stored in the jackpot type determination table for the first special figure for each jackpot type. It is determined which of the determination values stored in the table matches. Then, a start winning determination result specifying command for specifying the jackpot type “big hit” corresponding to the matched determination value is set. For example, a command for designating “non-probable variation big hit” or a command for designating “probability big hit” is set as the determination result designation command at the time of starting winning. Then, the set start prize opening designation command (“first start prize opening” designation) and the start prize determination result designation command are output to the effect control board 12.

  Note that the CPU 103 starts a game ball for a first start winning opening in a state where the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first starting winning opening reaches an upper limit (that is, according to the first start winning opening). When an invalid start prize that is not eligible for the special game is detected, the command specifying the “first start prize opening” is set as the start prize designation command, and the determination result at the start prize is designated As a command, blank data is set to specify that it is not a valid starting prize. Then, the set start prize opening designation command (“first start prize opening” designation) and the start prize determination result designation command (blank data) are output to the effect control board 12.

  The CPU 103 makes an effective start winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening, that is, the game ball to the second start winning opening when the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second start winning opening is less than the upper limit value. When the winning is detected, the big hit determination random number and the big hit type determination random number are extracted from the random number circuit 104, and the extracted big hit determination random number and the big hit type determination random number are stored in the second random number storage area for the second special figure. A command for designating “second start prize opening” is set as a start prize opening designation command while being stored in a storage area corresponding to the number of reserved memories (the second reserved memory number after addition including the valid start prize). In addition, the CPU 103 determines that the extracted (stored) jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value stored in the jackpot determination table corresponding to the current gaming state (normal state, time saving state, or probability variation state). Whether or not the start winning prize is determined is determined.

  In this starting prize determination, if the big hit determination random number does not match the big hit determination value of the big hit determination table, a start winning determination result designation command for designating “out” is set. When the jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table, the extracted (stored) jackpot type determination random number is further stored in the jackpot type determination table for the second special figure for each jackpot type. It is determined which of the determination values stored in the table matches. Then, a start winning determination result specifying command for specifying the jackpot type “big hit” corresponding to the matched determination value is set. For example, a command for designating “non-probable variation big hit” or a command for designating “probability big hit” is set as the determination result designation command at the time of starting winning. Then, the set start prize opening designation command (“second start prize opening” designation) and the start prize determination result designation command are output to the effect control board 12.

  Note that the CPU 103 starts a game ball for the second start winning port in a state where the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second start winning port reaches the upper limit (that is, according to the second start winning port). When an invalid start prize that is paid out, but is not subject to a special game, is detected, a command for designating a “second start prize opening” is set as a start prize designation command, and a determination result at start prize is designated As a command, blank data is set to specify that it is not a valid starting prize. Then, the set start prize opening designation command (“second start prize opening” designation) and the start prize determination result designation command (blank data) are output to the effect control board 12.

  In this embodiment, based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot type determination random number extracted at the time of starting winning, the variable display result of the special figure corresponding to the starting winning is determined, and based on the determination result Although the pre-reading notice effect is executed, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and based on the variation pattern determination random number extracted at the time of starting winning, the variable pattern changing pattern corresponding to the starting winning is determined, A pre-reading notice effect may be executed based on the determination result. For example, when the determination result at the start winning is a super reach variation pattern, the pre-reading notice effect is executed at a higher rate than when the determination result at the start winning is a non-reach variation pattern. Good.

  Specifically, when the CPU 103 detects an effective start winning of the game ball at the first start winning opening, the CPU 103 extracts a random number for determining the variation pattern from the random number circuit 104, and uses the extracted random number for determining the variation pattern for the jackpot determination. Along with the random number and the jackpot type determination random number, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number (the first reserved memory number after addition including the valid start winning) in the random number storage area for the first special figure. In addition, when the CPU 103 detects the effective start winning of the game ball at the second start winning opening, the CPU 103 extracts the random number for determining the variation pattern from the random number circuit 104, and uses the extracted random number for determining the variation pattern as the jackpot determining random number and the jackpot. Along with the type determination random number, it is stored in a storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number (the second reserved memory number after addition including the valid start winning) in the second special figure random number storage area.

  Here, the ROM 101 corresponds to the deviation variation pattern determination table in which a random number range corresponding to each of the deviation variation patterns shown in FIG. 8A is set, and to each of the big hit variation patterns shown in FIG. 8B. And a big hit variation pattern determination table in which the random number range is set.

  When the determination result of the start winning determination (the display result specified by the start winning determination result specifying command) is “out of”, the CPU 103 refers to the shift variation pattern determination table for extraction (storage). The variation pattern determination random number is included in the random number range of the variation pattern, the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern determination random number is identified, and the identified variation pattern is “non-reach” , A start winning variation pattern determination result designation command for designating which variation pattern is “normal reach loss” or “super reach failure” is set.

  On the other hand, when the determination result of the determination at the start winning prize (the display result specified by the determination result specifying command at the start winning prize) is one of “non-probable big hit” and “probable big hit”, the fluctuation for big hit Refer to the pattern determination table to determine which variation pattern random number for the extracted (stored) variation pattern determination is included in the random number range, and identify the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern determination random number Then, a start winning variation pattern determination result designation command for designating whether the identified variation pattern is a variation pattern of “normal reach big hit” or “super reach big hit” is set.

  When detecting the invalid start winning, the CPU 103 sets blank data for designating that the start winning variation pattern determining result designation command is not a valid start winning.

  Then, the CPU 103 outputs the set start prize variation pattern determination result designation command to the effect control board 12 as a start prize command together with the above-described start prize opening designation command and start prize determination result designation command.

  The CPU 120 for effect control is a start winning opening designation command designated as “first start winning opening” and a start winning determination result designation command including valid data which is not blank data (and a start including valid data which is not blank data). When receiving the winning variation pattern determination result designation command), the start winning determination result designation command (and the starting winning variation pattern determination result designation command) is held in the first winning command storage area for the first special figure. Stored in a storage area corresponding to the number of memories (the first reserved storage number after addition including the valid start prize), the start prize opening designation command designated as “second start prize opening” and valid data that is not blank data Start winning judgment result specifying command including (and starting winning variation pattern including valid data that is not blank data) When the start winning prize determination result specifying command (and the start winning fluctuation pattern determination result specifying command) is received, the second pending storage number (in the relevant prize winning command storage area for the second special figure) Stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number after addition including the effective start winning). The effect control CPU 120 confirms the start prize determination result designation command (and the start prize variation pattern judgment result designation command) stored in the start prize command storage area, so that the first special characteristic is established before the start condition is satisfied. It is possible to estimate the display result (and fluctuation pattern) of the figure or the second special figure and execute the prefetch notice effect.

  On the other hand, the production control CPU 120 has a start winning opening specifying command designated as “first starting winning opening” and a starting winning determination result specifying command including blank data (and a starting winning variation pattern determining result specifying command including blank data). Is received, the start winning determination result specifying command (and the start winning variation pattern determination result specifying command) is specified for the first special figure. It is not stored in the start winning command storage area (excluded from the execution target of the pre-reading notice effect), and the winning history storage area to be described later can store the winning history for the first start winning opening. Start winning port designation command designated as “start prize opening” and start prize determination result designation command including blank data (and start prize including blank data) Dynamic pattern determination result designation command) is received, it is determined that an invalid start prize for the second start prize opening has occurred, and the start prize determination result designation command (and start prize variation pattern judgment result designation command) Is not stored in the start winning command storage area for the second special figure (excluded from the execution target of the pre-reading notice effect), and the winning history storage area described later may store the winning history for the second starting winning opening. Is possible.

  As described above, the control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 includes a variation pattern designation command. As shown below, when the main board 11 starts variable display of the special symbol, the main board 11 determines a fluctuation pattern according to the special figure display result that is derived and displayed, and notifies the effect control board 12 of the fluctuation pattern. Output a change pattern specification command for The ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 stores effect control data corresponding to each variation pattern in advance, and the effect control CPU 120 is for effect control corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the received variation pattern designation command. Data is selected and effect control is executed according to the selected effect control data.

  When the first start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the first special figure is executed, the CPU 103 determines the big hit determination random number and the big hit type determination random number stored in the random number storage area for the first special figure, In addition, among the random numbers for variation pattern determination, the big hit determination random number, the big hit type determination random number, and the variation pattern determination random number in the first storage area (storage area corresponding to the number of stored storages = 1) and the variation pattern determination random number are read out and thereafter The big hit determination random number, the big hit type determination random number, and the variation pattern determination random number in the storage area are shifted one by one to the previous storage area. Then, a determination is made as to whether or not the read jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value stored in the jackpot determination table corresponding to the current gaming state (normal state, short-time state, or probability variation state). Perform time determination.

  If the jackpot determination random number does not match the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table at the start determination, the CPU 103 sets a variable display result notification command for designating “displacement” and the jackpot determination random number. The variation pattern determination random number read from the first storage area is determined to be included in the random number range of the variation pattern set in the deviation variation pattern determination table, and corresponding to the variation pattern determination random number By specifying the fluctuation pattern, the “outlier fluctuation pattern” is determined.

  When the jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table, the read jackpot type determination random number is stored for each jackpot type in the jackpot type determination table for the first special figure. It is determined which of the existing determination values matches. Then, a variable display result notification command for designating the “big hit” of the big hit type corresponding to the matched judgment value is set, and the random number for variation pattern judgment read from the top storage area together with the big hit judgment random number is changed for the big hit By determining which variation pattern set in the pattern determination table is included in the random number range and identifying the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern determination random number, the “big hit variation pattern” is determined.

  Then, the CPU 103 outputs the set variable display result notification command and the variation pattern designation command for designating the determined variation pattern together with the variation start command for designating the variation start of the first special figure.

  When the second start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the second special figure is executed, the CPU 103 determines the big hit determination random number and the big hit type determination random number stored in the random number storage area for the second special figure, In addition, among the random numbers for variation pattern determination, the big hit determination random number, the big hit type determination random number, and the variation pattern determination random number in the first storage area (storage area corresponding to the number of stored storages = 1) and the variation pattern determination random number are read out and thereafter The big hit determination random number, the big hit type determination random number, and the variation pattern determination random number in the storage area are shifted one by one to the previous storage area. Then, a determination is made as to whether or not the read jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value stored in the jackpot determination table corresponding to the current gaming state (normal state, short-time state, or probability variation state). Perform time determination.

  If the jackpot determination random number does not match the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table at the start determination, the CPU 103 sets a variable display result notification command for designating “displacement” and the jackpot determination random number. The variation pattern determination random number read from the first storage area is determined to be included in the random number range of the variation pattern set in the deviation variation pattern determination table, and corresponding to the variation pattern determination random number By specifying the fluctuation pattern, the “outlier fluctuation pattern” is determined.

  When the jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table, the read jackpot type determination random number is stored for each jackpot type in the jackpot type determination table for the second special figure. It is determined which of the existing determination values matches. Then, a variable display result notification command for designating the “big hit” of the big hit type corresponding to the matched judgment value is set, and the random number for variation pattern judgment read from the top storage area together with the big hit judgment random number is changed for the big hit By determining which variation pattern set in the pattern determination table is included in the random number range and identifying the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern determination random number, the “big hit variation pattern” is determined.

  Then, the CPU 103 outputs the set variable display result notification command and the variation pattern designation command for designating the determined variation pattern together with the variation start command for designating the variation start of the second special figure.

  When receiving the variation start command for designating the variation start of the first special figure, the variable display result notification command, and the variation pattern designation command, the production control CPU 120 selects the production control data corresponding to the variation pattern designation command. At the same time, a fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) corresponding to the variable display result notification command is determined. Then, the variable display of the decorative design is started, and the effect control is executed based on the selected effect control data. Accordingly, of the start winning determination result specifying command (and the start winning variation pattern determining result specifying command) stored in the first special drawing start winning command storage area, the leading storage area (the number of stored memories) = 1 in the storage area corresponding to = 1) (and the start winning variation pattern determination result specifying command) and the subsequent storage area start winning determination result specifying command (and the start winning prize) The time variation pattern determination result designation command) is shifted to the previous storage area one by one.

  In addition, the production control CPU 120 stores the reach state establishment timing corresponding to the variation pattern in the ROM 121, so that the reach state is established at the reach state establishment timing corresponding to the received variation pattern designation command. Controls variable display of symbols. That is, the production control CPU 120 can grasp the establishment timing of the reach state according to the variation pattern.

  When receiving the variation start command for designating the variation start of the second special figure, the variable display result notification command, and the variation pattern designation command, the production control CPU 120 selects the production control data corresponding to the variation pattern designation command. At the same time, a fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) corresponding to the variable display result notification command is determined. Then, the variable display of the decorative design is started, and the effect control is executed based on the selected effect control data. Accordingly, of the start winning determination result specifying command (and the start winning variation pattern determination result specifying command) stored in the start winning command storing area for the second special figure, the leading storage area (the number of stored memories) = 1 in the storage area corresponding to = 1) (and the start winning variation pattern determination result specifying command) and the subsequent storage area start winning determination result specifying command (and the start winning prize) The time variation pattern determination result designation command) is shifted to the previous storage area one by one.

  In addition, when the first general prize opening switch 24A to the fourth general prize opening switch 24D detect that the game balls have won the first general prize opening 50A to the fourth general prize opening 50D, the game balls are placed in any general prize opening. A general winning opening designation command for designating whether or not has been won is output from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control board 12. That is, when a game ball is detected by the first general prize opening switch 24A, a general prize opening designation command for designating a prize to the first general prize opening 50A is output, and a game ball is outputted by the second general prize opening switch 24B. When it is detected, a general prize opening designation command for designating a prize at the second general prize opening 50B is output. When a game ball is detected by the third general prize opening switch 24C, a command to the third general prize opening 50C is output. A general prize opening designation command for designating a prize is output, and when a game ball is detected by the fourth general prize opening switch 24D, a general prize opening designation command for designating a prize for the fourth general prize opening 50D is output. .

  Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can identify the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening and which general winning opening the gaming ball has won based on the received general winning opening designation command. . Further, as described above, when the game ball wins the first start winning opening or the second start winning opening, the effect control CPU 120 designates which start winning opening the game ball has won. A mouth designation command is received. Thereby, the CPU 120 for effect control stores the information that can identify the general winning port where the winning has occurred and the information that can identify the starting winning port where the winning has occurred in the winning history storage area of the RAM 122 according to the order of winning. It is possible.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines which of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the general winning opening designated by the received general winning opening specifying command (the general winning opening where the game ball has won). Confirming whether the start winning port designated by the received start winning port designation command (the starting winning port where the game ball has won) is the first starting winning port or the second starting winning port. The RAM 122 stores the winning history of each general winning opening and each starting winning opening. For example, when a game ball wins in the order of the second general winning port 50B, the first starting winning port, the first general winning port 50A, the second starting winning port, and the third general winning port 50C, The history of “winning mouth, first start winning mouth, first general winning mouth, second starting winning mouth, third general winning mouth”] is stored in the winning history storage area of the RAM 122.

  In addition, when the winning at the start winning opening and the winning at the general winning opening occur within a predetermined period, the game control microcomputer 100 issues a start winning opening specifying command and a start winning determination result specifying command. , It may be transmitted prior to the general prize opening designation command. For example, detection by any one of the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B and detection by any one of the first general winning port switch 24A to the fourth general winning port switch 24D. When the detection is confirmed almost simultaneously (for example, in the same interrupt process), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the start winning opening designation command and the starting winning determination result designation command as the general winning opening designation command. It is better to send it ahead of the other. By using such a transmission order, the production control CPU 120 knows that it has already received the start prize opening designation command and the start prize determination result designation command when the general prize opening designation command is received. It is possible to perform a pre-reading notice effect based on the start winning time determination result designation command received in advance as the specific effect executed based on the winning in the general winning opening.

  Note that, when winning in the general winning award occurs a plurality of times within a predetermined period, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a plurality of general winning award specifying commands in accordance with a predetermined priority order. To do. For example, if the detection by the first general prize port switch 24A and the detection by the second general prize port switch 24B are confirmed almost simultaneously (for example, in the same interrupt processing), the game control microcomputer 100 The general prize opening designation command for designating a prize to a general prize opening that is more difficult to win may be transmitted first with priority. In addition, when the number of prize balls given according to the general prize opening is different, a general prize opening designation command for designating a prize to a general prize opening with a larger number of prize balls may be preferentially transmitted first. good.

  When the count switch 23 detects that a game ball has been won at the big prize opening, a big prize opening command for designating that the game ball has won at the big prize opening is sent from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control board 12. Is output. Therefore, the production control CPU 120 can specify the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening based on the received big winning opening winning command, and the winning history to the starting winning opening and the winning to the general winning opening described above. Similarly to the history, it is possible to store the winning history for the big winning opening in the winning history storage area.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 120 receives a jackpot start command in a period from receiving the jackpot start specifying command for specifying the start of the jackpot gaming state to receiving the jackpot end specifying command for specifying the end of the jackpot gaming state. It is possible to separately count the number of times received and the number of times received for the general winning opening designation command. Thereby, it is possible to distinguish and count the number of times of winning a prize money and the number of times of winning a general prize mouth during the period controlled to the big hit gaming state, and the result of the counting is shown in FIG. 5 can be displayed.

  In addition, when a game ball is being fired in the game area 10, the game ball usually wins at any of the start winning port, the general winning port, and the big winning port at a certain frequency. If the decorative symbols are not variably displayed and a game ball has not been won in any of the predetermined winning period (for example, 1 minute), the start winning opening, the general winning opening, and the big winning opening, There is a high possibility that the player is in a non-game state in which no game is played. For this reason, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the variable display of the decorative symbols, and receives the start prize opening designation command, the general prize opening designation command, and the big prize opening prize command for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute). If not, it is possible to make a game end determination that determines that the game has ended.

  FIG. 3A is a diagram illustrating an example of winning number information managed by the winning number management table stored in the RAM 122. In this winning number management table, the number of winnings to each of the first general winning ports 50A to 50D is stored. The effect control CPU 120 can total the number of wins for each general winning slot for each gaming state based on the jackpot start designation command, jackpot end designation command, gaming state designation command, and general winning slot designation command. . The gaming state designation command is a timing at which the gaming state changes (in this case, the gaming state designation command designates the gaming state to be controlled, and is transmitted, for example, at the end of the big hit gaming state or at the end of the short time state. Or a timing at which the special symbol variable display is started (the game state designation command in this case designates the game state when the special figure game is executed).

  In this example, the number of winnings in the second general winning opening 50B is 50 (total for all periods), of which 46 are in the normal state, 2 are in the big hit gaming state, and the number in the probable state. Is 1, and the number of winnings in the short-time state is 1. That is, the number of winnings in the left-handed period is 46, and the number of winnings in the right-handed period is 4. Further, the total number of winnings in the general winning opening is 108, of which 81 are winning in the left-handed period and 27 are winning in the right-handed period.

  As described above, the number of winnings in the left-handed period and the number of winnings in the right-handed period are individually stored together with the number of winnings in each general winning opening and displayed on the image display device 5 (or corresponding to the pachinko gaming machine 1). Sent to a gaming device such as a card unit or a call lamp device provided and displayed on a display device included in the gaming device, or transmitted to an information management device and displayed on a display device included in the information management device. Thus, at the game hall, it is possible to grasp the ease of winning a game ball at each general winning opening and to use it for maintenance of game nails. For example, if the number of game balls received in a general prize opening is excessively large or small, it is estimated that the game nail near the general prize opening is bent or damaged, and maintenance of the game nail is performed. It can be performed.

  Information on the number of winnings in the winning number management table (the number of winnings in each general winning opening, the number of winnings in the general winning opening in each gaming state, the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the left-handed period and the right-handed period, and the general winning opening) Is displayed on the image display device 5 when the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 31 is in the second position (in the maintenance mode), and in the case of the first position (in the game mode). Do not show. The game shop clerk switches the mode changeover switch 31 from the first position to the second position, displays the winning number information in the winning number management table, performs game nail maintenance with reference to this, and enters the general winning opening. Appropriate frequency of winning game balls. Then, after the maintenance is completed, the mode switch 31 is returned from the second position to the first position.

  In this embodiment, the number-of-wins information in the number-of-wins management table does not depend on the game state (for example, normal state, probability change state, short-time state, jackpot game state), Whether or not variable display is being executed, the number of reserved memory for special-purpose games), and the execution status of ordinary games (whether or not variable display of normal symbols is being executed, and the number of reserved memories for ordinary game) Regardless, the period during which the operation portion of the mode switch 31 is in the second position is continuously displayed on the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the winning number information in the winning number management table may be displayed on the image display device 5 according to the gaming state. The operation unit is in the second position and can be displayed only in the normal state, and even if the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 31 is in the second position, it is not displayed in the probability change state, the short time state, or the big hit gaming state. Anyway.

  The winning number information in the winning number management table may be displayed on the image display device 5 in accordance with the execution state of the special figure game. For example, the operation unit of the mode switch 31 is set to the second position. Even when the special symbol variable display is not executed and the number of reserved memory of the special figure game is 0, the display can be performed only, and the operation part of the mode changeover switch 31 is in the second position. The period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed, or the period during which the number of special figure games held is not 0 may not be displayed. The winning number information in the winning number management table may be displayed on the image display device 5 in accordance with the execution state of the usual game. For example, the operation unit of the mode switch 31 is set to the second position. Even if the variable display of the normal symbol is not executed, the display can be performed only during the period in which the number of the reserved games stored in the normal game is 0, and the operation part of the mode changeover switch 31 is in the second position. The period during which the normal symbol variable display is being executed or the period during which the number of reserved games stored in the normal game is not 0 may not be displayed.

  The number-of-wins information stored in the number-of-wins management table includes the setting state of the mode switch 31, the setting state of the display switch 32, and the display settings by the operation buttons 30 (settings (1) to (3) in FIG. 5). Regardless of the setting on the screen, it is updated based on the reception of the general winning opening designation command. Also, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is transmitted from the information output terminal of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a game information management device (for example, a hall computer (not shown) provided in the game hall) after the game hall is closed. The winning information for each gaming machine is stored every business day in the gaming information management device. The winning number information stored in the winning number management table is obtained when the winning history in the winning history storage area described above is deleted (reset) based on execution of a specific effect corresponding to the winning history storage area. Even after the transmission to the game information management device is completed, the operation button in the state in which the store clerk reset operation (for example, the winning number information of the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device 5) 30).

  For example, the store clerk of the game hall presses the operation button 30 in a state where the winning number information in the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device 5 (the mode changeover switch 31 is in the second position (display setting)). By pressing the time (for example, 2 seconds or more), the number of winnings of all items (the number of winnings of each general winning mouth and the total number of winnings of general winning mouths) stored in the winning number management table may be reset to zero. Is possible.

  FIG. 3B is a diagram showing an example of winning number information managed by the display control table stored in the RAM 122. In this display control table, the number of wins to each of the first general winning ports 50A to 50D is stored. The effect control CPU 120 can add up the number of winnings to each general winning opening based on the general winning opening specifying command. In this example, the total number of winnings in the general winning award is 11, of which the number of winnings in the first general winning opening 50A is 3, the number of winnings in the second general winning opening 50B is 5, and the third general winning opening. The number of winnings in 50C is 2, and the number of winnings in the fourth general winning opening 50D is 1.

  As shown in FIG. 4, winning information (specifically, the number of objects displayed according to the total number of winnings) in the display control table is displayed when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is in the second position (display setting). ) And the display of the general winning number is set by the operation button 30, it is displayed on the image display device 5. When the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is in the first position (when the display is not set), regardless of whether or not the display setting of the general winning number is set by the operation button 30, the winning of the display control table is won. Number information is not displayed (display is prohibited). Even when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is in the second position (in the case of display setting), when the display setting of the general winning number is not performed by the operation button 30 (in the case of non-display setting). Does not display the winning information in the display control table.

  That is, when the store clerk of the game hall performs the display prohibition setting of the winning number information by the display changeover switch 32, the winning number to the general winning opening is not displayed regardless of the display setting operation of the player. Yes. Only when the store clerk of the game hall performs the display permission setting of the winning number information by the display changeover switch 32, the number of winnings to the general winning opening is displayed according to the display setting operation of the player.

  In this embodiment, a specific effect (specific effect A: change result notice effect, specific effect B: pre-read notice effect) based on the winning of a game ball in the general winning opening is executed. As for the production, as shown in FIG. 4, when the operation portion of the display changeover switch 32 is in the second position (in the case of execution permission setting) and the operation button 30 is used, the general winning display display setting (execution of specific production) is performed. It can be executed when (setting) is performed. When the operation part of the display changeover switch 32 is in the first position (in the case of execution non-permission setting), depending on whether or not the display setting of the general winning number (execution setting of specific effect) is performed by the operation button 30. The specific effect is not executed (execution is prohibited). Further, even when the operation portion of the display changeover switch 32 is in the second position (in the case of execution permission setting), the display setting of the general winning number is not performed by the operation button 30 (in the case of non-execution setting). In this case, the specific performance is not executed.

  In other words, when a store clerk in the game hall performs the setting for disapproving the execution of the specific effect by the display changeover switch 32, the execution of the specific effect is prohibited regardless of the player's execution setting operation. Only when the store clerk of the game hall performs execution permission setting of the specific effect by the display changeover switch 32, the specific effect can be executed according to the player's execution setting operation.

  Thus, in this embodiment, the setting as to whether or not to notify the number of winnings to the general winning opening also serves as the setting as to whether or not to execute the specific effect, and the operation means for setting is also common. (Amusement hall side: display changeover switch 32, player side: operation button 30). Not only in such a form, it may be possible to individually set whether or not to notify the number of winnings in the general winning opening and whether or not to enable the specific effect, and may be set by different operating means. May be.

  The number-of-wins information stored in the display control table includes the setting state of the mode switch 31, the setting state of the display switch 32, and the display setting by the operation buttons 30 (settings in FIGS. 5 (1) to (3)). Regardless of the setting on the screen, it is updated based on the reception of the general winning opening designation command. In addition, the number-of-wins information stored in the display control table (the number of winnings and the total number of winnings for each general winning slot) is the identification of the winning history in the winning history storage area described above corresponding to the winning history storage area. Even if it is erased (reset) based on the execution of the performance (A or B), it is not erased, and when the game end determination is made by the performance control CPU 120, for example, variable display of decorative symbols is executed. If the start winning port designation command, the general winning port designation command, and the big prize opening designation command have not been received for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), they are erased (reset to 0).

  When the number of winnings and the total number of winnings in each general winning opening stored in the display control table are reset to 0 based on the game end determination, the general winning opening displayed on the image display device 5 is displayed. The number of winnings is also reset to zero. For example, the coin-type object (winning display) displayed on the right side of the character “general winning” on the screen of FIG. 6 to be described later is not displayed, and the number of display objects becomes zero. It should be noted that when the number of winnings in the general winning award is not displayed on the image display device 5, the number of winnings and the total number of winnings in each of the general winning awards stored in the display control table are determined as the game end. Next, when the number of winnings to the general winning opening is displayed on the image display device 5, the total number of winnings stored in the display control table at that time ( For example, the number of objects corresponding to the total number of winnings) is displayed.

  In addition, the store clerk or the player of the game hall presses the operation button 30 in a state where the winning number information of the display control table is displayed on the image display device 5 (an object corresponding to the total winning number is displayed). By pressing for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds or more), regardless of the above game end determination, the number of winnings of all items stored in the display control table (the number of winnings of each general winning mouth and the total winnings of general winning mouths) (Number) can be reset to 0, and accordingly, the winning number information displayed on the image display device 5 is also reset to 0 (all displayed objects are erased).

  As shown in FIG. 5, the player's display setting operation is accepted by operating the operation button 30 during the display of the demonstration screen not related to the progress of the special game and the progress of the normal game. A state in which the player is not playing a game (for example, the decorative symbol variable display is not executed, and the start prize opening designation command, the general prize opening designation command, and the big prize opening prize command are set for a predetermined period (for example, 1 5 minutes), the demo screen is displayed on the image display device 5, and the screen shown in FIG. 5 (1) is displayed at predetermined intervals while the demo screen is displayed.

  On the screen of FIG. 5 (1), a message “Please press the enter button for display setting of the number of general winnings” is displayed, and an image simulating the operation button 30 is displayed below the operation button 30. An arrow prompting you to press is displayed. When the player presses the operation button 30 in accordance with the instruction, the selection screen shown in FIG. 5 (2) is displayed. On the selection screen, an icon including the characters “display” and an icon including the characters “do not display” are displayed, and a message “decision button after selecting with jog dial” is displayed. An arrow that prompts the user to press the jog dial after being rotated is displayed.

  In order to display the number of winnings in the general winning a prize, the operation button 30 (jog dial) is turned to the left to select an icon including the characters “display”, and to enter the general winning award. In order not to display the number of wins, the operation button 30 (jog dial) is rotated to the right to select an icon including the characters “not displayed”. In this example, an icon including the characters “display” is selected.

  Then, when the operation button 30 is pressed in a state where an icon including the characters “display” is selected in FIG. 5 (2), as shown in FIG. 5 (3), “the number of general winnings is displayed”. A message is displayed, and the display returns to the normal demonstration screen shown in FIG. By this setting operation, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the number of winnings in the general winning opening can be displayed on the image display device 5, and the player can grasp this. Here, it is assumed that the total number of winnings stored in the display control table at the time when the setting operation is completed (for example, the number of objects corresponding to the total number of winnings in FIG. 6) is displayed immediately. The total number of winnings is not displayed immediately after the setting operation is completed, but is displayed on the image display device 5 when the variable display of the special symbol is executed after the setting operation is completed (when the game end determination is no longer performed). You may make it.

  On the other hand, when the operation button 30 is pressed in the state where the icon including the characters “do not display” is selected in FIG. 5 (2), a message “The number of general winnings is not displayed” is displayed, and FIG. 5 (4). Return to the normal demo screen. As a result of this setting operation, the number of prizes received in the general prize opening is not displayed on the image display device 5.

  Here, in this embodiment, only when the operation portion of the display changeover switch 32 is in the second position, that is, on the game hall side, the winning information stored in the display control table is stored in the image display device 5. Only when the display is permitted, a screen for setting whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning a prize is displayed on the image display apparatus 5 as shown in FIGS. It shall be displayed. When the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is at the first position, that is, when the game hall side does not permit the image display device 5 to display the winning information stored in the display control table, As shown in FIGS. 5 (1) to (3), the screen for selecting whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not displayed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 4 described above, it is determined that the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not displayed only by the non-display setting of the display changeover switch 32 regardless of the display setting / non-display setting of the player. Is done.

  In this way, it is possible to reflect the intentions of the game hall and the player regarding whether or not to display the number of winning game balls to the general winning opening. In this embodiment, the player sets whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening only when the operation section of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the second position (display position) on the game hall side. It is possible. That is, in this embodiment, the intention of the game hall is prioritized over the intention of the player. Therefore, on the game hall side, when the player does not want the player to know the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 may be set to the first position (non-display position).

  In addition, in the case where the intention of the game hall has priority over the intention of the player, even though the operation section of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the first position (non-display position) on the game hall side ( (Although it has already been decided not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening regardless of the player's setting), the player's side as shown in FIGS. When the setting screen is displayed, it is misunderstood that the player can display the number of winnings in the general winning opening by his / her setting operation.

  In order to prevent such misidentification, in this embodiment, when the operation section of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the first position (non-display position) on the game hall side (regardless of the setting on the player side) When it is already determined not to display the number of winnings in the winning opening), the setting screen on the player side as shown in FIGS. 5 (1) to (3) is not displayed. That is, the notification itself that “the number of winnings in the general winning opening can be displayed according to the setting operation on the player side” is not performed.

  Display setting on the game hall side (the operation part of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the second position) and display setting on the player side (the icon including the characters “display” on the selection screen of FIG. 5 (2)) When it is decided to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening by pressing the operation button 30 in the selected state), as shown in FIG. “General winning” is displayed. When a game ball wins a general winning opening (first general winning opening 50A to fourth general winning opening 50D), as shown in FIG. 6 (2), a coin-shaped object is placed on the right side of the character “general winning”. (Winning display) is displayed.

  The number of coin-type objects displayed on the image display device 5 corresponds to the total number of winnings in the display control table described above. As shown in FIG. 6 (3), each time a game ball wins a general winning opening (first general winning opening 50A to fourth general winning opening 50D), the total number of winnings in the display control table is incremented by one. As a result, the number of coin-type objects also increases. In addition, the coin-type object includes a number “10”, which indicates the number of prize balls given when a game ball wins a general prize opening. Therefore, the player can grasp the number of prize balls given in accordance with winning in the general winning opening. Note that the number of winning balls that are awarded when a game ball is won in each winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, general winning opening, large winning opening) is stored in the ROM 121 in advance. And

  In this way, by displaying the object corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening, and increasing the number of objects to be displayed in accordance with the increase in the winning number, the player can It is possible to easily grasp that the game ball has won and the number of game balls won to the general winning opening.

  When the game end determination is made by the effect control CPU 120, as described above, the number of game balls won and the total number of wins in each general winning opening stored in the display control table are reset to zero. As a result, as shown in FIG. 6 (4), all coin-type objects displayed on the right side of the characters “general winning” are erased. That is, it is notified that the number of winnings in the general winning opening is zero.

  As described above, when the game end determination is made, that is, when it is specified that the gaming machine is in a non-game state, the number of winnings to the general winning opening that has been notified is reset to 0 (general It is possible to prevent a player who plays a game on the gaming machine from grasping the number of winnings in the general winning opening after that. .

  In this embodiment, by setting the game end determination condition and the above-described condition for shifting to the demo screen as a common condition, the number of winnings to the general winning opening that has been informed at the time of shifting to the demo screen is 0. Will be reset. In this way, when displaying the demo screen, the number of winning prizes received in the general winning award may be reset to zero.

  As described above, when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the first position (non-display position), the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the second position (display position). Is set not to display the number of general winnings on the player setting screen (FIG. 5), the display control for increasing the number of objects to be displayed for each winning in the general winning opening shown in FIG. 6 is not executed. . In these cases, the “general winnings” character itself shown in FIG. 6 is not displayed, and the coin-type object itself is also displayed regardless of the number of winnings in the general winning opening (total winnings in the display control table). Do not show.

  Note that if the number of objects (usually objects) to be displayed for each winning prize in the general prize opening is increased, the screen becomes difficult to see as the number of winnings increases, so the number of normal objects has reached a predetermined number (for example, 10). In this case, it is preferable to display one special object (for example, an object having a different aspect from the normal object including the number “100”) instead of the predetermined number of normal objects. Accordingly, a predetermined number of winning times and the number of winning balls corresponding thereto can be notified in one special object display area without requiring a predetermined number of normal object display areas.

  Further, in this embodiment, an example is shown in which the number of displayed objects is increased by one for each winning of a general winning opening. Objects may be displayed according to the number of winnings. For example, the number of displayed objects may be increased by one for every five winnings in the general winning opening.

  Also, the display setting on the game hall side (the operation part of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the second position) and the display setting on the player side (including the characters “display” on the selection screen of FIG. 5 (2)). When the operation button 30 is pressed with the icon selected), when it is determined to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening, as shown in FIG. , The number of winnings in the general winning opening is displayed together with the number of winnings in the large winning opening.

  FIG. 7 (1) is a screen displayed on the image display device 5 when controlled to the big hit gaming state. When the first round game is started, the characters “general winnings” are displayed, and the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the big hit gaming state is displayed on the right side thereof, and “large winnings” Is displayed, and on the right side, the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening in the big hit gaming state is displayed. In this example, the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the jackpot gaming state is still 0, and the number of winning balls awarded when a game ball is won in the general winning opening is 10 [0 × 10]. Is displayed. In addition, [0 × 15] is displayed because the number of winning balls in the big winning game state is still 0, and the number of winning balls awarded when a game ball is won in the big winning gate is 15. Has been. Further, in the jackpot gaming state, the number of winning balls [0 × 10] awarded in response to winning in the general winning opening and the number of winning balls [0 × 15] awarded in response to winning in the big winning mouth Since the total number of and is 0, [0 balls in total] is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 7 (2), as a result of performing the first round game, the game ball has won seven times in the big winning opening (special variable winning ball apparatus 7), and the general winning opening (first general winning opening 50A). Since the game ball has won once in the fourth general winning opening 50D), the general winning number is 1, and the large winning number is updated to 7. In addition, the total number of prize balls [1 × 10] awarded according to the prize winning to the general prize opening and the number of prize balls [7 × 15] awarded according to the prize winning to the big prize mouth is 115. Therefore, [total 115 balls] is displayed. It should be noted that the number of winning balls awarded in response to winning the general winning opening [1 × 10 = 10 balls] and the number of winning balls awarded in accordance with winning in the big winning opening [7 × 15 = 105] May be displayed individually.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 7 (3), as a result of the second to fifteenth (final) round games, the game balls are counted in the big winning mouth (special variable winning ball device 7) in the big hit gaming state. The game is won three times, and the game balls are won three times in the general winning opening (first general winning opening 50A to fourth general winning opening 50D), so that the general winning number is 3, and the large winning number is updated to 105. ing. Further, in the jackpot gaming state, the number of winning balls awarded in response to winning a general winning opening [3 × 10] and the number of winning balls awarded in response to winning a winning prize [105 × 15] Since the total number of and 1605 is 1605, a total of 1605 balls is displayed.

  In this way, by displaying the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the period controlled to the big winning gaming state separately from the number of winning in the large winning opening, the player can only receive the number of winning in the big winning opening. In addition, we will be interested in the number of prizes received in the general prize opening. In addition, by distinguishing and displaying the number of winning balls according to the number of winning prizes and the number of winning balls according to the number of winning winnings in the general winning slot, the player can win the winning prize. In addition to the number of prize balls given in response to this, there is an interest in the number of prize balls given in accordance with winning in the general prize opening.

  It should be noted that the number of winnings in the general winning award in the probability variation state or the short time state may be displayed on the image display device 5 without being limited to the number of winning in the general winning opening in the period controlled to the big hit gaming state. You may make it display on the image display apparatus 5 the number of winning in a general winning opening in a normal state. In addition, the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the right-handed period (big hit gaming state, probability change state or short-time state) may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the general winning in the left-handed period (normal state) may be displayed. The number of winning prizes for the mouth may be displayed on the image display device 5. Further, the number of winning prizes in the general winning opening during a period in which the variable display of special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, the number corresponding to the number of stored special figure games) may be displayed on the image display device 5.

  As described above, when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the first position (non-display position), the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the second position (display position). Is set not to display the number of general winnings on the player setting screen (FIG. 5), the number of winnings to the general winning opening during the period controlled to the big hit gaming state shown in FIG. 7 is displayed. Display control to be performed is not executed. In these cases, the number of “general winnings” shown in FIG. 7 itself is not displayed, and the number of winnings to the general winning opening and the number of winning balls corresponding to the winnings during the period controlled to the big hit gaming state. In addition, the total number of winning balls corresponding to the number of winning prizes in the general winning opening and the number of winning balls corresponding to the number of winning prizes in the big winning opening are not displayed. Only the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening and the number of winning balls corresponding to the number of winning prizes are displayed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 6, the example in which the number of winning balls (10) corresponding to the general winning opening is displayed on the object has been described. However, the image display device 5 has the number of winning balls corresponding to the general winning opening. It may not be displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 7, the example in which the number of prize balls (10) corresponding to the general prize opening and the number of prize balls given in accordance with the prize winning to the general prize opening is described. These may not be displayed on the device 5.

  In this way, only the number of winning prizes to the general winning opening may be displayed, and the number of winning balls corresponding to the general winning opening or the number of winning balls given in accordance with the winning to the general winning opening may not be displayed. . With such a configuration, when the number of winning balls corresponding to the general winning opening is changed in the design process of the gaming machine, the display information of the image display device 5 must be changed in accordance with the change. The situation of disappearing can be prevented. In contrast to this, only the number of prize balls given in accordance with winning in the general winning opening may be displayed.

  In this embodiment, when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the first position (non-display position) on the game hall side, the player setting shown in FIGS. The example in which the screen itself is not displayed (the player is not informed that the winning number display / non-display switching is possible) has been described. Even when the operation unit is set to the first position (non-display position), the player setting screen shown in FIGS. 5 (1) to (3) is displayed (the number of winnings can be displayed / hidden switched). May be notified to the player).

  In the case of such a configuration, even if the player has set to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening on the player setting screen of FIGS. 5 (1) to (3), The effect control CPU 120 displays the number of winnings to the general winning opening on the image display device 5 based on the fact that the operation part of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the first position (non-display position) on the game hall side. (Do not give priority to the game hall setting). At this time, it may be displayed on the image display device 5 that the number of winnings cannot be displayed due to the priority of the game hall setting.

  When the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the first position (non-display position), the player setting screen shown in FIG. That the player is informed), but the player's setting operation may be invalidated. For example, even if the operation button 30 is pressed on the player setting screen of FIG. 5 (1), the selection screen of FIG. It may be impossible to select whether or not.

  Thus, in this embodiment, the game hall setting has priority over the player setting, but conversely, the player setting may have priority over the game hall setting. That is, regardless of whether the operation part of the display changeover switch 32 is the first position (non-display position) or the second position (display position), the player setting screens of FIGS. When the operation button 30 is pressed in a state where an icon including the characters “display” is selected on the selection screen of FIG. 5 (2) so that it can be displayed on the image display device 5, the number of winning prizes in the general winning opening is displayed on the image display device. 5 (the display control of FIGS. 6 and 7 is executed), and when the operation button 30 is pressed in a state where an icon including the characters “do not display” is selected on the selection screen of FIG. The number of winning prizes in the mouth may not be displayed on the image display device 5 (the display control in FIGS. 6 and 7 is not executed).

  Further, it may be determined whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening in accordance with the order of the accepted setting operation, with the game hall setting and the player setting having the same priority. That is, it may be determined whether or not to display the number of winnings to the general winning a prize with priority given to the setting operation (latest setting operation) received last. For example, even when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the first position (non-display position), the player can enter the general winning opening on the player setting screens shown in FIGS. When the number is set to be displayed, the number of winnings in the general winning opening is displayed (the display control in FIGS. 6 and 7 is executed). Moreover, even if it is set not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening on the player setting screens of FIGS. 5 (1) to (3), after that, the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is moved to the second position. In the case of (display position), the number of winnings in the general winning opening is displayed (the display control in FIGS. 6 and 7 is executed). On the other hand, even when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the second position (display position), the number of winnings to the general winning opening is subsequently displayed on the player setting screens of FIGS. 5 (1) to (3). Is set not to be displayed, the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not displayed (the display control in FIGS. 6 and 7 is not executed). Further, even when the player setting screens of FIGS. 5 (1) to (3) are set to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is thereafter moved to the first position. In the case of (non-display position), the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not displayed (the display control in FIGS. 6 and 7 is not executed).

  Further, in this embodiment, it is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings to the general winning a prize on the image display device 5 by operating the display changeover switch 32 by the store clerk of the game hall, and the player By operating the operation button 30, it is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening on the image display device 5. By operating the switch 32, it is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening on the image display device 5. On the player side, the number of winnings in the general winning opening is displayed on the image display device 5. Whether or not to display may not be set (for example, a setting screen on the player side as shown in FIGS. 5 (1) to (3) is not provided). In this way, it may be possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening on the image display device 5 only on the game hall side.

  On the contrary, it is possible to set whether or not the image display device 5 displays the number of winnings in the general winning a prize by the player (and the store clerk of the game hall) operating the operation button 30. On the other hand, there may be no means (for example, the display changeover switch 32 is not provided) that allows only the game hall side to set whether or not the image display device 5 displays the number of winnings in the general winning opening. In the case of such a configuration, whether or not the player and the store clerk at the game hall display the number of winnings to the general winning a prize on the image display device 5 by a common setting operation (operation of the operation button 30). It can be set. In this way, it may be possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening on the image display device 5 by a common setting operation for the player and the game hall.

  In this embodiment, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device 5, but the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is displayed in the pachinko. An information display device provided corresponding to the gaming machine 1, for example, a card unit display device provided on the side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or a call lamp device provided above the pachinko gaming machine 1 to display information It may be displayed on the device. Also, the winning information stored in the winning number management table is transmitted to an information management device (for example, a hall computer) that manages game information of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the information management device receives a general winning opening for each gaming machine. The number of winnings may be stored and displayed on the display device. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is not provided with the mode changeover switch 31 so that the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is not displayed on the gaming machine (image display device 5). It may be displayed only on the information management apparatus.

  In this embodiment, the number-of-wins information stored in the number-of-wins management table is displayed on the image display device 5 according to the setting of the mode changeover switch 31, and is stored in the display control table according to the setting of the display changeover switch 32. The example in which the winning number information can be displayed on the image display device 5 has been described. Thus, the winning number management table and the display control table are not provided with individual switches for controlling the display of the winning number management table and the display control table. A common switch for performing display control of both the number management table and the display control table may be provided. For example, by setting the common switch as a display setting, both the winning number information stored in the winning number management table and the winning number information stored in the display control table are displayed on the image display device 5, and the common switch The non-display setting may be configured so that neither the winning number information stored in the winning number management table nor the winning number information stored in the display control table is displayed on the image display device 5.

  In FIG. 8A, when a special symbol other than a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped as a confirmed special symbol, it is determined by the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100). An outlier variation pattern is illustrated. FIG. 8B illustrates a big hit variation pattern determined by the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) when a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol. Has been. Since the special figure fluctuation time is determined for each fluctuation pattern, the presentation control CPU 120 that has received the fluctuation pattern designation command can perform the presentation according to the special figure fluctuation time.

  Among the deviation variation patterns, PX001 and PX002 are variation patterns that are non-reach out of effect, PX003 is a variation pattern that is out of normal reach and PX004 is a non-reach effect. It is a fluctuation pattern. Among the big hit fluctuation patterns, PY003 is a fluctuation pattern that is an effect mode of normal reach big hit, and PY004 is a fluctuation pattern that is an effect mode of super reach big hit. Here, the super reach variation pattern is a variation pattern in which a battle effect is executed after the reach state is established. The normal reach variation pattern is a variation pattern in which a battle effect is not executed after the reach state is established.

  The battle effect is an effect that suggests whether or not a teammate character and an enemy character battle each other and win or lose. In PX004, which is a variation pattern of super-reach, a defeat effect is performed in which a teammate character loses to an enemy character, whereas in PY004, which is a variation pattern of a super reach jackpot, a victory in which a teammate character wins against an enemy character. Production is performed.

  As described above, the effect control CPU 120 receives the variable display result notification command and the variation pattern designation command when the start condition is established and the variable display of the special figure is executed in the game control microcomputer 100. As a result, when the special symbol variable display is being executed (before the fixed special symbol is stopped), the specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol of the variable display (that is, the big bonus symbol) It is possible to execute a fluctuating result notice effect for notifying that the game state is controlled).

  In the change result notice effect shown in FIG. 9A, together with the change notice effect of the first mode in which only the sound effect in which the sound “Now is a chance!” Is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the sound effect, It is possible to execute the change notice effect of the second mode in which the accessory effect in which the movable accessory 1000 operates (rotating operation and lighting) is executed. Due to such a difference in the production mode, it is possible to suggest the possibility that the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the variable display currently being executed (the start condition is established).

  The effect control CPU 120, based on the notice effect determination random number extracted from the random number circuit 124, when the execution condition of the specific effect (specific effect A: variation result notice effect) based on the winning to the general winning opening is established, The mode of the change result notice effect is determined. Specifically, at the timing when the game ball is won at the general winning opening (the timing when the winning condition based on the winning at the general winning opening is established), the mode of the change result notice effect is determined, and the determined mode The change result notice effect is executed. As will be described later, if the special symbol variable display (the decorative symbol variable display associated therewith) is not executed, the execution of the fluctuation result notice effect is suspended or the change result notice effect is displayed. Do not execute.

  For example, if the variable display result (variable display result of the currently executed variable display) specified by the last received variable display result notification command specifies “out of”, the audio effect is 80%. The change notice effect of the 1st mode with only is performed, and the change notice effect of the 2nd mode with a sound effect and an accessory effect is performed in the ratio of 20%. On the other hand, if the variable display result specified by the last received variable display result notification command (the variable display result of the currently executed variable display) specifies “big hit”, the sound effect is 25%. The change notice effect of the 1st mode with only is performed, and the change notice effect of the 2nd mode with a voice effect and an accessory effect is performed in the ratio of 75%.

  Further, as described above, when the effective start winning to the first start winning port or the second starting winning port occurs in the game control microcomputer 100, the production control CPU 120 starts the start winning port designation command and the start winning award. Receives the hour determination result specification command. As a result, before the special chart start condition is established, a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol for variable display that has not yet been executed (that is, controlled to the big hit gaming state) ) Can be executed in advance.

  In the pre-reading notice effect shown in FIG. 9 (b), the first aspect of the pre-reading notice effect and the sound effect in which only the sound effect in which the voice of “coming soon! The pre-reading notice effect of the 2nd mode in which the accessory effect which the thing 1000 operate | moves (rotation operation and lighting) is performed can be performed. Due to the difference in the production mode, it is possible to suggest the possibility that the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied even though the start condition is satisfied. Yes.

  The effect control CPU 120 pre-reads based on the notice effect determining random number extracted from the random number circuit 124 when the execution condition of the specific effect (specific effect B: pre-read notice effect) based on the winning in the general prize opening is satisfied. The mode of the notice effect is determined. Specifically, the aspect of the pre-reading notice effect is determined at the timing when the game ball is won at the general winning opening (the timing when the winning condition based on the winning at the general winning opening is established), and the determined aspect is A pre-reading notice effect is executed. Note that, as will be described later, if the number of reserved memories is 0, execution of the prefetching notice effect is suspended or the prefetching notice effect is not executed.

  For example, if the start prize determination result designation command stored in the start prize command storage area does not include the start prize judgment result designation command for designating “big hit” (all start prizes for designating “out”) In the case of the time determination result designation command), the prefetching notice effect in the first mode with only the audio effect is executed at a rate of 85%, and the second mode with the sound effect and the effect effect at a rate of 15% is executed. A pre-reading notice effect is executed. On the other hand, if the start prize determination result designation command stored in the start prize command storage area includes a start prize determination result designation command for designating “big hit”, the voice effect is 10%. The prefetching notice effect of the 1st mode accompanied only by is performed, and the prefetching notice effect of the 2nd mode accompanied by an audio effect and an effect effect is performed in the ratio of 90%.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a specific effect that is executed based on the winning of a game ball in a general winning opening. The variation result notice effect for notifying whether the display result of the variable display being executed becomes a big hit symbol is executed as the specific effect A in the present embodiment. In addition, the pre-reading notice effect for notifying whether or not the display result of the variable display for which the start condition is not satisfied becomes a jackpot symbol, that is, whether or not the reserved memory includes the one determined to be a jackpot, It is executed as a specific effect B in the form.

  In this embodiment, the setting of whether or not to notify the number of winnings to the general winning opening also serves as the setting of whether or not the specific effect can be executed, and notifies the number of winnings to the general winning opening. When the setting has been made (when the operation part of the display changeover switch 32 is in the second position (in the case of execution permission setting) and the operation button 30 is used, the display setting of the general winning number (execution setting of specific effect) is performed. Only when it is performed) the effect control CPU 120 can execute the specific effect.

  As described above, each time the effect control CPU 120 receives the general winning opening designation command and the start winning opening designation command, the winning history storage area of the RAM 122 stores the winning history of the winning opening designated by the received command. However, this winning history storage area is provided for each specific effect. That is, in this embodiment, a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are provided separately. For example, the first general winning opening 50A, the second When winning occurs in the order of the general winning opening 50B, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the third general winning opening 50C, and the fourth general winning opening 50D, the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and Each of the winning history storage areas corresponding to the specific effect B has a winning history of [first general winning opening, second general winning opening, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, third general winning opening, fourth]. Will be memorized.

  In the effect form in which only the specific effect A can be executed, the effect control CPU 120 stores the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A (the timing at which a winning at any one of the winning openings occurs). ), Whether or not the winning condition is satisfied is determined, and the execution of the specific effect A is determined based on the winning condition being satisfied. Further, in an effect form in which only the specific effect B can be executed, every time the winning history is stored in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B (at the timing when a winning in any winning opening occurs) It is confirmed whether or not the condition is satisfied, and the execution of the specific effect B is determined based on the fact that the winning condition is satisfied. Further, in an effect form in which the specific effect A and the specific effect B can be executed, every time the winning history is stored in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B (any one) At the timing of winning a prize at the winning opening), it is confirmed whether or not a winning condition corresponding to the specific effect A is established in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A, and corresponding to the specific effect A. The execution of the specific effect A is determined based on the established winning condition, and it is confirmed whether or not the winning condition corresponding to the specific effect B is satisfied in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B. The execution of the specific effect B is determined based on the fact that the winning condition corresponding to the specific effect B is established.

  Further, when the execution of the specific effect A (variation result notice effect) is determined based on the establishment of the winning condition, the effect control CPU 120 sets the specific effect A execution flag. When the special symbol variable display (the variable decorative symbol display) is executed at the timing when the winning condition is established, as described above, the specific effect A corresponding to the variable display result is displayed. The mode (only the audio effect or both the audio effect and the effect effect) is determined, the change result notice effect of the determined mode is executed, and the specific effect A execution flag is deleted. That is, the specific effect A is executed at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening without holding the fluctuation result notice effect.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol variable display (variable display of the decorative symbol associated therewith) is not executed at the timing when the winning conditions are satisfied, the execution of the specific effect A is executed because there is no target for the change result notice effect. Is put on hold and the specific effect A execution flag remains set. The effect control CPU 120 can grasp that the execution of the specific effect A is determined by setting the specific effect A execution flag, but the specific effect A is not executed and is in a suspended state. It has become. And when the start condition of the variable display of the special symbol (the variable display of the decorative symbol associated therewith) is established, the aspect of the specific effect A is determined based on the variable display result of the variable display to be executed, The specific effect A that has been executed is executed, and the set specific effect A execution flag is deleted.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to this form, and if the special symbol variable display (the decorative symbol variable display associated therewith) is not executed at the timing when the winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect A is suspended. Without executing the specific effect A, the specific effect A may not be executed even when the variable display start condition is satisfied.

  Further, when the execution of the specific effect B (prefetching notice effect) is determined based on the establishment of the winning condition, the effect control CPU 120 sets the specific effect B execution flag. When the winning condition is satisfied, when the number of reserved memories (hereinafter referred to as the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number) is 1 or more, as described above, 1 The aspect of the specific effect B (only the sound effect or both the sound effect and the effect effect) according to the determination result at the time of starting winning is determined, the pre-reading notice effect of the determined aspect is executed, and the specific effect Clear the B execution flag. That is, the specific effect B is executed at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening without holding the pre-reading notice effect.

  On the other hand, when the number of reserved memories is 0 at the timing when the winning condition is satisfied, there is no target of the pre-reading notice effect, so the execution of the specific effect B is suspended and the specific effect B execution flag is set. State. The effect control CPU 120 can grasp that the execution of the specific effect B is determined by setting the specific effect B execution flag, but the specific effect B is not executed and is in a suspended state. It has become. Then, when the start condition is satisfied by the occurrence of a winning at the start winning opening (when the number of stored memories becomes 1 or more), the mode of the specific effect B is determined based on the start winning determination result, The specific effect B that has been put on hold is executed, and the set specific effect B execution flag is deleted.

  In addition, it is not restricted to such a form, and when the number of reserved memories is 0 at the timing when the winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect B is stopped without deferring the execution of the specific effect B, and thereafter Even if the start condition is satisfied and the number of stored memories becomes 1 or more, the specific effect B may not be executed.

  In addition, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped (for example, when a power interruption is detected), the effect control CPU 120 receives the winning history storage area (the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history storage area). All winning histories stored in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B and the specific effect execution flags (specific effect A execution flag and specific effect B execution flag) are deleted. As a result, power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 while the specific effect (variation result notice effect, pre-read notice effect) is being executed, or after the execution of the specific effect has not been executed yet. However, even if the power supply is restarted after that, the specific effect that was being executed or the specific effect that was decided to be executed is not executed again. That is, for a predetermined period after the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the specific effect is not executed because the winning history and the specific effect execution flag are erased. When it is confirmed that the winning conditions are satisfied based on the winning history since the power supply is started, the specific effect is newly executed.

[First production form]
In the first effect form shown in FIG. 10, when the game state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 120 has a game ball in one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. The winning condition (the first winning condition) is satisfied every time the player wins. When the first winning condition is satisfied, the presence / absence of execution of the specific effect is determined based on the specific effect execution determination random number extracted from the random number circuit 124, and the execution of the specific effect A is determined at a rate of 50%. Each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A (at least the first general winning port 50A to the fourth general winning port 50D that is the first winning condition). (Including winning history for any of them) is deleted.

  On the other hand, when the game state is (2) the probability variation state or the short time state, the effect control CPU 120 each time the game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. A winning condition (second winning condition) is established. When the second winning condition is satisfied, the presence / absence of the specific effect is determined based on the random number for determining the specific effect extracted from the random number circuit 124, and the execution of the specific effect A is determined at a rate of 20%. Each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning histories in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A (at least the first general winning port 50A to the fourth general winning port 50D, which is the second winning condition). (Including winning history for any of them) is deleted.

  In the first effect form, and in the second effect form to the fourth effect form, which will be described later, (1) the ratio at which the specific effect is executed based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening in the normal state is (2 ) It is higher than the rate at which the specific performance is executed based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening in the probability changing state or the short time state. In the promiscuous state and the short-time state, the player is usually more interested in the winning situation of the game ball in the second starting prize opening and the variable display of the decorative pattern than the winning situation of the game ball in the general winning opening. Even if the specific performance is executed, it is difficult to produce the same interest as in the normal state. For this reason, in the probability variation state or the short time state, the execution rate of the specific effect is reduced compared with the normal state, and the interest reduction of the specific effect is suppressed.

  In the second effect form to the fourth effect form, which will be described later, unlike the first effect form, the presence / absence of execution of the specific effect is not determined based on the random number for determining the specific effect execution. In any of the second to fourth effect forms described later, the specific effect can be executed when the winning condition is satisfied. However, the winning condition in the (2) probability change state or the short-time state is (1) normal. More winnings are required than the winning conditions in the state. Therefore, (1) the execution rate of the specific effect in the normal state is higher than (2) the execution rate of the specific effect in the probability variation state or the short-time state.

  Thus, by making the execution ratio of the specific effects different according to the game state, it is possible to improve the interest when the game ball wins the general winning opening. Contrary to the examples of the first effect form to the fourth effect form, (2) the ratio of the specific effect being executed based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening in the probability variation state or the short time state, ( 1) You may make it become higher than the ratio in which a specific production | presentation is performed based on a game ball having won a general winning opening in the normal state.

  In the second effect form to the fourth effect form, which will be described later, as in the first effect form, whether or not the specific effect is executed is determined based on the random number for determining the specific effect when the winning condition is satisfied. You may do it. For example, in the second effect form to the fourth effect form, the first winning condition required in the normal state and the second winning condition required in the probability changing state or the short time state are the same winning condition. As in the production mode, by making the lottery probability when the winning condition is established in the normal state and the lottery probability when the winning condition is established in the probability variation state or the short-time state different from the probability that the specific effect is normally executed You may make it differ from the ratio in which a specific effect is performed in a state or a time-short state.

  Further, the specific effects may be executed at different ratios depending on not only the gaming state but also the display result of variable display and the determination result at the time of starting winning. For example, when the display result of the variable display is a jackpot symbol, the specific effect may be executed at a higher rate compared to the case where the display result of the variable display is a loss symbol. When there is a hold memory determined to be a big win, compared to a case where there is no hold memory determined to be a big win at the time of start winning (when there is only a hold memory determined to be a deviation at the start winning), The specific effect may be executed at a high rate. In addition, the number of times that the specific effect is executed in one variable display period is limited to a predetermined number of times (for example, the specific effect can be executed only once regardless of the type, or for different types of specific effects It may be possible to execute only once every time).

[Second production form]
In the second effect form shown in FIG. 10, when the game state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 120 has two or more general ones out of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. A winning condition (the first winning condition) is established when a game ball wins at least once each at the winning opening. When the first winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is (2) the probability variation state or the short-time state, the production control CPU 120 has two or more general winning ports out of the first general winning port 50A to the fourth general winning port 50D, respectively. A winning condition (second winning condition) is established by winning the game ball two or more times. When the second winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased.

  As described above, in the second effect form, and in the third effect form and the fourth effect form, which will be described later, the number of winnings to the general winning opening necessary for executing the specific effect in the normal state, Because the number of winnings in the general winning opening required to execute the specific performance in the short-time state is different, it is possible to make interest in the number of winning game balls in the general winning opening depending on the gaming state. .

  Further, in the second effect form, in order to execute the specific effect, the game is performed at least once for each of two or more general winning ports of the first general winning port 50A to the fourth general winning port 50D. Ball winning is a condition. In this way, by setting the winning for each of the plurality of general winning awards as the execution condition of the specific effect, not only the presence or absence of the winning in the general winning award, but the game ball wins in any general award You can be interested in what you did.

  In the second effect form and the third effect form and the fourth effect form, which will be described later, the start of the big hit game state is designated based on the fact that the game control microcomputer 100 controls the big hit game state. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the jackpot start designation command, both the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are erased. It is supposed to be.

  Also, in the second effect form, and in the third effect form and the fourth effect form, which will be described later, the winning history in the winning history storage area is not erased based on the change in the gaming state. . Therefore, the fact that the first winning condition is satisfied means that the first winning condition is satisfied as a result of confirming the winning history in the winning history storage area in the normal state. Based on this, the first winning condition is not necessarily established. Similarly, the fact that the second winning condition is satisfied means that the second winning condition is satisfied as a result of confirming the winning history in the winning history storage area in the probability changing state or the short time state. The second winning condition is not always established based on the winning history only in the short-time state. Note that the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the winning history in the winning history storage area is erased based on the transition from the normal state to the probability changing state or the time-saving state, and the transition from the probability changing state or the time shortening state to the normal state. Also good. That is, it is confirmed whether or not the first winning condition is established based on the winning history only in the normal state, and whether or not the second winning condition is established based on the winning history only in the probability variation state or the short-time state. You may make it confirm.

[Third production form]
In the third effect form shown in FIG. 10, when the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 120 has a general winning opening (first general winning opening 50A to 4th general within 120 seconds). The winning condition (the first winning condition) is established when the game ball has won a total of three or more times at the winning opening 50D). When the first winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is (2) the probability change state or the short-time state, the effect control CPU 120 can enter the general winning opening (the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D) within 120 seconds. The winning condition (second winning condition) is established when the game ball has won five or more times in total. When the second winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased.

  Here, the period of 120 seconds is started based on the fact that the winning history for the first general winning opening is stored in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A (for example, the timer for the specific effect A is set to 120 seconds). Set). If the winning condition is not satisfied within the period of 120 seconds (when the specific effect A timer times out), the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A is erased without executing the specific effect A. . On the other hand, when the winning condition is satisfied within the period of 120 seconds (when the winning condition is satisfied before the time-out of the timer for the specific effect A), the specific effect A is executed and the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A Is erased.

  As described above, the winning frequency (the number of winnings within a predetermined period) required for executing the specific effect in the normal state and the winning frequency (predetermined period) required for executing the specific effect in the probability variation state or the short time state. (The number of winning prizes) can be made interested in the winning frequency of the general winning opening according to the gaming state.

  Further, in the third effect form, when the specific effect A targeted for the variable display that was executed at the time of winning the first general winning award in a predetermined period (120 seconds) is executed (only for one variable display period) If there is a winning condition according to the winning history), a specific effect A is executed for a variable display different from the variable display that was executed at the time of winning the first general winning opening in a predetermined period (120 seconds). In some cases, the winning conditions may be satisfied by winning histories in a plurality of variable display periods.

  It should be noted that, as in the third production mode, a special design is variably displayed a predetermined number of times as a mode in which the specific production is executed when the number of prizes received in the general prize opening in a predetermined period reaches a predetermined number. The specific effect may be executed when the number of prizes received at the general prize opening during the period reaches a predetermined number. For example, it is specified when the number of winnings in the general winning award reaches a predetermined number until all the reserved memory of the special figure game is exhausted, that is, within the period when the variable display of special symbols corresponding to the number of reserved memories is executed. An effect may be executed.

[Fourth production form]
In the fourth effect form shown in FIG. 10, when the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 120 starts the winning prize opening (either the first starting prize opening or the second starting prize opening). , The winning winning opening (one of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening), the general winning opening (any one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D) in order of the game balls The winning condition (the first winning condition) is established by winning the mouth. When the first winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is (2) a certain change state or a short-time state, the effect control CPU 120 has a start winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a starting winning opening (first start). Any one of the winning a prize opening and the second start winning a prize opening), the general winning a prize opening (any one of the first general award winning opening 50A to the fourth general award opening 50D), and the general winning a prize opening (the first general winning a prize opening 50A to the fourth award). The winning condition (the second winning condition) is established when the game balls win the winning opening in the order of the general winning opening 50D). When the second winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased.

  In this way, the specific effect is executed on condition that the winning order to the other winning ports (the first starting winning port, the second starting winning port) different from the general winning port and the general winning port is a specific order. This makes it possible to give interest not only to the status of winning the general winning award but also to the winning order for the general winning award and other winning awards.

  It should be noted that a range may be provided for the number of times that a game ball wins continuously to the general winning opening and the number of times that a game ball wins continuously to another winning port. For example, the winning condition may be satisfied by winning the general winning opening twice or more after winning the starting winning opening three or more times continuously. In addition, the winning condition may be determined regarding which of the plurality of general winning awards or which of the plurality of other winning awards has been won. For example, a winning condition is established when a game ball wins a winning opening in the order of a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a first general winning opening 50A, and a second general winning opening 50B. Also good. The winning conditions are not limited to the order in which the winning in the general winning opening occurs after the winning in the starting winning opening occurs, but the winning condition is determined by the winning in the starting winning opening after the winning in the general winning opening occurs. May hold.

  Further, the winning conditions may be established based on the fact that the order of winning the game balls to the plurality of general winning holes becomes a specific order. For example, when the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the winning conditions ((1) the game balls are awarded to the plurality of general winning openings in the order of the first general winning opening 50A and the second general winning opening 50B). When the first winning condition is established) and the gaming state is (2) a probability change state or a short-time state, the first general winning opening 50A, the second general winning opening 50B, and the third general winning The winning conditions (referred to as the second winning condition) may be satisfied when the game balls have won a plurality of general winning openings in the order of the mouth 50C and the fourth general winning opening 50D.

  Further, the winning conditions may be established based on the winning order of the game balls in the plurality of general winning holes and the winning order of the game balls in the one or more starting winning holes being in a specific order. . For example, when the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the winning condition ((1) the game ball is won in the order of the first general winning opening 50A, the first starting winning opening, the second general winning opening 50B) When the first winning condition is established) and the gaming state is (2) a probability change state or a short-time state, the first general winning opening 50A, the first starting winning opening, the second general winning opening 50B, Furthermore, the winning condition (the second winning condition) may be satisfied when the game balls have won in the order of the third general winning opening 50C, the second starting winning opening, and the fourth general winning opening 50D. good.

  In addition, the order of entry to the general prize opening and entry to the start prize opening is not limited to the order of entry to the general prize opening and entry to the grand prize opening. The condition may be satisfied, and the winning condition is satisfied based on the fact that the order of entering the general winning opening and entering the first passing gate 41A or the second passing gate 41B becomes a specific order. You may do it. In addition, when there is a specific area in which a big hit type (for example, a probable big hit) is determined based on the entry of a game ball, the order of entry into the general winning opening and the entry into the specific area is specific. The winning conditions may be satisfied based on the order.

  In the first effect form to the fourth effect form, the example in which the variation result notice effect (specific effect A) is executed as the specific effect has been described. However, the prefetch notice effect (specific effect B) is executed as the specific effect. May be.

[Fifth effect form to eighth effect form]
In the fifth effect form to the eighth effect form shown in FIG. 11, unlike the first effect form to the fourth effect form, (1) in the normal state and (2) in the case of the probability variation state or the time-short state. The winning conditions are not different and are common winning conditions. In the examples of the fifth effect form to the eighth effect form, the first winning conditions in the first effect form to the fourth effect form, that is, the winning conditions employed in the normal state are provided as common winning conditions, respectively. ing. Then, (1) if the game state when the winning condition is satisfied is the normal state, the change result notice effect (specific effect A) is executed as the specific effect, and (2) the game when the winning condition is satisfied. When the state is a certain change state or a short time state, a pre-reading notice effect (specific effect B) is executed as the specific effect. Thereby, according to the gaming state when the game ball wins the general winning opening, the type of the specific effect can be made different, and the specific effect executed based on the game ball winning the general winning opening Interest can be improved.

  In the fifth effect form shown in FIG. 11, the effect control CPU 120 determines execution of the specific effect at a rate of 50% when the winning condition is satisfied. When the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the specific effect A is executed, and each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A, and All winning histories in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are erased. On the other hand, when the gaming state is (2) a certain change state or a short-time state, the specific effect B is executed, and each time the specific effect B is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A , And the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is erased.

  In the sixth effect form to the eighth effect form shown in FIG. 11, the effect control CPU 120 executes the specific effect A when the gaming state when the winning condition is satisfied is (1) the normal state, Each time the specific effect A is executed, both the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are erased. On the other hand, if the gaming state when the winning condition is satisfied is (2) a certain change state or a short time state, the specific effect B is executed, and each time the specific effect B is executed, it corresponds to the specific effect A. Both the winning history in the winning history storage area and the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are erased.

  In the sixth effect mode to the eighth effect mode, a big hit start specifying command for specifying the start of the big hit game state is sent based on the fact that the game control microcomputer 100 controls the big hit game state. Is received, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are both erased. Further, in the sixth effect form to the eighth effect form, the winning history in the winning history storage area is not erased when the gaming state is changed. Note that the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the winning history in the winning history storage area is erased based on the transition from the normal state to the probability changing state or the time-saving state, and the transition from the probability changing state or the time shortening state to the normal state. Also good.

  In the seventh effect form, the specific effect timer is set to 120 seconds based on the fact that the winning history for the first general prize opening is stored in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A and the specific effect B. . Then, when the specific effect timer times out, the specific effect A and the specific effect B are not executed, and the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A and the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect B are displayed. Both are erased. On the other hand, if the winning conditions are satisfied before the time-out of the specific effect timer, (1) in the normal state, the specific effect A is executed and the winning history and the specific effect B in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A are executed. All the winning histories in the winning history storage area are deleted. (2) In the case of the probability change state or the short time state, the specific effect B is executed and the winning history and the specific effect in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A are executed. All winning histories in the B winning history storage area are erased.

[9th effect form-12th effect form]
In the ninth effect form to the twelfth effect form shown in FIG. 12, unlike the first effect form to the eighth effect form, (1) in the normal state and (2) in the case of the probability variation state or the time-short state. The winning conditions are different, and the types of specific effects executed based on the establishment of the winning conditions are also different. That is, (1) when the first winning condition is established in the normal state, the variation result notice effect (specific effect A) is executed as the specific effect, and (2) the second winning condition in the probability variation state or the short time state. When is established, a prefetch notice effect (specific effect B) is executed as the specific effect. Thereby, according to the gaming state when the game ball has won the general winning opening, the execution ratio of the specific effect and the type of the specific effect can be made different, and the game ball has won the general winning opening. It is possible to improve the interest of the specific performance executed based on the above.

  In the ninth effect form shown in FIG. 12, when the game state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 120 has a game ball in either the first general winning port 50A or the second general winning port 50B. The winning condition (the first winning condition) is established each time the player wins, and execution of the specific effect A is determined at a rate of 50%. Each time the specific effect A is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased. On the other hand, when the game state is (2) the probability change state or the short time state, the effect control CPU 120 each time the game ball wins one of the third general winning opening 50C and the fourth general winning opening 50D. The winning condition (second winning condition) is established, and execution of the specific effect B is determined at a rate of 20%. Each time the specific effect B is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is erased.

  In the tenth effect form shown in FIG. 12, when the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 120 has 1 for each of the first general winning opening 50A and the second general winning opening 50B. When the game ball wins at least once, a winning condition (first winning condition) is established, and execution of the specific effect A is determined. Each time the specific effect A is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased. On the other hand, when the game state is (2) the probability variation state or the short-time state, the effect control CPU 120 has two or more game balls at both the third general winning opening 50C and the fourth general winning opening 50D. Wins the winning condition (the second winning condition), and the execution of the specific effect B is determined. Each time the specific effect B is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is erased.

  In the ninth effect form to the twelfth effect form, based on the fact that the game control microcomputer 100 controls the big hit game state, a big hit start designation command for specifying the start of the big hit game state is sent to the effect control CPU 120. Is received, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are both erased. Also, in the ninth effect form to the twelfth effect form, the winning history in the winning history storage area is not erased when the gaming state is changed. Note that the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the winning history in the winning history storage area is erased based on the transition from the normal state to the probability changing state or the time-saving state, and the transition from the probability changing state or the time shortening state to the normal state. Also good.

  In the eleventh effect form shown in FIG. 12, when the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 120 has the first general winning opening 50A and the second general winning opening 50B within 120 seconds. When a game ball wins a total of three or more times, a winning condition (first winning condition) is established, and execution of the specific effect A is determined. Each time the specific effect A is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased. On the other hand, when the game state is (2) the probability change state or the short-time state, the effect control CPU 120 wins the game ball a total of five times or more in the third general winning opening 50C and the fourth general winning opening 50D. As a result, a winning condition (second winning condition) is established, and execution of the specific effect B is determined. Each time the specific effect B is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is erased.

  In the eleventh effect form, the timer for specific effect A is set to 120 seconds based on the fact that the winning history for the first general prize opening is stored in the prize history storage area of specific effect A. When the timer for the specific effect A times out, only the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A is erased without executing the specific effect A. On the other hand, if the first winning condition is satisfied in the normal state before the time-out of the timer for the specific effect A, the specific effect A is executed and only the winning history in the prize history storage area of the specific effect A is deleted. Further, based on the fact that the winning history for the first general winning opening is stored in the winning history storage area of the specific effect B, the timer for the specific effect B is set to 120 seconds. When the timer for the specific effect B times out, only the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect B is erased without executing the specific effect B. On the other hand, if the second winning condition is established in the probability variation state or the short-time state before the timeout of the timer for the specific effect B, the specific effect B is executed and only the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect B is deleted. Is done.

  In the twelfth effect form shown in FIG. 12, when the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 120 has a first start winning port, a first starting winning port, a second general winning port 50B, The winning conditions (the first winning condition) are established when the game balls win the winning opening in this order. When the first winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Each time the specific effect A is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased. On the other hand, when the gaming state is (2) the probability change state or the short-time state, the production control CPU 120 has the second start winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the third general winning opening 50C, and the fourth general winning opening. The winning condition (second winning condition) is established when the game balls win the winning opening in the order of 50D. When the second winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect B is determined. Each time the specific effect B is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is erased.

  As in the ninth to twelfth effect forms, a general winning opening (a general winning opening and a start winning opening in the twelfth effect form) that is a target for winning a game ball for executing a specific effect is selected according to the gaming state. Thus, the specific effect is appropriately executed according to the gaming state. In the ninth effect form to the twelfth effect form, in order to establish the second winning condition in the probability variation state or the short time state, the target winning opening to be awarded in order to establish the first winning condition in the normal state Although the example where all the target winning mouths to be awarded are different is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the target winning mouth in the normal state and the target winning mouth in the certain change state or the short time state are partially It may be common. For example, the first prize condition and the second prize condition may include a prize for the second general prize opening 50B.

[13th effect form-16th effect form]
In the thirteenth effect mode to the sixteenth effect mode shown in FIG. 13, the ratio of executing the specific effect A when the timing when the first winning condition is satisfied is a period after the reach state is established in (1) reach fluctuation. However, the timing at which the second winning condition is satisfied is higher than the ratio of executing the specific effect A when (2) the reach variation is outside the reach variation period or before the reach state is established in the reach variation.

  Here, (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach variation, specifically, the confirmed decorative pattern (final stop) after the reach state is established in the variable display of the variation pattern with the reach effect (normal reach, super reach) This is the period until the symbol is stopped. In addition, (2) the period outside the reach fluctuation period or before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation is, specifically, a period during which variable display of a fluctuation pattern with reach production (normal reach, super reach) is being executed. It is the period from the start of variable display of the fluctuation pattern with reach production (normal reach, super reach) to before the reach state is established.

  The first winning condition and the second winning condition in the thirteenth effect form to the sixteenth effect form are the same as the first winning condition and the second winning condition in the first effect form to the fourth effect form, respectively. It has become. In any production form, when the timing when the first winning condition is established is (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the ratio of executing the specific effect A is determined by the second winning condition. When the established timing is (2) a period outside the reach fluctuation period or a period before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the ratio is higher than the ratio of executing the specific effect A. In this way, by changing the execution ratio of the specific effect according to the game period when the winning conditions are satisfied, it is possible to improve the interest when the game ball wins the general winning opening.

[17th effect form to 20th effect form]
In the seventeenth effect form to the twentieth effect form shown in FIG. 14, when the timing when the winning condition is satisfied is (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach variation, the specific effect A is executed, and the winning condition is determined. When the timing at which is established is (2) a period outside the reach fluctuation period or a period before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect B is executed.

  The winning conditions in the seventeenth effect form to the twentieth effect form are the same as the winning conditions (common winning conditions) in the fifth effect form to the eighth effect form, respectively. In any production mode, when the timing when the winning condition (common winning condition) is established is (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect A is executed and the winning condition is established. When the performed timing is (2) outside the reach fluctuation period or before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect B is executed. In this way, by executing different types of specific effects according to the game period when the winning conditions are satisfied, it is possible to improve the interest when the game ball wins the general winning opening.

[21st effect form to 24th effect form]
In the 21st effect form to the 24th effect form shown in FIG. 15, the specific effect A is executed when the timing when the first winning condition is satisfied is the period after the reach state is established in (1) reach fluctuation. When the timing at which the second winning condition is established is (2) a period outside the reach fluctuation period or a period before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect B is executed.

  The first winning condition and the second winning condition in the twenty-first effect form to the twenty-fourth effect form are the same as the first winning condition and the second winning condition in the ninth effect form to the twelfth effect form, respectively. It has become. In any production mode, when the timing when the first winning condition is established is (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect A is executed and the second winning condition is established. When the completed timing is (2) a period outside the reach fluctuation period or a period before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect B is executed. In this way, depending on the game period when the winning conditions are satisfied, the execution ratio of the specific effects is made different, and by executing different types of specific effects according to the gaming periods when the winning conditions are satisfied, It is possible to improve interest when a game ball wins a general winning opening.

[25th effect form and 26th effect form]
In the 25th effect form shown in FIG. 16, unlike the 1st effect form to the 24th effect form, regardless of the gaming state or the game period, the general winning award (first general winning award 50A to fourth general winning award 50D). The first winning condition is satisfied when the game ball has won three or more times in total. When the first winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased. Further, regardless of the game state and the game period, the second winning condition is satisfied when the game ball has won a total of five or more times in the general winning opening (the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D). When the second winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect B is determined. Each time the specific effect B is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is erased.

  In the 26th effect form shown in FIG. 16, unlike the first effect form to the 24th effect form, the general winning opening (the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general) is within 120 seconds regardless of the game state and the game period. The first winning condition is established when the game ball has won a total of three or more times at the winning opening 50D). When the first winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased. In addition, regardless of the game state and the game period, the second prize is awarded because the game ball has won five or more times in the general prize opening (first general prize opening 50A to fourth general prize opening 50D) within 120 seconds. The condition is met. When the second winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect B is determined. Each time the specific effect B is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is erased.

  In this way, regardless of the game state and the game period, the number of winnings to the general winning a prize mouth is executed by performing different effects according to the number of winnings to the general winning award and the winning frequency (the number of winnings within a predetermined period). And interest in winning prizes. In this example, the production mode (output audio) differs according to the number of winnings to the general prize opening and the winning frequency, and the variable display to be notified differs (specific production A: variable display being executed, Specific presentation B: variable display that has not been executed), but is not limited to this, depending on the number of winnings to the general winning opening and the winning frequency, whether or not to suggest the display result of the variable display is different ( For example, it may be possible to execute an effect of notifying the display result of the variable display and an effect not related to the display result of the variable display, and an effect (for example, high probability) indicating whether or not the game state is suggested. It is also possible to execute an effect that informs that the state is in effect and an effect that is not related to the gaming state.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 receives a general winning opening designation command and receives a general winning opening, and the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. It is possible to specify which of the game balls has been won, and upon receipt of the start winning port designation command, a winning to the starting winning port has occurred, and either the first starting winning port or the second starting winning port has a game It is possible to specify whether or not the ball has won, and it is possible to specify that a winning to the big winning opening has occurred by receiving the winning prize winning command. Therefore, the winning number management table in the form shown in FIG. 17 can be stored as the winning number management table and can be updated.

  The second start winning opening is formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B, and the normally variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be released (the game ball can be won or can be easily won from a closed state where the game ball is not winning or difficult to win). The game ball can be won by switching to the state. Further, the special winning opening is formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be opened (the game ball can be won or won easily from a closed state where the game ball is not won or difficult to win). The game ball can be won by switching to the open state. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17, the second start winning opening and the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 are classified into a prize winning slot where a game ball can be won by the operation of the winning combination. On the other hand, the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D and the first start winning opening are always open, and a non-commodity winning opening through which a game ball can be won regardless of the operation of the accessory. It is divided into.

  In the winning number management table of FIG. 17, a game ball has won a prize in each of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, and the big winning opening. The number of prize balls given at times (the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning opening, which is 10, 10, 10, 10, 2, 2, 15 in this example) is stored. Then, for each winning opening, the number of winnings (in this example, 11, 36, 22, 14, 754, 315, 420), which is the number of times that a game ball has won the winning opening, is multiplied by the number of winning balls. The number of payouts (the total number of balls paid out by winning the game ball in the winning opening, 110, 360, 220, 140, 1508, 630, 6300 in this example) is stored.

  The winning ratios are as follows: (1) The number of winning prizes in each winning mouth (11, 36, 22, 14, 754, 315, 420), respectively, with respect to the total number of winning prizes in each winning mouth (1572 in this example). And (2) non-community winning ports (first general winning port 50A to fourth general winning port 50D and first start winning) with respect to the total number (1572 in this example) of each winning port. The number of winning prizes (11 + 36 + 22 + 14 + 754), the percentage of winning numbers (315 + 420) of the winning prize winning opening (the second starting winning prize opening and the big winning prize opening), and (3) the total number of winning prizes for each winning entry In this example, the ratio of the number of winnings other than the big winning opening (11 + 36 + 22 + 14 + 754 + 315) and the ratio of the winning number of the big winning opening (420) with respect to 1572) are stored.

  Also, as the payout ratio, (1) the number of payouts for each winning mouth (110, 360, 220, 140, 1508, 630, 6300, respectively) with respect to the total number of payouts for each winning mouth (9268 in this example) And (2) non-commodity prize opening (the first general prize opening 50A to the fourth general prize opening 50D and the first start prize) with respect to the total number of payouts of each prize opening (9268 in this example) The number of payouts (110 + 360 + 220 + 1140 + 1508), the ratio of the number of payouts (630 + 6300) for the prize winning award (630), and (3) the total number of payouts for each winning mouth ( In this example, the ratio of the number of payouts other than the big prize opening (110 + 360 + 220 + 140 + 1508 + 630) and the ratio of the number of payouts of the big prize opening (6300) with respect to 9268) are stored.

  Here, as described above, during the period when the operation unit of the mode switch 31 is in the second position (display position), the effect control CPU 120 displays each information stored in the winning number management table as an image. Display on device 5. Accordingly, the store clerk at the game hall is paid out when the game ball is won at the prize winning port with respect to the total number of balls (9268) paid out when the game ball is won at each winning port. The ratio of the number of balls (110 + 360 + 220 + 140 + 1508) (hereinafter referred to as “first payout ratio”, which is 74.77% in this example) can be grasped. In addition, the number of balls (6300) paid out by winning the game ball at the big prize opening with respect to the total number of balls (9268) paid out by winning the game ball at each prize opening. The ratio (hereinafter referred to as “second payout ratio”, which is 67.98% in this example) can be grasped.

  Here, when the first payout ratio is higher than a predetermined first reference ratio (for example, 70%), the effect control CPU 120 notifies the fact in an identifiable manner. . In the example of FIG. 17, since the first payout ratio (74.77%) exceeds the first reference ratio (70%), the display area of the first payout ratio is highlighted with a thick frame. In addition, when the second payout ratio is higher than a predetermined second reference ratio (for example, 60%), the effect control CPU 120 notifies the fact in an identifiable manner. In the example of FIG. 17, since the second payout ratio (67.98%) exceeds the second reference ratio (60%), the display area of the second payout ratio is highlighted with a thick frame.

  In this way, the effect control CPU 120 can display the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio on the image display device 5, and the comparison result between the first reference ratio and the second reference ratio determined in advance. It can be displayed in a graspable manner. For example, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio may be displayed on the image display device 5 by the setting of the display changeover switch 32 and the setting operation by the operation button 30 regardless of the setting of the mode changeover switch 31. The first payout ratio and the second payout ratio may also be displayed when the demo screen is displayed on the image display device 5. Further, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio may be displayed regardless of the settings on the game hall side or the player side. Further, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio may be displayed according to the gaming state, for example, when being controlled to the big hit gaming state.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 120 outputs the calculated first payout ratio and the second payout ratio to a gaming device (for example, a card unit or a call lamp device) provided corresponding to the pachinko gaming machine 1 for gaming. In the apparatus, the received first payout ratio and second payout ratio can be stored and displayed on the display device. Further, the production control CPU 120 transmits the calculated first payout ratio and second payout ratio to an information management apparatus such as a hall computer, and the information management apparatus uses the first payout ratio and the second payout of each gaming machine. The ratio can be stored and displayed on the display device.

  In addition, when the game control microcomputer 100 outputs a general prize opening designation command, a start prize opening designation command, or a big prize opening prize command to the effect control CPU 120, external output information corresponding to these commands is output. As an information, it is possible to specify that a winning to the general winning opening has occurred and which of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D the game ball has won, and a winning to the start winning opening has occurred. And information that can specify whether the game ball has won in the first start winning opening or the second start winning opening, and information that can specify that the winning to the big winning opening has occurred The data is output to an external device such as a card unit or a call lamp device or an information management device (hall computer).

  This makes it possible to specify information corresponding to the general winning opening designation command, information corresponding to the start winning opening designation command, information corresponding to the big winning opening winning command, that is, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio. In the external device that has received this information, it is possible to store the winning number management table in the form shown in FIG. 17 for each gaming machine and update it. This makes it possible to grasp the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio for each gaming machine. In addition, for each gaming machine, it can be determined whether the first payout ratio exceeds the first reference ratio and whether the second payout ratio exceeds the second reference ratio.

  In addition, regarding the counting period of the winning number information (value of each item in FIG. 3 or FIG. 17) stored in the winning number management table of the pachinko machine 1, if no setting is made for the counting period, the pachinko machine It is a period from when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is started until the power supply is stopped. As the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is reset (the number of winnings at each winning opening becomes 0), and the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is resumed. In some cases, the number of winnings for each winning opening stored in the winning number management table is zero. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is erased without being backed up.

  The total period of the number-of-wins information (value of each item in FIG. 3 or FIG. 17) stored in the number-of-wins management table of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be set on the game hall side. Using the button 30, it is possible to set a total period (for example, 10 hours or 3 hours) for the gaming machine. In addition, in a gaming device (card unit or calling lamp device), a shop clerk inputs a desired counting period with an input device or the like, and the input counting period is transmitted to the corresponding pachinko gaming machine 1, and the counting period May be set (stored in the RAM 122). In addition, in the information management device (hall computer), the manager of the game hall inputs a desired total period with an input device or the like, and the input total period is the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the pachinko machine selected as the setting target). It may be transmitted to the gaming machine 1) and set as a total period (stored in the RAM 122). Then, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a winning number management table is created for each set counting period (for example, 10 hours), and these are displayed on the image display device 5, or correspondingly provided gaming devices (cards) Unit, call lamp device) and displayed on the display device of the gaming device, or output to the information management device (hall computer) and displayed on the display device of the information management device. .

  Also, the number of winnings in the winning number management table is output from the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the information corresponding to the general winning opening designation command, the information corresponding to the start winning opening designation command, and the information corresponding to the large winning opening winning command. By storing and updating information (value of each item in FIG. 3 or FIG. 17), by setting an aggregation period using an input device provided in the external apparatus, an external apparatus that updates the information is set for each set aggregation period (for example, 10 hours). A winning number management table can be created and displayed on a display device provided in an external device. For example, when the external device is a gaming device (a card unit or a call lamp device) provided corresponding to the pachinko gaming machine 1, a winning number management table for a predetermined period related to the corresponding gaming machine is displayed on the display device. If the external device is an information management device that manages gaming information for each gaming machine, the winning number management table for each predetermined period can be displayed on the display device for each gaming machine. It becomes.

[27th effect form]
The specific effects A and B described above both give notice of the variable display result in the special game according to the effect mode, and are executed in connection with the winning of the game balls to the general winning openings 50A to 50D. As the specific effect, it is possible to execute an effect not related to the variable display result in the special game or the variable display result in the general game. FIG. 18 illustrates a specific effect C (point giving effect) as an effect that is not related to the variable display result in the special game or the variable display result in the normal game.

  In the 27th effect form shown in FIG. 19 and the 29th effect form to be described later, the specific effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 every time a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. The presence / absence of execution of the specific effect C is determined based on the execution determination random number, and the specific effect C is executed if it is determined to be executed. When the specific effect C is executed, 1 is added to the total points in the point storage area formed in the RAM 122, and as shown in FIG. 18, the image display device 5 includes an image including the characters “1point”. 2000 is displayed.

  That is, every time a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D, a lottery for whether or not to give one point is performed, and the lottery is won. In this case, a point form effect in which 1 point is given is performed. A privilege is given to the player according to the total points in the point storage area.

  For example, when the total point reaches 5 (when 5 wins have been won), a two-dimensional code for accessing the image providing server is displayed on the image display device 5. The player can access the image providing server by reading (imaging) the two-dimensional code with the two-dimensional code reader of the information terminal that he owns, and download the desired standby image or the like to the information terminal. . When the total point reaches 10 (when 10 points are won), a two-dimensional code for accessing the music providing server is displayed on the image display device 5. The player can access the music providing server by reading (imaging) the two-dimensional code with the two-dimensional code reader of the information terminal owned by the player, and download the desired music to the information terminal.

  In the 27th production mode, the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) a period during which a variable display of a special symbol is executed (within a symbol variation period) ), The specific effect C is executed at a rate of 20%, and (2) when the variable symbol special display is not executed (outside the symbol change period), the rate is 80%. The specific effect C is executed. The effect control CPU 120 receives a change start command for specifying start of change in the special figure game, and a change pattern specification command for specifying a change pattern such as a change time of the special symbol in the special figure game and a decorative pattern in the image display device 5. By receiving from the game control microcomputer 100, it is possible to specify whether or not it is a period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed.

  As with the specific effects A and B, a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effects C is provided. Each time the specific effect C is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect C (at least one of the first general winning port 50A to the fourth general winning port 50D, which is the winning condition) History is included).

  Here, the total point of the point storage area formed in the RAM 122 is 10 regardless of the winning history in the winning history storage area (even if the winning history in the winning history storage area is erased). After reaching (in this example, a two-dimensional code for accessing the music providing server is displayed), it is reset to 0, and 1 is added again each time the specific effect C is executed.

  In the 27th effect form and the 29th effect form, which will be described later, (1) the specific effect is based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening during the period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed (within the symbol change period). The rate of execution is lower than (2) the rate of execution of a specific effect based on the fact that a game ball has won a general winning opening during a period when the special symbol variable display is not being executed (outside the symbol change period). Is set. During the period of (1), the player usually has a general prize because an effect corresponding to the special game (for example, a change result notice effect) is being executed by the image display device 5 or the speakers 8L and 8R. I am more interested in these effects, including the variable display of decorative symbols, rather than the winning status of game balls in the mouth. Therefore, even if the specific effect is executed in the period of (1), the interest of the specific effect may be impaired. On the other hand, during the period (2), the player can execute the specific effect because the effect corresponding to the special game that is the object of interest is not executed. I am in a situation where I am interested in this. Therefore, the interest of the specific effect is appropriately increased by executing the specific effect at a higher rate than the period of (1).

  Further, by executing a specific effect C (point giving effect) that is not related to a variable display result in a special game or a variable display result in a normal game as a specific effect, depending on the execution status of the special game and the number of reserved memories. Therefore, the specific effect can be executed at an appropriate timing, and the interest of the specific effect is not impaired. For example, when an effect related to a variable display result in a special game such as a specific effect A is adopted as a specific effect, the timing at which a game ball wins a general winning opening is (2) variable symbol variable display is executed When the period is not set (outside the symbol change period), there is no change result notice target at this timing. Therefore, the specific effect is not executed (the execution of the specific effect based on the winning in the general prize opening is stopped) or the execution is suspended until the start condition of the variable display related to the special game is established (the general prize) The specific effect is not executed at the timing of winning the mouth, and the specific effect is subsequently executed at the timing when the variable display start condition for the special figure game is satisfied). As a result, the execution frequency of the specific effect may decrease, or the interest may decrease due to the divergence between the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific effect. By adopting a specific effect that is not related to the variable display result in the special game or the variable display result in the general game as the specific effect, such a problem can be avoided.

  In the twenty-seventh effect form, the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) a period during which variable display of a special symbol is being executed (design variation) If it is within the period), the specific effect C is not executed, and (2) the specific effect C can be executed only when the variable symbol special display is not executed (outside the symbol change period). Also good. Also, contrary to the example shown in the 27th effect form, (1) specified based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening during the period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed (within the symbol variation period) The rate at which the effect is executed is (2) the rate at which the specific effect is executed based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening during a period when the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol change period). May be set to be higher.

[28th effect form]
In the twenty-eighth effect form, unlike the twenty-seventh effect form, the presence / absence of execution of the specific effect is not determined based on the random number for determining the specific effect execution extracted from the random number circuit 124. In the twenty-eighth effect form, the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) a period during which a special symbol variable display is executed (within a symbol variation period) ), The specific effect A (change result notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (2) when the variable symbol special display is not executed (outside the symbol change period) The specific effect A is not executed.

  In addition, as shown to Fig.9 (a), the specific effect A is either the 1st aspect in which only an audio effect is performed, and the 2nd aspect in which an accessory effect is performed with an audio effect. Thus, the variation result notice effect suggests that the possibility that the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied is suggested before the variable display result is derived and displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 9B, the specific effect B is one of the first aspect in which only the sound effect is executed and the second aspect in which the accessory effect is executed together with the sound effect. Thus, the pre-reading notice effect suggests that the jackpot symbol may be derived and displayed as a variable display result of variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied even though the start condition is satisfied. Further, as shown in FIG. 18, the specific effect C is a variable display display result (whether it becomes a big hit symbol) related to the special game, and a variable display display result (whether it becomes a win symbol) related to the normal game. It is an effect not related to any of the above, and points are awarded to the player in accordance with winning in the general winning opening.

  As described above, when the timing at which the game ball wins any one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (2), the specific effect A is not executed (described above “ The execution of the specific effect A is deferred, and the process of “execute when the variable display start condition for the special game is satisfied” is not performed), and is specified only in the period (1). Production A is to be executed. Each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A (at least one of the first general winning port 50A to the fourth general winning port 50D, which is the winning condition) History is included).

  In the 28th effect form, by executing the specific effect A (variation result notice effect) related to the variable display result in the special figure game executed at the timing when the game ball is won in the general winning opening as the specific effect, I am trying to improve my interest in specific productions. However, if the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is a period (2) during which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol variation period), there is a subject of the change result notice at this timing. do not do. In this case, the execution of the specific effect A is temporarily suspended (the specific effect A is not executed at the timing of winning the general prize opening), and then specified when the variable display start condition for the special figure game is satisfied. When the production A is executed, there is a possibility that the interest will be lowered due to the difference between the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific production. Therefore, in the twenty-eighth effect form, the specific effect A is not executed when the game ball wins the general winning opening during the period (2) (outside the symbol change period).

  In the twenty-eighth effect form, when the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (1) (within the symbol variation period), The specific effect A may be executed at a rate of 80%, and the specific effect A may be executed at a rate of 20% in the case of the period (2) (outside the symbol variation period). In the case of such a form, when a winning in a general winning opening occurs during the period (2) (outside the symbol change period), the execution of the specific effect A is temporarily suspended (in the general winning opening) The specific effect A is not executed at the timing of winning a prize), and then the specific effect A is executed when the variable display start condition for the special figure game is satisfied. As described above, the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is either the period (1) (within the symbol variation period) or the period (2) (outside the symbol variation period). Alternatively, the specific effect A may be executed, and the specific effect A may be executed at a different rate.

  In addition, when the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is within the period (1) (within the symbol variation period), a special feature being executed is further displayed. The execution ratio of the specific effect A may be varied depending on the variable display result of the figure game and whether or not the reach effect is executed in the variable display of the decorative pattern being executed. For example, if the CPU 120 for effect control has decided to use the confirmed decorative symbol as the jackpot symbol, the specific effect A is executed at a rate of 80%, and the confirmed decorative symbol is used as the off symbol. If it is determined, the specific effect A may be executed at a rate of 20%.

[29th effect form]
In the 29th effect form, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) the number of reserved memories (for example, the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number). Is within the period of 1 or more, (2) In the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is being executed (within the symbol variation period) In some cases, the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 20%. On the other hand, the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is as follows: (3) A period in which the number of reserved memories is 0 and the special symbol variable display is not executed ( If it is outside the symbol variation period), the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 80%.

  That is, when the game ball is won at the general winning opening, the special symbol variable display is executed or at least the special symbol variable display is determined to be executed ((1) or (2) above) ), The specific effect C is executed at a rate of 20%, and the special symbol variable display is not executed and the special symbol variable display is performed at the timing when the game ball is won in the general winning opening. If it is not determined to execute (in the period (3) above), the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 80%.

  Each time the specific effect C is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect C (at least one of the first general winning port 50A to the fourth general winning port 50D, which is the winning condition) History is included).

  In the 29th effect form, when the game ball is won at the general winning opening, the special symbol variable display is executed, or at least the special symbol variable display is determined to be executed ((1) above) (If it is during the period of (2)), the specific effect is executed at the timing when the game ball is won at the general winning opening, the special symbol variable display is not executed, and the special symbol variable display is performed. It is set lower than the rate at which the specific effect is executed when the execution is not determined (in the case of the period (3)). In the period of (1) and (2), an effect corresponding to the special game (for example, a change result notice effect or a prefetch notice effect) is being executed by the image display device 5 or the speakers 8L and 8R. The player is usually more interested in these effects including variable display of decorative symbols rather than the winning situation of the game ball in the general winning opening. For this reason, even if the specific effect is executed during the periods (1) and (2), the interest of the specific effect may be impaired. On the other hand, during the period (3), the player can execute the specific effect because the effect corresponding to the special figure game that is the target of interest is not executed. I am in a situation where I am interested in this. Therefore, the interest of the specific effect is appropriately increased by executing the specific effect at a higher rate than the periods (1) and (2).

  Further, by executing a specific effect C (point giving effect) that is not related to a variable display result in a special game or a variable display result in a normal game as a specific effect, depending on the execution status of the special game and the number of reserved memories. Therefore, the specific effect can be executed at an appropriate timing, and the interest of the specific effect is not impaired. For example, when the pre-reading notice effect that can be executed only when the number of reserved memories is 1 or more as in the specific effect B is adopted as the specific effect, the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is the number of reserved memories In the period in which is 0, there is no target of prefetching notice at this timing. Therefore, the specific effect is not executed (the execution of the specific effect based on the prize winning in the general prize opening is stopped), or the execution is suspended until the reserved memory count becomes 1 or more (the general prize winning is won). The specific effect is not executed at the timing, and then the specific effect is executed at the timing when the variable display start condition for the special game is established). As a result, the execution frequency of the specific effect may decrease, or the interest may decrease due to the divergence between the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific effect. By adopting a specific effect that is not related to the variable display result in the special game or the variable display result in the general game as the specific effect, such a problem can be avoided.

  In the 29th effect form, variable display of a special symbol is executed or at least variable display of a special symbol is performed at a timing when a game ball wins any of the first general winning port 50A to the fourth general winning port 50D. If it is decided to execute (in the period (1) or (2) above), the specific effect C is not executed, the special symbol variable display is not executed, and the special symbol is not executed. The specific effect C may be executable only when it is not determined to execute the variable display (in the case of the period (3)). Contrary to the example shown in the 29th effect form, is the variable symbol display being executed at the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D? Or, when it is decided to execute variable display of special symbols at least (in the case of the period (1) or (2) above), the variable symbol special display is executed at a rate that the specific effect is executed. If it is not determined to execute variable symbol special display (in the period (3) above), it may be set to be higher than the rate at which the specific effect is executed.

  In addition, the timing at which variable display related to the special figure game is started (the timing when the start condition is satisfied) and the timing at which the game ball is won at the general winning opening are within a predetermined period (for example, within 0.2 seconds and including the same time). In this case, the specific effect may be executed after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, after 5 seconds have elapsed) after the variable display is started, without immediately executing the specific effect. According to this, although the specific effect is not related to the special game immediately after the start condition is satisfied (for example, in the case of the specific effect B or the specific effect C), immediately after the start condition is satisfied. It is possible to prevent misunderstanding that the game is related to the special figure game. In addition, the timing at which the game ball wins the start winning opening (the timing when the start condition is established) and the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening are within a predetermined period (for example, within 0.2 seconds, including the same time). In some cases, the specific effect may be executed after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, after 5 seconds have elapsed) after the reserved memory number increases without immediately executing the specific effect. According to this, although the specific effect is not related to the special game immediately after the start condition is established (for example, in the case of the specific effect A or the specific effect C), immediately after the start condition is satisfied. It is possible to prevent misunderstanding that the game is related to the special figure game.

[30th effect form]
In the 30th effect form, unlike the 29th effect form, the presence / absence of execution of the specific effect is not determined based on the random number for determining the specific effect execution extracted from the random number circuit 124. In the 30th production mode, the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) the number of reserved memories (for example, the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number). ) Is within a period of 1 or more, the specific effect B (prefetching notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (2) the reserved memory number is 0. Is the period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed (within the symbol variation period), (3) the period in which the number of reserved memories is 0 and the special symbol variable display is not being executed (outside the symbol variation period) If it is, the specific effect B is not executed.

  As described above, when the timing at which the game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (2) or (3), the specific effect B is not executed. (The above-described process of “suspending execution of the specific effect B and executing it when the number of reserved memories becomes 1 or more” is not performed) and only in the period of (1), The specific effect B is executed. Each time the specific effect B is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B (at least one of the first general winning port 50A to the fourth general winning port 50D, which is the winning condition) History is included).

  In the 30th effect form, the specific effect B is specified by executing the specific effect B (pre-reading notice effect) related to the variable display result of the special figure game held at the timing when the game ball is won in the general winning opening. I try to improve my interest in production. However, if the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is the period (2) or (3) in which the number of reserved memories is 0, there is no pre-reading notice target at this timing. In this case, the execution of the specific effect B is temporarily suspended (the specific effect B is not executed at the timing of winning the general prize opening), and then the specific effect B is displayed when the number of reserved memories becomes 1 or more. When it is executed, there is a possibility that the interest will be lowered due to the divergence between the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific effect. Therefore, in the 30th effect form, the specific effect B is not executed when the game ball wins the general winning opening during the period (2) or (3) (the period in which the stored storage number is 0). .

  In the 30th production mode, when the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (1) (within the period with reserved memory). The specific effect B is executed at a rate of 80%, and if it is the period (2) or (3) (within the period without holding storage), the specific effect B is executed at a rate of 20%. You may do it. In the case of such a form, when a winning to the general winning opening occurs during the period (2) or (3) (within the period without holding storage), the execution of the specific effect B is temporarily suspended. Every time (the specific effect B is not executed at the timing of winning the general winning opening), and then the specific effect B is executed when the number of reserved memories becomes 1 or more. As described above, the timing at which the game ball is won at the general winning opening is the period (1) (within the period with reserved memory) and the period (2) or (3) (within the period without reserved memory). ), The specific effect B can be executed, and the specific effect B can be executed at a different rate.

  Further, when the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is within the period (1) (within a period with reserved storage), the holding is further held. The execution ratio of the specific effect B varies depending on the variable display result of the special game related to memory and whether or not the reach effect is executed in the variable display of the decorative symbols accompanying the execution of the special game related to the reserved memory. You may do it. For example, the effect control CPU 120 stores the start winning prize determination result designation command for designating “big hit” in the start winning command storage area (that is, the reserved memory in which the variable display result of the special game is a big hit symbol). In the case where there is a special winning effect B at a rate of 80%, the start winning time determination result designation command for designating “big hit” is not stored in the start winning command storage area (ie, In the case where there is no reserved memory in which the variable display result of the special figure game becomes a big hit symbol), the specific effect B may be executed at a rate of 20%.

[31st effect form]
In the 31st effect form shown in FIG. 20, the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is as follows: (1) A period during which the variable symbol variable display is executed ( If it is within the symbol change period), the specific effect A (change result notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (2) the period during which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol change period) In some cases, the specific effect C (point giving effect) is executed at a rate of 100%.

  As described above, the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (1) and the period (2). Different types of specific effects are executed. Thereby, it can be interested in the effect performed when a game ball wins a general winning opening, and it can improve interest. In addition, every time a specific effect (specific effect A or specific effect C) is executed, the winning history (at least the first general winning opening 50A to 4A that are the winning conditions) in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect. The winning history for any of the general winning ports 50D is included).

  In the 31st effect form, by executing the specific effect A (variation result notice effect) related to the variable display result in the special figure game being executed at the timing when the game ball has won the general winning opening, I am trying to improve my interests. However, if the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is a period (2) during which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol variation period), there is a subject of the change result notice at this timing. do not do. In this case, if no specific effects are executed, the execution frequency of the specific effects decreases. On the other hand, in order not to reduce the execution frequency of the specific effect, the execution of the specific effect A is temporarily suspended (the specific effect A is not executed at the timing of winning the general winning opening), and then the special game is related. When the specific effect A is executed when the variable display start condition is satisfied, there is a possibility that the interest is lowered due to the difference between the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific effect.

  In the 31st effect form, when a game ball wins a general winning opening during the period (2) (outside the symbol change period), instead of the specific effect A, the variable display result in the special game or the variable in the normal game By executing the specific effect C that is not related to the display result, such a problem can be avoided. It should be noted that any type of specific production is always executed (percentage is executed at a rate of 100%) every time a prize is awarded to the general prize opening, and any type of specific presentation is given for every prize winning to the general prize opening. The specific performance may be executed at a predetermined ratio (for example, 50%).

[32nd form]
In the thirty-second effect form, the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) the number of reserved memories (for example, the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number). ) Is within a period of 1 or more, the specific effect B (prefetching notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (2) the reserved memory number is 0. Is a period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed (within the symbol variation period), the specific effect A (change result notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (3) the number of reserved memories is 0 When the variable symbol special display is not executed (outside the symbol change period), the specific effect C (point giving effect) is executed at a rate of 100%.

  As described above, the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (1), the period (2), In the case of the period 3), different types of specific effects are executed. Thereby, it can be interested in the effect performed when a game ball wins a general winning opening, and it can improve interest. Each time a specific effect (specific effect A, specific effect B, or specific effect C) is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect (at least the first general winning that is the winning condition) The winning history for any of the mouth 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is included).

  In the thirty-second effect form, when the timing at which a game ball wins a general winning opening is within the period of (1), that is, when the target of the prefetch notice exists, the specific effect B (prefetch notice) When the period is within the period of (2), that is, when there is no target of the prefetching notice but there is a target of the fluctuation result notice, the specific effect A (fluctuation result notice effect) When the period is (3), that is, when neither the target of the pre-reading notice nor the subject of the change result notice exists, the specific effect C (point giving effect) is executed.

  In this way, by selecting a specific effect that can be executed immediately at the timing when a game ball is won in the general prize opening and executing this, the interest when the game ball wins in the general prize opening is appropriately improved. I try to let them. It should be noted that any type of specific production is always executed (percentage is executed at a rate of 100%) every time a prize is awarded to the general prize opening, and any type of specific presentation is given for every prize winning to the general prize opening. The specific performance may be executed at a predetermined ratio (for example, 50%).

  In the thirty-second effect form, if the number of reserved memories is 1 or more at the timing when the game ball is won at the general winning opening, whether or not the variable display of the special symbol is executed at that timing. Regardless, that is, the pre-reading notice effect is executed regardless of whether or not there is a subject of the change result notice. That is, in the case where “the subject of the change result notice and the object of the prefetch notice exist both”, the prefetch notice effect is preferentially executed. Not only in such a form, but when the number of reserved memories is 1 or more at the timing when a game ball wins a general winning opening, when variable display of special symbols is executed at that timing, the change result notice When the effect is executed, and the variable symbol special display is not executed at that timing, the pre-reading notice effect may be executed. That is, in the case where “the target of the change result notice and the target of the prefetch notice exist both”, the change result notice effect may be preferentially executed.

[Modified example of the 27th effect form to the 32nd effect form]
In the twenty-seventh effect form to the thirty-second effect form, the execution ratio of the specific effect may be varied according to the state when the game ball is won at the general winning opening. The “state” here is a state that is generated as a result of a game in the gaming machine and is based on a game in the gaming machine. The execution ratio of the specific effect is varied according to the state category. For example, in the 27th effect form, when the timing at which a game ball wins a general winning opening is within (1) the symbol variation period, if the game state at that time is a normal state, the specific effect is 30%. C is executed, and if the gaming state at that time is a certain change state or a short time state, the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 10%. On the other hand, if the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is outside the symbol variation period (2), if the gaming state at that time is the normal state, the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 100%. If the game state at that time is a certain change state or a short time state, the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 60%. According to this, the interest when a game ball wins a general winning opening can be further enhanced.

  Moreover, in the 27th effect form-the 32nd effect form, you may make it vary the kind of specific effect performed according to the state when a game ball wins a general winning opening. For example, in the 31st effect form, when the timing at which a game ball wins a general winning opening is within (1) the symbol change period, if the reserved memory number at that time is 0, the specific effect A (change result notice) If the number of reserved memories at that time is 1 or more, the specific effect B (prefetching notice effect) is executed. On the other hand, if the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is outside (2) the symbol variation period, if the number of reserved memories at that time is 0, the specific effect C (point giving effect) is executed, If the number of reserved memories at that time is 1 or more, the specific effect B (prefetching notice effect) is executed. According to this, the interest when a game ball wins a general winning opening can be further enhanced.

  As described above, the execution ratio of the specific effect or the state classification for changing the type of the specific effect is either (1) the game state is the normal state or (2) the game state is the probability change state or the short-time state. Or (1) whether the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, or (2) whether the number of reserved memories is 0. For example, it may be classified as (1) a period after the reach state is established in the reach change or (2) a period before the reach state is established in the reach change. Also, (1) it is a period in which variable display without reach effect (non-reach fluctuation) is being executed, or (2) it is a period in which variable display with reach effect (reach fluctuation) is being executed, It may be a category. Further, it may be classified as (1) a period in which variable display without pseudo-continuous effects is being executed or (2) a period in which variable display with pseudo-continuous effects is being executed. . Further, even if the classification is (1) before execution of pseudo continuous effects in variable display with pseudo continuous effects, or (2) after execution of pseudo continuous effects in variable display with pseudo continuous effects. good. Furthermore, both the execution ratio of the specific effect and the type of the specific effect may be different according to the difference between these categories.

  Whether or not execution of the specific effect C (point granting effect) is performed according to the display setting table of FIG. It is like that. Specifically, the display changeover switch 32 is set to display setting (second position), and display setting is performed by player operation (setting operation using the operation button 30 on the setting screen of FIG. 5). It is only possible to execute. As described above, whether or not to execute the specific effect C can reflect the intention of the game hall or the player.

  In addition, the specific effect C (point granting effect) is not limited to one point that is awarded for one prize to the general prize opening, but 2 points or 3 points are given for one prize to the general prize opening. It may be. The number of points awarded may be different depending on, for example, which general winning opening the game ball has won, and the state of the gaming machine when the game ball has won the general winning opening, for example, The game state may be different depending on whether the game state is a normal state, a probability change state, or a time-short state.

  In addition, in the specific effect C (point giving effect), points may be awarded according to factors other than the prize winning to the general prize opening. For example, points are awarded according to the winning to the starting prize opening. Alternatively, points may be awarded according to the establishment of the reach state.

[33rd effect form]
FIG. 21 illustrates a specific effect D (gauge update effect) as an effect in which the effect mode changes step by step in accordance with the winning of a game ball in the general winning opening. As shown in FIG. 21, the specific effect D (gauge update effect) is a filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 displayed on the image display device 5 in accordance with the winning of a game ball in the general winning opening. This effect can be changed step by step from a minimum of 0 to a maximum of 10.

  In the example of FIG. 21A, the filling area 2100a (the black portion in the gauge image) in the gauge image 2100 is in the 0 stage in response to the game ball winning in any of the first general winning openings 50A to 50D. It increases from 1 (the state where the white part occupies 10/10) to 1 level (the state where the black part occupies 1/10 and the white part occupies 9/10) (gauge + 1). In the example of FIG. 21B, the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 is changed from the 0th stage to the 3rd stage (black part) in response to the game ball winning in any of the first general winning ports 50A to 50D. Occupies 3/10 and the white part occupies 7/10) (gauge +3).

  In this way, the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 increases in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening and reaches 10 levels (the black part in the gauge image occupies 10/10). In the case where the player is in a state of being), a privilege is given to the player. For example, similarly to the specific effect C described above, a two-dimensional code for accessing the image providing server or the music providing server is displayed on the image display device 5, and the player can select a desired image or music as the image providing server or the music. It can be downloaded from the providing server to the information terminal.

  Not limited to this, when the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 reaches 10 levels, a special character may be displayed on the image display device 5, and a special song is output as the BGM during the game. It may be made possible. Alternatively, a variable result notice effect may be executed in which the display result of the variable display relating to the special figure game being executed at the timing when the filling area 2100a reaches 10 stages may be a big hit symbol. A pre-reading notice effect may be executed in which the display result of the variable display related to the special figure game held at the timing when the area 2100a reaches 10 stages may be a big hit symbol.

  That is, the privilege provided when the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 reaches 10 levels may be an effect not related to the variable display result in the special game or the variable display result in the normal game. It may be an effect related to a variable display result in a game or a variable display result in a usual game. In addition, it may be an effect related to the gaming state or an effect not related to the gaming state. Further, a different effect may be executed every time the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 reaches 10 levels. Further, different effects may be executed according to the gaming state when the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 reaches 10 levels.

  When the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 reaches 10 levels, a notification to that effect is given by displaying a message on the image display device 5 or outputting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, and then the gauge image 2100. The filling area 2100a at is reset to the zero level. After the reset, the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 increases again in accordance with the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening.

  In the 33rd effect form to the 37th effect form shown in FIG. 22 to FIG. 23, each time a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D, the identification extracted from the random number circuit 124 It is determined whether or not the stage of the filling region 2100a in the gauge image 2100 (hereinafter referred to as a gauge level) is increased by one stage based on the effect execution determination random number. Is increased by one step. That is, every time a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to increase the gauge level by one step. If you win, your gauge level will increase by one level.

  In the 33rd effect form, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) a period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol variation period) ), The gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 20%, and (2) when it is a period during which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol variation period), a rate of 80%. Increases the gauge level by one step. The effect control CPU 120 receives a change start command for specifying start of change in the special figure game, and a change pattern specification command for specifying a change pattern such as a change time of the special symbol in the special figure game and a decorative pattern in the image display device 5. By receiving from the game control microcomputer 100, it is possible to specify whether or not it is a period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed.

  As with the specific effects A to C, a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effects D is provided. When the gauge level reaches 10 stages, along with a notification to that effect and provision of a privilege (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading an image or music, display of a special character, output of a special music, etc.) The winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least ten winning histories to the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D) is deleted.

  In the 33rd effect form, and in the 34th effect form, the 36th effect form, and the 37th effect form, which will be described later, (1) a general winning opening during the period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed (within the symbol variation period) The rate at which the gauge level increases based on the winning of the game ball in (2) is that the game ball won in the general winning opening during the period when the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol change period) The gauge level is set lower than the rate of increase. During the period of (1), the player usually has a general prize because an effect corresponding to the special game (for example, a change result notice effect) is being executed by the image display device 5 or the speakers 8L and 8R. I am more interested in these effects, including the variable display of decorative symbols, rather than the winning status of game balls in the mouth. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased during the period (1), the interest of the specific performance may be impaired. On the other hand, during the period of (2), the player can increase the gauge level because the production corresponding to the special game of interest is not preferentially executed. I am in a situation where I am interested in this. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level at a rate higher than the period of (1), the interest of the specific performance is appropriately increased.

  In the 33rd effect form, the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) a period during which variable display of a special symbol is being executed (design variation) (Within the period), the gauge level is not increased. (2) The gauge level can be increased when the special symbol variable display is not performed (outside the symbol variation period). Also good. Contrary to the example shown in the 33rd effect form, (1) a gauge based on the fact that a game ball has won a general winning opening during a period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed (within the symbol variation period). The rate at which the level increases is higher than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that (2) the game ball has won the general winning opening during the period when the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol change period) You may set so that it becomes.

[34th form]
In the 34th production mode, the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) a period during which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol variation period) ), The gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 80%. The timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (2) a period during which the special symbol variable display is executed (within the symbol variation period) and is special. When the remaining time until the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the figure game is 10 seconds or more, the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 40%. The timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (3) a period during which the special symbol variable display is executed (within the symbol variation period) and When the remaining time until the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the figure game is less than 10 seconds, the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 10%.

  The effect control CPU 120 receives a change start command for specifying start of change in the special figure game, and a change pattern specification command for specifying a change pattern such as a change time of the special symbol in the special figure game and a decorative pattern in the image display device 5. By receiving from the game control microcomputer 100, it is possible to specify whether or not it is the period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed, and until the special symbol variable display is completed (the confirmed special symbol is It is possible to specify the remaining time (until the stop is displayed). For example, when the variation start command and the variation pattern designation command are received, the variation time of the special symbol designated by the variation pattern designation command is set as the value of the variation time timer. The remaining time until the timer value times out can be specified as the remaining time until the special symbol variable display ends (until the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed). In addition, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that becomes the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The remaining time until the value of the variable time timer times out can be specified as the remaining time until the variable display of the decorative symbol ends (until the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed).

  In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and provision of a privilege (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading an image or music, display of a special character, output of a special music, etc.) Accordingly, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least ten winning histories to the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D) is deleted.

  In the 34th production form, (2) the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening when it is 10 seconds or longer until the symbol stops is (3) when the symbol level is less than 10 seconds until the symbol stops In addition, the gauge level is set to be higher than the rate at which the game level is won based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening. During the period of (3), the player is usually more interested in what the fixed decorative pattern that is displayed in a stopped state will be, rather than the winning situation of the game ball in the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased during the period (3), the interest of the specific performance may be impaired. On the other hand, in the period (2), there is a grace period until the confirmed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level, the player is easily interested in this. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level at a rate higher than the period of (3), the interest of the specific performance is appropriately increased.

  In the 34th production mode, the gauge level is increased when the timing at which the game ball wins any one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (2). In the case of the period (3), the gauge level may not be increased. Contrary to the example shown in the 34th effect form, (2) the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that a game ball is won at the general winning opening when 10 seconds or more until the symbol stops is (3 ) It may be set to be lower than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening when it is less than 10 seconds until the symbol stops.

  Moreover, in the 34th production form, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is a common period (either (2) or (3)). In some cases, the gauge level may be increased at a different rate depending on whether the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special figure game being executed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative symbol being executed when the timing at which the game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (2). When the display result of variable display is a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 70%. When the display result is out of symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 40%, while the first general prize is awarded. When the timing at which a game ball is won in any of the mouths 50A to 4D general winning opening 50D is the period (3), and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols being executed is a jackpot symbol May increase the gauge level at a rate of 30%, and increase the gauge level at a rate of 10% if the display result is out of pattern.

[35th form]
As described above, the specific effect B is exemplified as the pre-reading notice effect for notifying the variable display result in the reserved special game. In the specific effect B shown in FIG. 9B, does the start prize determination result designation command for designating “big hit” be included in the start prize determination result designation command stored in the start prize command storage area? Based on whether or not, it is determined whether the effect mode of the pre-reading notice effect is the first mode (sound effect only) or the second mode (sound effect and accessory effect). That is, in the pre-reading notice effect such as the specific effect B, the variable display (hereinafter referred to as target fluctuation) that is the target of the pre-fetching notice is not notified to the player, and the player grasps the target fluctuation. It has become difficult.

  As the pre-reading notice effect, it is also possible to adopt an effect that notifies the target fluctuation. For example, as described above, in the start winning storage display area 5H, a plurality of display parts whose display colors are changed from left to right in order from the variable display game in which the start condition is first established based on the occurrence of the start winning. Is provided. When the start control winning determination result designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 displays the display portion corresponding to the command if it is a command that designates “big hit”, and the display corresponding to the command that designates “off”. It is possible to execute a hold change effect displayed in a special mode (for example, gold) different from the part. The target variation in this case is a variable display corresponding to the display portion displayed in a special manner, and the player can grasp the remaining variable display count executed until the target variation.

  For example, if a command for designating “big hit” is received when a start winning determination result designation command is received, a display portion corresponding to the command is displayed in a special manner at a rate of 70%, and at a rate of 30%. The display part corresponding to the command is displayed in the normal mode. On the other hand, if a command specifying “out of” is received when the start winning determination result specifying command is received, the display portion corresponding to the command is displayed in a special mode at a rate of 5%, and at a rate of 95%. The display part corresponding to the command is displayed in the normal mode. As described above, when the display part corresponding to the reserved memory generated by the start winning is displayed in the special mode at the time of the start winning, the display part in the special mode is displayed every time the variable display game is executed (the start condition is satisfied). Each time), and when the start condition of the variable display game (variable display that is the target of the pre-reading notice) corresponding to the display portion of the special mode is satisfied, The display part disappears from the start winning storage display area 5H. In such an aspect, the hold change effect is executed during the period from the start winning to the start of the variable display game corresponding to the start winning.

  That is, when the start condition of the variable display game is satisfied according to the order in which the start condition of the variable display game is satisfied, the hold change effect is executed, so that the display portion (the target of the hold change effect is displayed) in a special mode. Depending on the number of display parts in the normal mode (display information corresponding to variable display hold storage that is not the target of hold change effect) to the left of the display information corresponding to variable display hold storage) It becomes possible to grasp the number of remaining variable display games until the variable display that is the target of the hold change effect is executed.

  In addition, the timing which displays a display site | part in a special aspect is not restricted at the time of a start winning prize. For example, the display part may be displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning prize, and after changing the predetermined effect, the normal mode may be changed to the special mode. The timing at which the start condition is satisfied (display mode of each display part) May be changed from the normal mode to the special mode at the timing of shifting to the left). In these aspects, from the timing at which the display portion corresponding to the variable display that is the target of the pre-reading notice changes from the normal state to the special form, the start condition of the variable display that is the target of the pre-reading notice is satisfied. During the period, the pending change effect is being executed.

  In the thirty-fifth production mode, the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is as follows: If it is a non-period (when there is no display part of a special mode in the pending change effect and it is not a target variation execution period), the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 80%.

  In addition, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (2) the pre-reading notice effect is executed and the remaining variable display count until the target change is 2 or more. If there is a special game in which the start condition is established before the special game corresponding to the display part of the special mode in the pending change effect, the ratio is 40%. Increases the gauge level by one step.

  In addition, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (3) the pre-reading notice effect is executed and the remaining variable display count until the target change becomes 1. If there is one special figure game in which the start condition is established before the special figure game corresponding to the display part of the special mode in the pending change effect, the gauge is measured at a rate of 20%. Level increases by one level.

  In addition, when the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (4) the execution period of the target change accompanying the end of the pre-reading notice effect (in the hold change effect) The gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 10% when the variable display based on the fact that the start condition of the special figure game corresponding to the display portion of the special mode is established.

  In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and provision of a privilege (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading an image or music, display of a special character, output of a special music, etc.) Accordingly, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least ten winning histories to the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D) is deleted.

  In the 35th production mode, (2) the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening when the remaining variable display count until the target change is 2 or more is (3) until the target change The rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball is won at the general winning opening when the remaining variable display count of 1 is 1, (4) When the remaining variable display count until the target change is 0 (execution of target change) During the period), the gauge level is set higher than the rate at which the game ball is won at the general winning opening. In the period of (3), the player is usually more interested in the target change to be executed next than the winning situation of the game ball in the general winning opening. In the period (4), the player is usually more interested in the target variation that is currently being executed than the winning status of the game ball in the general winning opening. For this reason, even if the gauge level is increased during the periods (3) and (4), the interest of the specific performance may be impaired. On the other hand, in the period (2), since there is a grace period until the target change is executed, the player is easily interested in this by increasing the gauge level. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level at a higher rate than the periods (3) and (4), the interest of the specific performance is appropriately increased.

  In the 35th production mode, when the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (2), increasing the gauge level. In the case of (3) and (4), the gauge level may not be increased. Contrary to the example shown in the 35th effect form, (2) the rate at which the gauge level increases when the remaining variable display count until target change is 2 or more is (3) remaining variable until target change. The ratio may be set so that the gauge level increases when the number of display times is 1, and (4) the gauge level increases when the target variation is executed.

  Moreover, in the 35th production form, the timing at which the game ball wins any one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is in any of the common periods ((2), (3), (4) In this case, the gauge level may be increased at a different rate depending on whether the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the target fluctuation or not. For example, when the timing at which the game ball is won in any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (2), the effect control CPU 120 displays the variable display result in the target variation. In the case of a big win symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 70%. When the variable display result is out of symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 40%. When the timing at which the game ball is won in any of the winning openings 50D is the period of (3), when the variable display result in the target variation becomes a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 30%, When the variable display result is an out-of-order symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 20%, and one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. When the timing at which the game ball wins is in the period (4), if the variable display result in the target variation becomes a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 15%, and the variable display result does not match the symbol. In this case, the gauge level may be increased at a rate of 10%.

[36th effect form]
In the thirty-sixth production mode, the timing at which a game ball wins any one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) a period during which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol variation period) ), The gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 80%. In addition, the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is a period in which (2) variable display (non-reach fluctuation) without a reach effect is being executed. In some cases, the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 40%.

  In addition, the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (3) a period during which variable display (reach fluctuation) with reach effect is executed, and If it is a period before the reach state is established, the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 20%, and (4) a variable display (reach fluctuation) with a reach effect is being executed and the reach state In the period after establishment, the gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 10%.

  In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and provision of a privilege (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading an image or music, display of a special character, output of a special music, etc.) Accordingly, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least ten winning histories to the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D) is deleted.

  In the thirty-sixth production mode, (3) the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening before the reach state in reach change is established is (4) after the reach state is established in reach change The gauge level is set higher than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the winning of the game ball in the winning opening. During the period of (4), the player is usually more interested in the remaining decorative symbols that are not stopped after the reach state is established, rather than the winning status of the game ball in the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased during the period (4), the interest of the specific performance may be impaired. On the other hand, since the reach state is not established in the period (3), the player is easily interested in this by increasing the gauge level. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level at a rate higher than the period of (4), the interest of the specific performance is appropriately increased.

  In the thirty-sixth production mode, when the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (3), increasing the gauge level. In the case of the period (4), the gauge level may not be increased. Contrary to the example shown in the thirty-sixth effect form, (3) the rate at which the gauge level increases during the reach fluctuation period and before the reach state is established is (4 ) It may be set to be lower than the rate at which the gauge level increases when the reach variation is being executed and after the reach state is established.

[37th effect form]
In the 37th effect form shown in FIG. 23, the ratio of increasing the gauge level differs depending on which of the plurality of general winning awards is won. When the timing at which a game ball wins one of the second general winning opening 50B and the third general winning opening 50C is (1) the period during which the special symbol variable display is executed (within the symbol variation period) The gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 10%. On the other hand, the timing at which a game ball has won one of the first general winning opening 50A and the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) a period during which a special symbol variable display is being executed (within a symbol variation period). The gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 20%.

  In addition, the timing when the game ball wins in either the second general winning opening 50B or the third general winning opening 50C is (2) a period during which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol changing period). The gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 40%. On the other hand, the timing at which a game ball has won one of the first general winning opening 50A and the fourth general winning opening 50D is (2) a period in which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol changing period). The gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 80%.

  In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and provision of a privilege (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading an image or music, display of a special character, output of a special music, etc.) Accordingly, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least ten winning histories to the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D) is deleted.

  In the 37th effect form, the rate of increase of the gauge level is different between (1) the symbol variation period and (2) outside the symbol variation period, and further, the second general prize opening 50B or the third general prize opening The rate at which the gauge level increases differs between the case where a game ball is won in 50C and the case where a game ball is won in the first general winning port 50A or the fourth general winning port 50D. The rate at which the gauge level increases depending on the general winning opening where the game ball has won, so that the player will be interested in which general winning opening the game ball has won, and improve the interest. be able to.

  For example, the first general prize provided closer to the end of the game area 10 than the winning of the game ball to the second general prize opening 50B and the third general prize opening 50C provided near the center of the game area 10. When it is difficult to win game balls in the mouth 50A and the fourth general prize opening 50D, the rate at which the gauge level increases when the game balls win in the first general prize opening 50A and the fourth general prize opening 50D Is made higher than the rate at which the gauge level increases when a game ball wins in the second general winning opening 50B and the third general winning opening 50C, thereby making it more interesting to win a general winning opening that is more difficult to win. It is good to raise it.

  In the 37th production mode, when a game ball wins in the first general winning opening or the fourth general winning opening, it is possible to increase the gauge level, and in the second general winning opening or the third general winning opening. When a game ball wins, the gauge level may not be increased. Contrary to the example shown in the 37th performance mode, the rate at which the gauge level increases when the game ball wins the first general winning opening 50A or the fourth general winning opening 50D is the second general winning opening 50B. Or you may set so that it may become lower than the ratio which a gauge level increases when a game ball wins in the 3rd general winning opening 50C.

[38th production form]
In the thirty-eighth effect form to the forty-second effect form shown in FIG. 24 and FIG. 25, the presence / absence of execution of the specific effect is not determined based on the random number for determining the specific effect execution extracted from the random number circuit 124. Moreover, in the 38th production form-the 42nd production form, the gauge level which increases according to one prize-winning to a general winning opening is not restricted to one step. For example, as shown in FIG. 21 (b), the gauge level may be increased by three stages in response to a single winning at the general winning opening.

  In the thirty-eighth production form, the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is as follows: ), The gauge level increases by one step (gauge + 1), and (2) when the variable symbol special display is not executed (outside the symbol change period), the gauge level is three steps. Increase (gauge + 3).

  In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and provision of a privilege (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading an image or music, display of a special character, output of a special music, etc.) Accordingly, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least four winning histories to the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D) is deleted.

  In the 38th effect form, and the 39th effect form, the 41st effect form, and the 42nd effect form, which will be described later, (1) a general winning opening during a period during which the special symbol variable display is executed (within the symbol change period) The number of gauge level stages that increase based on the winning of a game ball in (2) is that the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening during the period when the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol change period) Is set to be less than the number of gauge level steps that increase based on During the period of (1), the player usually has a general prize because an effect corresponding to the special game (for example, a change result notice effect) is being executed by the image display device 5 or the speakers 8L and 8R. I am more interested in these effects, including the variable display of decorative symbols, rather than the winning status of game balls in the mouth. For this reason, even if the gauge level is increased in the period (1), the interest of the specific performance may be impaired. On the other hand, in the period (2), the player corresponding to the special game that is the subject of interest is not executed in the original period, so that the player is increased by increasing the gauge level. Are in a situation where they are interested in this. For this reason, the interest level of the specific performance is appropriately increased by increasing the gauge level more than the period (1).

  In the thirty-eighth production mode, the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) a period during which variable display of a special symbol is being executed (design variation) (Within a period), the rate at which the gauge level is increased by two or more steps is, for example, 20% (the rate at which only one step is changed is 80%), and (2) a period during which variable symbol special display is not executed ( If it is outside the symbol variation period), the rate at which the gauge level is increased by two or more levels may be, for example, 80% (the rate at which only one level is changed is 20%). Contrary to the example shown in the 38th effect form, (1) a gauge based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize in a general winning opening during a period during which a variable display of a special symbol is executed (within a symbol variation period). The number of stages in which the level increases is (2) the number of stages in which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening during the period when the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol change period) You may set so that it may also increase.

  In addition, as a privilege granted when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, a privilege with a different value may be given. For example, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, a two-dimensional code capable of downloading only an image may be displayed, and a two-dimensional code capable of downloading an image and music may be displayed. At this time, the privilege value given to the latter is greater than the former. Depending on the number of stages at which the gauge level increases, the value of the privilege value that is given when the gauge level reaches 10 stages may be suggested. For example, when the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) a period during which a special symbol variable display is executed (within a symbol variation period). In addition, when the privilege value is small, the rate at which the gauge level is increased by two or more levels is set to, for example, 20% (the rate at which only one level is changed is 80%). When the rate of increase is, for example, 40% (the rate of changing only one step is 60%), and (2) when the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol variation period), the privilege value is small For example, the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more levels is 50% (the rate of changing only one level is 50%). If the privilege value is large, increase the gauge level by two or more levels Ratio, for example 80% to (ratio to one step change of 20%) may be.

[39th form]
In the 39th production mode, the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) a period during which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol variation period) ), The gauge level increases by three levels (gauge + 3). The timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (2) a period during which the special symbol variable display is executed (within the symbol variation period) and is special. When the remaining time until the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the figure game is 10 seconds or more, the gauge level is increased by two levels (gauge + 2). The timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (3) a period during which the special symbol variable display is executed (within the symbol variation period) and When the remaining time until the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the figure game is less than 10 seconds, the gauge level increases by one step (gauge + 1).

  In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and provision of a privilege (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading an image or music, display of a special character, output of a special music, etc.) Accordingly, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least four winning histories to the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D) is deleted.

  In the 39th production form, (2) the number of gauge level stages that increase based on the fact that a game ball has won the general winning opening when 10 seconds or more until the symbol stops is (3) less than 10 seconds until the symbol stops It is set to be higher than the number of gauge levels that increase based on the fact that a game ball has won a general winning opening. During the period of (3), the player is usually more interested in what the fixed decorative pattern that is displayed in a stopped state will be, rather than the winning situation of the game ball in the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased a lot during the period (3), the interest of the specific performance may be impaired. On the other hand, in the period (2), since there is a grace period until the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the player is likely to be interested in this by increasing the gauge level. For this reason, the interest level of the specific performance is appropriately increased by increasing the gauge level more than the period (3).

  In the 39th production mode, when the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (2), the gauge level is increased by two or more stages. For example, 80% (the rate of changing only one step is 20%), and in the period (3), the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps is, for example, 20% (the rate of changing only one step) May be 80%). Contrary to the example shown in the 39th production mode, (2) the number of stages at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that a game ball is won at the general winning opening when 10 seconds or more until the symbol stops ( 3) It may be set to be less than the number of stages in which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening when it is less than 10 seconds until the symbol stops.

  Moreover, in the 39th effect form, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is a common period (either (2) or (3)). In some cases, the gauge level may be increased at different stages depending on whether the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special figure game being executed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative symbol being executed when the timing at which the game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (2). When the display result of the variable display is a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased by three steps, and when the display result is an out-of-order symbol, the gauge level is increased by two steps, while the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general When the timing at which a game ball is won in any of the winning openings 50D is the period (3), if the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern being executed is a jackpot symbol, the gauge level is set in two levels. The gauge level may be increased by one step when the display result is a deviated symbol.

[40th effect form]
In the 40th effect form, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) the pre-reading notice effect is not executed and the target variation is also executed. If it is a non-period (when there is no display part of a special mode in the on-hold change effect and it is not an execution period of target variation), the gauge level is increased by four stages (gauge + 4).

  In addition, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (2) the pre-reading notice effect is executed and the remaining variable display count until the target change is 2 or more. If there are two or more special-figure games in which the start condition is established before the special-figure game corresponding to the display part of the special mode in the pending change effect, the gauge level is 3 Increase in steps (gauge + 3).

  In addition, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (3) the pre-reading notice effect is executed and the remaining variable display count until the target change becomes 1. If there is one special figure game where the start condition is established before the special figure game corresponding to the display part of the special mode in the pending change effect, the gauge level is increased by two stages. (Gauge +2).

  In addition, when the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (4) the execution period of the target change accompanying the end of the pre-reading notice effect (in the hold change effect) The gauge level is increased by one level (gauge + 1) when the variable display based on the fact that the start condition of the special figure game corresponding to the display portion of the special mode is established).

  In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and provision of a privilege (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading an image or music, display of a special character, output of a special music, etc.) Accordingly, the winning history (including at least three winning histories to the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D) in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D is erased.

  In the 40th production mode, (2) the number of gauge level stages that increase based on the winning of a game ball in the general winning opening when the number of remaining variable display until target change is 2 or more is (3) target change When the remaining variable display count up to 1 is 1, the number of gauge levels increases based on the winning of a game ball in the general prize opening, (4) When the remaining variable display count until target change is 0 (target change The number of gauge levels is set to be increased based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize at a general winning opening during the execution period of (1). In the period of (3), the player is usually more interested in the target change to be executed next than the winning situation of the game ball in the general winning opening. In the period (4), the player is usually more interested in the target variation that is currently being executed than the winning status of the game ball in the general winning opening. For this reason, even if the gauge level is increased in the period of (3) and (4), the interest of the specific performance may be impaired. On the other hand, in the period (2), since there is a grace period until the target change is executed, the player is easily interested in this by increasing the gauge level. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level more than the periods (3) and (4), the interest of the specific performance is appropriately increased.

  In the 40th production mode, the gauge level is increased by two or more stages when the timing at which the game ball is won in any one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (2). For example, the ratio of increasing the gauge level by two or more stages is set to 20% (only one stage) in the period of (3) and (4). The rate of change may be 80%). Contrary to the example shown in the 40th effect form, (2) the number of stages in which the gauge level increases when the remaining variable display count until the target change is 2 or more is (3) the remaining until the target change. It may be set so that the number of stages in which the gauge level increases when the number of times of variable display is 1, and (4) less than the number of stages in which the gauge level increases during the target variation execution period.

  In the 40th production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is in any of the common periods ((2), (3), (4)). In this case, the gauge level may be increased at a different rate depending on whether the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the target fluctuation or not. For example, when the timing at which the game ball is won in any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (2), the effect control CPU 120 displays the variable display result in the target variation. In the case of a big win symbol, the gauge level is increased by 4 steps, and in the case where the variable display result is out of the design, the gauge level is increased by 3 steps, and any one of the first general winning port 50A to the fourth general winning port 50D. When the timing when the game ball is won is in the period of (3), if the variable display result in the target fluctuation is a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased by three stages, and the variable display result becomes a symbol out of place The gauge level is increased by two stages, and the timing at which the game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is In the case of the period of 4), if the variable display result in the target fluctuation becomes a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased by two steps, and if the variable display result becomes a disjoint symbol, the gauge level is increased by one step. Anyway.

[41st effect form]
In the 41st effect form, the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) a period during which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol variation period) ), The gauge level is increased by 4 levels (gauge + 4). In addition, the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is a period in which (2) variable display (non-reach fluctuation) without a reach effect is being executed. In this case, the gauge level is increased by three levels (gauge + 3).

  In addition, the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (3) a period during which variable display (reach fluctuation) with reach effect is executed, and If it is a period before the reach state is established, the gauge level is increased by two steps (gauge +3), and (4) a variable display (reach fluctuation) with reach effect is being executed and the reach state is established. In the subsequent period, the gauge level increases by one step (gauge + 1).

  In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and provision of a privilege (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading an image or music, display of a special character, output of a special music, etc.) Accordingly, the winning history (including at least three winning histories to the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D) in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D is erased.

  In the forty-first production mode, (3) the number of stages of the gauge level that increases based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening before the reach state in reach change is established (4) after the reach state in reach change is established. The number is set more than the number of stages of gauge levels that increase based on the game ball winning in the general winning opening. During the period of (4), the player is usually more interested in the remaining decorative symbols that are not stopped after the reach state is established, rather than the winning status of the game ball in the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is greatly increased during the period (4), the interest of the specific performance may be impaired. On the other hand, since the reach state is not established in the period (3), the player is easily interested in this by increasing the gauge level. For this reason, the interest level of the specific performance is appropriately increased by increasing the gauge level more than in the period (4).

  In the 41st production form, when the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (3), the gauge level is increased by two or more stages. For example, 80% (the rate of changing only one step is 20%), and in the period (4), the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps is, for example, 20% (the rate of changing only one step) May be 80%). Contrary to the example shown in the 41st effect form, (3) the number of stages in which the gauge level increases when the reach fluctuation is being executed and before the reach state is established, 4) It may be set to be smaller than the number of stages in which the gauge level increases when the reach fluctuation is being executed and after the reach state is established.

[42nd effect form]
In the forty-second effect form shown in FIG. 25, the number of stages for increasing the gauge level differs depending on which of the plurality of general winning awards is won. When the timing at which a game ball wins one of the second general winning opening 50B and the third general winning opening 50C is (1) the period during which the special symbol variable display is executed (within the symbol variation period) The gauge level increases by one step (gauge + 1). On the other hand, the timing at which a game ball has won one of the first general winning opening 50A and the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) a period during which a special symbol variable display is being executed (within a symbol variation period). The gauge level is increased by two levels (gauge +2).

  In addition, the timing when the game ball wins in either the second general winning opening 50B or the third general winning opening 50C is (2) a period during which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol changing period). , The gauge level increases by 3 levels (gauge + 3). On the other hand, the timing at which a game ball has won one of the first general winning opening 50A and the fourth general winning opening 50D is (2) a period in which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol changing period). The gauge level is increased by 4 levels (gauge + 4).

  In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and provision of a privilege (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading an image or music, display of a special character, output of a special music, etc.) Accordingly, the winning history (including at least three winning histories to the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D) in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D is erased.

  In the 42nd production form, the number of steps of increasing gauge level is different between (1) the symbol change period and (2) outside the symbol change period, and further, the second general prize opening 50B or the third general prize is given. The number of steps of increasing gauge level is different between the case where a game ball wins the mouth 50C and the case where a game ball wins the first general winning port 50A or the fourth general winning port 50D. By increasing the number of gauge levels to be increased according to the number of general winning holes that the game balls have won, the player will be interested in which general winning holes the game balls have won, and improve the interest. Can be made.

  For example, the first general prize provided closer to the end of the game area 10 than the winning of the game ball to the second general prize opening 50B and the third general prize opening 50C provided near the center of the game area 10. When it is difficult to win game balls in the mouth 50A and the fourth general prize opening 50D, the stage in which the gauge level increases when the game balls win in the first general prize opening 50A and the fourth general prize opening 50D By increasing the number more than the number of stages in which the gauge level increases when a game ball is won in the second general winning opening 50B and the third general winning opening 50C, it is possible to win a general winning opening that is more difficult to win. It is good to raise interest.

  In the forty-second production mode, when a game ball is won at the first general winning opening or the fourth general winning opening, the ratio of increasing the gauge level by two or more stages is, for example, 80% (the ratio of changing only one stage is 20). %), And when a game ball wins the second general winning opening or the third general winning opening, the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps is set to 20% (the rate of changing only one step is 80%), for example. Also good. Contrary to the example shown in the 42nd production mode, the number of stages in which the gauge level increases when the game ball wins the first general winning opening 50A or the fourth general winning opening 50D is the second general winning opening. You may set so that it may become less than the number of steps which a gauge level increases when a game ball wins 50B or the 3rd general winning opening 50C.

[Modification of the 33rd effect form to the 42nd effect form]
In the 33rd effect form to the 37th effect form, the division serving as a reference for determining whether to increase the gauge level, and the number of gauge levels to be increased in the 38th effect form to the 42nd effect form are determined. The classification used as a reference for this is not limited to the above example. For example, the category for determining whether or not to increase the gauge level, and the category for determining the number of stages of the gauge level to be increased include (1) whether the gaming state is a normal state or (2) the gaming state is It may be a category of whether the state is a certain change state or a short time state. Further, it may be classified as (1) the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, or (2) whether the number of reserved memories is 0. Further, it may be classified as (1) a period in which variable display without pseudo-continuous effects is being executed or (2) a period in which variable display with pseudo-continuous effects is being executed. . Further, even if the classification is (1) before execution of pseudo continuous effects in variable display with pseudo continuous effects, or (2) after execution of pseudo continuous effects in variable display with pseudo continuous effects. good.

  Note that the gauge image 2100 is displayed even when the filling area 2100a is at a minimum of 0 stage, but a condition for displaying the gauge image 2100 may be provided. For example, the gauge image 2100 is displayed when the gaming state is the normal state, and an effect of increasing the gauge level can be executed. An effect of increasing the level may not be executed).

  The effect of increasing the display of the gauge image 2100 and the gauge level is executed in a period in which the predetermined effect is being executed, and may not be executed in a period in which the predetermined effect is not being executed. For example, the gauge image 2100 is displayed when the game ball is won in the general winning opening only during a period (a predetermined stage stage period) in which the background image of the decorative pattern displayed on the image display device 5 is a predetermined background image. Or the gauge level may be increased. In addition, the game ball is won at the general winning opening only during a period in which the display portion in the start winning memory display area 5H is displayed in a predetermined mode (for example, white indicating that there is a possibility of changing to a special mode). When this is done, the gauge image 2100 may be displayed or the gauge level may be increased.

  Further, the production control CPU 120 performs simultaneous production (simultaneously executed when a predetermined time is reached in a game machine of the same model at a timing when an unillustrated RTC (real time clock) provided on the production control board 12 has reached a predetermined time. In the case of performing (drafting), the gauge image 2100 may be displayed or the gauge level may be increased when a game ball wins a general winning opening during the execution period of the simultaneous rendering.

  Further, when the gauge level is increased, a predetermined effect sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, different production sounds may be output depending on the number of steps of the gauge level to be increased. For example, when the gauge level is increased by three steps, the gauge level is increased by one step. The volume of the production sound may be increased.

  In addition, it is preferable to output an effect sound that increases the gauge level at a volume different from the effect sound related to the special game or the effect sound related to the ordinary game. For example, the volume of the effect sound that increases the gauge level may be larger than the volume of the effect sound related to the usual game, but lower than the volume of the effect sound related to the special game. Further, the volume of the effect sound that increases the gauge level is larger than the volume of the effect sound related to the special game, but may be smaller than the volume of the error sound that notifies the gaming machine error.

  Further, the volume of the effect sound that increases the gauge level may be different depending on the state. For example, the sound volume in the normal state may be larger than the sound volume in the probability change state or the short time state.

  In addition, the specific effect in which the effect mode changes step by step in accordance with the winning of the general prize opening is not limited to the specific effect D that changes the gauge level, and the displayed character mode is step by step. It may be one that changes (for example, the size of the displayed character increases or the item that the character owns changes), and the number of characters that the player can select increases step by step. Also good. Further, the mode and position of the movable accessory may be changed step by step, and the emission color of the game effect lamp 9 may be changed stepwise. Moreover, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R may change stepwise.

  Whether or not the specific effect D (gauge update effect) is executed is switched according to the display setting table of FIG. 4 in the same manner as the other specific effects A to C executed based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. It is like that. Specifically, the display changeover switch 32 is set to display setting (second position), and display setting is performed by player operation (setting operation using the operation button 30 on the setting screen of FIG. 5). It is only possible to execute. As described above, whether or not to execute the specific effect D can reflect the intention of the game hall or the player.

[43rd effect form]
The specific effects A to D described above are effects that are executed based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening, but the specific effect is executed when the game ball does not win the general winning opening. Anyway. For example, if the game ball is not won in any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D in the game period of 10 minutes, as shown in FIG. The specific effect E for displaying on the image display device 5 the image imitating the form of the general winning opening and the notification image 2200 including the characters “There is no general winning” can be executed.

  As described above, the specific effect is not limited to an effect that is executed based on a game ball having won a general winning opening, but an effect that is executed based on a game ball that has not won a general winning opening (general winning game) It may be a presentation that suggests difficulty in winning a prize in the mouth. That is, the specific effect may be an effect related to a game event such as a game ball winning in a general winning opening (an effect executed when a game event occurs or no game event occurs).

  In the 43rd effect form shown in FIG. 27, the effect control CPU 120 stores a non-winning determination timer for determining a period in which a game ball has not won the general winning opening. When the value of the non-winning determination timer is 0 (assuming that the initial value at the start of power supply is 0), the effect control CPU 120 receives a start winning port designation command and a general winning port from the gaming control microcomputer 100. When any of the designated command and the big prize winning command is received, 10 minutes is set as the value of the non-winning determination timer, and the timer is started. If the general prize opening designation command is received before the non-winning determination timer times out (before 10 minutes have elapsed from the timer set), 10 minutes is again set as the value of the non-winning determination timer, and again Start the timer.

  On the other hand, when the non-winning determination timer times out due to not receiving the general winning opening designation command before the non-winning determination timer times out, a notification image 2200 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. The specific effect E to be displayed is executed. When the specific effect E is executed, 10 minutes is again set as the value of the non-winning determination timer, and the timer is started again. The specific effect E (display of the notification image 2200) is continued for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). In this case, the value of the non-winning determination timer is a value corresponding to the elapsed time from the timing when the game ball has won the general winning opening.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the variable display of the decorative symbols, and performs the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the big winning opening designation command once for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute). If it is not received, a game end determination is made to determine that the game has ended, and the update of the non-winning determination timer is suspended (so that the timer value is not updated). When the update of the non-winning determination timer is temporarily stopped, the process (specifically, the execution of the specific effect E) due to the non-winning determination timer timing out is limited. Thereby, the specific effect E is not executed in a period when the game is not performed (execution of the specific effect E is prohibited). When the update of the non-winning determination timer is not paused, the effect control CPU 120 performs processing due to the non-winning determination timer timing out (specifically, in response to detection of a time-out when the timer value becomes 0). (Execution of the specific effect E) becomes possible. In the state where the update of the non-winning determination timer is temporarily stopped, the production control CPU 120 receives any of the start winning port specifying command, the general winning port specifying command, and the big winning port winning command. The renewal of the non-winning determination timer is resumed.

  In other words, the non-winning determination timer is updated during a period in which the player is playing a game (the game is not determined to be finished). A time-out occurs when the number of winnings in the winning opening becomes 0 (the time-out control CPU 120 detects the time-out). As a result, when the player is playing a game, the specific effect E is executed if no winning in the general winning opening occurs for 10 minutes.

  In the above-described production form, whether or not the player is playing a game may be determined based on whether or not a game ball is being fired toward the game area 10. For example, a launch detection sensor is provided near the entrance of the game ball in the game area 10, and it is determined whether or not the player is playing a game depending on whether or not the launch detection sensor detects a game ball. Anyway. Further, it may be determined whether or not the player is playing a game, depending on whether or not the hitting operation handle 63 is operated (whether or not the launching motor provided in the hitting ball launching device is operating). good.

  In this way, when the player is playing a game and no winning in the general winning opening occurs in a predetermined period (10-minute gaming period), the specific effect E is executed, Informs that no winning in the general winning opening has occurred. By this notification, the player can grasp that the winning to the general winning opening has not occurred, and can use it as a reference (for example, judgment material for selecting a base) when playing the game. Further, in the game hall, by grasping the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the specific effect E is executed (or the execution frequency of the specific effect E is high), the game nail is made so that the winning frequency at the general winning opening becomes higher. It is possible to take measures such as performing maintenance.

  In addition, when a game is being played by the player and no winning in the general winning opening has occurred, the specific effect E is executed, but the game is not being played by the player. When no prize has occurred in the general prize opening, the non-winning determination timer is temporarily stopped (the production control CPU 120 does not execute the process based on the timeout of the non-winning determination timer). Execution of the specific effect E is restricted.

  It should be noted that the specific effect E may be executed even when it is determined that no prize has occurred in the general prize opening due to the fact that no game is being played by the player. The specific effect E may be executed at a lower rate than the case where it is determined that a winning in the general winning opening has not occurred despite the game being played by the player.

[44th form]
The specific effect E is not limited to notifying that a general winning opening has not been won within a predetermined period (the number of winnings in the general winning opening is less than 1), You may make it alert | report that it can specify that the number of winnings to a winning opening is less than predetermined number. In the 44th effect form, the effect control CPU 120 stores a winning number determination timer for counting the number of winning game balls to the general winning opening in a predetermined period. When the value of the winning number determination timer is 0 (assuming that the initial value at the start of power supply is 0), the effect control CPU 120 receives a start winning port designation command and a general winning port from the gaming control microcomputer 100. When either the designated command or the big prize winning command is received, 30 minutes is set as the value of the winning number determination timer, and the timer is started. At this time, the value of the winning number counter area formed in the RAM 122 is set to zero. Then, 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter area every time a general winning opening designation command is received during the period until the winning number determination timer times out (30 minutes from the timer set).

  Then, when the value of the winning number counter area at the timing when the winning number determination timer times out is less than a predetermined number (for example, 3), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the specified effect E is within a predetermined period. That the number of winnings is less than a predetermined number and / or the number of winnings within a predetermined period is notified. For example, a message “The number of general winnings for 30 minutes is less than 3” and / or a message “There is only one general winning number for 30 minutes” is displayed on the image display device 5.

  When the specific effect E is executed, 30 minutes is again set as the value of the winning number determination timer, and the timer is started again. The specific effect E is continued for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). In this case, the value of the winning number determination timer is a value corresponding to the elapsed time after the specific effect E is started. On the other hand, when the value of the winning number counter area at the timing when the winning number determination timer times out is equal to or larger than a predetermined number (for example, 3), the specific number E is not executed and the winning number determination timer is set. Set the value again to 30 minutes and start the timer again.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the variable display of the decorative symbols, and performs the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the big winning opening designation command once for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute). If it is not received, a game end determination is made to determine that the game has ended, and the update of the winning number determination timer is suspended (so that the timer value is not updated). When the update of the winning number determination timer is temporarily stopped, processing (specifically, execution of the specific effect E) due to timeout of the winning number determination timer is limited. Thereby, the specific effect E is not executed in a period when the game is not performed (execution of the specific effect E is prohibited). When the update of the winning number determination timer is not paused, the effect control CPU 120 responds to detection of a time-out when the winning number determination timer times out (specifically, the timer value becomes zero). (Execution of the specific effect E) becomes possible. Then, when the update of the winning number determination timer is temporarily stopped, the production control CPU 120 receives any of the start winning mouth designation command, the general winning mouth designation command, and the big winning mouth prize command. Then, the update of the winning number determination timer is restarted.

  In other words, the winning number determination timer is updated during a period in which the player is playing a game (no game end determination is made), and 30 minutes have elapsed within the period in which the player is playing a game. The time-out occurs (the time-out control CPU 120 detects the time-out). At the time of the time-out, the specific effect E is executed only when the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the game period of 30 minutes is less than the predetermined number.

  In the above-described production form, whether or not the player is playing a game may be determined based on whether or not a game ball is being fired toward the game area 10. For example, a launch detection sensor is provided near the entrance of the game ball in the game area 10, and it is determined whether or not the player is playing a game depending on whether or not the launch detection sensor detects a game ball. Anyway. Further, it may be determined whether or not the player is playing a game, depending on whether or not the hitting operation handle 63 is operated (whether or not the launching motor provided in the hitting ball launching device is operating). good.

  Thus, even if the player is playing a game, the specific effect E is executed when the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the predetermined period (30 minute game period) is less than the predetermined number. Thus, it is notified that the number of winnings in the general winning opening during the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number. By this notification, the player can grasp that the frequency of winning in the general winning opening is low, and can use it as a reference (for example, judgment material for selecting a base) when playing the game. Further, in the game hall, by grasping the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the specific effect E is executed (or the execution frequency of the specific effect E is high), the game nail is made so that the winning frequency at the general winning opening becomes higher. It is possible to take measures such as performing maintenance.

  In addition, when the number of winnings in the general winning opening in a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number even though the game is being played by the player, the specific effect E is executed, but the game is performed by the player. If the number of prizes received in the general prize opening during the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number, the winning number determination timer is temporarily stopped (the effect control CPU 120 executes processing based on the timeout of the winning number determination timer) By doing so, the execution of the specific effect E is restricted.

  It should be noted that the specific effect E may be executed even when it is determined that the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number because the player is not playing a game. In this case, the specific effect is produced at a lower rate than the case where it is determined that the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number even though the game is being performed by the player. E may be executed.

[45th effect form]
In the 43rd effect form and the 44th effect form, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that the number of winning prizes in the general winning opening within a predetermined period is smaller than the predetermined number (including 0), the situation at that time Regardless, the specific effect E is executed. However, the execution ratio of the specific effect E may be varied according to the state when this determination is made. In the forty-fifth production mode, the gaming state at the timing (the timing when the non-winning determination timer times out, the timing when the winning number determination timer times out) determined that the number of wins to the general winning opening within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number However, (1) the specific effect E is executed in the normal state, and (2) the specific effect E is not executed in the probability variation state or the short time state.

  Note that the gaming state at the timing (the timing when the non-winning determination timer has timed out, the timing when the winning number determination timer has timed out) determined that the number of winnings in the general winning opening within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number is (1 ) In the normal state, the specific effect E is executed at a rate of, for example, 80%, and (2) In the case of the probability changing state or the short-time state, the specific effect E is executed at a rate of, for example, 20%. May be. As described above, it is preferable to execute the specific effects E at different ratios according to the gaming state when it is determined that the number of winnings in the general winning opening within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number.

[46th effect form]
In the 43rd effect form and the 44th effect form, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that the number of winning prizes in the general winning opening within a predetermined period is smaller than the predetermined number (including 0), the situation at that time Regardless, the specific effect E is executed in the common mode. However, the specific effect E may be varied depending on the state when this determination is made. In the 46th performance mode, the gaming state at the timing (the timing when the non-winning determination timer timed out, the timing when the winning number determination timer timed out) determined that the number of winnings in the general winning opening within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number However, (1) When it is in the normal state, the specific effect E is executed in the first mode (image display + audio output). The program is executed in two modes (image display only).

  Specifically, the first aspect of the specific effect E is informed to the image display device 5 together with the notification by the image display that displays that the number of winning in the general winning award in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number. This is a mode in which notification is performed by sound output for outputting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the second mode of the specific effect E is a mode in which only notification by image display is performed and notification by sound output is not performed.

  Note that the gaming state at the timing (the timing when the non-winning determination timer has timed out, the timing when the winning number determination timer has timed out) determined that the number of winnings in the general winning opening within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number is (1 ) In the normal state, for example, the specific effect E is executed in the first mode at a rate of 80% (executed in the second mode at a rate of 20%). The specific effect E may be executed in the first mode at a rate of 20%, for example (executed in the second mode at a rate of 80%). As described above, it is preferable to execute the specific effect E in a different mode according to the gaming state when it is determined that the number of winning in the general winning opening within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number.

[Modification of the 43rd effect form to the 46th effect form]
The specific effect E executed in the 43rd effect form to the 46th effect form is the display setting table of FIG. 4 as with the other specific effects A to D executed based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening. The execution can be switched according to the above. Specifically, the display changeover switch 32 is set to display setting (second position), and display setting is performed by player operation (setting operation using the operation button 30 on the setting screen of FIG. 5). It is only possible to execute. As described above, whether or not the specific effect E is executed can reflect the intention of the game hall or the player.

  For example, when it is not desired to execute the specific effect E on the game hall side, the specific effect E is not executed regardless of the player setting by switching the display changeover switch 32 to the non-display setting (first position). . By having such a configuration, whether or not to execute the specific performance E, that is, whether or not to notify the difficulty of winning a prize in the general winning opening is reflected with priority given to the intention of the game hall side. Can be made.

  In addition, the value of the non-winning determination timer in the 43rd effect form, the value of the winning number determination timer in the 44th effect form, and the value of the winning number counter area are all stored in the RAM 122. If it is not backed up at the time of disconnection and the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, it is erased accordingly. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is resumed, the initial state of the non-winning determination timer in the 43rd effect form and the initial state of the winning number determination timer in the 44th effect form are both invalid. The timer value is not referred to until the predetermined time is set by the effect control CPU 120. Further, the initial value of the winning number counter area in the 44th effect form becomes 0 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is resumed.

  Thus, with the stop of the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the number of winnings to the general winning opening is erased without being backed up, and when the power supply is resumed, the addition starts from 0 again. become. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid a control burden that requires providing backup means at the time of power interruption.

  As in the 45th effect form and the 46th effect form, the execution ratio of the specific effect E or the category for differentiating the effect mode of the specific effect E is either (1) whether the gaming state is a normal state or (2 ) It is not limited to whether the game state is a probable change state or a short time state. For example, it may be classified as (1) the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, or (2) whether the number of reserved memories is 0. Further, it may be classified as (1) a period after the reach state is established in the reach change or (2) a period before the reach state is established in the reach change. Also, (1) it is a period in which variable display without reach effect (non-reach fluctuation) is being executed, or (2) it is a period in which variable display with reach effect (reach fluctuation) is being executed, It may be a category. Further, it may be classified as (1) a period in which variable display without pseudo-continuous effects is being executed or (2) a period in which variable display with pseudo-continuous effects is being executed. . Further, even if the classification is (1) before execution of pseudo continuous effects in variable display with pseudo continuous effects, or (2) after execution of pseudo continuous effects in variable display with pseudo continuous effects. good. Furthermore, according to the difference of these divisions, both the execution ratio of the specific effect E and the aspect of the specific effect E may be different.

  It should be noted that the specific effect E executed in the 43rd effect form to the 46th effect form is executed when the number of wins to the general winning opening in the predetermined game period is less than the predetermined number. Not only in such a form, but among the first general prize opening 50A to the fourth general prize opening 50D, only a specific general prize opening is targeted, and the predetermined number of prizes to the specific general prize opening in a predetermined period is a predetermined number. The specific effect E may be executed when the number is smaller. For example, the general prize opening for a predetermined game period is targeted only for the second general prize opening 50B and the third general prize opening 50C, which have higher game ball winning frequencies than the first general prize opening 50A and the fourth general prize opening 50D. The specific effect E may be executed when the number of winnings is counted and the counted number of winnings is smaller than a predetermined number.

  Further, in the 43rd effect form to the 46th effect form, the specific effect E is executed when the number of wins to the general winning opening within a certain time (10 minutes or 30 minutes) is less than the predetermined number. However, the period for determining the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not limited to this. The period may be defined by the number of executions of the special figure game. For example, the variable display related to the special figure game may be executed 100 times. Further, the period may be a period from the start of power supply to the gaming machine to the present time, or may be a period defined by a plurality of business days (for example, one week or one month). In addition, the period may be a period controlled to a predetermined gaming state, for example, a period controlled to a normal state (a period in which a game is performed by left-handed), a probability change state or a time reduction It may be a period controlled by the state (a period in which a game is played with a right hand).

  Furthermore, the following method may be used as a method for determining whether or not the number of winning game balls to the general winning opening during a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number.

(A) You may make it determine whether the number of winning in a general winning opening with respect to the predetermined number of balls thrown into the game area 10 is less than a predetermined number. During driving of the launch motor provided in the hitting ball launching device, approximately 100 game balls are launched into the game area 10 in one minute. Therefore, for example, the specific effect E may be executed when the number of winnings in the general winning opening with respect to 1000 shot balls (corresponding to a game period of 10 minutes) is less than a predetermined number. . Further, the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening with respect to the number of shot balls fired in the game area 10 is calculated, and the specific effect E is executed when the ratio is lower than a predetermined ratio. May be.

  In addition, the ratio of the number of winning prizes to the general winning opening with respect to the number of shot balls fired in the game area 10 is different depending on whether it is lower than a predetermined ratio or not less than a predetermined ratio. A specific effect may be executed. For example, when the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening with respect to the number of balls shot into the game area 10 is low, the character A appears and the winning frequency to the general winning opening is low. When the level is informed and the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening with respect to the number of balls shot into the game area 10 is a medium ratio higher than the low ratio, the character B appears. Then, it is notified that the winning frequency at the general winning opening is at a medium level, and the ratio of the winning number at the general winning opening with respect to the number of shots shot into the game area 10 is higher than the medium ratio. In the case of the ratio, it may be notified that the character C appears and the winning frequency to the general winning opening is high.

(B) You may make it determine whether the number of prize balls paid out according to the winning to a general winning opening in a predetermined period is smaller than a predetermined number. For example, when 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball is won at the general prize opening, the number of prize balls paid out in accordance with the winning at the general prize opening in the game period of 30 minutes The specific effect E may be executed when the number is less than 30 (3 wins). Also, whether or not the number of prize balls paid out in response to winning in the general winning opening for a predetermined number of balls (for example, 1000 shots) fired in the game area 10 is less than the predetermined number The ratio of the number of prize balls that are paid out in accordance with the winning in the general winning opening with respect to the number of shots shot into the game area 10 is calculated, and the ratio is predetermined. The specific effect E may be executed when the ratio is lower than. In addition, when the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out in accordance with the winning in the general winning opening with respect to the number of shot balls fired in the game area 10 is lower than a predetermined ratio, or more than a predetermined ratio It may be made to perform the specific effect of a different aspect with the case where it is.

  As described above, it may be determined whether or not the number of prize balls paid out in accordance with the winning in the general winning opening is smaller than a predetermined number. It should be noted that such a form can be applied even in a case where a different number of prize balls are paid out depending on a general winning opening where game balls have been won.

(C) It may be determined whether or not the number of winning in the general winning opening is smaller than a predetermined number (for example, 5) with respect to a predetermined number of winning (for example, 100) in the starting winning opening. It is also possible to calculate the ratio of the number of winnings in the general winning opening with respect to the number of winnings in the starting winning opening, and to execute the specific effect E when the ratio is lower than a predetermined ratio. In addition, the number of prize balls paid out in accordance with the winning in the general prize opening with respect to a predetermined number of winning balls (eg, 10,000) paid out in accordance with the winning in the start winning opening is more than the predetermined number. It is also possible to determine whether or not the number is less, and the number of prize balls that are paid out in response to the winning prize in the starting prize opening is the prize ball that is paid out in accordance with the prize winning in the general prize opening. The ratio of numbers may be calculated, and the specific effect E may be executed when the ratio is lower than a predetermined ratio. In addition, the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out in accordance with the prize winning in the general prize opening to the number of prize balls paid out in accordance with the prize winning in the starting prize slot is lower than a predetermined percentage. And the specific effect of a different aspect may be performed when it is more than a predetermined ratio.

  In addition, for example, the total number of winning balls for a predetermined period when the gaming state is in the normal state (in accordance with the number of winning balls paid out in accordance with the winning at the starting winning opening and the winning at the general winning opening) The total number of award balls paid out) is calculated as a percentage of the number of prize balls paid out in accordance with the prize winning in the general winning opening, and the percentage is lower than the predetermined percentage. The specific effect E may be executed. Moreover, you may make it perform the specific production of a different aspect according to the ratio.

(D) It may be determined whether or not the number of winnings in the general winning opening for a predetermined consumption amount (for example, 1000 yen) in the gaming machine is less than a predetermined number (for example, 2 times). The ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening with respect to the amount of money consumed in the gaming machine may be calculated, and the specific effect E may be executed when the ratio is lower than a predetermined ratio. In such a form, a different predetermined number (for example, twice for 4 yen, 8 for 1 yen, etc.) depending on the rental unit price (for example, 4 yen, 1 yen, etc.) of the game media used in the gaming machine. Etc.) or different predetermined ratios (for example, 2 times / 1000 yen for 4 yen, 8 times / 1000 yen for 1 yen, etc.) are applied. In addition, specific effects in different modes are executed depending on whether the percentage of the number of winnings in the general prize opening with respect to the amount of money consumed in the gaming machine is lower than a predetermined ratio or more than a predetermined ratio You may make it do.

[47th effect form]
In the 47th effect form shown in FIG. 30, a character is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the winning of a game ball in the general winning opening, and the first start winning opening is displayed within the period during which the character is displayed. Effective start winning of the game ball (that is, winning of the game ball to the first start winning port when the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first start winning port is less than the upper limit value) and the game to the second start winning port Based on the occurrence of one of the effective start winnings of the ball (that is, winning of the game ball to the second starting winning port in a state where the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second starting winning port is less than the upper limit value) In the start winning memory display area 5H, a hold change effect is executed in which the display portion corresponding to the variable display game held including the variable display game based on the generated effective start win is changed from the normal mode to the special mode. .

  Note that the production control CPU 120 displays the display portion corresponding to the variable display game corresponding to the effective start winning based on the occurrence of the effective starting winning in the special mode from the beginning without going through the normal mode. You may make it perform change production. For example, when a new effective start winning occurs, the display part corresponding to the variable display game corresponding to the new effective start winning in accordance with the action that the displayed character swings up the wand etc. May be displayed not in the normal mode but in a special mode (from the beginning of the display of the hold information, a state in which the hold information in the special mode corresponding to the variable display game for which the start condition is finally established exists).

  Here, in the 47th effect form, and in the 48th effect form and the 49th effect form, which will be described later, each time the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening, the random number circuit 124 is used. The random number for character determination is extracted from. Then, based on the extracted character determination random number, the character determination table in FIG. 28 indicates whether or not to make the character appear, and which of the characters A to C when the character appears. Determine at the indicated rate.

  Note that the character determination random number may be extracted by the effect control CPU 120 only when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, by extracting a random number for character determination on the condition that it is not controlled to the big hit gaming state, it is possible to limit the character from appearing during the period controlled to the big hit gaming state. . In addition, it is possible to prevent characters from appearing after the reach state is established by not extracting the random numbers for character determination after the reach state is established within the period during which the variable display game is being executed.

  In the example of FIG. 28, the production control CPU 120 determines to cause the character A to appear at a rate of 10% when receiving a general winning opening designation command for designating a winning to the first general winning opening 50A. It is determined that the character B appears at a rate of 30%, and the character C is determined to appear at a rate of 60%. Also, when receiving a general prize opening designation command for designating a prize to the second general prize opening 50B, it is determined that no character appears at a rate of 50%, and character A appears at a rate of 35%. It is determined that the character B appears at a rate of 10%, and the character C is determined to appear at a rate of 5%.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines that no character will appear at a rate of 90% when receiving a general prize opening designation command for designating a prize to the third general prize opening 50C. The character C is determined to appear at a ratio. In addition, when receiving a general prize opening designation command for designating a prize to the fourth general prize opening 50D, it is determined that no character appears at a rate of 75%, and a character C appears at a rate of 25%. Decide to let

  In other words, in this example, when a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A and the second general winning opening 50B provided in the left gaming area 10A, the third gaming area provided in the right gaming area 10B. Characters appear at a higher rate than when the game ball wins at either the general winning opening 50C or the fourth general winning opening 50D. Since the player fires a game ball in the left game area 10A when the game state is in the normal state, and a game ball is fired in the right game area 10B when the game state is in the probabilistic state or in the short-time state, in the normal state, the player Characters appear at a higher rate than the state or the short time state.

  Then, in the 47th effect form to the 49th effect form, the specific effect (specific effect F (holding change effect)) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (effective start winning, reach state) during the period in which the character is displayed. , The specific effect G (the change result notice effect by dialogue) is executed, and in these effect forms, when the game state is the normal state, the game state is higher than when the game state is the probability change state or the short time state. Specific effects can be executed at a rate.

  In this way, in the normal state, it is disadvantageous compared to the probability variation state and the short time state, and the player's game, for example, the state of low interest in variable display of the special figure game is low. By making the execution frequency high, the interest is improved. On the other hand, the probability variation state and the short time state are advantageous compared to the normal state, and the player's game, for example, the state of high interest in variable display of special figure games is high. However, if it remains high, it may be detrimental. Therefore, in the probability variation state and the short time state, the appearance frequency of the character and the execution frequency of the specific effect are set low.

  In addition to the example shown in FIG. 28, even when a game ball wins the same general winning opening, the rate of appearance of the characters may differ depending on the game state, for example, the normal state When a game ball is won at the second general winning opening 50B, a character appears at a rate of 50%. However, when a game ball is won at the second general winning opening 50B in the probability variation state and the short time state, 10%. Characters may appear at a rate of.

  Further, the character can appear only in the normal state, and the character may not appear in the probability variation state and the short time state. Thus, in order to “make the execution rate of the effect in one state different from the execution rate of the effect in the other state”, the effect can be executed only in one state and the effect is not executed in the other state. Is included. In contrast to the example shown in FIG. 28, the appearance ratio of characters in the probability variation state and the normal state may be higher than the appearance ratio of characters in the normal state.

  In the example of FIG. 28, when a game ball wins the first general winning opening 50A, characters appear at a higher rate than when a game ball wins the second general winning opening 50B. Yes. Further, when a game ball wins in the fourth general winning opening 50D, a character appears at a higher rate than when a game ball wins in the third general winning opening 50C. In this embodiment, when a game ball is launched into the left game area 10A, the frequency of the game ball winning in the second general prize opening 50B is higher than that in the first general prize opening 50A, and the right game area 10B is entered. When a game ball is fired, the frequency at which the game ball wins in the third general winning opening 50C is higher than in the fourth general winning opening 50D. That is, when a game ball wins a general winning opening where it is difficult for a game ball to win, a character appears at a higher rate than when a game ball wins a general winning slot where a game ball easily wins. On the other hand, when a game ball is won in a general winning opening where a game ball is easy to win, a higher percentage of characters are played than when a game ball is won in a general winning port where a game ball is difficult to win. You may make it appear.

  Further, in the example of FIG. 28, characters that may be displayed when a game ball wins in the first general winning port 50A and the second general winning port 50B, where the frequency of winning the game ball in the normal state is high, Although it is the characters A to C, there is a possibility that the game ball is displayed when the game ball wins in the third general winning port 50C and the fourth general winning port 50D, where the frequency of winning the game ball is high in the probability changing state and the short time state. The character with is only the character C. In the probability variation state and the short time state, which are gaming states that have a higher gaming interest compared to the normal state, the occurrence of a situation in which the character display period elapses without the predetermined condition being met, although the character has appeared, Since it is conceivable to cause a decrease, only the character C having the longest display period can be displayed.

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 28, and even when a game ball is won in the same general winning opening, characters appearing in accordance with the game state may be different. 2 When the game ball is won at the general winning opening 50B, the characters A to C may be displayed. However, when the game ball is won at the second general winning opening 50B in the probability variation state and the short time state, the character is displayed. Only C may be displayed. Also, contrary to the example shown in FIG. 28, the number of characters that may be displayed in the probability variation state and the normal state is set to be greater than the number of characters that may be displayed in the normal state. May be.

  FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating a display period of each character displayed on the image display device 5. It is assumed that the characters A to C are immediately displayed on the image display device 5 at the timing when the character to be displayed is determined based on the winning in the general winning opening. That is, the character is displayed immediately after the winning in the general winning opening, so that the player can easily grasp that the winning in the general winning opening has occurred.

  When the character A is displayed on the image display device 5, (1) when the predetermined condition is not satisfied within 1 minute from the start of display (effective start winning, reach state is established), from the start of display of the character A Character A is erased from the screen at the timing when one minute has elapsed, and (2) when a predetermined condition is satisfied within one minute from the start of display, a specific effect (specific effect F (holding change effect) based on the establishment of the predetermined condition ), The character A is erased from the screen at the timing when the specific effect G (change result notice effect) is completed.

  The predetermined condition in (1) is a condition related to a game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (including a condition related to an effect executed as the game progresses). Even when an effective start prize is generated, if the number of variable display games held including the variable display game corresponding to the effective start prize is 1, the start condition for the variable display game is satisfied. Since the start condition is satisfied immediately after the hold (hold information is deleted), it is difficult to secure a period for executing the hold change effect by the displayed character. Therefore, when the number of hold of the variable display game after the effective start winning is equal to or less than the predetermined number (1 in this example), the hold change effect is not executed, and the number of hold of the variable display game after the effective start winning is the predetermined number. If the number is greater than (1 in this example), the hold change effect may be executed.

  Further, the character may be deleted when the game state is shifted to the big hit game state or when the above-described effect control CPU 120 determines the game end. The character displayed on the image display device 5 immediately before the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped is not displayed again after the power supply is resumed. That is, it is assumed that the backup process for displaying the character displayed before the power interruption on the image display device 5 after the power supply is resumed is not performed.

  Note that the execution of the specific effect F (holding change effect) causes the reserved character to be stored in the holding memory as the appearing character performs a predetermined action (that is, according to a change in the mode of the displayed object). Both the case where the aspect of the corresponding display part changes and the case where it does not change shall be included. Further, the timing at which the specific effect F (holding change effect) ends is the timing at which the character completes a predetermined action. Specifically, as shown in FIG. In the example, the character A is used. However, in the specific effect F (holding change effect), the character B may appear or the character C may appear). This is the timing at which the action effect for covering the corresponding display part is performed for a certain period of time (a predetermined action effect period has elapsed).

  In addition, the fact that the specific effect G (change result notice effect) is executed means that as shown in FIGS. 32 (f) and 32 (g), the appearing character 3100 (in this example, the character B is the specific effect G). In (variation result notice effect), when character A appears or character C may appear), it means that a predetermined dialogue is issued, and the timing at which specific effect G (variation result notice effect) ends is This is the timing when the dialogue of the character is displayed for a certain period of time (a predetermined dialogue display period has elapsed).

  When the character B is displayed on the image display device 5, (1) when the predetermined condition is not satisfied within 2 minutes from the start of display (effective start winning, reach state is established), from the start of the display of the character B Character B is erased from the screen at the timing when two minutes have elapsed, and (2) when a predetermined condition is satisfied within two minutes from the start of display, a specific effect (specific effect F (holding change effect) based on the establishment of the predetermined condition ), The character B is erased from the screen at the timing when the specific effect G (change result notice effect) is completed.

  When the character C is displayed on the image display device 5, (1) when the predetermined condition (effective start winning, establishment of reach state) is not established within 3 minutes from the start of display, the display of the character C is started. Character C is erased from the screen at the timing when 3 minutes have elapsed, and (2) when a predetermined condition is satisfied within 3 minutes from the start of display, a specific effect (specific effect F (holding change effect) based on the establishment of the predetermined condition ), The character C is deleted from the screen at the timing when the specific effect G (change result notice effect) is completed.

  As described above, the state in which the game ball is won at the general winning opening is shown to the player by immediately displaying the character on the image display device 5 based on the winning of the game ball at the general winning opening. Can be recognized. In addition, the period during which the character is displayed is a specific period in which the specific effect can be executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Even if the predetermined condition is satisfied during the period when the character is not displayed, the predetermined condition is satisfied. Since the specific effect based on the character is not executed, the player recognizes that the specific effect is executed if the predetermined condition is satisfied while the character is displayed, and plays the game to satisfy the predetermined condition. As a result, the interest of the game is enhanced until a specific performance is executed.

  Further, since the display period differs depending on the character to be displayed, it is possible to make the player interested in which character is being displayed. The player who has confirmed the character type can grasp the display period of the character, that is, the period during which the predetermined condition must be satisfied in order to execute the specific effect. Thereby, the interest until a specific effect is performed can be improved.

  In addition, as described above, the appearance ratio of each character, that is, the set ratio for a specific period in which a predetermined condition must be established differs depending on the general winning opening, so that the player can play a game ball in any general winning opening. You will be interested in winning.

(Specific example of specific effect F (holding change effect))
In the 47th effect form shown in FIG. 30, when any of the characters A to C is displayed on the image display device 5 and an effective start winning is generated, the character displayed as the specific effect F is displayed. The hold change effect with the action is executed. As described above, the occurrence of the effective start winning is the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening when the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first starting winning opening is less than the upper limit, and the second That is, winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening occurs when the second reserved memory number corresponding to the starting winning opening is less than the upper limit value.

  The production control CPU 120 has received a start winning port designation command specifying “first start winning port” or “second start winning port”, and a start winning determination result specifying command including valid data that is not blank data. Based on this, it is possible to recognize the occurrence of the effective start winning. FIG. 31 shows a specific example of the hold change effect in the 47th effect form.

  In FIG. 31 (a), the decorative symbols change (for example, scrolling in the vertical direction) is executed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and the reserved memory is stored. It is assumed that the number (the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number) is 2. At this time, in the start winning memory display area 5H, among the variable display games in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, the display part (left end) corresponding to the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied first. Is displayed in the normal mode, and the display part (second from the left) corresponding to the variable display game that satisfies the start condition second is displayed in the normal mode.

  At this time, it is assumed that the effect control CPU 120 determines to cause the character A to appear at a rate of 35% based on the fact that the game ball has won the second general winning opening 50B (see FIG. 28). In FIG. 31B, based on this determination, the effect control CPU 120 displays the character 3000 (character A) having the staff 3001 on the image display device 5. It is assumed that the character A appears on the screen immediately after the general winning.

  Then, it is assumed that an effective start winning is made to the first start winning opening within one minute from the appearance of the character A, and the predetermined condition is satisfied. In this case, in FIG. 31C, the number of reserved memories is 3, and the display part (third from the left) corresponding to the variable display game that satisfies the start condition third is displayed in the normal mode. The production control CPU 120 that has detected the occurrence of the effective start winning, that is, the establishment of the predetermined condition in the state where the character is displayed, determines whether or not to change the display portion corresponding to each of the three reserved storages from the normal mode to the special mode. Each is determined.

  Here, the production control CPU 120 determines each start prize determination result designation command (not blank data) stored in the start prize command storage area for the first special figure and the start prize command storage area for the second special figure. (Contains valid data). As shown in FIG. 31 (d), regarding the start winning determination result designation command for designating “big hit”, the mode of the display portion corresponding to the command is changed from the normal mode to the special mode at a rate of 80%. It is determined that the mode of the display portion corresponding to the command is not changed in the normal mode at a rate of 20%. On the other hand, regarding the start winning determination result designation command for designating “out of”, it is decided to change the mode of the display part corresponding to the command from the normal mode to the special mode at a rate of 10%, and the rate of 90% Thus, it is determined that the mode of the display part corresponding to the command is not changed in the normal mode.

  In this example, regarding the start winning determination result designation command corresponding to the variable display game in which the first and second start conditions are satisfied, the mode of the display portion corresponding to the command is not changed in the normal mode. Only with respect to the start prize determination result designation command corresponding to the variable display game for which the start condition is satisfied for the third time, the display part mode corresponding to the command is changed from the normal mode to the special mode. Suppose that it is decided to make it happen (with pending change).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 31 (e), the effect control CPU 120 directs the character 3000 (character A) to point the tip of the cane 3001 toward the start-winning memory display area 5H, and the flame 3002 emitted from the tip of the cane 3001. As a result, an action effect in such a manner that a display part corresponding to each reserved storage is surrounded is executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 31 (f), the effect control CPU 120 changes the display mode to the normal mode based on the above-described determination for the second display part from the left end and the left with the execution of the action effect. For the third display portion from the left without changing, the display mode is changed from the normal mode to the special mode based on the determination described above. When the action effect is executed for a predetermined period, the character 3000 (character A) holding the wand 3001 and the flame 3002 emitted from the tip of the wand 3001 are erased from the screen.

  As a result of the change in the display portion mode accompanying the action effect, the player will see the third display portion from the left as a result of the action of the character 3000 (character A) that has appeared based on the winning in the general winning opening. Recognizes that the game has changed from the normal mode to the special mode, and expects a variable display game executed three times after the currently executed variable display game.

  On the other hand, in FIGS. 31 (c) and 31 (d), regarding the start winning determination result designation command corresponding to the three variable display games in which the start condition is not satisfied, all of the display part modes corresponding to the command are normally set. When it is decided not to change the mode (no change in hold), after the action effect shown in FIG. 31 (e) is performed, three hold memories are stored as shown in FIG. 31 (g). None of the three corresponding reserved sites remain in the normal mode.

  Thus, the effective start winning is generated during the character display period by executing the specific effect F (holding change effect) triggered by the fact that “the effective start winning has occurred within the period during which the character is displayed”. Whether or not the game ball is won at the general winning opening until the specific effect is executed can be enhanced. In addition, a game ball is placed at the general prize opening by an effect configuration in which a display result of the variable display game for which the start condition has not yet been established is triggered by an event of winning a prize at the general prize opening that is not related to the progress of the variable display game. It is possible to further enhance the interest from winning a prize until a specific performance is executed.

  Also, with the action of the character 3000 (character A), of the display parts corresponding to the variable display game for which the start condition has not yet been established, the display form of any display part changes from the normal form to the special form. If not, and if it changes, it can be noted which display mode of the display part changes from the normal mode to the special mode. That is, it is possible to improve interest by suggesting a variable display game that a player can expect.

  In addition, an effect that suggests winning in the general prize opening (appearance of character A) and an effect that suggests a display result of a variable display game in which the start condition is not satisfied (action of character A) are common objects ( By being constituted by the character A), it is possible to further enhance the interest until the specific effect is executed after the game ball is won in the general winning opening. The common object suggests the winning to the general winning opening not related to the progress of the variable display game and the display result of the variable display game for which the start condition is not satisfied, thereby relating to the appearance and action of the character. It can increase the player's interest.

  The specific effect F (holding change effect) is a variable display game corresponding to an effective start prize (an effective start prize that has been determined to satisfy a predetermined condition) as an opportunity to execute the hold change effect. Lastly, the display results are announced for each variable display game that is held, including the variable display game for which the start condition is satisfied). However, the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the hold change effect is executed. Targeting only the variable display game (variable display game where the start condition was finally satisfied) corresponding to the effective start prize (the effective start prize determined that the predetermined condition was established) The display result may be notified in advance. On the other hand, the variable display game corresponding to the effective start prize that triggered the execution of the on-hold change effect (the effective start prize that triggered the determination that the predetermined condition was met) (the last start condition) The display result may be notified in advance by targeting a variable display game (except for the variable display game in which is established).

(Character deletion process)
Similarly to the specific effects A to D, a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect F (holding change effect) is provided. When the specific effect F is executed, the effect control CPU 120 erases the displayed character from the screen, and at the same time, wins the winning history (at least the first general prize opening 50A to the first general winning opening 50A to the second) corresponding to the specific effect F. 30. One or more winning histories to the general winning opening 50D and one or more winning histories to any of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening are deleted (the winning history of FIG. 30). Reset condition).

  In addition, when the displayed character is erased by the elapse of a predetermined display period without executing the specific effect F, the winning history (at least in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect F is associated with this). The first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D include one or more winning histories) (the winning history reset condition in FIG. 30).

  FIG. 33A is a timing chart showing the display period of each character when the specific effect F (holding change effect) is executed. In this figure, it is assumed that a decorative display variable display game is executed in the order of variable display 1, variable display 2, variable display 3, and variable display 4. When the variable display 1 is being executed, one of the characters A to C is displayed on the screen based on the fact that the game ball has won one of the general winning ports 50A to 50D at the timing of (1). The

  When the displayed character is the character A, the character A is not displayed at the timing of (2) after one minute has passed since the appearance without generating an effective start winning. During this time, the variable display 1 is ended and the variable display 2 is started. However, with the end of the variable display 1 and the start of the variable display 2, the character A is not displayed but is continuously displayed. Yes. If an effective start prize is generated within one minute from the appearance of the character A, the character A is not displayed after the action effect ends.

  When the displayed character is the character B, the character B is not displayed at the timing of (3) after 2 minutes from the appearance without generating an effective start winning. During this time, the variable display 1 is ended and the variable display 2 is started. Further, the variable display 2 is ended and the variable display 3 is started. However, the variable display 1 is ended, the variable display 2 is started, and the variable display 2 is started. With the end of the display 2 and the start of the variable display 3, the character B is not displayed but is continuously displayed. If an effective start winning is generated within 2 minutes from the appearance of the character B, the character B is not displayed after the action effect ends.

  When the displayed character is the character C, the character C is not displayed at the timing when 5 minutes have passed since the appearance without generating an effective start winning. In this example, the action effect is executed without the character being hidden because the effective start winning is generated at the timing of (4) before 5 minutes have passed since the appearance of the character C. At the timing (5) when the production ends, the display portion corresponding to one or more reserved memories changes from the normal mode to the special mode. During this time, the variable display 1 is finished and the variable display 2 is started, the variable display 2 is finished and the variable display 3 is started, and the variable display 3 is finished and the variable display 4 is started. With the end of display 1 and the start of variable display 2, the end of variable display 2 and the start of variable display 3, and the end of variable display 3 and the start of variable display 4, character C is not hidden. It is displayed continuously.

  As described above, once the character is displayed, it is continuously displayed until “a predetermined condition is satisfied” or “a predetermined period of time elapses without the predetermined condition being satisfied”. ing. Then, the character is not displayed at the earlier timing of “the predetermined condition is satisfied” and “the predetermined period elapses without the predetermined condition being satisfied”.

[48th form]
In the forty-eighth effect form shown in FIG. 30, a character is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the fact that a game ball has won a general winning opening, and the reach state is established within the period during which the character is displayed. Based on the display result of the variable display game being executed (variable display game with a variation pattern with a reach state) is displayed. That is, the display control of the character is the same as in the 47th effect form, but the predetermined condition to be established within the character display period and the type of the specific effect executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied are different.

(Specific example of specific effect G (change result notice effect))
In the forty-eighth effect form shown in FIG. 30, when the reach state is established in a state where any of the characters A to C is displayed on the image display device 5, the specific effect G of the character being displayed is displayed. The change result notice effect accompanied by the dialogue display is executed. As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can grasp the establishment timing of the reach state according to the variation pattern. Therefore, when the variable display game with the reach state is being executed, and the remaining time of the variable display game with the reach state has reached a predetermined reach state establishment timing, the fact that the reach state has been established The specific effect G can be executed if the character is displayed at this time. FIG. 32 shows a specific example of the change result notice effect in the 48th effect form.

  In FIG. 32 (a), decoration pattern changes (for example, vertical scroll display) are executed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It is assumed that the number (the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number) is 1. At this time, in the start winning memory display area 5H, it is assumed that the display portion (left end) corresponding to one variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is displayed in the normal mode. .

  At this time, it is assumed that the effect control CPU 120 determines to cause the character B to appear at a rate of 30% based on the fact that the game ball has won the first general winning opening 50A (see FIG. 28). In FIG. 32B, based on this determination, the effect control CPU 120 displays the character 3100 (character B) having the staff 3101 on the image display device 5. Character B shall appear on the screen immediately after the general winning.

  In FIG. 32 (c), it is assumed that after the appearance of the character B, the variable display of the decorative symbols that has been executed is finished and the display result is derived and displayed. In this case, as a finalized decorative symbol, a combination of non-reach loses with “2” on the left, “1” on the right, and “3” on the middle is derived and displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 32 (d), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition, and accordingly, the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. No longer exists, and the leftmost display region is not displayed.

  It is assumed that the reach state is established and the predetermined condition is established within 2 minutes from the appearance of the character B. In FIG. 32 (e), with the establishment of the reach state, a character 3050 of “reach!” Is displayed at the top of the screen. The production control CPU 120 that detects the establishment of the reach state, that is, the establishment of the predetermined condition in the state where the character is displayed determines the dialogue of the character B.

  Here, the CPU 120 for effect control confirms whether the display result of the decorative display variable display game being executed is determined to be the big hit combination or the lost combination. It should be noted that it may be confirmed whether the last variation pattern designation command received from the game control microcomputer 100 is a big hit variation pattern designation command or a deviation variation pattern designation command. .

  Then, as shown in FIG. 32 (f), when it is determined that the display result of the variable display game is a big hit combination, the character of the character displaying the “chance!” Line at a rate of 25%. It is determined to be displayed horizontally, and it is determined to display the line “Intense heat !!” next to the character being displayed at a rate of 75%. On the other hand, when it is determined that the display result of the variable display game is a combination of lost, it is determined to display the line “chance!” Next to the displayed character at a rate of 90%. % Will be displayed next to the character being displayed at the rate of%.

  In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to display the line “Intense heat !!” next to the character being displayed. Based on this determination, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 32 (g), the character 3100 (character B) swings up the cane 3101 and the effect of emitting the dialogue 3102 of "Burning !!" Is executed. When the dialogue 3102 is displayed for a predetermined period of time, the character 3100 (character B) having the wand 3101 and the dialogue 3102 emitted from the character 3100 are erased from the screen.

  As a result, for the player, there is a possibility that the decorative symbol that will be the jackpot combination will be finally stopped and displayed as a result of the reach production due to the dialogue of the character 3100 (character B) that has appeared based on the winning in the general winning opening. It is possible to grasp that it is expensive.

  In this way, whether or not the reach state is established in the character display period by executing the specific effect G (change result notice effect) triggered by “the reach state is established within the period during which the character is displayed”. It is possible to make it interested in whether or not, and it is possible to enhance the interest until a specific effect is executed after a game ball is won in the general winning opening. In addition, in the event of a prize-winning event at a general prize opening not related to the progress of the variable display game, a play structure for notifying the display result of a variable display game for which a display result has not been derived and displayed has been announced. It is possible to further enhance the interest from the winning of the ball until the specific performance is executed. Further, attention can be paid to the dialogue of the character 3000 (character A), and the interest of the character display effect can be improved.

  In addition, an effect that suggests winning in the general prize opening (appearance of character B) and an effect that suggests the display result of the variable display game whose display result is not derived and displayed (the line of character B) are common objects. By being constituted by (Character B), it is possible to further enhance the interest until the specific effect is executed after the game ball is won in the general winning opening. Then, a common object suggests a winning to a general winning opening that is not related to the progress of the variable display game and a display result of the variable display game that is not fixed, so that the player's appearance and dialogue regarding the appearance of the character and dialogue Increase interest.

  In the forty-eighth effect form, the specific effect G in which the character emits a predetermined dialogue is executed when the reach state is established, that is, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is in a predetermined mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the specific effect G may be executed when the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed regardless of the mode of variable display of the decorative symbol. Further, for example, when a predetermined notice effect different from the specific effect G (for example, a step-up notice effect executed immediately after the start of the variable display game) is executed when variable display of decorative symbols is executed. The specific effect G may be executed as follows.

  Moreover, in the 48th effect form, the example in which the character is displayed based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening regardless of the decorative display variable display mode has been described. The character may be displayed on the condition that the variable display of the decorative pattern executed when the game ball is won at the general winning opening becomes a predetermined mode. For example, the game ball is won at the general winning opening. The character may be displayed on the condition that the variable display of the decorative pattern being executed at the time of reaching the reach state (the variable display game of the reach variation pattern is being executed).

(Character deletion process)
As with the specific effects A to D and the specific effects F, a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect G (change result notice effect) is provided. When the specific effect G is executed, the effect control CPU 120 deletes the displayed character from the screen, and at the same time, wins history (at least the first general prize opening 50A to the first general winning opening 50A to the first game) corresponding to the specific effect G. 4 (including the winning history of one or more times to the general winning opening 50D) (the winning history reset condition in FIG. 30).

  In addition, when the displayed character is erased with the elapse of a predetermined display period without executing the specific effect G, the winning history (at least in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect G is associated with this). The first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D include one or more winning histories) (the winning history reset condition in FIG. 30).

  FIG. 33B is a timing chart showing the display period of each character when the specific effect G (change result notice effect) is executed. In this figure, it is assumed that the decorative display variable display game is executed in the order of variable display 1, variable display 2, variable display 3, and variable display 4. Of these, the reach effect is executed only on the variable display 4 and the reach state is reached. Is assumed to hold. When the variable display 1 is being executed, any one of the characters A to C is displayed on the screen based on the fact that the game ball has won one of the general winning ports 50A to 50D at the timing of (11). The

  When the displayed character is the character A, the character A is not displayed at the timing of (12) when one minute has elapsed from the appearance without the reach state being established. During this time, with the end of the variable display 1 and the start of the variable display 2, the character A is not displayed but is continuously displayed. When the reach state is established within one minute from the appearance of character A, character A is not displayed after the end of the line display effect.

  When the displayed character is the character B, the character B is not displayed at the timing of (13) when two minutes have passed since the appearance without establishment of the reach state. During this time, with the end of the variable display 1 and the start of the variable display 2, and the end of the variable display 2 and the start of the variable display 3, the character B is continuously displayed instead of being hidden. If the reach state is established within 2 minutes from the appearance of the character B, the character B is not displayed after the end of the dialogue display effect.

  When the displayed character is the character C, the character C is not displayed at the timing when 5 minutes have passed since the appearance without the reach state being established. In this example, the dialogue display effect is executed without the character being hidden because the reach state is established at the timing of (14) before 5 minutes have passed since the appearance of the character C. During this time, the character C is not displayed as the variable display 1 ends and the variable display 2 starts, the variable display 2 ends and the variable display 3 starts, and the variable display 3 ends and the variable display 4 starts. It is displayed continuously.

[49th effect form]
In the 47th effect form and the 48th effect form described above, an example is shown in which a specific effect is executed as long as a predetermined condition is satisfied, regardless of which type of character A to C is displayed. However, only when a specific type of character is displayed, a specific type of specific effect may be executed.

  For example, in the 49th effect form shown in FIG. 30, the specific effect F (holding change effect) is executed based on the fact that an effective start winning is generated within the period in which either the character A or B is displayed. Thus, even if an effective start winning is generated during the period in which the character C is displayed, the specific effect F (holding change effect) is not executed. In addition, the specific effect G (change result notice effect) is executed based on the fact that the reach state is established within the period during which the character C is displayed, and the character A or B is temporarily displayed. Even if the reach state is established within a certain period, the specific effect G (change result notice effect) is not executed.

  As described above, according to the type of character to be displayed, that is, the notification mode for notifying that the game ball has won the general winning opening, the predetermined condition for enabling execution of the specific effect, and the predetermined condition The types of specific effects executed based on the establishment may be different.

  In addition, although the predetermined condition for enabling execution of the specific effect is common regardless of the type of the displayed character, the specific that is executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied according to the type of the displayed character The type of production may be different. For example, when an effective start winning is generated during the period in which the character A or B is displayed, the specific effect F (holding change effect) is executed (the specific effect G (change result notice effect) is not executed). However, when an effective start winning is generated during the period in which the character C is displayed, the specific effect G (change result notice effect) is executed (the specific effect F (holding change effect) is not executed). May be.

  Moreover, although the predetermined conditions for enabling execution of a specific effect differ depending on the type of character displayed, it is executed when a predetermined condition corresponding to each is established regardless of the type of character displayed. The types of specific effects may be common. For example, when an effective start prize is generated during the period in which the character A or B is displayed, the specific effect F (holding change effect) is executed (even if the reach state is established within that period, the specific effect F is specified) However, when the reach state is established within the period in which the character C is displayed, the specific effect F (holding change effect) is executed (assuming that an effective start prize is generated within that period). However, the specific effect F may not be executed).

  In addition, if an effective start winning occurs before the reach state is established within the period in which the character is displayed, a specific effect F (holding change effect) in which the displayed character performs an action is displayed. After the execution, the character is deleted. (2) When the reach state is established prior to the effective start winning, the character is displayed after executing the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) in which the displayed character emits speech. It may be deleted. As described above, there is a possibility that a plurality of predetermined conditions (1) and (2) may be satisfied within the display period of one character, and the predetermined condition previously satisfied among the plurality of predetermined conditions is set. A corresponding type of specific effect may be executed.

  In addition, if an effective start winning occurs before the reach state is established within the period in which the character is displayed, a specific effect F (holding change effect) in which the displayed character performs an action is displayed. The character is deleted after being executed, and (2) the character is deleted after executing the specific effect F (holding change effect) in which the displayed character performs an action even when the reach state is established prior to the effective start winning. You may make it do. In this way, there is a possibility that a plurality of predetermined conditions (1) and (2) may be satisfied within the display period of one character, and a specific effect is produced when any of the predetermined conditions is satisfied. You may make it perform.

[Modification of 47th Production Mode to 49th Production Mode]
In the example of FIG. 29, when a predetermined condition is established and a specific effect is executed within a predetermined period after the character is displayed, the character is erased before the end of the specific period. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the character once displayed may be continuously displayed until the specific period ends even after the specific effect is executed. good.

  In the case of such a form, a specific effect may be executed every time a predetermined condition is satisfied within a period during which the character is displayed. For example, when the character C is displayed based on a winning in the general winning opening, the character C continues without disappearing from the screen for 5 minutes when the character C is displayed even if an effective start winning occurs. The specific effect F (holding change effect) may be executed every time an effective start prize is generated for 5 minutes.

  In the example of FIG. 29, the example in which the character display period is a predetermined period (1 minute, 2 minutes, 5 minutes) has been described. However, the display period of the character is not limited to such a form. The period until the variable display game is executed a predetermined number of times or the period until the variable display game being executed when the character is displayed may be completed, and the character is displayed. It is good also as a period until the game state (for example, a normal state, a probable change state or a time-short state, a big hit game state) ends.

  Further, there may be a character that is continuously displayed until a predetermined condition is satisfied regardless of the display period. That is, once such a character is displayed, it is assumed that the character is not erased until a predetermined condition is established and a specific effect is executed, regardless of the elapsed time from the start of display.

  In addition, the character display period may be determined before the character type to be displayed is determined, and the character may be selected according to the display period. For example, when a game ball is won in the general winning opening, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the character display period is 1 minute, 2 minutes, or 3 minutes. If the display period is 1 minute, character A is selected at a rate of 70%, character B is selected at a rate of 20%, character C is selected at a rate of 10%, and the determined display period is 2 minutes. If the character B is selected at a rate of 70%, the character A is selected at a rate of 15%, the character C is selected at a rate of 15%, and the determined display period is 3 minutes, C may be selected at a rate of 70%, character B may be selected at a rate of 20%, and character A may be selected at a rate of 10%. For example, different display periods may be determined depending on which general winning opening the game ball has won or depending on the game state.

  In addition, the predetermined condition to be satisfied in order to enable execution of the specific performance is not limited to the above-mentioned effective start winning or reach state, but the occurrence of a big hit gaming state, a predetermined type of big hit gaming state (for example, probability variation big hit, or The number of rounds with the greatest number of rounds, the number of prize balls awarded in the big hit gaming state has reached a predetermined number, the number of consecutive big hit gaming states (the number of consecutive = the winning state after the end of the big hit gaming state) The number of consecutive big hit gaming states controlled by the state + 1) has reached a predetermined number of times, the end of the big hit gaming state, the predetermined gaming state (for example, the probability variation state) has been controlled, and the display result is a lost combination A variable display game has been repeated a predetermined number of times, a variable display game having a variation pattern of “non-reach” (“losing without reach”) has been continued a predetermined number of times, and a pending storage There may be a satisfied conditions with such that you have reached the predetermined number, the other conditions, i.e., in the game. In addition, the specific effect is not limited to the period in which the special symbol variable display is being executed, but the special symbol variable display (the effect corresponding to the special symbol variable display) such as the period controlled in the big hit gaming state is executed. It may be performed during a period that is not performed.

  In the 47th effect form and the 49th effect form, an example is shown in which the notice effect for notifying the display result of the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is the hold change effect. For example, as shown in FIG. 9 (b) described above, depending on whether or not there is a jackpot hold, an effect of only sound is executed or an effect by the sound and the movable accessory 1000 is executed. It may be a pre-reading notice effect with a different ratio of whether or not, or it may be a chance eye notice effect as shown in a 50th effect form or a 51st effect form to be described later. Further, it may be a countdown notice effect in which the player is notified of the remaining variable display count until the variable display that is the target of the prefetch notice.

  In the 47th effect form and the 49th effect form, after the character is displayed based on the fact that the game ball has been won in the general winning opening, the displayed character is the mode of the hold information by the occurrence of the effective start winning. Although the example of executing the hold change effect for changing the game is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and when a game ball wins a game in a general winning opening, determination at the start winning prize corresponding to each variable display game held Check the result specification command and the start winning variation pattern judgment result specification command, and if there is a variable display game with a big hit display result or a variable display game with a reach state, it will be at a higher rate than when it does not exist A character may appear. In addition, when there is a variable display game in which the display result is a big hit or a variable display game with a reach state, the rate at which a specific character appears may be higher than when there is no such game. Further, different types of characters may appear depending on whether there is a variable display game in which the display result is a big hit or a variable display game with a reach state, and a case in which there is no reach. Then, when an effective start winning occurs after the appearance of the character (when a predetermined condition is satisfied), it is preferable that the displayed character performs a hold change effect that changes the mode of the hold information.

  In the 47th to 49th effect forms, when the big hit game state is controlled, the displayed character is erased, and during the period in which the big hit game state is controlled, a game ball is placed in the general winning opening. Even if a prize is won, a specific effect may not be executed by preventing a new character from appearing. As a result, the player's consciousness is concentrated on various effects (for example, fanfare effect, in-round effect, ending effect, etc.) executed in accordance with the control to the big hit gaming state so as not to disturb these various effects. be able to.

  In the 47th effect form to the 49th effect form, the example in which the specific effect is always executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied within the character display period has been described. Even if the predetermined condition is satisfied within the period, the specific effect may be executed at a predetermined rate. For example, when the predetermined condition is satisfied within the display period of the character A, the specific effect is executed at a rate of 25%, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied within the display period of the character B, the specific effect is performed at the rate of 50%. When the predetermined condition is satisfied within the display period of the character C, the specific effect is executed at a rate of 100%, for example, the specific effect when the predetermined condition is satisfied according to the displayed character. The execution ratio may be varied.

  Here, in the 47th effect form to the 49th effect form, when a game ball is won in the general winning opening when the character is displayed, the display of a new character based on winning in the general winning opening is as follows. It is assumed that the already displayed character is continuously displayed without performing the above. That is, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence / absence of the character display and the character to be displayed at the rate shown in FIG. 28 on condition that no character is displayed when the game ball is won in the general winning opening. The character is displayed based on the determination.

  In addition, not only in such a form, when a character is displayed when a game ball wins in a general winning opening, instead of the character based on the previous general winning that has already been displayed (already displayed The character may be deleted) and the character based on the subsequent general winning may be displayed.

  In addition, the remaining display period of the character based on the previous general prize is compared with the display period of the character based on the subsequent general prize, and the remaining display period of the character based on the previous general prize is If the display period of the character based on the subsequent general prize is longer, it is displayed instead of the character based on the previous general prize (already The displayed character may be deleted), and the character based on the subsequent general winning may be displayed.

  In such a form, when displaying a character based on the subsequent general winning instead of the character based on the previous general winning (deleting the already displayed character), the character display period based on the subsequent general winning In addition, the remaining display period of the character based on the previous general winning that has already been displayed may be added (the period during which both are added is taken as the display period of the newly displayed character).

  In addition, in the 47th to 49th presentation forms, when a game ball is won in the general winning opening during the character display period, no new character is displayed based on the winning in the general winning opening. The remaining display period of characters that have already been displayed may be extended. Here, the period to be extended (the time to be added to the remaining display period) may be a display period (for example, 1 minute if character A is displayed) defined for the already displayed character. Also, even when a winning in the general winning opening occurs during the character display period, one of the characters is determined at the rate shown in FIG. 28, and the determined character (however, newly displayed) A display period (for example, 2 minutes for character B) corresponding to the character that is not displayed may be added to the remaining display period of the already displayed character.

(Display of multiple characters)
In addition, when a character is displayed when a game ball is won in the general winning opening, the character is displayed along with the character based on the previous general winning that has already been displayed (without deleting the already displayed character). The character based on the general prize may also be displayed. For example, when it is determined that a game ball is won at the general winning opening when the character A is displayed and the character B is newly displayed, a new character is added in addition to the already displayed character A. B may also be displayed on the image display device 5.

  In such a form, a period obtained by adding the character display period based on the subsequent general prize to the remaining character display period based on the previous general prize is set as a common display period for both characters. May be. In this case, when the predetermined condition is satisfied before the common display period elapses, the specific effect is executed, and either one character or both characters are erased. Further, when a common display period elapses without satisfying the predetermined condition, both characters are erased.

  Further, in a state where both the first character (for example, character A) and the second character (for example, character B) are displayed on the image display device 5, the first predetermined condition (for example, effective When the start prize is established and the first specific effect (for example, the specific effect F (holding change effect)) based on the establishment of the first predetermined condition is executed, the first character is deleted and only the second character is present. Next, the second predetermined condition (for example, reach state) corresponding to the second character is established, and the second specific effect (for example, the specific effect G (variation result) based on the establishment of the second predetermined condition is established. When the notice effect) is executed, the second character may be deleted. Here, the first character and the second character may be the same type of character.

  In such a form, the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition may be set as a common condition (for example, occurrence of an effective start prize). In this case, both the first character and the second character The first specific effect by the first character and the second specification by the second character based on the establishment of the common condition (for example, the occurrence of a single effective start prize) in the state displayed on the image display device 5 Both the effects are executed, and both the first character and the second character are deleted.

  Further, the first specific effect and the second specific effect may be the same type of effect (for example, the specific effect F (holding change effect)), and in this case, both the first character and the second character are image display devices. When the first predetermined condition (for example, effective start winning) corresponding to the first character is satisfied in the state displayed in FIG. 5, a certain type of specific effect (specific effect F (holding change effect)) is executed, When one character is erased and only the second character is displayed, and then a second predetermined condition (for example, reach state) corresponding to the second character is satisfied, a specific effect (specific effect F ( The second character may be deleted by executing the hold change effect)).

  In addition, as in the 49th effect form, if the first character (character A or B) is being displayed, the first specific effect (specific effect) according to the establishment of the first condition (occurrence of an effective start prize). F) can be executed, and the second specific effect (specific effect G) can be executed in accordance with the establishment of the second condition (establishment of the reach state) during the period in which the second character (character C) is displayed. In this case, it is assumed that only one of the first character and the second character can be displayed on the image display device 5 (both the first character and the second character are not displayed simultaneously). Here, when the second specific effect is executed, if the ratio of controlling to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) is higher than when the first specific effect is executed, the second character is the first character. It is assumed that it is displayed with priority over the character. For example, when it is determined to display the second character based on the winning of a game ball in the general winning opening when the first character is displayed, the first character is deleted and the second character is deleted. Is newly displayed. On the other hand, when the second character is displayed, the control for displaying the first character is not performed instead.

  On the other hand, if the first character and the second character can be displayed on the image display device 5 at the same time, the first specific effect is executed according to the establishment of the first condition, and the second condition It is possible to execute the second specific effect according to the establishment of. However, when both the first specific effect and the second specific effect are effects for the same variable display game and the execution periods overlap (for example, both are the change result notice effect of the same variable display game and reach) In the case where it is executed immediately after the state is established), the second specific effect is executed with priority over the first specific effect, and at this time, the first specific effect is not executed.

[50th effect form]
In the 50th effect form shown in FIG. 34, each time a game ball wins a general winning opening, a button icon 4000 is newly displayed on the image display device 5 (see FIG. 35, etc.), and the displayed button icon 4000 is displayed. Depending on the number, the types of specific effects that can be executed are different. Here, each of the specific effects in the effect form is an effect that prompts the player to perform some operation, and is an effect that can notify the display result of the variable display game based on the detection of the player's action. As specific effects, three types of cut-in notice effects (specific effects H), pseudo-continuous notice effects (specific effects I), and chance eye notice effects (specific effects J) are provided.

  The display information condition in FIG. 34 is the display number of button icons 4000 necessary for each specific effect to be executed. If at least the number of button icons 4000 indicated in the display information condition is not displayed, each specific information is displayed. Production is not executed. Specifically, the cut-in notice effect is not executed unless one or more button icons 4000 are displayed, and the pseudo-continuous notice effect is not executed unless two or more button icons 4000 are displayed. If 3 or more button icons 4000 are not displayed, the button icon 4000 is not executed.

  The button icon 4000 displayed on the image display device 5 is incremented by 1 every time a game ball wins a general winning opening, and a predetermined maximum number (for example, 5) can be displayed on the image display device 5. It shall be. Then, when the specific effect is executed, the number of button icons 4000 obtained by subtracting the display number of the button icon 4000 required for the execution of the specific effect from the display number of the button icon 4000 before the execution of the specific effect, It will be displayed on the image display device 5 after execution of the specific effect. For example, when (1) a cut-in notice effect (the number of required button icons to be displayed = 1) is executed in a state where five button icons 4000 are displayed, the button icon after the cut-in notice effect is executed. The display number of 4000 is 4, and (2) When the pseudo-continuous notice effect (the number of required button icon displays = 2) is executed, the display number of 4000 of the button icon after the execution of the pseudo-continuous notice effect is three. (3) When the chance eye notice effect (the number of required button icon displays = 3) is executed, the number of 4000 displayed button icons after the chance eye notice effect is executed is two.

(Cut-in notice effect)
The cut-in notice effect provided as the specific effect H is an effect in which after the reach state is established, the display result of the variable display pattern of the variable display pattern is notified based on the content of the characters displayed on the screen. As shown in FIG. 34, the cut-in notice effect is (1) when one or more button icons 4000 are displayed and (2) when a variable display game is executed with a variation pattern with a reach state. A notification is given to perform a predetermined continuous hitting operation, and (3) the player can execute it by performing the predetermined continuous hitting operation.

  In addition, when the variable display game is executed in a state where no button icon 4000 is displayed and the variation pattern with the reach state is performed, the continuous hit operation related to the cut-in notification effect is not notified and the cut-in notification is performed. Production is not executed. Further, in a variable display game with a variable pattern that does not involve a reach state, notification of a continuous hit operation related to a cut-in notice effect is not performed, and the cut-in notice effect is not executed.

  Further, in the cut-in notice effect, the reach state is established during the period in which the variable display game is executed, and then the player operates the operation button 30 a plurality of times, so the reach effect is executed. The condition is that the variable display game is executed with the variation pattern to be executed. A specific aspect of the cut-in notice effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  In FIG. 35 (a), the decorative symbol variation (for example, vertical scroll display) is executed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It is assumed that the number (the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number) is 1. At this time, in the start winning memory display area 5H, it is assumed that the display portion (left end) corresponding to one variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is displayed in the normal mode. .

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the first button icon 4000 on the left end of the screen based on the winning of the game ball in any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. In FIG. 35B, the screen is updated from a state where the button icon 4000 is not displayed to a state where one button icon 4000 is displayed. In addition, when one or more button icons 4000 are displayed on the screen in total, a “cut-in” character 4000a indicating that “a cut-in notice effect can be executed after a predetermined operation suggestion condition is satisfied” is displayed. It is displayed. The predetermined operation suggestion condition here is that (1) one or more button icons 4000 are displayed, and (2) a variable pattern variable display game with a reach state is executed.

  In FIG. 35 (c), it is assumed that the variable display of the decorative symbol that has been executed is finished and the display result is derived and displayed. In this case, as a definite decorative symbol, a combination of non-reach loses, “4” on the left, “2” on the right, and “8” in the middle, is derived and displayed.

  Here, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display game is a reach variation pattern with a reach state based on the establishment of the start condition of the next variable display game. Confirm based on the variation pattern designation command received from 100. When the variable display game to be started is a reach variation pattern, it is determined that the operation suggesting condition for the cut-in notice effect is satisfied.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 35 (d), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition, and accordingly, the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. No longer exists, and the leftmost display region is not displayed.

  In the reach change pattern variable display game, the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect of displaying the character 4080 of “reach!” When the reach state is established, as shown in FIG. Then, based on the fact that the operation suggestion condition is satisfied, as shown in FIG. 35 (f), in the center of the screen, in order from the top, the characters “continuous hit!”, A plurality of downward arrows, and the operation button 30 are imitated. The continuous hit suggestion information 4100 composed of an image and a time bar suggesting the remaining period during which the operation is valid is displayed. Thereby, the player recognizes that the operation of pressing the operation button 30 should be continuously performed.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 erases one button icon 4000 necessary for executing the cut-in notice effect among the displayed button icons 4000 with the display of the continuous hit suggestion information 4100. As a result, the number of button icons 4000 displayed becomes zero, and the “cut-in” character 4000a is erased from the screen when there is no specific effect that can be executed.

  It is assumed that the player who has recognized the continuous hit suggestion information 4100 continuously performs an operation of pressing the operation button 30 for a predetermined number of times. The effect control CPU 120 updates the display of the time bar in accordance with the elapsed time since the continuous hit suggestion information 4100 is displayed. When the time bar is displayed, it is in a state of 5 stages out of 5 stages, and it is assumed that the time bar is decreased by 1 stage every 1 second from the display. As shown in FIG. 35 (g), the effect control CPU 120 operates the operation button 30 a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) until the time bar reaches 0 level out of 5 levels (for example, within 5 seconds from the start of display). When the above operation is performed, the cut-in mode is determined and a cut-in screen corresponding to the determined mode is displayed on the image display device 5.

  Specifically, the effect control CPU 120, when the consecutive hit suggestion condition is satisfied, as shown in FIG. 35 (h), when the display result of the variable display game to be executed becomes the final stop symbol of the jackpot combination Decides to display the characters “chance!” At a rate of 20% and “burnt!” At a rate of 80%, and the display result of the variable display game to be executed is a losing combination. In the case of the final stop symbol, it is determined that the characters “chance!” Are displayed at a rate of 80% and the characters “burning!” Are displayed at a rate of 20%.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes a cut-in notice effect for causing the image display device 5 to display a screen including the determined character. In the example of FIG. 35 (i), the characters 4200 of “Burning !!” are displayed large on the entire screen.

  It should be noted that the effect control CPU 120 “chance!” If the operation button 30 has not been operated a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) from the start of displaying the continuous hit suggestion information 4100. In addition, it is assumed that neither of the characters “Furious” !! is displayed on the screen.

(Pseudo-continuous notice effect)
The pseudo-continuous notice effect provided as the specific effect I is as if multiple times in a variable display game, by performing re-variation that scrolls and temporarily displays the temporarily stopped decorative symbols again and again. This is an effect that makes it appear as if the variable display of decorative symbols is continuously executed. When re-variation is performed, in accordance with the player's each symbol stop operation, the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C has a pseudo-continuous symbol as a decorative symbol (in this example, composed of characters “NEXT”). Shall be temporarily suspended.

  As shown in FIG. 34, the pseudo-continuous notice effect is (1) in a state where two or more button icons 4000 are displayed, and (2) a variable display game is executed with a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 8 seconds or more. In such a case, a notification is given to perform each predetermined symbol stop operation, and (3) the player can execute it by performing each predetermined symbol stop operation.

  Further, in the pseudo-continuous notice effect, the player operates the operation button 30 three times (performs each symbol stop operation three times) within a period in which one variable display game is executed. It is required to execute a variable display game with a variation pattern that requires a certain operation time and has a variation time of a certain time (8 seconds in this example) or more. A specific aspect of the pseudo continuous notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37.

  In FIG. 36 (a), the decorative symbol variation (for example, vertical scroll display) is executed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It is assumed that the number (the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number) is 1. At this time, in the start winning memory display area 5H, it is assumed that the display portion (left end) corresponding to one variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is displayed in the normal mode. .

  Also, one button icon 4000 is displayed on the left end of the screen based on the winning of the game ball in the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. A “cut-in” character 4000 a indicating that “in-notification effect can be executed” is displayed.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the second button icon 4000 on the left end of the screen based on the winning of the game ball in any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. In FIG. 36B, the screen is updated from a state where one button icon 4000 is displayed to a state where two button icons 4000 are displayed. In addition, when two or more button icons 4000 are displayed on the screen in total, a “pseudo-continuous” character 4000b indicating that “pseudo-continuous notice effect can be executed after a predetermined operation suggestion condition is satisfied” is displayed. It is displayed. The predetermined operation suggestion conditions here are (1) a state in which two or more button icons 4000 are displayed, and (2) a variable display game is executed with a variation pattern having a variation time of 8 seconds or more. is there.

  In FIG. 36C, it is assumed that after the second button icon 4000 is displayed, the variable display of the decorative symbol that has been executed is completed and the display result is derived and displayed. In this case, as a fixed decorative pattern, a combination of non-reach loses in which “5” on the left, “1” on the right, and “7” on the middle is derived and displayed.

  Here, the effect control CPU 120 receives from the game control microcomputer 100 whether or not the variation time of the variable display game is 8 seconds or more based on the establishment of the start condition of the next variable display game. Check based on the change pattern specification command. And when the variation time of the variable display game to be started is 8 seconds or more, it is determined that the operation suggestion condition of the pseudo-continuous notice effect is established.

  When the operation suggestion condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 36 (d), when the variation pattern of the variable display game to be started is a non-reach variation pattern without a reach state. Decides to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbol (perform re-variation) with a probability of 15%, and not to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbol (perform no re-variation) at a rate of 85%. On the other hand, when the variation pattern of the variable display game to be started is a reach variation pattern with a reach state, it is determined to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbol (perform re-variation) with a probability of 100%.

  When it is determined that the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped, the effect control CPU 120 temporarily stops the decorative symbol display area 5L on the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L in accordance with each symbol stop operation of the player, and Then, the decorative symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R is determined, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is determined to be temporarily stopped in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C.

  As described above, when receiving the change start command, the variable display result notification command, and the change pattern designation command, the effect control CPU 120 selects the effect control data corresponding to the change pattern designation command and also displays the variable display result. A confirmed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) corresponding to the notification command is determined. When it is decided to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbols, the “left” and “right” decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R in accordance with the player's respective symbol stopping operations are determined It may be different from the “left” and “right” decorative symbols constituting the decorative symbol (final stop symbol), or may be the same.

  When it is determined that the pseudo-continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped, the effect control CPU 120 displays the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L and the “right” decorative symbol display in accordance with each symbol stop operation of the player. In the area 5R and the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C, the “left”, “right”, and “middle” decorative symbols that constitute the determined final decorative symbol (final stop symbol) are stopped. Decide on. That is, when the re-variation is not performed, it is determined to stop the fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) according to each symbol stop operation of the player.

  Thus, when the presence / absence of re-variation and the temporary stop symbol for re-variation are determined, as shown in FIG. 36 (e), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition, Accordingly, there is no variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and the display portion at the left end is in a non-display mode. With the start of variable display of decorative symbols, as shown in FIG. 36 (f), a character “Press!”, A downward arrow, and an operation button 30 are displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5 L in order from the top. The operation suggestion information 4050 including the simulated image is displayed. Thus, the player recognizes that the operation button 30 should be pressed in order to stop the decorative symbols in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L.

  In addition, with the display of the operation suggestion information 4050, the effect control CPU 120 erases two button icons 4000 necessary for executing the pseudo-continuous notice effect among the displayed button icons 4000. As a result, the number of button icons 4000 displayed becomes zero, and the “cut-in” character 4000a and the “pseudo-continuous” character 4000b are erased from the screen in accordance with the fact that there is no executable specific effect.

  When the player who has recognized the operation suggestion information 4050 displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L performs an operation of pressing the operation button 30, as shown in FIG. The decorative symbol (“1” in this example) is stopped from swinging in the symbol display area 5L. The swing stop is a state in which the decorative symbols are not scrolled in the vertical direction but are not completely stopped and are shaking (the state where the final stop is not displayed). Here, the decorative symbol to be rocked and stopped is the “left” decorative symbol that constitutes the combination of the temporary stop symbol that has been determined in advance if the pseudo continuous symbol has been determined to be stopped. When it is determined not to stop the continuous symbols, it is a “left” decorative symbol that constitutes a predetermined combination of finalized decorative symbols (final stop symbol).

  When the “left” decorative symbol is stopped swinging, the effect control CPU 120 then displays the operation suggestion information 4050 in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, as shown in FIG. . Thereby, the player recognizes that the operation button 30 should be pressed to stop the decorative symbols in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R.

  When the player who has recognized the operation suggestion information 4050 displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R performs an operation of pressing the operation button 30, as shown in FIG. The decorative symbol (“2” in this example) is stopped from swinging in the symbol display area 5R. Here, the decorative symbol to be stopped is the “right” decorative symbol that constitutes the combination of the temporary stop symbols determined in advance when the pseudo continuous symbol is determined to be stopped. When it is determined not to stop the continuous symbols, it is a “right” decorative symbol that constitutes a predetermined combination of finalized decorative symbols (final stop symbol).

  When the “right” decorative symbol is stopped swinging, the effect control CPU 120 then displays operation suggestion information 4050 in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C as shown in FIG. 36 (h). . Thus, the player recognizes that the operation button 30 should be pressed in order to stop the decorative symbols in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C.

  It is assumed that the player who has recognized the operation suggestion information 4050 displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C performs an operation of pressing the operation button 30.

  At this time, if the CPU 120 for effect control has decided to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbols based on the table of FIG. 36D, as shown in FIG. In the decorative symbol display area 5C, the pseudo continuous symbol composed of the characters “NEXT” is stopped. As a result, the combination of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” temporary stop symbols determined in advance is temporarily stopped. Then, as shown in FIG. 37 (j), after the temporary stop display for a predetermined time, the variation of the decorative symbols (for example, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”) Re-variation is resumed to resume the vertical scroll display. After the re-variation, the combination of the finalized symbols (final stop symbols) is finally stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the decorative symbols are variably displayed. The display result of the game will be confirmed.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 120 for effect control has decided not to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbols based on the table of FIG. 36D, as shown in FIG. The “medium” decorative symbol constituting the combination of the predetermined decorative symbol (final stop symbol) determined in advance in the decorative symbol display area 5C is stopped. As a result, the predetermined combination of “left”, “right”, and “medium” determined decorative symbols (final stop symbols) is rocked and stopped. Then, as shown in FIG. 37 (l), after a predetermined period of swaying stop, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, finalized decorative symbols (final stop) The combination of symbols) is finally stopped and displayed, and the display result of the decorative symbol variable display game is determined.

  It should be noted that the CPU 120 for effect control has decided to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbols even when the operation button 30 is not operated within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) from the display of the operation suggestion information 4050. In this case, it is assumed that the combination of the temporary stop symbols determined in advance is temporarily stopped and re-variation is executed. That is, once it is decided to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbols, even if no operation is performed, the temporary stop symbol combination is automatically displayed as temporary stop and re-variation is executed. And

  In this example, when the operation suggestion condition that two or more button icons 4000 are displayed and the variable display game is executed with a variation pattern having a variation time of 8 seconds or more is satisfied, The operation suggestion information 4050 is displayed regardless of whether or not the variation pattern is in a reach state (that is, regardless of the specified variation pattern effect mode). The operation suggesting condition may be that two or more button icons 4000 are displayed and the variable display game is executed in a variation pattern with a reach state. In the case of such an operation suggestion condition, when the display result of the variable display game with the reach state is a big hit, the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped at a higher rate than when the display result is lost. It is good to make it.

  In addition, when the presence or absence of execution of the pseudo-continuous notice effect is preset for each variation pattern determined on the game control microcomputer 100 side, that is, by a variation pattern designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100. In a case where the pseudo-continuous symbols are designated to be temporarily stopped, the effect control CPU 120 displays two or more button icons 4000 and is designated to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbols. The operation suggestion condition may be that the received change pattern designation command is received (the variable display game is executed with the change pattern accompanied by the pseudo-announcement effect), as in the above-described example, regardless of the specified change pattern. , Button icon 4000 is displayed more than two, and variable table with variable time more than predetermined time Game is executed, it may be used as the operation suggested condition.

(Chance eye notice effect)
The chance eye notice effect provided as the specific effect J is different from the display result of the decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination as the display result of the variable display game executed before the variable display game that is the target of the prefetch notice. By displaying the chance that is the display result as a final stop display, the player is notified of the display result of the variable display game that is the target of the pre-reading notice.

  In this example, the same odd number of decorative symbols are finally stopped and displayed in the “left” and “middle” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C, and “left” is displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. In addition, an even-numbered decorative symbol that is one larger than an odd-numbered decorative symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in each of the “middle” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C is finally stopped and displayed, so that “left”, “middle”, “ The “right” decorative symbol combination shall be completed.

  That is, the combination of the decorative symbols of “left”, “middle”, and “right” that are chances in this example is any one of “112”, “334”, “556”, and “778”. In accordance with the player's all symbol stop operation, it is possible to display the final stop combination of decorative symbol combinations that will become opportunities.

  As shown in FIG. 34, the chance eye notice effect is (1) a state in which three or more button icons 4000 are displayed, (2) a variable display game with a reach state is put on hold, and its variable When none of the variable display games executed before the display game is in a reach state, a notification is given to perform a predetermined all symbol stop operation, and (3) the player performs a predetermined all symbol stop operation. It becomes possible to execute by doing.

  In the chance eye notice effect, the combination of “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbols swings when the player operates the operation button 30 only once in one variable display game. Stopped. That is, unlike the pseudo-continuous notice effect that requires each symbol stop operation three times to stop swinging each of the “left”, “right”, and “middle” decorative symbols in one variable display game, The operation (all symbols stop operation) required in one variable display game is only once. A specific aspect of the chance eye notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39.

  In FIG. 38 (a), the decorative symbol variation (for example, vertical scroll display) is executed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It is assumed that the number (the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number) is 3. At this time, in the start winning memory display area 5H, each display part (left end, second from the left, and 3 from the left) corresponding to the three variable display games in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. )) Are displayed in the normal mode.

  Here, the production control CPU 120 stores the start winning change pattern determination result designation command stored in the first special drawing start winning command storage area and the second special drawing start winning command storage area. The change pattern corresponding to the variable display game (the display part at the left end) that first satisfies the start condition among the three variable display games that are put on hold is confirmed after confirming the start winning change pattern determination result designation command. Is the non-reach variation pattern, the variation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (the second display part from the left) that satisfies the second start condition is the non-reach variation pattern, and the third start condition is satisfied It is assumed that the variation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (third display portion from the left) is the reach variation pattern.

  Two button icons 4000 are displayed at the left end of the screen based on the fact that the game ball has won a plurality of times (at least twice or more) in the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. "Cut-in" effect 4000 "indicating that the cut-in notice effect can be executed after the operation suggestion condition is satisfied, and" The pseudo-continuous notice effect can be executed after the predetermined operation suggestion condition is satisfied " A “pseudo-ream” character 4000b is displayed.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the third button icon 4000 on the left end of the screen based on the winning of the game ball in any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. In FIG. 38B, the screen is updated from the state where the two button icons 4000 are displayed to the state where the three button icons 4000 are displayed. In addition, when a total of three or more button icons 4000 are displayed on the screen, a “chance eye” character 4000c indicating that “the chance eye notice effect can be executed after the predetermined operation suggestion condition is satisfied” is displayed. It is displayed. The predetermined operation suggestion conditions here are (1) a state in which three or more button icons 4000 are displayed, (2) a variable display game with a reach state is put on hold, and the variable display game None of the variable display games executed before the time is accompanied by the reach state.

  In FIG. 38C, it is assumed that after the third button icon 4000 is displayed, the variable display of the decorative symbol that has been executed is completed and the display result is derived and displayed. In this case, as a confirmed decorative pattern, a combination of non-reach loses with “5” on the left, “9” on the middle, and “6” on the middle is derived and displayed.

  Here, the CPU 120 for effect control is a non-reach variation pattern in which the variation pattern of the variable display game in which the start condition is established is not accompanied by the reach state based on the establishment of the start condition of the next variable display game. Among the two variable display games that are put on hold, the variation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (the display portion at the left end) that first satisfies the start condition is a non-reach variation pattern, and the start condition is satisfied second. Based on the fact that the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (the second display part from the left) is the reach fluctuation pattern, it is determined that the operation suggesting condition of the chance eye notice effect is established.

  When the operation suggestion condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display game that is executed before the variable display game of the reach reach variation pattern (two times including the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied). Each variable display game) is requested to request the player to stop all symbols after the variable display is started. In addition, whether or not the display result of the variable display game of the pending reach variation pattern is a big hit combination or a loss combination, a start winning determination result designation command or a start winning variation pattern corresponding to the variable display game Check based on the judgment result specification command.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 38 (d), when the display result of the variable display game of the reach reach variation pattern that is put on hold is a jackpot combination, all the symbols of the player in the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied are displayed. According to the stop operation, it is decided to stop the chance chance at a rate of 75% and stop the non-chance eye (miss combination other than the chance eye) at a rate of 25%. If the display result of the display game is a lost combination, in the variable display game where the start condition is satisfied, it is decided to stop the chance eye at a rate of 25% in accordance with the player's all symbols stop operation, Decide to stop non-chance eyes at a rate of 75%.

  When it is decided to stop the chance eye, the effect control CPU 120 configures the “left” and “middle” decorative symbol display area 5L that constitutes the chance eye according to the player's all symbol stop operation. And the odd number of decorative symbols to be stopped at 5C, and the even number of decorative symbols to be stopped in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R.

  When it is decided not to stop the chance eye, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L and the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C according to the player's all symbol stop operation. In addition, the decorative symbols constituting the final decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that does not become a chance according to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command are swung in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. Decide to stop. That is, in accordance with the player's all symbol stop operation, it is decided to stop the swinging of the confirmed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that will be a non-chance.

  Thus, when the presence / absence of the chance eye stop and the stop symbol for performing the chance eye stop are determined, as shown in FIG. 38 (e), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition. Accordingly, there are two variable display games in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and the third display portion from the left is in a non-display mode. With the start of variable display of decorative symbols, as shown in FIG. 38 (f), the characters 4200 of “Stop all symbols!” Are displayed in the center of the screen, and the characters “Press!” The operation suggestion information 4050 including an arrow and an image imitating the operation button 30 is displayed. Thereby, the player recognizes that the operation button 30 should be pressed to stop the decorative symbols in all the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. To do. In the chance eye notice effect, unlike the above-described pseudo-announce notice effect, all the decorative symbol display areas 5L of “left”, “middle”, and “right” are displayed by operating the operation button 30 only once. Decorative symbols are stopped at 5C and 5R.

  In addition, the display control CPU 120 displays the three buttons required for the execution of the chance eye notice effect among the displayed button icons 4000 in accordance with the display of the characters 4200 “Stop all symbols!” And the operation suggestion information 4050. The icon 4000 is deleted. As a result, the number of displayed button icons 4000 becomes 0, and there is no specific effect that can be executed. Accordingly, “cut-in” character 4000a, “pseudo-continuous” character 4000b, and “chance” Is deleted from the screen.

  Next, it is assumed that the player who has recognized the characters 4200 “Stop all symbols!” And the operation suggestion information 4050 performs an operation of pressing the operation button 30.

  At this time, if the CPU 120 for effect control has decided to stop the non-chance eyes based on the table of FIG. 38D, as shown in FIG. In the “middle” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a combination of a fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that does not become a chance according to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is shaken. Stop moving. Then, as shown in FIG. 38 (h), after the rocking stop for a predetermined period, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, finalized decorative symbols (final stop) The combination of symbols) is finally stopped and displayed, and the display result of the decorative symbol variable display game is determined. In this case, as a non-chance eye definitive decorative symbol, a combination of non-reach loses, “4” on the left, “9” on the middle, and “7” on the right, is derived and displayed.

  If the operation button 30 is not operated within a predetermined period of time (for example, within 5 seconds) from the display of the characters 4200 “Stop all symbols!” And the operation suggestion information 4050, the effect control CPU 120 When it is decided to stop the non-chance eye according to all the symbol stop operations, the fixed decorative pattern (final stop symbol) that does not become the chance eye according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command This combination shall be rocked and stopped.

  Next, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the next variable display game start condition for the next variable display game is based on the fact that it is determined that the player is requested to stop all symbols. Even if established, whether or not to stop the chance eye is determined as in the previous variable display game. That is, as shown in FIG. 39 (i), when the display result of the variable display game with the reach reach variation pattern is a big hit combination, all the symbols of the player in the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied. According to the stop operation, it is decided to stop the chance chance at a rate of 75%, and stop the non-chance eye at a rate of 25%. In the variable display game where the start condition is satisfied, it is decided to stop the chance chance at a rate of 25% according to the player's all symbol stop operation, and the non-chance rate at a rate of 75%. Decide to stop.

  Further, as in the previous variable display game, the effect control CPU 120 performs the player's all symbol stop operation when it is determined to stop the chance eye or when it is determined to stop the non-chance eye. The combination of decorative symbols to be stopped is determined according to the above.

  Thus, when the presence / absence of the chance eye stop and the stop symbol for performing the chance eye stop are determined, as shown in FIG. 39 (j), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition. Accordingly, there is one variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and the second display portion from the left is in a non-display mode. With the start of variable display of decorative symbols, as shown in FIG. 39 (k), the characters 4200 of “Stop all symbols!” And operation suggestion information 4050 are displayed at the center of the screen. Thereby, the player recognizes that the operation button 30 should be pressed to stop the decorative symbols in all the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. To do.

  Next, it is assumed that the player who has recognized the characters 4200 “Stop all symbols!” And the operation suggestion information 4050 performs an operation of pressing the operation button 30.

  At this time, if it is determined that the chance control CPU 120 stops the chance eye based on the table of FIG. 39 (i), as shown in FIG. 39 (l), “left”, “ The combination of the decorative symbols constituting the determined chance eyes is stopped in the middle and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, as shown in FIG. 39 (m), after the rocking stop for a predetermined period, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, finalized decorative symbols (final stop) The combination of symbols) is finally stopped and displayed, and the display result of the decorative symbol variable display game is determined. Here, as a determined decorative pattern of a chance, a combination of non-reach loses, “1” on the left, “1” in the middle, and “2” on the right, is derived and displayed.

  If the operation button 30 is not operated within a predetermined period of time (for example, within 5 seconds) from the display of the characters 4200 “Stop all symbols!” And the operation suggestion information 4050, the effect control CPU 120 Even if it is decided to stop the chance eye according to all the symbols stop operation of, the fixed decorative pattern (final stop) that does not become the chance eye according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command The combination of symbols) shall be stopped.

  Next, for the next variable display game, that is, the variable display game of the reach variation pattern that is the target of the chance eye notice effect, it is determined that the effect control CPU 120 requests the player to stop all symbols. Therefore, when the next variable display game start condition is satisfied, whether or not to stop the chance eye is not determined. Then, as shown in FIG. 39 (n), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition, and accordingly, the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. No longer exists, and the leftmost display region is not displayed.

  In the variable display game of the reach variation pattern, the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect of displaying a character 4080 of “reach!” When the reach state is established, as shown in FIG.

  In the 50th effect form described above, the cut-in notice effect, the pseudo-continuous notice effect, and the chance eye notice effect are all in the state after the game ball has won the general winning opening, that is, the button icon 4000 is displayed. In the displayed state, it can be executed with the player's operation corresponding to each notice effect. In this way, by providing a specific effect that is executed on the condition of the player's operation after winning the game ball to the general winning opening, it is possible to enhance the interest when the game ball wins the general winning opening.

  Further, every time a game ball wins a general winning opening, the button icon 4000 displayed on the screen increases, so that the player can play a game ball in any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening. It is possible to recognize that has won.

  When the operation suggestion condition for the cut-in notice effect is established in a state where one or more button icons 4000 are displayed, a notification for prompting a continuous hit operation is given as an operation corresponding to the cut-in notice effect, and two or more button icons 4000 are displayed. If the operation suggestion condition of the pseudo-continuous announcement effect is established in the state of being displayed, a notification that prompts each symbol stop operation as an operation corresponding to the pseudo-continuous announcement effect is given, and three or more button icons 4000 are displayed. When the operation suggestion condition for the notice effect is established, a notification that prompts all symbol stop operations as an operation corresponding to the chance eye notice effect is given, and the player can execute the specific effect by performing any operation. I can understand.

  Further, according to the display number of the button icon 4000, when the display number is 1 or more, the “cut-in” character 4000a is displayed, and when the display number is 2 or more, the “pseudo-continuous” character 4000b is displayed. When the number is 3 or more, the “chance eye” character 4000c is displayed, so that the player can grasp the types of specific effects that can be executed according to the number of button icons 4000 displayed. Thereby, interest can be given to the number of winning game balls to the general winning opening.

  In addition, you may make it alert | report the operation required in order to perform the specific effect with the kind of specific effect which can be performed. For example, according to the display number of the button icon 4000, when the display number is 1 or more, a “continuous hit” character is displayed next to the “cut-in” character 4000a, and when the display number is 2 or more, a “pseudo continuous” character is displayed. The character “stop each symbol” is displayed next to the character 4000b, and when the number of displays is 3 or more, the character “canceled” is displayed next to the character “4000c”, so that the player can It is possible to grasp an operation required according to the type of specific effect that can be executed.

  Here, in this embodiment, there are cases where the operation suggestion conditions corresponding to each of the plurality of types of specific effects are simultaneously satisfied. For example, in a state where two or more button icons 4000 are displayed, when the variable display game start condition is satisfied, the variation pattern is a variation pattern with a reach state, and the variation time of the variation pattern is 8 In this case, a notification for prompting a continuous hitting operation for executing a cut-in notice effect (display of continuous hitting suggestion information 4100) and a prompting operation for stopping each symbol for executing a pseudo-notice notice effect are performed. Which of notifications (display of operation suggestion information 4050 in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R) should be a problem. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the one having the larger number of button icons 4000 required to execute the specific effect is executed with priority. Accordingly, a notification that prompts each symbol stop operation for execution of the pseudo-continuous notice effect (two or more button icons 4000 are required) is a notification that prompts a repeated operation for execution of the cut-in notice effect (one or more button icons 4000 are required). Shall be given priority over.

  Further, in a state where three or more button icons 4000 are displayed, when the start condition of the variable display game of the non-reach variation pattern is satisfied, the variation time of the non-reach variation pattern is 8 seconds or more, and In some cases, the variable display game on hold has a reach variation pattern. In this case, a notification prompting each symbol stop operation for execution of the pseudo-continuous notice effect (in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R). Either display of operation suggestion information 4050) or notification prompting all symbol stop operation for execution of chance eye notice effect (character 4200 of "Stop all symbols!" And display of operation suggestion information 4050 in each variable display game) The question is whether to do this. In this case, a notification that prompts all symbol stop operations for the chance eye notice effect execution (three or more button icons 4000 are required) is a notification that prompts each symbol stop operation for the pseudo-continuous notice effect execution (button icon 4000). Is given priority over 2).

  Further, in this embodiment, the number of displayed button icons 4000 is the number of button icons 4000 required to execute a specific effect (1 for a cut-in notice effect, 2 for a pseudo-continuous notice effect) If the number is more than 3), the number of button icons 4000 obtained by subtracting the number of button icons 4000 required to execute the specific effect from the number of the button icons 4000 initially displayed is the specific notice effect. It will continue to be displayed after the performance.

  For example, when a chance eye notice effect is executed in a state where four or more button icons 4000 are displayed, one button icon 4000 that is continuously displayed remains after execution of the chance eye notice effect. The “4000” character 4000a remains displayed on the screen. After that, when the variable display game of the reach variation pattern is started, the operation suggesting condition of the cut-in notice effect is established, and the notification for prompting the continuous hitting operation is performed.

  In this embodiment, when the variable display game is started, it is determined whether or not an operation suggestion condition corresponding to each specific effect is established (the number of button icons 4000 is confirmed). In addition, this is not limited to such a form, but when the variable display game is being executed, is the operation suggestion condition corresponding to each specific effect established? It may be determined whether or not. For example, the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not one or more button icons 4000 are displayed at the timing when the reach state is established, and if it is displayed, the repetitive hit suggestion information 4100 for causing repeated hits is displayed. It may be displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not two or more button icons 4000 are displayed at a timing when the remaining time until the end of the variable display game (display result derivation display) reaches a predetermined time (for example, the remaining 10 seconds). If it is determined and displayed, the operation suggestion information 4050 for performing each symbol stop operation may be displayed. Also, the production control CPU 120 holds a variable display game (including a variable display game corresponding to the effective start winning) with a reach state at the timing when the effective start winning occurs, and the variable display game When none of the variable display games executed before the reach state is accompanied, it is determined whether or not three or more button icons 4000 are displayed, and if they are displayed, all symbol stop operations are performed. For example, the characters 4200 and “operation suggestion information 4050” may be displayed. In other words, within the variable display game being executed at the timing when the number of display of the button icon 4000 reaches a predetermined number set in advance (without waiting for the start condition of the next variable display game to be executed) A notification that the operation should be performed or a specific effect may be executed.

  In addition, the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display game being executed is the reach variation pattern at the timing when the button icon 4000 becomes 1 or more based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening. In the case of the reach variation pattern, the repetitive hit suggestion information 4100 may be displayed at the timing when the reach state is established. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 remains until the end of the variable display game being executed (the display of the display result) at the timing when the button icon 4000 becomes 2 or more based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening. It is determined whether or not the time is longer than a predetermined time (for example, the remaining 10 seconds). If the time is longer than the predetermined time, the remaining time until the end of the variable display game (display result display) is the predetermined time (for example, You may make it display the operation suggestion information 4050 for performing each symbol stop operation at the timing which became the remaining 10 seconds. Further, the production control CPU 120 is configured to display a variable display game with a reach state (a variable display game corresponding to the effective start winning) at a timing when the button icon 4000 becomes 3 or more based on the winning of a game ball in the general winning opening. Variable display game with a reach state by determining whether or not any of the variable display games executed before the variable display game is accompanied by a reach state. Is held, and all the variable display games executed before the variable display game are not accompanied by the reach state, the entire symbol stop operation is performed in the variable display game being executed. For example, the characters 4200 and “operation suggestion information 4050” may be displayed. In other words, within the variable display game being executed at the timing when the number of display of the button icon 4000 reaches a predetermined number set in advance (without waiting for the start condition of the next variable display game to be executed) A notification that the operation should be performed or a specific effect may be executed.

  Also, in the 50th effect form, the operation suggestion conditions for informing to perform a predetermined operation (continuous hitting operation, each symbol stopping operation, all symbol stopping operation) are all conditions relating to the variable display game (display mode and The example in which the specific effect is executed during the execution of the variable display game because the predetermined operation is performed has been described. However, the operation suggesting condition is not limited to such a form, for example, the jackpot It may be a condition relating to a gaming state (for example, whether or not the game is controlled to a big hit gaming state, whether or not the big hit type is a probable big hit, and whether or not the number of rounds is greater than a predetermined number). A specific effect may be executed when a predetermined operation is performed in the gaming state. For example, when the number of display of the button icon 4000 reaches a predetermined number within the period controlled to the big hit gaming state, the player is notified to perform a predetermined operation, and the predetermined operation is performed. In some cases, an effect may be executed to notify whether or not the big hit gaming state is a probabilistic big hit or whether or not the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state is greater than a predetermined number. Further, when the display number of the button icons 4000 reaches a predetermined number within a period in which the gaming state is controlled to the probability changing state (however, the player is in a rendering mode in which it is difficult for the player to recognize that the probability changing state). A notification that prompts the player to perform a predetermined operation may be performed, and when the predetermined operation is performed, an effect may be executed to notify whether or not the gaming state is a probable change state.

  Further, in the 50th effect form, even when the number of display of the button icon 4000 is 1, a notification for prompting a continuous hitting operation is performed based on the establishment of the operation suggestion condition, and a cut-in notice effect is executed according to the continuous hitting operation. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form. If the number of displayed button icons 4000 is not a predetermined number or more (for example, 2 or more, or 3 or more), notification for prompting a predetermined operation is not performed (for example, There is no notification prompting any one of the repeated operation, each symbol stop operation, and all symbol stop operations), and the specific effect is not executed (for example, any of the cut-in notice effect, the pseudo-continuous notice effect, and the chance eye notice effect) May not be executed).

(Example of single announcement)
In the 50th effect form, in order to stop the temporary stop symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, three operations are performed for each area. However, the final decorative symbol (final stop symbol) is used. ) May be caused to be performed three times for each area in order to stop the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In other words, when the effect control CPU 120 determines the final decorative symbol (final stop symbol) according to the variable display result notification command, the operation suggestion information 4050 is displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, and the operation button 30 is displayed. The left symbol composing the final stop symbol is rocked and stopped in response to the operation, and then the operation suggestion information 4050 is displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, and the final stop symbol is displayed in response to the operation of the operation button 30. The right symbol constituting the symbol is stopped from swinging, and finally, the operation suggestion information 4050 is displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C, and the middle symbol constituting the final stop symbol according to the operation of the operation button 30. May be rocked and stopped. In such a configuration, when the jackpot symbol combination is the final stop symbol, the symbol display areas 5L, 5R for “left”, “right”, and “middle” are displayed according to the player's three operations. By sequentially stopping the same decorative design in 5C, the player's expectation for the operation can be enhanced.

  In addition, in the “left”, “right”, and “middle” symbol display areas, a combination of special ornament symbols different from a combination of normal ornament symbols (for example, images of alphanumeric characters “1” to “8”) is used. By stopping, the player is informed of a predetermined operation, and whether or not the display result of the variable display game is a big hit or off (or a probable change big hit) according to the player's predetermined operation. Or a specific effect that informs whether or not it is a non-probable big hit or the like. For example, in the “left” and “right” symbol display areas, special ornament symbols, which are images simulating the operation buttons 30, are stopped (or in the “left” and “right” symbol display areas, normal ornament symbols are displayed. The symbol is stopped), and the image of the characters “continuous hit!” Is stopped in the “medium” symbol display area. Then, when the player who has recognized the image of the character “continuous hit!” Performs the hit operation, the display result of the variable display game (for example, the image of the character “big hit!” Or “losing” is displayed on the image display device 5. May be displayed.

  Further, in such a form, according to the character image stopped in the “medium” symbol display area (according to the notification mode that suggests performing a predetermined operation), the variable display game The rate at which the display result is a big hit (or the rate at which the probability variation big hit) may be different. For example, in the “middle” symbol display area, the operation button 30 is made longer than when the image of the “continuous hit!” Character suggesting that the operation button 30 be pressed many times shortly is stopped as a special symbol. When the image of the character “Long press!” Suggesting that the user presses once is stopped as a special symbol, the ratio of the display result that is a big hit may be increased. In this way, an effect in which the display result of the variable display game is notified in accordance with the player's operation without passing through the reach state may be executed as the specific effect. During the period in which one variable display game is being executed, the special decorative design is stopped by causing the combination of the special decorative symbols to be stopped a plurality of times in the “left”, “right”, and “middle” symbol display areas. Each time the combination is stopped, the player may perform a predetermined operation. In this case, a notice effect that suggests a display result is executed for each predetermined operation (excluding the last predetermined operation), and the display result may be notified according to the last predetermined operation. .

  In the 50th effect form, each symbol stop operation is valid on condition that two or more winnings are made to the general winning opening, and further, a pseudo-continuous notice effect is executed according to each symbol stopping operation, An example is shown in which all symbol stop operations are valid on condition that three or more winnings are made, and a chance eye notice effect is executed in response to all symbol stop operations, but a notification that a predetermined operation should be performed (predetermined The condition that the operation is valid) may be based on four or more winnings to the general winning opening.

[51st effect form]
In the 51st effect form shown in FIG. 34, the specific effect that can be executed according to the gaming state is different from the 50th effect form. In the 51st effect form, the cut-in notice effect requiring continuous hitting operation can be executed when the game state is the normal state, the probability change state, and the time-short state. On the other hand, the quasi-continuous notice effect that requires each symbol stop operation can be executed only when the gaming state is in the normal state, and the chance eye notice effect that requires all symbol stop operations is in the probable state or in the short time state. It can be executed only when

  In the cut-in notice effect and the pseudo-continuous notice effect, an operation suggestion condition may be satisfied at the same time in the normal state. In this case, the pseudo-continuous notice effect that requires a larger number of button icons 4000 is executed. Therefore, each symbol stop operation is preferentially prompted. On the other hand, since the executable game state is different between the pseudo-continuous notice effect and the chance eye notice effect, the operation suggesting condition is not satisfied at the same time.

  Even if the number of button icons 4000 displayed in the normal state is three or more, the chance eye notice effect is not executed in the normal state, so that the characters “cut-in” 4000a and “pseudo-continuous” are displayed. The character 4000b is displayed, but the “chance eye” character 4000c is not displayed. Even if the number of button icons 4000 displayed in the probability change state or the time-short state is three or more, the pseudo-continuous notice effect is not executed in the probability change state or the time-short state. The characters 4000a and “chance eyes” 4000c are displayed, but the characters “pseudo-continuous” 4000b are not displayed.

  Thus, according to the gaming state when the game ball is won in the general winning opening, the type of the specific effect to be notified, that is, the type of the specific effect that can be executed, is appropriately changed according to the gaming state. It becomes possible to make interest different.

  In this production form, a notice production that requires a larger number of button icons 4000 is preferentially executed. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form. Priority may be given to execution. For example, when an operation suggestion condition for a cut-in notice effect and an operation suggestion condition for a pseudo-continuous notice effect are established for the same variable display game, a notice effect with a higher percentage of big hits (for example, a pseudo-continuous notice effect) ) Should be prioritized.

[52nd production form]
In the 52nd effect form shown in FIG. 40, unlike the 50th effect form and the 51st effect form, the button icon 4000 is not displayed according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening, and the game ball to the general winning opening is displayed. Whether or not to display any of the characters 4000a to 4000c for each winning prize, and in the case of displaying, the “cut-in” character 4000a, the “pseudo-ream” character 4000b, and the “chance eye” character 4000c. Which of these is to be displayed is determined. In FIG. 41 (A), whether or not to display any of the characters 4000a to 4000c in accordance with winning in each general winning opening, and to display any of the characters 4000a to 4000c. The display information determination table for determining is shown.

  When the game ball wins the first general winning opening 50A, the performance control CPU 120 determines to display the characters “cut-in” 4000a on the screen at a rate of 25%, and at a rate of 75%, It is decided to display the character 4000b of "pseudo ream" on the screen. In addition, when a game ball is won in the second general winning opening 50B, it is determined that none of the characters 4000a to 4000c is displayed at a rate of 50%, and the character “cut-in” 4000a is set at a rate of 25%. It is determined to be displayed on the screen, and the “pseudo-continuous” characters 4000b are determined to be displayed on the screen at a rate of 25%.

  Further, when a game ball is won in the third general winning opening 50C, it is determined that none of the characters 4000a to 4000c is displayed at a rate of 80%, and the character “cut-in” 4000a is set at a rate of 10%. It is determined to be displayed on the screen, and it is determined to display the character “cance chance” 4000c on the screen at a rate of 10%. Further, when a game ball is won in the fourth general winning opening 50D, it is determined that none of the characters 4000a to 4000c is displayed at a rate of 70%, and the character “cut-in” 4000a is set at a rate of 10%. It is determined to be displayed on the screen, and the character 4000c of “chance” is determined to be displayed on the screen at a rate of 20%.

  Similarly to the 50th effect form and the 51st effect form described above, when the variable display game of the reach variation pattern is started in a state where the character “cut-in” 4000a is displayed, the continuous hitting operation is performed. A cut-in notice effect is executed in response to a continuous hitting operation, and a variable display game of a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 8 seconds or more is started in a state in which the “pseudo-continuous” character 4000b is displayed. In such a case, it is notified that each symbol stop operation is performed, a pseudo-continuous notice effect is executed in accordance with each symbol stop operation, and the reach variation pattern is changed in a state where the character 4000c of “chance eyes” is displayed. If the display game is put on hold and all the variable display games executed before that are non-reach variation patterns, a notification is made to perform all symbol stop operations, To run the chance eyes announcement attraction in accordance with the symbol stop operation.

  In the example of FIG. 41A, when a game ball is won in the first general winning opening 50A, one of the characters 4000a to 4000c is displayed at a rate of 100%, and a gaming ball is displayed in the second general winning opening 50B. When winning, one of characters 4000a to 4000c is displayed at a rate of 50%, and when a game ball is won at the third general winning opening 50C, one of characters 4000a to 4000c is displayed at a rate of 20%. When a game ball wins the fourth general winning opening 50C, any one of the characters 4000a to 4000c is displayed at a rate of 30%.

  In this way, depending on the general winning award that the game ball has won, the ratio of the notification of the type of the specific effect that can be executed and the ratio that the specific effect can be executed differ, so that It is possible to improve interest by focusing on whether a game ball enters.

  Also, the game ball launched into the left game area 10A is easier to win the second general prize opening 50B than the first general prize opening 50A, and the game ball launched into the right game area 10B is the fourth general prize opening. If it is configured to make it easier to win the third general winning opening 50C than 50D, it is more difficult to win the general winning opening (if the normal state, the first general winning opening 50A, if the probability change state or the short time state) When a game ball wins the fourth general winning opening 50D), the ratio of executing the specific effect is high.

  In addition, when a game ball wins the first general winning opening 50A or the second general winning opening 50B, there is a possibility that either “cut-in” character 4000a or “pseudo-ream” character 4000b is displayed. However, the “4000 chance” character 4000c is not displayed. On the other hand, when a game ball has won a prize in the third general winning opening 50C or the fourth general winning opening 50D, there is a possibility that either “cut-in” character 4000a or “chance eye” character 4000c is displayed. However, the “pseudo-ream” character 4000b is not displayed.

  In this way, depending on the general winning opening where the game ball has won, the notification mode of the specific effect that can be executed and the type of the specific effect that can be executed are different, so that the game ball enters any general winning port. You can pay attention to what you do and improve your interest.

  Further, when the gaming state is the normal state, a gaming ball is fired to the left gaming area 10A, and when the gaming state is the probability changing state or the short time state, the gaming ball is fired to the right gaming area 10B. In the normal state in which a game ball wins the 50A or the second general winning opening 50B, the characters 4000a to 4000c are more likely than the probability change state or the short time state in which the gaming ball wins the third general winning opening 50C or the fourth general winning opening 50D. Is displayed at a high rate, and the execution rate of the specific effect is high.

  Since the interest is likely to decrease when the gaming state is the normal state, the interest reduction is prevented by increasing the rate at which the characters 4000a to 4000c appear and the rate at which the specific performance is executed. On the other hand, when the game state is in the probabilistic state or in the short-time state, the player's interest is directed to the special game or the ordinary game. Therefore, the rate at which the characters 4000a to 4000c appear and the rate at which the specific effect is executed are set lower than the normal state. In this way, it is possible to appropriately change the interest of a game ball to win a general winning opening according to the game state.

  Further, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 41A, when the gaming state is in the probable change state or in the short-time state, the ratio or the specific effect in which the characters 4000a to 4000c appear than in the normal state. The ratio may be increased. In contrast to the example shown in FIG. 41A, when a game ball wins the third general winning opening 50C or the fourth general winning opening 50D, the first general winning is achieved. The characters 4000a to 4000c may be displayed at a higher rate than when the game ball is won in the mouth 50A or the second general winning opening 50B. In FIG. 41 (A), the pseudo-continuous notice effect can be executed only at the time of winning the first general winning opening 50A or the second general winning opening 50B, but similarly, the third general winning opening 50C. Or you may make it provide the specific production which can be performed only at the time of winning a prize to the 4th general winning opening 50D.

  In addition to the example shown in FIG. 41 (A), as shown in FIG. 41 (B), a game ball won in each of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. When the game state at the time is the normal state, the rate at which the characters 4000a to 4000c appear or the rate at which the specific performance is executed is greater than the case where the game state when the game ball is won is a probability change state or a short time state. You may make it raise. Contrary to the example shown in FIG. 41 (B), when a game ball is won at each general winning opening in the normal state when a game ball is won at each general winning opening in the probability variation state or the short time state. The characters 4000a to 4000c may be displayed at a higher rate. Further, in FIG. 41B, a specific effect that can be executed only when the gaming state is the normal state may be provided, and the specific effect that can be executed only when the gaming state is the probability change state or the short-time state. May be provided.

  In addition, according to whether the gaming state is the normal state, the probability variation state or the time-short state, not limited to the example in which the rate of displaying the characters 4000a to 4000c and the rate of executing the specific performance is different, For example, whether or not the game is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, whether or not the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot gaming state has reached a predetermined number, the number of consecutive jackpot gaming states (the number of consecutive = the end of the jackpot gaming state) Whether or not the number of consecutive big hit gaming states that are controlled to a probabilistic state or a short time state + 1) has reached a predetermined number of times, whether or not a variable display game whose display result is a lost combination has continued a predetermined number of times, The character 4000a depends on other conditions such as whether or not the variable display game of the variation pattern of “reach” (“losing without reach”) has continued a predetermined number of times, whether the number of reserved memories has reached a predetermined number, or the like. Ratio and the specific effect that 4000c is displayed may be made different proportions to be executed.

[Display area of each image on the screen of the image display device 5]
The display area of each image that can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 may be set as follows. Hereinafter, the maximum width of an image that can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 is (X + 1) pixels, and the maximum height is (Y + 1) pixels. The coordinates of the pixel at the upper left corner of the display screen are (0, 0), and the coordinates of the pixel at the lower right corner of the display screen are (X, Y). At this time, as shown in FIG. 42A, a rectangular area defined with coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (a, Y) as vertices is defined as a first area α, and coordinates (a + 1, 0) And a rectangular area defined with coordinates (X, Y) as vertices is defined as a second area β. There is no overlapping area between the first area α and the second area β. In this example, the second area β is a larger area than the first area α.

  In the first area α, prizes related to the number of prizes received at each prize opening, such as the number of prizes received at the general prize opening, the number of prizes received at the first start prize opening, and the number of prizes received at the second start prize opening, etc. Number information can be displayed. In the second area β, as shown in FIG. 42 (a), an error message display area 5E, fourth symbol display areas 5A and 5B, decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, and a start winning memory display area 5H. Is provided. 42 and 43, the background image can be visually recognized in the second area β, but the background image cannot be visually recognized in the first area α.

  In this example, the entire background image stored in the ROM 121 as effect data has an overall width of (X + 1) pixels, as shown in FIGS. In this image, the height is (Y + 1) pixels, the character D is climbing near the top of the mountain, and the character E is climbing near the foot of the mountain. In the examples of FIGS. 42B, 43C, and 43E, 43F, the entire background image region [rectangular region defined with coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (X, Y) as vertices] Of these, only the area corresponding to the second area β [rectangular area defined with coordinates (a + 1, 0) and coordinates (X, Y) as vertices) is visible to the player. Of the entire background image area, the area corresponding to the first area α [rectangular area defined with coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (a, Y) as vertices) is invisible to the player.

  Therefore, in the examples of FIGS. 42B, 42C and 43E, 43F, the player is defined with the coordinates (a + 1, 0) and coordinates (X, Y) of the background image as vertices. The character D included in the rectangular area can be visually recognized, but the character E included in the rectangular area defined with the coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (a, Y) of the background image as vertices is not visible.

  42 (b) (c) and 43 (e) (f), in the first area α, (1) “Today's number of general winnings” which is the total number of winnings to the general winning opening on that day. (2) “Today's navel winning number” which is the total number of winnings at the first starting prize opening on that day, and (3) “Today's total number of winnings at the second starting winning prize opening” Three items of “Den-chu winning number” are displayed.

  In this embodiment, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 wins a game ball in any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D when a winning in the general winning opening occurs. When a general prize opening designation command is received to specify whether the game ball is won at the first starting prize opening or the second starting prize opening when a winning at the starting prize opening occurs, the starting prize is designated. A mouth designation command is received. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can individually count the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening, and the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening. In this example, (1) “Today's general prize number” is 70, (2) “Today's navel prize number” is 521, and (3) “Today's electronic Chu prize number” is 217. In this way, by displaying the number of prizes received at the general prize opening and the number of prizes received at the start prize opening in a comparable manner, it is possible to relatively grasp the winning situation at each prize opening.

  In the example of FIGS. 42B and 43E, the fourth symbol for the first special figure is variably displayed in the fourth symbol display area 5A in the second area β. The decorative symbols are variably displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. In the start winning memory display area 5H, a round object is displayed at the left end as one hold information corresponding to one special figure game hold. The image of the fourth symbol during variable display, the image of the decorative symbol during variable display, and the image of the hold information are all displayed only in the second area β.

  The fourth symbol display layer, the decorative symbol display layer, and the hold information display layer are all higher than the background image display layer. Here, when the display layer of a certain image is higher than the display layer of another image, when a certain image and another image are displayed in a superimposed manner, the visibility of a certain image is reduced. This means that display control is given priority over the performance. Specifically, in the examples of FIGS. 42B, 42C, and 43E, 43F, the region where the images of the fourth symbol, the decorative symbol, and the hold information are displayed and one of the background images. In this case, with respect to the overlapping area, the 4th pattern, the decorative pattern, and the hold information whose display layer is higher than the background image are easily visible (including visible). On the other hand, display control is performed to make the background image difficult to view (including invisible). Therefore, when viewed from the player, the fourth symbol, the decorative symbol, and the hold information appear to be displayed in front of the background image (player side).

  In this embodiment, the error message display layer is higher than the decorative symbol display layer. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 42 (a) and 43 (f), the area where the decorative design is displayed and the area where the error message is displayed overlap, but in this case, the overlapping area is displayed. With regard to, the display control is performed so that an error message whose display layer is higher than the decorative symbol is easily visible (including visible), and the decorative symbol is difficult to visually recognize (including invisible). Accordingly, when viewed from the player, the error message appears to be displayed in front of the decorative design (player side).

  As a display control for enabling the player to visually recognize only the area corresponding to the second area β among the entire area of the background image, only the area corresponding to the second area β of the entire background image is displayed in the background. An area corresponding to the first area α is set as the display layer of the image, and an area corresponding to the first area α is not set as the display layer of the background image (that is, [coordinate (a + 1, 0) and coordinates (X, (Rectangular area defined with Y) as the apex] may be used).

  In addition, as another display control for allowing only the area corresponding to the second area β to be visible to the player among the entire area of the background image, the entire area of the background image is set as the display layer of the background image (that is, In the display layer higher than the display layer of the background image, the entire background image [using the image data of the rectangular area defined with the coordinates (0, 0) and the coordinates (X, Y) as vertices) is used. By setting another background image (for example, a white, plain image) for winning number information in the area corresponding to the area α, the area corresponding to the first area α of the background image of the lower display layer cannot be visually recognized. Anyway. In such a configuration, it is easy to see a predetermined transmittance (an image of a display layer below the display layer) on another background image (for example, a white and plain image) for winning number information. , The image of the lower display layer may be visible, and the background image of the lower display layer can be set by setting a predetermined transmittance. An area corresponding to the first area α can be visually recognized, and the character E can be visually recognized.

  In addition, the display layer of the winning information displayed in the first area α is higher than the display layer of other information that can be displayed in the first area α. Therefore, the visibility of the winning information is not reduced by displaying other information in the first area α. In addition, the display layer of the winning information may be the same display layer as the error message in which the display area does not exist in the first area α, or may be a higher display layer than the error message. May be a lower display layer. For example, the display layer for the number-of-wins information is the highest among all the display layers, and is displayed in a display area for other information (displayed in the first area α or the second area β). Regardless, the visibility may not be lowered.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (b), since the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the hold information are all performed in the second area β, these images are displayed. Depending on what is displayed on the image display device 5, the number of winnings to the general winning opening (“the number of general winnings of the day”) as the winning number information displayed in the first area α, the first start winnings The visibility of the number of winnings to the mouth ("Today's navel winning number") and the number of winnings to the second start winning opening ("Today's electric Chu winnings") are not hindered. Thereby, the player can appropriately grasp the winning number information regardless of the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the hold information.

  When the image display device 5 is performing variable display of the fourth symbol, variable display of the decorative symbol, and display of the hold information, when a winning in the general winning opening occurs, FIG. As shown in d), based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 has received the general winning award designation command, the number of winnings in the general winning award displayed in the first area α (“the number of general winnings today”). Is updated. As described above, when a winning in the general winning opening occurs while the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the hold information are performed, the general winning displayed in the first area α is displayed. The number of winnings in the mouth is updated without impeding visibility. That is, the visibility when the winning information is updated is not hindered by the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the hold information. Thereby, the player can easily grasp that the winning in the general winning opening has occurred and as a result, the number of winning in the general winning opening has been updated.

  When the special symbol variable display ends and the display result is stopped, the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is ended and the display result is stopped, as shown in FIG. At the same time, the variable display of decorative symbols is also terminated and the display result is stopped. In this example, it is assumed that the 4th symbol display area 5A is lit (displayed) in a display color that reminds of a disengagement (the display result is stopped and displayed). The off symbol that becomes “5, 3, 1” is stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 42 (c), the fourth symbol is displayed in a stopped state (in a state where the display result is derived and displayed) and is stopped and displayed (the display result is derived and displayed). Since all the decorative symbols (in the state) are displayed in the second area β, the number of winnings displayed in the first area α depending on the display of these images on the image display device 5. Information on the number of prizes received at the general prize opening ("Today's number of general prizes"), the number of prizes at the first start prize opening ("Number of navel prizes of today"), and the prize at the second start prize opening Visibility of the number ("Dai Chu Chu winnings today") is not hindered. Thereby, the player can grasp | ascertain the number-of-wins information appropriately irrespective of the stop display of a 4th symbol, and the stop display of a decoration symbol.

  Then, in the image display device 5, when a stop for the fourth symbol and a stop symbol for the decorative symbol are being displayed, if a winning in the general winning opening occurs, as shown in FIG. 42 (d). Based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 has received the general prize opening designation command, the number of winning prizes (“the number of today's general prizes”) displayed in the first area α is updated. As described above, when a winning in the general winning opening occurs when the stop display of the fourth symbol and the decorative symbol are stopped, the number of winnings in the general winning slot displayed in the first area α is calculated. , Updated without disturbing visibility. That is, the visibility when the winning information is updated is not hindered by the stop display of the fourth symbol and the stop display of the decorative symbol. Thereby, the player can easily grasp that the winning in the general winning opening has occurred and as a result, the number of winning in the general winning opening has been updated.

  42B, 42C, and 42D, an example is shown in which the number of winnings in the general winning opening is updated without impeding visibility, but the first starting winning opening is shown. In the same way as in the case of the general winning opening, the winning in the first starting winning opening is performed regardless of the variable display and stop display of the fourth symbol and the variable display and stop display of the decorative symbol. The number is updated without impeding visibility. In addition, even when a winning to the second start winning a prize occurs, as in the case of the general winning a prize, regardless of the variable display and stop display of the fourth symbol, and the variable display and stop display of the decorative symbol, The number of winnings in the second start winning opening is updated without impeding visibility.

  As shown in FIGS. 43 (e) and 43 (f), when the production control CPU 120 receives an abnormality detection designation command for designating that an abnormality has occurred, an error message (in this example, “an error has occurred”) is displayed. Is displayed). As described above, the error message display layer is higher than the decorative symbol display layer. For this reason, when the decoration control CPU 120 receives an abnormality detection designation command when the decorative design is variably displayed or when the decorative design is stopped, an area for displaying the decorative design and an error are displayed. With respect to the overlapping range with the area where the message is displayed, display control is performed to make the error message easy to see (including visible) and make the decorative symbol difficult to view (including invisible). Therefore, in the example of FIG. 43B, when viewed from the player, the error message is closer to the player (side of the player) than the decorative symbol that is variably displayed (or the decorative symbol that is stopped). Looks like it is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 43 (f), since the error message is displayed in the second area β, the fact that the error message is displayed on the image display device 5 indicates that the error message is displayed in the first area α. As the information on the number of winnings displayed in the above, the number of winnings in the general winning opening (“the number of general winnings of the day”), the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening (“the number of navel winnings of the day”), The visibility of the number of winnings at the 2 start winning award (“Today's electric Chu winnings”) is not hindered. Thereby, the player can appropriately grasp the winning number information regardless of the display of the error message.

  In the image display device 5, when an error message is displayed, if a winning in the general winning opening occurs, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. Based on the receipt of the mouth designation command, the number of wins to the general winning opening displayed in the first area α (“the number of general winnings of the day”) is updated. As described above, when a winning in the general winning opening occurs while the error message is displayed, the visibility of the number of winning in the general winning opening displayed in the first area α is not hindered. Updated. That is, depending on the display of the error message, the visibility when winning information is updated is not hindered. Thereby, the player can easily grasp that the winning in the general winning opening has occurred and as a result, the number of winning in the general winning opening has been updated.

  In the example of FIGS. 43 (f) and 43 (g), an example is shown in which the number of winnings in the general winning opening is updated without impeding visibility, but the winning in the first starting winning opening is shown. Even when it occurs, the number of winnings to the first start winning opening is updated without impeding visibility, regardless of the display of the error message, as in the case of the general winning opening. In addition, even when a prize is awarded to the second starting prize opening, the visibility of the number of winnings to the second starting prize opening is hindered regardless of the display of an error message, as in the case of the general winning prize opening. Updated without any changes.

  Further, in the example of FIG. 43 (f), the characters “An error has occurred” for notifying that an abnormality has occurred are displayed based on the reception of the abnormality detection designation command. Not limited to this, different error messages may be displayed depending on the type of abnormality designated by the abnormality detection designation command. For example, when an abnormality detection designation command is received that specifies that a magnetic abnormality has occurred, the message “Magnetic error has occurred” is displayed, and an abnormality detection designation command that specifies that a vibration abnormality has occurred is received. Sometimes the message “Vibration error has occurred” may be displayed, and when an error detection designation command is received that specifies that a radio wave error has occurred, the message “A radio wave error has occurred” may be displayed. .

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 42A, a rectangular area defined with coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (a, Y) as vertices is defined as a first area α, and coordinates (a + 1) are defined. , 0) and a rectangular area defined with coordinates (X, Y) as vertices are defined as the second area β, but the first area in which the winning information can be displayed, the decorative design, the fourth design, and the hold The second area where information and error messages can be displayed is not limited to a rectangular area, but may be any area that does not overlap each other on the screen.

(Display / Hide setting for winning information)
As described with reference to FIG. 4, the operation part of the display changeover switch 32 is operated by opening the glass door frame 3a forward (operating by a game hall clerk but not by a player). Position), and on the player setting screen (see FIG. 5), when the setting for displaying the number of winnings to the general winning opening is made by the player's operation, The number-of-wins information related to the number of winnings is to be displayed.

  The example shown in FIG. 42 and FIG. 43 is a display mode of the screen in a state where the setting for displaying the winning number information is performed in this way, and when the setting for displaying the winning number information is performed. In the first area α, not only the number of winning in the general winning opening, but also the number of winning in the first starting winning opening (so-called “Hesso”) and winning in the second starting winning opening (so-called “Den Chu”). The number is also displayed. In other words, according to the operation of the display changeover switch 32 and the operation button 30, it is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings at the first start winning opening and the number of winnings at the second starting winning opening.

  Here, as described with reference to FIG. 4, when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is set to non-display (first position), the number-of-winning information (the number of winnings to the general winning opening is displayed by the operation button 30. The number-of-wins information is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 regardless of whether or not the setting for displaying the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening and the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening is performed. Do not show. Further, even when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is set to display setting (second position), when the setting for displaying the winning information is not performed by the operation button 30 (in the case of non-display setting) ) Is not displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

  The example shown in FIGS. 44B and 44C is a display mode of the screen in a state where the setting for not displaying the winning number information is performed in this way, and the setting for not displaying the winning number information is performed. In this case, in the first area α, the number of winnings for the general winning opening is not displayed, the number of winnings for the first starting winning opening (so-called “heso”) and the second starting winning opening (so-called “Den Chu”). The number of winnings is not displayed.

  In this way, it is possible to set whether or not to display winning information according to the setting operation on the game hall side and according to the setting operation on the player side. In addition, the number-of-wins information can be displayed according to the judgment of the player.

  As shown in FIGS. 44 (a), (b), and (c), when the setting for not displaying the winning number information is made, the error message display area 5E, compared with the setting for displaying the winning number information, The fourth symbol display areas 5A and 5B, the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, and the start winning memory display area 5H are common. That is, the display position and display range (image size) of each image of the error message, the fourth symbol, the decorative symbol, and the hold information displayed in the second area β are set to display the winning information and the number of winnings. It does not change with the setting that does not display information. This simplifies the display control associated with the setting change for setting whether or not to display the winning information.

  On the other hand, when it is set not to display the winning number information, as shown in FIGS. 44A, 44B and 44C, it is set to display the winning number information (display examples in FIGS. 42 and 43). In contrast, the background image is visible in the first area α and the second area β. 44A, 44B, and 44C, the first area of the entire background image [rectangular area defined with coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (X, Y) as vertices). An area corresponding to α [rectangular area defined with coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (a, Y) as vertices) and an area corresponding to the second area β [coordinates (a + 1, 0) and coordinates ( Both of the rectangular areas defined with X, Y) as vertices, that is, the entire area of the background image is visible to the player.

  Therefore, in the examples of FIGS. 44 (a), (b), and (c), the player determines that the character included in the rectangular area defined with the coordinates (a + 1, 0) and coordinates (X, Y) of the background image as vertices. In addition to being able to visually recognize D, the character E included in the rectangular area defined with the coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (a, Y) of the background image as vertices can also be visually recognized.

  Thus, regarding the display position and display range (size of the image) of a specific image (error message, 4th symbol, decorative symbol, and hold information), the setting for displaying the winning number information and the winning number information are displayed. The control load is reduced by not changing (common) with the setting that does not, while the other images (background images) can be viewed with the setting that displays the winning information and the setting that does not display the winning information By making different ranges different, the interest in the case where winning information is not displayed is improved.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 44 (b), in the image display device 5, when the variable display of the 4th symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the hold information are performed, the winning in the general winning opening is performed. Even when the event occurs, as shown in FIG. 44 (d), the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not displayed because the setting is made so that the winning number information is not displayed. Also, as shown in FIG. 44 (c), in the image display device 5, when the 4th symbol stop display and the decorative symbol stop display are performed, a case where a winning to the general winning a prize occurs also occurs. As shown in FIG. 44 (d), since the number-of-winning information is not displayed, the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not displayed.

  In the example of FIGS. 44B, 44C, and 44D, an example in which the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not displayed even when the winning in the general winning slot is generated is shown. In the case where the setting is not displayed, the number of winnings at the first starting winning opening is not displayed even when winning at the first starting winning opening occurs, and the winning at the second starting winning opening occurs. However, the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening is not displayed. In this manner, whether or not to display the number of winnings at each winning opening can be set according to the player's operation.

(Each item in the winning information)
FIG. 45 shows an example of items of winning number information that can be displayed in the first area α. FIG. 45 shows items related to the number of prizes received at the general prize opening. Similarly, items related to the number of prizes received at the first start prize opening and to the second start prize opening. Items related to the number of winnings can be displayed in the first area α.

  It is possible to display “today's number of general winnings (A1)”, which is the total value of the number of winnings in each general winning opening since the power-on of the gaming machine. The effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the general winning number counter stored in the RAM 122 to 0 when the power is turned on, and increments the value of the general winning number counter by 1 each time a general winning opening designation command is received. By doing so, A1 can be tabulated.

  In addition, it is possible to display “today's general winning ratio (A2)”, which is the ratio of A1 to the total number of outs from when the gaming machine is turned on. The effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the out number counter stored in the RAM 122 to 0 when the power is turned on, and sets the value of the out number counter every time the detection signal output from the out ball detector is received. By adding one by one, the total number of outs can be tabulated, and by calculating the ratio of A1 to the total number of outs, A2 can be tabulated.

  In addition, it is possible to display “today's general award ball number (referred to as A3)”, which is the total number of award balls awarded based on winning in each general winning opening since the power-on of the gaming machine. In addition, it is possible to display “today's general prize ball ratio (referred to as A4)”, which is the ratio of A3 to the total number of prize balls since the power of the gaming machine is turned on.

  The ROM 121 stores the number of winning balls determined for each of the first starting winning port, the second starting winning port, the first general winning port 50A to the fourth general winning port 50D, and the big winning port. . The effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the general prize ball number counter stored in the RAM 122 to 0 when the power is turned on, and the general prize opening designation command is designated every time a general prize opening designation command is received. By adding the number of winning balls corresponding to the general winning opening to the value of the general winning ball number counter, A3 can be tabulated. In addition, when the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the prize ball number counter stored in the RAM 122 to 0, the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the big winning opening The total number of winning balls can be totaled by adding the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning port specified by each command to the value of the winning ball counter every time a command is received for a large winning port that specifies winning. Thus, A4 can be tabulated by calculating the ratio of A3 to the total number of winning balls.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 specifies whether the current gaming state is the low base state or the high base state by designating the gaming state by the gaming state designation command, and wins in the low base state. The number information (B1 to B4) and the winning number information (C1 to C4) in the high base state can be divided and tabulated.

  Specifically, it is possible to display “the number of general winnings in the low base state (referred to as B1)” that is the total value of the number of winnings in each general winning opening in the low base state, and each general winning opening in the high base state It is possible to display “the number of general winnings in the high base state (assumed to be C1)”, which is the total value of the winning numbers.

  When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the low base medium general winning number counter stored in the RAM 122 and the value of the high base medium general winning number counter to 0. . Then, during the period when the gaming state designated by the received gaming state designation command is the normal state, B1 is added by incrementing the value of the low base medium general winning number counter by 1 every time the general winning opening designation command is received. During the period when the gaming state specified by the received gaming state designation command is either the probability change state or the short time state, the value of the high base medium general winning number counter is received every time a general winning mouth designation command is received. By adding one by one, C1 can be tabulated.

  In addition, it is possible to display the “low base state general winning ratio (referred to as B2)” that is the ratio of B1 to the number of outs in the low base state, and the ratio of C1 to the number of outs in the high base state It is possible to display “a general winning ratio in a high base state (C2)”.

  It is assumed that the effect control CPU 120 sets both the low base medium out number counter value and the high base medium out number counter value stored in the RAM 122 to 0 when the power is turned on. And, in the normal state, the low base medium out number can be counted by adding the value of the low base medium out number counter by 1 each time the detection signal output from the out sphere detector is received, B2 can be tabulated by calculating the ratio of B1 to the number of low base medium outs. On the other hand, in the probability variation state or the short time state, the high base medium out number can be counted by adding one value to the high base medium out number counter every time a detection signal output from the out sphere detector is received. It is possible to count C2 by calculating the ratio of C1 to the number of high base medium outs.

  In addition, it is possible to display “the number of general prize balls in the low base state (referred to as B3)”, which is the total value of the number of prize balls awarded based on winning in each general winning opening in the low base state. It is possible to display “the number of general winning balls in the high base state (referred to as C3)”, which is the total value of the number of winning balls awarded based on winning in each general winning opening in the state.

  The effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the low base medium general prize ball number counter and the value of the high base medium general prize ball number counter stored in the RAM 122 at the time of power-on. And Then, during the period in which the gaming state designated by the received gaming state designation command is the normal state, the number of winning balls corresponding to the general winning mouth designated by the received general winning mouth designation command is displayed as a low base medium general winning ball number counter. B3 (“the number of general prize balls in the low base state”) can be counted by adding to the value of the game state, and the gaming state designated by the received gaming state designation command is either the probability variation state or the short-time state. The period is determined by adding the number of prize balls corresponding to the general prize opening specified by the received general prize designation command to the value of the high base medium general prize ball counter, so that C3 ("the number of general prize balls in the high base state" ") Can be tabulated.

  In addition, it is possible to display “a ratio of the general prize ball in the low base state (referred to as B4)” that is a ratio of B3 to the number of prize balls in the low base state. It is possible to display the “high base state general prize ball ratio (referred to as C4)” which is the ratio of C3.

  The effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the low base medium prize ball number counter and the value of the high base medium prize ball number counter stored in the RAM 122 to 0 when the power is turned on. . In the normal state, each time the start winning port designation command, the general winning port designation command, and the large winning mouth prize command are received, the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning mouth designated by each command is reduced to the low base middle prize. By adding to the value of the ball counter, the number of low base medium award balls can be tabulated, and by calculating the ratio of B3 to the number of low base medium award balls, B4 (“low base state General prize ball ratio ") can be tabulated. On the other hand, in the probability change state or the short-time state, the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning mouth designated by each command is increased every time the start winning mouth designation command, the general winning mouth designation command, and the large winning prize designation command are received. By adding to the value of the base middle prize ball number counter, the number of high base middle prize balls can be tabulated, and by calculating the ratio of C3 to the number of high base middle prize balls, C4 (“high It is possible to tabulate the general award ball ratio in the base state.

  As described above, information related to the number of winnings in the general winning opening can be tabulated for each gaming state, so that the player can grasp information according to the current gaming state. For example, when the gaming state is the low base state (normal state), focus on the items B1 to B4, and when the gaming state is the high base state (probability change state or short time state), focus on the items C1 to C4. Become.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the items B1 to B4 in the first area α when the gaming state is in the low base state, while not displaying the items C1 to C4, and when the gaming state is in the high base state. The items C1 to C4 may be displayed in the first area α, while the items B1 to B4 may not be displayed. Although the items B1 to B4 and the items C1 to C4 are displayed in the first area α regardless of the gaming state, the items B1 to B4 are more visible than the items C1 to C4 in the low base state. In a high base state, the items C1 to C4 may be displayed in a manner that is easier to visually recognize (for example, larger) than the items B1 to B4.

(Aggregation of winning information during the set period)
In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can count the number-of-wins information in the period set by the player, and the “total number of winnings in the set period ( D1) ”can be displayed in the first area α.

  When the aggregation period corresponding to the player's operation shown in FIG. 46 described later is set, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the general winning number counter stored in the RAM 122 to 0 and the aggregation. The timer value is set to a set period (total period according to the player's operation), and the total timer is started. Each time a general prize opening designation command is received, the value of the general winning number counter is incremented by 1 during the set period, and the general prize is received during the set period when the total timer times out (when the set total period has elapsed). The value of the number counter is displayed in the first area α as D1.

  In addition, while the number of outs is increasing (for example, within a predetermined period since the detection signal was last received from the out-sphere detector), the counting timer is updated while the number of outs is not increasing (for example, After a predetermined period has elapsed since the detection signal was last received from the out-ball detector, the counting timer may be stopped without updating. In this way, a period during which the game ball is not being launched into the game area 10 may be excluded from the counting period.

  When the counting timer times out and D1 is displayed in the first area α, the value of the general winning number counter is reset to 0 again during the setting period, and the value of the counting timer is again set to the setting period (player's The counting timer is set again at the counting period according to the operation). The value of the general prize counter during the set period is added every time a general prize opening designation command is received, and the general prize counter during the set period when the total timer times out again (when the set total period elapses again). Is displayed in the first area α as D1. Thus, D1 corresponding to the counting period is displayed for each counting period set by the player.

  Further, it is possible to display a “general winning ratio (set as D2) for the set period” that is a ratio of D1 to the number of outs of gaming machines in the set period. When the value of the general winning number counter during the set period stored in the RAM 122 is set to 0, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the out number counter during the set period stored in the RAM 122 to 0. The number of outs in the set period can be totaled by adding the value of the out number counter during the set period every time a detection signal output from the out-sphere detector is received. D2 can be tabulated by calculating the ratio of D1 to the number of outs in the period.

  Further, it is possible to display “the number of general prize balls in the set period (denoted as D3)”, which is the total value of the number of prize balls awarded based on winning in each general prize opening in the set period. Further, it is possible to display “general prize ball ratio (D4) in the set period” which is a ratio of D3 to the number of prize balls in the set period.

  When the aggregation period corresponding to the player's operation shown in FIG. 46, which will be described later, is set, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the general prize ball number counter stored in the RAM 122 to 0, and The value of the total timer is set to a set period (total period according to the player's operation), and the total timer is started. Each time a general winning award designation command is received, the total number of prize balls corresponding to the general winning prize designated by the general winning award designation command is added to the value of the general prize winning number counter during the set period, and the counting timer The value of the general prize ball number counter during the set period when time-out occurs (when the set counting period elapses) is displayed in the first area α as D3.

  When the counting timer times out and D3 is displayed in the first area α, the value of the general prize ball number counter is reset to 0 again during the setting period, and the value of the counting timer is again set to the setting period (player). The counting timer is restarted, and the counting timer starts again. Then, every time a general winning opening designation command is received, the value of the general prize ball counter during the set period is added, and the general prize ball during the set period when the total timer times out again (when the set total period elapses again). The value of the number counter is displayed in the first area α as D3. Thus, D3 corresponding to the total period is displayed for each total period set by the player.

  When the value of the general prize ball number counter during the setting period stored in the RAM 122 is set to 0, the effect control CPU 120 also sets the prize ball number counter during the setting period stored in the RAM 122. Is set to 0, and each time a winning prize designation command is specified, each time a start prize designation command, a general prize designation command, or a big prize entry command specifying a prize to the big prize opening is received. Is added to the value of the prize ball number counter during the set period, so that the number of prize balls in the set period can be tabulated, and the ratio of D3 to the number of prize balls in the set period D4 can be tabulated by calculating.

  It should be noted that the general prize opening designation command received by the effect control CPU 120 is to designate which general prize opening the game ball has won, so that the effect control CPU 120 has the first general prize opening 50A to No. 4 Total number of winnings to the general winning opening 50D is individually counted, and the items corresponding to A1 to A4, B1 to B4, C1 to C4, and D1 to D4 are counted for each general winning opening, and the total value is obtained. It is possible to display in the first area α.

  Each item related to the number of winnings to the general winning opening shown above, each item related to the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening described later, and the number of winnings to the second starting winning opening Which of the items is displayed in the first area α may be automatically determined according to the gaming state or the like. For example, the items B1 to B4 may be displayed in the low base state, and C1 to C4 may be displayed in the high base state. In addition, each item related to the number of winnings to the general winning opening shown above, each item related to the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening described later, and the number of winnings to the second starting winning opening Which of the related items is displayed in the first area α may be selectable by an operation on the game hall side (for example, an operation using the display changeover switch 32 and the operation button 30). The selection may be made by the above operation (for example, the operation using the operation button 30).

  In addition, each item related to the number of winnings to the general winning opening shown above, each item related to the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening described later, and the number of winnings to the second starting winning opening For each related item, a reference value corresponding to each item is provided, and the ROM 121 stores the reference value in association with each item. Therefore, the CPU 120 for effect control checks whether or not the total value of the item displayed in the first area α has reached the reference value of the item, and if the total value does not reach the reference value As shown in FIG. 46 (4), which will be described later, it is possible to display a message notifying that the total value of the item displayed in the first area α has not reached the reference value of the item. . Thereby, the player grasps whether or not the total value of the item displayed in the first area α is an advantageous value as compared with the reference value of the item, and selects the gaming machine. It can be used as a judgment material (whether or not to continue the game in the gaming machine).

  Next, a method for setting the aggregation period will be described with reference to FIG. For example, the totaling period setting screen in FIG. 46 sets the totaling period when selection is made to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening on the selection screen in FIG. This is a screen that is displayed when the selection screen for selecting whether or not is selected and the selection to set the aggregation period is made on the selection screen (when the intention to set the aggregation period is confirmed) And

  In the setting screen of FIG. 46 (1), a message “Please set the total period” is displayed, and an image simulating the operation button 30 is displayed below the message. On the setting screen, an icon including the characters “10 minutes”, an icon including the characters “30 minutes”, and an icon including the characters “60 minutes” are displayed, and the button is “determine button after selecting with the jog dial”. A message is displayed, and an arrow that prompts the user to press the operation button 30 (jog dial) after rotating it is displayed.

  When setting the total period to 10 minutes, when the operation button 30 is pressed while the icon including the characters “10 minutes” is selected by rotating the operation button 30 (jog dial) to the left, the “setting” The message “The period is 10 minutes” is displayed, and the aggregation period is set to 10 minutes. That is, the setting period of D1 to D4 is 10 minutes. Also, when the total period is set to 30 minutes, as shown in FIG. 46 (1), when the operation button 30 is pressed while an icon including the characters “30 minutes” is selected, FIG. 46 (2). As shown in FIG. 5, a message “Setting period is 30 minutes” is displayed, and the aggregation period is set to 30 minutes. That is, the setting period of D1 to D4 is 30 minutes. Further, when setting the total period to 60 minutes, when the operation button 30 is pressed while the icon including the characters “60 minutes” is selected by rotating the operation button 30 (jog dial) to the right, The message “Setting period is 60 minutes” is displayed, and the aggregation period is set to 60 minutes. That is, the setting period of D1 to D4 is 60 minutes.

  Thus, it is possible to set a desired total period according to the player's operation. In the example of FIG. 46, 30 minutes is set as the total period. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 46 (3), in the first area α, the number of winnings in the general winning opening per 30 minutes is displayed as “the number of winnings in the set period (D1)”. In the example of FIG. 46 (3), 30 is stored as the reference value of the number of winnings to the general winning opening per 30 minutes, whereas the total value of the number of winnings to the general winning opening per 30 minutes is Since it is 37, the total value exceeds the reference value. Accordingly, there is no notification that the total value has not reached the reference value.

  On the other hand, in the example of FIG. 46 (4), 30 is stored as the reference value of the number of winnings to the general winning opening per 30 minutes, whereas the number of winnings to the general winning opening per 30 minutes is counted. Since the value is 29, the total value does not reach the reference value. Therefore, a notification that the total value has not reached the reference value (display of a message “below the reference value (30 times / 30 minutes)”) is made.

(Items related to the number of prizes received at the start prize opening)
The production control CPU 120 receives a start winning port designation command for designating which one of the first start winning port and the second starting winning port is won when a winning to the start winning port occurs. By the same method as the totaling process when receiving a general winning opening designation command for designating which of the first to fourth general winning openings, the “number of wins to the first starting winning opening of today (in A1 “Equivalent)”, “award ratio to today's first start winning opening (corresponding to A2)”, “the number of winning balls awarded based on the winning to the first start winning opening today (corresponding to A3)”, And “the ratio of the number of winning balls awarded based on the winning of today's first starting winning opening to the total number of winning balls of today (corresponding to A4)” and “the second starting winning opening of today No. of winnings (equivalent to A1) ”,“ Today's 2nd starting prize winning ratio "Equivalent to A2)", "the number of winning balls awarded based on the winning of the second starting winning opening today (corresponding to A3)", and "the second starting of today against the total number of winning balls of today" The ratio of the number of winning balls awarded based on winning in the winning opening (corresponding to A4) ”can be totaled and displayed in the first area α.

  Also, “the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening in the low base state (corresponding to B1)”, “the winning ratio in the first starting winning opening in the low base state (corresponding to B2)”, “the number of winning in the low base state” The number of prize balls awarded based on winning in the 1st prize opening (corresponding to B3) "and" the number of prize balls given in the low base condition to the first starting prize opening in the low base state "Percentage of winning balls awarded based on winning (corresponding to B4)", "Number of winnings in second starting winning opening in low base state (corresponding to B1)", "Second starting in low base state" Winning ratio to the winning opening (equivalent to B2) "," Number of winning balls awarded based on winning at the second starting winning opening in the low base state (equivalent to B3) ", and" Low base state " In the low base state for the number of winning balls 2 ratio of starting prize counts granted under the winning to winning opening (corresponding to B4) ", aggregates the can be displayed in the first area alpha.

  Also, “the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening in the high base state (corresponding to C1)”, “the winning ratio in the first starting winning opening in the high base state (corresponding to C2)”, “the number of winning in the high base state” The number of prize balls awarded based on winning in the 1st start prize opening (corresponding to C3) "and" the number of prize balls given in the high base state to the first start prize opening in the high base state “Percentage of winning balls awarded based on winning (corresponding to C4)”, “Number of winnings in second starting winning opening in high base state (corresponding to C1)”, “Second starting in high base state “Award ratio to the winning opening (corresponding to C2)”, “Number of winning balls awarded based on winning in the second starting winning opening in the high base state (corresponding to C3)”, and “Awarding in the high base state” In a high base state for the number of winning balls 2 ratio of starting prize counts granted under the winning to winning opening (corresponding to C4) ", aggregates the can be displayed in the first area alpha.

  In addition, “the number of winnings in the first start winning opening in the setting period (corresponding to D1)”, “the winning ratio in the first starting winning opening in the setting period (corresponding to D2)”, “the first starting winning in the setting period” Awarded based on the number of winning balls awarded based on winning in the mouth (corresponding to D3), and “based on winning in the first start winning mouth in the setting period with respect to the number of winning balls given in the setting period” "Percentage of winning balls (corresponding to D4)", "Number of winnings in the second start winning opening during the setting period (corresponding to D1)", "Winning ratio for the second starting winning opening during the setting period ( D2) ”,“ the number of prize balls awarded based on winning in the second start winning opening during the setting period (corresponding to D3) ”, and“ setting for the number of prize balls given during the setting period ” Awarded based on winning the 2nd starting prize opening during the period Percentage of winning balls number (corresponding to D4) ", aggregates the can be displayed in the first area alpha.

(Role (running ratio), ratio display)
Further, in the gaming machine 1, each of the winning ports (large winning port, second starting winning port, first starting winning port, first to fourth general winning ports, etc.) is also included in the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11. , Also called “entry area”). Further, in the gaming machine 1, predetermined information such as a combination (community ratio) and a combination ratio can be displayed on the display monitor 29 shown in FIGS. 49 and 50 provided on the main board 11.

  As described above, on the gaming machine manufacturer side, it is normal to design the game board surface so that the game medium enters the general winning area at a predetermined frequency (passes the test). Further, when the test is performed, it is confirmed whether or not the game medium has entered the general winning area at a predetermined frequency. Further, even after the gaming machine is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment is performed and, as a result of the adjustment, whether the game medium has entered the general winning area as frequently as designed. Therefore, in a gaming machine according to an embodiment described later, it is possible to recognize what adjustment has been made in a gaming machine having a general winning area. In the following, display of an accessory ratio and the like will be described. Hereinafter, the display of the total of game balls on the main board 11 and the ratio of the objects will be described.

  The main board 11 shown in FIG. 49 is a board that performs control related to the game. As shown in FIG. 51A, the main substrate 11 is enclosed in a substrate case 201, and a display monitor 29 is disposed at the center of the back side of the main substrate 11. The display monitor 29 is disposed in front of the main board 11 when visually recognized. Since the main board 11 is not visible when the glass door frame 3a is not opened, the front when viewing the main board 11 is the back side of the game board 2 when the glass door frame 3a is opened. It is the front of the game and is different from the front of the gaming machine 1. However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the gaming machine 1 may be common.

  The main board 11 has information related to game winning, for example, the number of winning balls by winning at the first starting opening (heso), the number of winning balls by winning at the second starting winning opening (electrical chew), and the large winning opening ( The number of winning balls and the total number of winning balls are entered and aggregated, and the display monitor 29 is the proportion of the total number of winning balls that is occupied by the number of winning balls for winning the large winning opening (attacker). This is the percentage of the total number of consecutive balls (%) and the total number of prize balls that are won by winning the 2nd starting prize opening (Den Chu) and the number of winning balls by winning the big prize opening (Attacker) The role ratio (%) is displayed. A combination (ream ratio) is a ratio of the total number of winning balls that is occupied by the number of winning balls (the number of consecutive winning characters below) by winning a winning prize (attacker). The ratio is the number of winning balls in the 2nd starting winning entrance (Den Chu) out of the total number of winning balls and the number of winning balls in the big winning entrance (attacker) (the number of winning balls below) Is the proportion occupied. The total number of winning balls (the total number of winning balls below) is the number of winning balls for winning the winning prize winner (attacker), the number of winning balls for winning the second starting winning prize opening (Den Chu), and the winning prize opening (Attacker) and the total number of winning balls by winning in winning ports (first starting winning port, general winning port) other than the second starting winning port (Den Chu). In addition, the big winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electrical chew) are variable roles, and the winning percentage of the game ball is changed due to the change of the passable width of the game ball. is there. In addition, the winning ports (first starting winning port, general winning port) other than the big winning port (attacker) and the second starting winning port (Den Chu) are fixed roles, and the passable width of the game ball is fixed. The expected percentage of winning game balls is a fixed character.

  As a method of counting and calculating information related to game winnings, the number of winning balls (the number of general winning balls), the number of winning balls in the first starting opening (heso) and the general winning opening (sode) with 6000 winning balls, 2 Special Dengaku Award, which is the number of balls in the regular electric role (number of electric chew awards), which is the number of balls won by winning in the starting winning opening (Denchu), Count the number of balls (the number of attackers). The total is set as one set, and 10 sets, that is, 60,000 roles (%) and roles (%) are calculated. In addition, the number of award balls (general award ball number), the number of ordinary electric award balls (the number of electric chew award balls), and the special electric roles The number of winning balls (attacker winning ball number) is recorded in the ring buffer, has a recording capacity of at least 11 sets, and is updated for each set. Furthermore, the memory of 11 sets of 66,000 pieces is stored in a corresponding quantity (for example, several bytes), and the cumulative combination (connection ratio) (%) and combination ratio (%) within the range of those numerical values are stored. Can be calculated.

  The display monitor 29 displays 60,000 items in a series (unit ratio) (%), a unit ratio (%), and a total unit group (unit ratio) (%) and a unit ratio (%) for a predetermined time (for example, 30). Can be switched every second). That is, four displays are switched and displayed by one display means. In this case, it takes 2 minutes to display all, but the number of award balls won by winning at the first starting hole (hews) counted by the progress of the game, winning at the second starting winning hole (electric chew) The number of award balls due to, and the number of award balls due to winning a prize winner (attacker) will change. Then, for example, if the number of winning balls won after displaying 60,000 consecutive games (run ratio) (%) is reflected in the 60000 hand roles (%) displayed thereafter, There is a possibility that a discrepancy may occur between the 60,000 servings (running ratio) (%) and the 60000 servings (%). Therefore, the number of winning balls by winning at the first starting gate (heso), the number of winning balls by winning at the second starting winning port (Den Chu), the number of winning balls by winning at the big winning port (attacker), the total number of winning balls If the numbers are input and aggregated at a predetermined timing in the switching display (for example, display timing of 60,000 combinations (run ratio) (%), etc.), such a discrepancy can be prevented. .

As an example of the calculation method, the total number of winning balls is 60000, and the number of winning balls by winning in the second starting winning mouth (Den Chu) and the number of winning balls by winning in the big winning mouth (attacker) A method for calculating the ratio of the winning combinations (ratio (%)) in the case where the total number of acquired winning balls is 42,000 will be described. In the following description, the total number of acquired balls refers to the total number of game media (prize balls) paid out from the gaming machine. In addition, the number of winning balls acquired means the total number of game media paid out by winning the game media to the attacker and the electric chew. In addition, the number of consecutively-acquired balls acquired is the cumulative number of game media paid out when the game media wins an attacker. For this reason, the combination (running ratio) can be obtained by the following equation (1). Further, the role ratio can be obtained by the following equation (2).
Association (ream ratio) = [Number of consecutive feature acquisition balls / total number of acquisitions] × 100 (1)
Ratio = [(number of consecutive feature winning balls + number of winning balls) / total winning number] × 100 (2)

When the total number of winning balls is 60000 and the number of winning balls is 42,000, the bonus rate is obtained by dividing 42000 by 60000 and rounding down to 3 decimal places after 0.70.
However, since the microcomputer used in the gaming machine cannot perform the calculation after the decimal point, the following method is required.

  First, the first calculation method will be described. In the first calculation method, first, the number of winning characters is multiplied by 100 to 4200000. Then, 4200000 is divided by 60000. As a result, 70 is obtained as a quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the ratio of the actors is obtained as 70%. That is, by multiplying the dividend by 100, it is possible to obtain a calculation result up to two decimal places. Here, when the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point is obtained, it may be multiplied by 1000.

  Next, the second calculation method will be described. In the second calculation method, first, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 to obtain 600. Then, 42000 is divided by 600. As a result, 70 is obtained as a quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the ratio of the actors is obtained as 70%. That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, it is possible to obtain the calculation result up to two decimal places. Here, when the calculation result up to 3 digits after the decimal point is obtained, it may be divided by 1000.

  In this example, the total number of prize balls is 60000, but a 3-byte area is provided as an area for storing the total number of prize balls in order to calculate the ratio of a long-term bonus. That is, in this example, 00EA60h is stored in the 3-byte storage area. Similarly, 00A410h is stored in the 3-byte storage area for the number of winning balls acquired.

  Here, the microcomputer used in the gaming machine can only perform operations between values of up to 2 bytes. Therefore, in order to facilitate the calculation, the lower 1 byte may be truncated.

  Here, a third calculation method performed by simplifying the second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, the lower 1 byte of 60h is rounded down to 00EAh, which is a decimal number, with respect to 00EA60h, which is the total number of prize balls, in order to facilitate calculation on a microcomputer used in a gaming machine. Calculate 234 by notation. Similarly, 10h of the lower 1 byte is rounded down to 00A410h of the winning character acquisition ball number, and the winning character acquisition ball number is 00A4h, that is, 164 is calculated in decimal notation.

  Then, similarly to the second calculation method, 2 is calculated by dividing the total number of winning balls by 100 (273/100). Then, 156 is divided by 2 to obtain 78 as a quotient. From the 78 obtained here, the ratio of the actors is obtained as 78%.

  In the third calculation method, calculation with a microcomputer used in a gaming machine is facilitated, but an error of + 12% occurs. However, the error when the total number of winning balls and the number of winning balls is 10 times is + 1%. That is, the error is reduced as the period for calculating the accessory ratio becomes longer, and approximates the original value.

  The substrate case 201 is made of a light-transmitting material so that the main substrate 11 and the display monitor 29 are visible. The board case 201 is formed with a hole (not shown) through which a wiring connector connected to the main board 11 is inserted, and a heat radiating hole for releasing heat of electrical components of the main board 11. The display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 is arranged at a position where the heat radiation hole is not directly in front. Therefore, the visibility of the display monitor 29 is not blocked by the heat radiating holes. Here, “directly in front” means directly in front of the main board 11 as a viewpoint, and means between the main board 11 and an employee who wants to visually recognize the main board 11.

  The board case 201 is provided with a seal for displaying the type, model, specifications, etc. of the main board 11. These holes, heat dissipation holes, and seals are arranged so as not to block the display on the display monitor 29. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50, when the display monitor 29 is arranged in the first part of the main board 11 (for example, the central part of the main board 11), the second different from the first part in the main board 11. Another electrical component or the like is disposed in a portion (for example, the peripheral portion of the main substrate 11), and a hole, a heat radiating hole, or a seal is disposed in a portion of the substrate case corresponding to the second portion of the main substrate 11. Good. In particular, the heat radiating hole is preferably provided in the vicinity of the display monitor 29 in order to release heat generated by the display monitor 29. Even in this case, it is preferable that the heat radiating hole is disposed at a position not directly in front of the display monitor 29. According to this, the visibility on the display monitor 29 is not hindered, so that it is easy to confirm information related to winning.

  Further, it is preferable that the wiring does not overlap with the portion of the substrate case 201 corresponding to the second part of the main substrate 11. Specifically, the portion of the substrate case 201 corresponding to the second portion of the main substrate 11 does not overlap the hole to which one connector of the wiring is connected and the connection destination to which the other connector of the wiring is connected. To. According to this, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the display monitor 29 from being hindered by the wiring.

  The main board 11 is provided with a 7-segment display for displaying an error of the gaming machine. In order to avoid misidentification with the 7-segment of the display monitor 29, the main board 11 is separated by a predetermined distance or other electronic components. It is preferable to arrange them with a gap between them. The other electronic components here are preferably large control components such as a CPU.

  Storage area for storing information related to game winning (ring buffer, 10 set total buffer (total of information related to game winning stored in ring buffer having 10 counters of 2 bytes at maximum), prize ball The total number buffer) may be stored continuously without being initialized when the reset button is operated. The ring buffer will be further described later. Note that the checksum of the stored value is calculated, and if an abnormality is detected, initialization is performed, the value of the number of winning balls is greater than the value of the total number of winning balls stored, Initialization of the storage area for storing information related to game winnings when an event that cannot occur as a situation is detected, such as when the number of consecutive feature-acquired balls is greater than the number of acquired balls Processing may be performed. Further, the abnormality count error display or warning display may be performed without performing the initialization process, or the abnormality count error display or warning display may be performed or may be performed after the initialization process. Abnormal count error display and warning display will be further described later.

  For example, assuming that the total number of acquired balls is 34321 and the number of winning balls is 19876, 34321 are divided as a divisor for 19876 and the ratio is calculated. 1987/34321 = 0.57912... It is calculated that the role ratio (%) is about 57.9%. When calculation is performed in the game control microcomputer 100, calculation with a decimal point must be avoided, so the calculation formula is replaced with the following. In the division of 19876/34321, 34321 of the denominator is divided by 100, and the decimal point is rounded down to be 19876/343 = 57.9475. Since the fractional part is rounded down, it is calculated that the ratio is 57% (%) and is displayed on the display monitor 29. In this example, the value calculated by accurate calculation is an error on the display. There will be no.

  The minimum value in 16 bits is 32768 (the value other than the value of the most significant bit is 0), and the value with the maximum error is when the total number of acquired balls and the number of acquired balls are 32799 respectively. If this is calculated by the above method, 32799/32799 = 100%, and if replaced with the calculation by the game control microcomputer 100, 32799/327 = 100.3%, which is an error of + 0.3%. When the calculation is performed with the decimal point rounded down, for example, when the accurate value is 69.9% and the value calculated by the game control microcomputer is 70.1%, 69% → 70% on the display. % Error may be displayed, but even in the display of 1% error, it is possible to display the role (%) (or the combination (connection ratio) (%)) with a very small error.

  In addition, when the above calculation method is used, the total number of acquired balls is divided by 100. Therefore, when the total number of acquired balls is less than 100, the calculation cannot be performed. Further, the error gradually increases even when it is less than 32768. If it is less than 10,000, the error may exceed 1%, resulting in a larger error. That is, the smaller the total number of acquired balls, the larger the error. For this reason, until the total number of acquired balls of a specific number or more (for example, 32768 which is the minimum value of 16 bits) is counted by the counter, the display monitor 29 displays the role ratio (%) and the role combination (ream ratio) (%). Notifying or notifying that the error may be large even if it is displayed, by emitting a dedicated lamp, outputting a notification sound, flashing the displayed value, etc. Good.

  Further, the display monitor 29 displays the ratio (%) and the combination (link ratio) (%) on 7 segments, and switches each value at predetermined intervals (for example, every 30 seconds). indicate. In this case, for example, while the role ratio (%) is displayed for 30 seconds, an event occurs in which a new game medium wins an electric chew or attacker, and the value calculated accordingly is changed to If it is displayed as a value of (combined ratio) (%), there is a possibility that the value of the combined ratio (%) and the combined function (%) may deviate. For this reason, it is preferable to sequentially display the values calculated and calculated in the same interrupt for the role ratio (%) and the role combination (ream ratio) (%).

  In addition, when the numerical value that can be displayed in 7 segments is 2 digits (for example, when two 7 segments are provided), it becomes impossible to display 100% as 100. In this case, 99 may be displayed instead of 100. In the display monitor 29 shown in FIGS. 50 and 51A, numerical values can be displayed in the lower two digits. However, even in this case, the numerical values may be displayed without using the upper two digits. Alternatively, numerical values may be displayed in a part of the upper two digits under specific conditions.

  In addition, in the above calculation method, an example is shown in which the total number of acquired balls, the number of winning balls, and the number of consecutive winning balls are counted in a counter. It is detected that a game medium has been won by a sensor provided, and the number of winning balls is counted separately based on the detection result. The value to be aggregated may be calculated. Further, based on the detection result, a sensor provided individually for the attacker and a sensor provided after the discharge passage through which the game media winning the attacker and the game media winning the electric chew are discharged are joined. Thus, a value to be added to the counter for the number of winning balls for the winning combination and the counter for the number of winning balls for the consecutive winning points may be calculated. Hereinafter, the display of the combination (ream) ratio will be described in detail. In the following specific example, an example will be described in which it is detected that a game medium has been won by a sensor provided in each of an attacker and an electric chew, and the number of each winning ball is individually counted based on the detection result.

  A display monitor 29 is connected to the main board 11 in the gaming machine 1 as shown in FIG. In the gaming machine 1, the main board 11 is provided on the back side of the gaming board 2 (see FIG. 1) provided in the gaming machine frame 3 as shown in FIG. In addition to the main board 11, other peripheral boards such as an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a power supply board, a payout control board, and a launch control board are provided on the back side of the game board 2. Yes. The main board 11 is arranged at a position where it does not overlap with each peripheral board other than the main board 11. The main board 11 may overlap with each of these peripheral boards. In particular, the main substrate 11 may overlap so as to be on the upper side of each peripheral substrate.

  The RAM 102 on the main board 11 includes a first gate passing number counter, a second gate passing number counter, a first starting winning number counter, a second starting winning number counter, a first general winning number counter, a second general winning number counter, A third general winning number counter, a fourth general winning number counter, and a large winning number counter are provided.

  The first gate passage number counter is a counter that counts the number of times that the first gate switch 21A has detected a game ball. The second gate passage number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second gate switch 21B. The first start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first start port switch 22A. The second start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second start port switch 22B.

  The first general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first general winning port switch 24A. The second general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second general winning port switch 24B. The third general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the third general winning opening switch 24C. The fourth general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the fourth general winning opening switch 24D. The big prize counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23.

  A clear switch is connected to the main board 11. The clear switch is arranged on the back side surface of the game board 2 at a position where an employee or the like cannot easily operate. By operating the clear switch, the combination (relation ratio) and data used for the combination stored in the RAM 102 described later are cleared. The clear switch is a switch that is operated when it is necessary to redo the calculation of the association (relation ratio) or ratio, such as when there is a failure in the calculation of the association (relation ratio) or ratio. It is. For this reason, it is a switch that does not need to be operated when collecting data for calculating a normal combination (run ratio) or a combination ratio. When the clear switch is operated, a clear switch operation signal is transmitted to the main board 11 in addition to clearing data.

  The main substrate 11 is provided with an RTC 106. The main board 11 can detect the current time by the RTC 106. The RTC 106 can measure a predetermined time, elapsed time, and the like by performing initial settings, but in the present embodiment, the RTC 106 can measure the business hours of the game hall.

  The main board 11 is accommodated in a board case 201 as shown in FIG. Caulking pins 11B are attached to the substrate case 201. Since the caulking pin 11B is provided, the main board 11 is completely enclosed in the board case 201, and an illegal act on the main board 11 is prevented. The substrate case 201 is a crimped substrate case (hereinafter also referred to as “crimped substrate case”).

  The display monitor 29 is provided on the main board 11. In addition, a seal seal 11S is attached to the substrate case 201 to prove that the main substrate 11 is sealed. The seal seal 11S is pasted across, for example, the removed portion of the substrate case 201. The seal seal 11S is disposed at a position away from the main substrate 11, and is disposed at a position different from the position where the visibility of the display monitor 29 is blocked, such as directly in front of the display monitor 29. Thus, the display monitor 29 is disposed at a position that is not hidden by the seal seal 11S.

  The display monitor 29 includes a four-digit display unit of a first display unit 29A, a second display unit 29B, a third display unit 29C, and a fourth display unit 29D. Each of the first display unit 29A to the fourth display unit 29D is configured by 7 segments configured by seven segments that draw a character “8”, and dots disposed on the lower right side of the 7 segments. The first display unit 29A to the fourth display unit 29D can be turned on and blinked in various colors, for example, red, blue, green, yellow, white, and the like. In addition, these colors can be displayed in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing in an extremely short period.

  Each item of display Nos. 1 to 4 shown in FIG. The total period is displayed on the first display portion 29A and the second display portion 29B of the upper two digits, and the numerical value is displayed as a percentage on the third display portion 29C and the fourth display portion 29D of the lower two digits. In display No1, a short-term role combination (run ratio) is displayed, and in display No2, a short-term role ratio is displayed. In display No3, the total cumulative combination (running ratio) is displayed, and in display No2, the total cumulative combination is displayed.

  The short term here means a period in which the number of awarded balls (acquired balls) was 60000. The period for which the total is calculated means the total period after starting the calculation of the consecutive (relation ratio) and ratio, or the total period after temporarily resetting the calculation of the consecutive (link ratio) and ratio. To do.

  In the above example, the combination (run ratio) and the combination ratio are calculated regardless of the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the combination of consecutive balls (ream ratio) may be the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the big prize opening in the big hit gaming state in the total number of prize balls. Also, the winning ratio is the total number of winning balls. The winning ratio is the number of winning balls in the second starting winning opening in the high base state of the total winning balls and the winning winning opening in the big hit gaming state. It is good also as a ratio which the number of prize balls by winning a prize occupies.

  When the short-term role combination (run ratio) of the display No1 is displayed, “y6.” Is displayed on the first display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B, and the short-term role ratio of the display No2 is displayed. "Y7." Is displayed on the first display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B. In addition, when the short-term combination (linkage ratio) of display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term combination (linkage ratio) is displayed as a percentage (displayed in%) on the first display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B. When the short-term role ratio of display No. 2 is displayed, the short-term role ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the first display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B.

  When the total accumulated combination of display No. 3 (run ratio) is displayed, “A6.” Is displayed on the first display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B, and the total accumulated combination of display No. 4 is displayed. In this case, “A7.” Is displayed on the first display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B. In addition, when the total cumulative combination (run ratio) of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative combination (run ratio) is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D. When the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed in percentage (% display) on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D.

  When the main board 11 calculates the combination (link ratio) and the combination ratio, the game ball that has entered the fourth general winning opening from the attacker, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the first general winning opening The number of intrusions is counted. In the main process, the CPU 103 performs the first gate switch 21A and the second gate switch 21B, the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the first general winning port switch 24A to the fourth general switch. A state confirmation process is performed to confirm the state of each switch (presence / absence of a detection signal) of the winning opening switch 24D.

  In the state confirmation process of each switch, it is specified which entry area the game ball has entered based on the detection signal output from each switch. When detection signals are output from the first gate switch 21A and the second gate switch 21B, the values of the first gate passage number counter and the second gate passage number counter are added, and the first start port switch 22A, When the detection signal is output from the second start port switch 22B, the values of the first start winning number counter and the second starting winning number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the count switch 23, When the value of the large winning number counter is added and a detection signal is output from the first general winning port switch 24A, the second general winning port switch 24B, the third general winning port switch 24C, and the fourth general winning port switch 24D. Is added to the values of the first general winning number counter, the second general winning number counter, the third general winning number counter, and the fourth general winning number counter, Aggregate entering the number of tricks cells (winning number of game balls to each of the winning openings). Note that the value of each counter is stored in the RAM 102.

  In this way, the step for counting the number of game balls entering each entry area is executed together in a series of processes for checking the switch status corresponding to each entry area (included in the switch status check process). Thus, the number of game balls entering each entry area can be counted without causing a separate counting program to be executed, that is, without causing a problem of insufficient capacity due to an increase in the number of execution programs. .

  The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the number of winning balls by winning each winning mouth based on the total number of winning game balls to each winning mouth, and stores the calculated number of winning balls in the RAM 102 for each winning mouth. Let The number of winning balls for winning a game ball is calculated by multiplying the number of gaming balls to be paid out by one winning with respect to the winning opening and the number of winning for the winning opening. The number of winning balls for winning a game ball is predetermined for each winning opening.

  As shown in FIG. 52, the number of winning balls for each winning mouth divided here is a general winning mouth winning ball (a winning ball by winning from the first general winning mouth to the fourth general winning mouth (sode)), 1st starting prize mouth ball (award ball by winning the 1st starting prize port (heso)), ordinary electric role award ball (award ball by winning an electric Chu), special electric role award ball (winning an attacker) Is the number of prize balls. The RAM 102 also stores the total number of winning balls. The CPU 103 separately counts the number of game balls won in the general winning opening and the number of game balls won in the first starting opening, but the number of game balls won in the general winning opening and the first starting opening are counted. The number of winning game balls to may be summed up. In addition, although the number of prize balls for the general prize opening prize ball and the number of prize balls for the first start mouth prize ball are calculated separately, the number of prize balls for the general prize opening prize ball and the number of the first start mouth prize ball are calculated. May be calculated together.

  The RAM 102 includes a ring buffer and an active buffer for storing the number of prize balls. The ring buffer includes 10 first storage areas to 10th storage areas, each of which has a counter of up to 2 bytes for storing the number of winning balls by winning in each winning mouth for every 6000 winning balls. As described above, the ring buffer has a storage area of a predetermined unit (maximum 2 bytes). The active buffer also includes a 0th storage area composed of a counter of up to 2 bytes for storing the number of winning balls by winning in each winning mouth for every 6000 winning balls. In the 0th storage area, the number of winning balls for each winning mouth that increases as the game progresses is added. Eleven storage areas from the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area can store 256 × 256 = 65536 data, and up to 6000 data can be stored with a margin.

  In addition, the RAM 102 is provided with a storage area for the total number of prize balls (for 10 sets) stored in the first storage area to the tenth storage area and the total total for each winning opening. The storage area of the total of 10 sets and the total total is composed of a counter of maximum 3 bytes. Therefore, 256 × 256 × 256 = 16777216 data can be stored, and up to 60000 data can be spared. I can remember.

  In addition, the RAM 102 is provided with a role combination (relation ratio) role storage area for storing role ratios and role combinations (ream ratios) of 10 sets and totals. The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the ratios of the ten sets and the total cumulative and the combination of the totals (running ratio) based on the number of winning balls based on the number of game balls won in each of the ten sets and the total cumulative winning holes. 10 sets and total accumulated role ratios and role combinations (ream ratios) are stored in a role combination (ream ratio) role storage area. Each of the 10 sets and the total accumulated role ratios and role combinations (ream ratios) are stored in counters of up to 1 byte. For example, in the case of storing the set ratio and the combined run (run ratio) of 10 sets and the total cumulative number as an integer, the counter can be stored with a margin with a maximum of 1 byte.

  Here, the memory space of the CPU 103 of the main board 11 will be described. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a memory map of the CPU on the main board. The CPU 103 has a memory space for accessing the above-described built-in register, ROM 101, RAM 102, and the like. Specifically, as shown in the memory map of FIG. 53, the address / data signal line of the ROM 101 is a built-in ROM area of a 16 Kbyte area of 0000H to 2FFFH (H indicates a hexadecimal number; the same applies hereinafter) in the memory space. Assigned to. The CPU 103 performs various control processes in the built-in ROM area.

  The address / data signal lines of the built-in registers are assigned to the built-in register areas FE00H to FEBHFH in the memory space. The CPU 103 reads data from the built-in register and writes data to the register through the built-in register area.

  The address / data signal line of the RAM 102 is assigned to the RWM area (built-in RAM area) of F000H to F3FFH in the memory space. The CPU 103 designates the RWM area and reads data from the RAM 102 or writes data to the RAM 102. Note that other areas of the memory space (in the present embodiment, 3000H to EFFFH, F400H to FDFFH, FEC0H to FFFFH) are unused areas.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54, a use area program area, a use area data area, a non-use area program area, and a non-use area data area are allocated to the built-in ROM area. A free area is allocated between the use area program area and the use area data area. Similarly, free areas are also allocated between the use area data area and the non-use area program area, and between the non-use area program area and the non-use area data area. The CPU 103 designates this built-in ROM area and reads data from the ROM 101.

  Among these, the use area program area is composed of instruction data (opcode) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions executed by the CPU 103 and supplementary data (operands) necessary for the CPU 103 to execute each instruction. The game-related program data relating to the progress of is stored. The game-related programs stored in the use area program area include a game control program that is a program for controlling a game, and a special symbol display output program that is a program for displaying a special figure, a general figure, etc. Yes. These game control programs and special symbol display output programs are stored in the use area program area. The game control program is a program related to the progress of the game, and is a program that performs control related to the progress of the game, such as a jackpot lottery program for lottery with respect to the transition to the big hit gaming state.

  The non-use area program area is composed of the CPU 103's combination data (operating ratio), instruction data (opcode) for calculating the combination ratio, and supplementary data (operands) necessary for the CPU 103 to execute each instruction. The data of the association (relation ratio) and the program for calculating and displaying the association ratio (hereinafter also referred to as the association (interaction ratio) association ratio related program) are stored. The role-related (relationship) ratio-related programs include a role-relationship (relationship) ratio calculation program for calculating the role-relationship (relationship ratio) and ratio, and a monitor that displays the role-relationship (relation ratio) and ratio 29, a role combination (relation ratio) role ratio display output program is displayed. In the non-use area program area, a role combination (relation ratio) role ratio calculation program and a role combination (relation ratio) role ratio display output program are stored. The combination (relation ratio) combination calculation program is a program different from the progress of the game.

  Here, the use area program area and the non-use area program area will be further described. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a configuration of a use area program area and a non-use area program area in the built-in ROM area. As shown in FIG. 55, in the use area program area, “switch input process”, “digit output process 1”, “jump process to non-use area (digit output process 2)”, “error detection process” as game related programs. "Random number update process" "Special figure process" "Common figure process" "Information output process" "Prize ball process" "Test terminal process" "Solenoid process" "Memory display process" "Error notification process" Each program of “jump processing to ratio calculation processing” is stored. Also, in the non-use program area, programs such as a combination (link ratio) “digit output process 2”, “jump process to use area (error detection process)”, and “ratio calculation process” are stored. In the CPU 103, the digit output process 1 and the digit output process 2 are made common and executed in one interrupt process. Moreover, in the digit output process 1 and the digit output process 2, the LEDs on the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, and the display monitor 29 are displayed by dynamic lighting. However, static lighting may be used instead of dynamic lighting.

  Among these processes, the program that performs “digit output process 1” corresponds to a special symbol display output program, and the program that performs “digit output process 2” corresponds to a combination (ratio) ratio display output program. . Further, a program that performs “error detection processing” to “error notification processing” (hereinafter also referred to as “game progress control processing”) corresponds to a game control program, and a program that performs “role calculation processing” Corresponds to a ratio calculation program. In the role association (relation ratio) ratio calculation program, the role association (relation ratio) and the role ratio are calculated, and the display pattern when displaying the calculated role association (relation ratio) and the role ratio on the display monitor 29, in other words, And the light emission pattern of several LED (1st segment SG1-7th segment SG7 and dot SG8 shown in FIG. 67) in the display monitor 29 is determined.

  In the use area data area, reference data (for example, the above-described various lottery data) referred to by the control program stored in the use program area is stored. In addition, in the non-use area data area, data used for displaying a combination (connection ratio) and a combination ratio is temporarily stored. For example, the non-use area data area is provided with a storage area for storing the total cumulative number of winning balls for each winning opening and a total cumulative combination (relation ratio) ratio storage area. The non-use area data area includes an active buffer having a 0th storage area for each winning mouth, a ring buffer having a first storage area to a tenth storage area, and the number of winning balls for each winning mouth (for 10 sets). A total storage area and 10 sets of consecutive (running ratio) combination ratio storage areas are provided.

  In the present embodiment, 1 byte (8 bits) of data can be stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to each address of the RAM area, and each of the above-described data (command data, supplemental data, reference data) is stored. , Management data) is data having a number of bytes exceeding 1 byte (for example, 2 bytes), the data is divided and stored for each byte in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to a plurality of consecutive addresses in the RAM control area. doing.

  In addition, there are a use area program area in which a special symbol display output program and a game control program are stored in the built-in ROM area of the CPU 103, a role combination (relation ratio) ratio display output program, and a role combination (relation ratio) role ratio calculation program. Different upper addresses (head addresses) are set in the stored unused area program areas.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56, the upper address of the subroutine in the use area program area in which the special symbol display output program and the game control program are stored is “00”. The upper address of the subroutine in the non-use area program area in which the combination (relation ratio) ratio display output program and the combination (relation ratio) ratio calculation program are stored is “01”. Thus, the upper address of the program stored in the non-use area program area is different from the upper address of the program stored in the use area program area.

  “CALLF” and “CALLmn” are used for the programs stored in the use area program area as calling instructions for these programs. For the program stored in the non-use area program area, only “CALLmn” is used, and “CALLF” is not used. The special symbol display output program and the game control program stored in the use area program area are called by “CALLF” or “CALLmn”, but are called by “CALLF” here. Also, the combination (relation ratio) ratio display output program stored in the non-use area program area and the combination (relation ratio) ratio calculation program are called by “CALLmn” and called by “CALLF”. Absent. Comparing these call instructions, “CALLF” is a call instruction having a shorter tone and lighter capacity than “CALLmn”.

  The CPU 103 includes a Q register. The Q register is a dedicated register for storing the upper address in the built-in ROM area as a fixed value. By providing the Q register, it is possible to call a program without the upper address. A fixed value corresponding to the upper address is set in the Q register. For example, when calling a program stored in the use area program area, a fixed value “00” is set, and when calling a program stored in the non-use area program area, a fixed value “01” is set. The As described above, the Q register may set a fixed value at the upper address of the non-use area program area after executing a program in the non-use area program area after setting a fixed value at the upper address of the use area program area. Is possible.

  Next, the program execution order in the interrupt processing executed by the CPU 103 will be described. In principle, the CPU 103 executes the programs in the order of addresses. Therefore, referring to FIG. 55, when executing the program, the CPU 103 first executes “switch input processing” in the use area program area, and then performs “digit output processing 1” corresponding to the special symbol display output program. Run. When interrupt processing is started, a fixed value “00” is set in the Q register. In the “digit output process 1”, the CPU 103 uses the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 to transmit the digit signal for the special symbol or ordinary diagram obtained in the previous routine. Execute the process to output to.

  After executing “digit output process 1”, the CPU 103 jumps from the use area program area to the non-use area program area and executes “digit output process 2” corresponding to the combination (relationship) ratio display output program. . When jumping from the use area program area to the non-use area program area, a fixed value “01” is set in the Q register. The same applies thereafter. In the digit output process 2, the CPU 103 executes a process of outputting a digit signal regarding the combination (continuity ratio) and the combination ratio obtained in the previous routine to the display monitor 29. Therefore, “digit output process 1” and “digit output process 2” are executed in succession.

  After performing the digit output process 2, the CPU 103 jumps from the non-use area program area to the use area program area and performs a process according to the game control program. When jumping from the non-use area program area to the use area program area, a fixed value “00” is set in the Q register. The same applies thereafter. In the process according to the game control program, the CPU 103 performs “error detection process”, “random number update process”, “special chart process”, “general map process”, “information output process”, “prize ball process”, “test terminal process”, “solenoid process”. The “memory display process” and the “error notification process” are sequentially executed. The CPU 103 generates a digit signal for a special drawing, a general drawing, or the like by processing according to these game control programs.

  The CPU 103 executes the “error notification process”, and when the process corresponding to the third program is completed, the CPU 103 jumps from the use area program to the non-use area program, The ratio calculation process ”is executed. The CPU 103 calculates the combination (relation ratio) and the combination ratio by the “computation ratio calculation process”, and generates a digit signal regarding the combination (interconnection ratio), the combination ratio, and the like. Thus, the interrupt process in the CPU 103 is completed.

  As described above, the CPU 103 executes “digit output process 1” and “digit output process 2” in one interrupt process, and displays the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display. The special figure and the usual figure are displayed on the device 20 and the combination (relation ratio) and the combination ratio are displayed on the display monitor 29.

  Next, the configuration of the use area program area and the non-use area program area in the built-in ROM area will be described. FIG. 57 is a diagram showing another configuration of the use area program area and the non-use area program area in the built-in ROM area. In this example, as shown in FIG. 57, the use area program area includes “switch input process”, “error detection process”, “random number update process”, “special drawing process”, “general map process”, “information output process”, “award”. Each program of sphere processing, “test terminal processing”, “solenoid processing”, “memory display processing”, “error notification processing”, and “digit output processing 1” is stored. In the unused program area, “digit output process 2” and “ratio calculation process” programs are stored.

  Next, the program execution order in the interrupt processing executed by the CPU 103 in this example will be described. Referring to FIG. 57, when executing the program, the CPU 103 first executes “switch input processing” in the use area program area, and then performs processing according to the third program. In the process according to the game control program, the CPU 103 performs “error detection process”, “random number update process”, “special chart process”, “general map process”, “information output process”, “prize ball process”, “test terminal process”, “solenoid process”. The “memory display process” and the “error notification process” are sequentially executed. The CPU 103 generates a digit signal for a special drawing, a general drawing, or the like by processing according to these game control programs.

  CPU 130 then executes “digit output process 1” according to the special symbol display output program. In the “digit output process 1”, the CPU 103 uses the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 to transmit the digit signal for the special symbol or ordinary diagram obtained in the previous routine. Execute the process to output to. However, the digit signal for the special figure or ordinary figure obtained in this routine may be output.

  Then, the CPU 103 shifts to the non-use area program area as it is, and executes “digit output processing 2” corresponding to the combination (continuation ratio) combination ratio display output program. In the digit output process 2, the CPU 103 executes a process of outputting a digit signal regarding the combination (continuity ratio) and the combination ratio obtained in the previous routine to the display monitor 29. Therefore, “digit output process 1” and “digit output process 2” are executed in succession.

  After that, when the digit output process 2 is performed, the CPU 103 executes a “role calculation process” in accordance with the role (run ratio) role ratio calculation program. The CPU 103 calculates the combination (relation ratio) and the combination ratio by the “computation ratio calculation process”, and generates a digit signal regarding the combination (interconnection ratio), the combination ratio, and the like. Thus, the interrupt process in the CPU 103 is completed.

  As described above, the CPU 103 executes “digit output process 1” and “digit output process 2” in one interrupt process, and displays the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display. The special figure and the usual figure are displayed on the device 20 and the combination (relation ratio) and the combination ratio are displayed on the display monitor 29.

  For example, regarding the configurations of the use area program area and the non-use area program area in the built-in ROM area, the configuration shown in FIG. 55 is the area configuration pattern A, and the configuration shown in FIG. The configuration of the use area program area and the non-use area program area in the built-in ROM area is the same as the configuration shown in FIG. 55 except for the jump processing between the use area program area and the non-use area program area. C.

  In this case, in the area configuration pattern A, as shown in FIG. 58 (A), in one cycle of interrupt processing in the CPU 103, a special symbol display output program → combined (combined) role display display program → game control program → The process is executed in the order of the combination (ream) combination ratio calculation program. In the area configuration pattern B, as shown in FIG. 58 (B), in the interrupt processing in the CPU 103, a game control program → special symbol display output program → competition (combined ratio) ratio display output program → combined ( The processing is executed in the order of the connection ratio calculation program. Further, in the area configuration pattern C, as shown in FIG. 58 (C), a special symbol display output program → game control program → community (combined ratio) ratio display output program → complex (combined ratio) ratio calculation program Processing is executed in the order of. In the following, the interrupt process shown in FIG. 58 (A) is referred to as a first interrupt process, the interrupt process shown in FIG. 58 (B) is referred to as a second interrupt process, and the interrupt process shown in FIG. 58 (C) is shown. The process is referred to as a third interrupt process.

  Next, a description will be given of the control (display ratio) and the control for displaying the combination ratio for the display monitor 29 by the main board 11. Here, the main board 11 performs control to sequentially display a plurality of items related to the role combination (ream ratio) and the role ratio. FIG. 59A is a time chart showing display times of items displayed on the display monitor. As shown in FIG. 59 (A), when the display on the display monitor 29 is started, first, the short-term combination (connection ratio) of the display No. 1 is displayed. The display of the short-term combination (run ratio) of display No. 1 is displayed in green. In the display of the short-term combination (run ratio) of display No1, as shown in FIG. 59 (B-1), the letter “y” is displayed on the first display portion 29A, and “6. "Is displayed. Further, the short-term combination (continuity ratio) is displayed on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D. For example, when the short-term combination (running ratio) is 41%, the character “4.” is displayed on the third display portion 29C, and the character “1.” is displayed on the fourth display portion 29D.

  When the display of display No1 continues for 30 seconds, the short-term role ratio of display No2 is displayed. The display of the short-term combination (run ratio) of display No. 2 is displayed in red. In the display of the short-term role ratio of display No. 2, as shown in FIG. 59 (B-2), the letter “y” is displayed on the first display section 29A, and the letter “7.” is displayed on the second display section 29B. Is displayed. Further, the short-term role ratio is displayed on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D. For example, when the short-term role ratio is 63%, the characters “4.” are displayed on the third display portion 29C, and the characters “3.” are displayed on the fourth display portion 29D.

  When the display of display No. 2 continues for 30 seconds, the total cumulative combination (connection ratio) of display No. 3 is displayed. The display of the total accumulated combination series (run ratio) of display No. 3 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative combination (run ratio) of display No. 3, as shown in FIG. 59 (B-3), the letter “A” is displayed on the first display unit 29A, and “6” is displayed on the second display unit 29B. . "Is displayed. In addition, the total cumulative combination (running ratio) is displayed on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D. For example, when the total cumulative combination (running ratio) is 58%, the characters “5.” are displayed on the third display portion 29C, and the characters “8.” are displayed on the fourth display portion 29D.

  When the display of display No. 3 continues for 30 seconds, the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative role ratio of display No. 4, as shown in FIG. 59 (B-4), the character “A” is displayed on the first display portion 29A, and the character “7.” is displayed on the second display portion 29B. Is displayed. Further, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D. For example, when the total cumulative combination ratio is 68%, the characters “6.” are displayed on the third display portion 29C, and the characters “8.” are displayed on the fourth display portion 29D.

  When the display of display No. 4 continues for 30 seconds, as shown in FIG. 59 (B-5), the short-term combination (connection ratio) of display No. 1 is displayed. Thereafter, the display of the short-term combination (connection ratio) of display No1 to the total cumulative combination of display No4 is sequentially displayed every 30 seconds. In addition, as for the display color, only the short-term combination of the display No1 (run ratio) is green, and the short-term combination of the display No2 to the total cumulative combination of the display No4 is red. As described above, the display monitor 29 switches the short-term combination (ream), the short-term combination, the total accumulated combination (ream), and the total accumulated combination every 30 seconds.

  Further, the content displayed on the display monitor 29 is not limited to the above content and can be determined as appropriate. For example, in the above example, characters such as “y” and “A” are displayed on the first display unit 29A, and numerical values are displayed on the second display unit 29B to the fourth display unit 29D. Characters may be displayed on the display unit 29B, and numerical values may be displayed on the first display unit 29A, the third display unit 29C, and the fourth display unit 29D.

  In addition, numerical values may be displayed on all of the first display unit 29A to the fourth display unit 29D, and a predetermined ratio, division, and the like may be indicated only by the numerical values. Or a character may be displayed on two places of the 1st display part 29A-the 4th display part 29D, and a numerical value may be displayed on two other places. Alternatively, a numerical range of characters may be set so that only the characters are displayed on the first display unit 29A to the fourth display unit 29D. For example, “0” to “30” may be displayed as “P”, “31” to “60” as “Q”, and “61” to “100” as “R”. The characters to be displayed are not limited to English characters, but may be hiragana, katakana, kanji, or the like. Further, not a character but a symbol having no meaning may be displayed.

  Further, when displaying numerical values or the like on the display monitor 29, the display may be performed by changing the color or display mode according to the displayed numerical values. For example, when displaying the role ratio, it may be displayed in “blue” if the displayed role ratio is less than or equal to a predetermined value, and may be displayed in “red” if it exceeds the predetermined value. Further, when the displayed role ratio is less than or equal to a predetermined value, it may be lit and displayed when it exceeds the predetermined value. In the blinking display, any display among the first display unit 29A to the fourth display unit 29D may be blinked. For example, the entirety of the first display unit 29A to the fourth display unit 29D may be blinked, two of the first display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B, or the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D. These two may be blinked. About the display part which is not blinking, it may be made to light and may be made to light-extinguish.

  On the main board 11, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area in the active buffer reaches 6000, which is a predetermined capacity, the storage in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area in the ring buffer is updated. Further, the storage area of the sum and total of 10 sets is updated, and the storage of the combination (relation ratio) role ratio storage area for storing the ratio of 10 sets and the total of the total accumulation and the combination (relation ratio) is updated respectively. .

  In the update in the active buffer and the ring buffer, the numerical value stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the first storage area of the ring buffer. Further, the numerical values stored in the first storage area to the ninth storage area of the ring buffer are moved to the second storage area to the tenth storage area, respectively. For example, as shown in FIG. 60, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 0th storage area to the 9th storage area is “27” “81” “120” “36” “225” “87” “66”, respectively. “117” “45” “21”. At this time, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area of the active buffer reaches 6000, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 1st storage area to the 10th storage area is “27”, “81”, “ 120 ”,“ 36 ”,“ 225 ”,“ 87 ”,“ 66 ”,“ 117 ”,“ 45 ”, and“ 21 ”. Also, the number of prize balls in the 0th storage area is set to “0”, and the number of prize balls in the 10th storage area is deleted.

  When the number of prize balls stored in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area is updated, the number of prize balls stored may be temporarily deleted and a new number of prize balls may be stored. Or you may memorize | store a new number of prize balls in the form overwritten on the number of prize balls stored.

  Further, the abnormality detection sensor group 26 shown in FIG. 49 includes a door opening sensor for detecting the opening of the glass door frame 3a. Opening the glass door frame 3a does not correspond to an abnormality when performed by an employee, but often corresponds to an abnormality when performed by a person other than the employee. For this reason, in this embodiment, the door opening sensor which detects opening of the glass door frame 3a is included in the sensor group 26 for abnormality detection. The door opening sensor transmits an opening signal to the main board 11 when detecting the opening of the glass door frame 3a.

  The door opening includes normal opening of the glass door frame 3a by an employee and abnormal opening of the glass door frame 3a by a person other than the employee. Here, detection of door opening is performed assuming abnormal opening of the glass door frame 3a. Further, even if the employee opens the glass door frame 3a and the glass door frame 3a is opened normally, the door opening is detected, but the employee or the like recognizes the opening of the glass door frame 3a. Because there are many, special problems can be avoided.

  Next, the control related to the display of the combination (relation ratio) and the combination performed on the main board 11 will be described. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 performs the necessary initial setting after setting the interrupt prohibition. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM control area and the RAM data area in the RAM 102 are cleared. For this reason, when the power supply from the power supply board is started, the data used for displaying the combination (relation ratio) and the combination stored in the non-use area and other areas of the RAM 102 is maintained without being cleared. The The data used for displaying the combination (run ratio) and the combination stored in the non-use area and other areas of the RAM 102 is cleared by operating the clear switch. Also, register setting of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. After the initial setting, the CPU 103 can periodically execute a timer interrupt process. The role association (ream ratio) and role ratio related processing is executed by this timer interrupt processing. In addition, among the association (association) / association-related processing, the association (association) association ratio display output program is executed in the display switching control process (step S209 in FIG. 64), and the association ( The ratio ratio calculation program is executed. The role ratio calculation processing in the role association (ream ratio) role ratio calculation program includes other processes for calculating the role association (ream ratio) and the role ratio. However, in the ratio calculation process, the calculation of the combination (link ratio) and ratio is performed, and a program corresponding to the other processes in the combination (link ratio) ratio calculation program may be prepared separately. Good.

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a combination (relation ratio) / ratio related process. In the main board 11, as shown in FIG. 61, it is determined whether or not an abnormal operation has been detected in the combination (relation ratio) / ratio related processing (step S101). Whether or not an abnormal operation is detected is determined by whether or not a clear switch operation signal is transmitted from the clear switch.

  As a result, when the clear switch operation signal is transmitted and an abnormal operation is detected (step S101; YES), warning display preparation is performed (step S102), and the process proceeds to step S103. If no clear switch operation signal is transmitted and no abnormal operation is detected (step S101; NO), winning information is acquired (step S103). As for the winning information, a game ball is detected by any of the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the first general winning port switch 24A to the fourth general winning port switch 24D. Obtained by.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the current time is within business hours (step S104). Whether or not the current time is within business hours is measured by the RTC 106 and determined. As a result, when the current time is within business hours (step S104; YES), it is determined whether or not the glass door frame 3a is closed (step S105). Whether or not the glass door frame 3a is closed is determined by whether or not an opening signal is transmitted from the door opening sensor.

  As a result, when the opening signal is not output from the door opening sensor and the glass door frame 3a is closed (step S105; YES), the game ball wins a predetermined number of balls or more per unit time. It is determined whether or not (step S106). Here, the unit time and the predetermined number of balls are set to numerical values assuming a state in which a normal game cannot be won. Specifically, since the maximum number of game balls that can be fired is 100 per minute, for example, 100 balls can be appropriately determined as an upper limit per minute. More specifically, the predetermined number of balls is 5 when the unit time is 1 second, or the predetermined number is 30 when the unit time is 10 seconds. The unit time is measured by the RTC 106. Further, the number of winning game balls to the attacker is measured by the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23.

  As a result, when the game ball has not won more than the predetermined number of balls per unit time (step S106; NO), the number of prize balls is added to add the number of prize balls according to the winning information acquired in step S103. Processing is performed (step S107). The award ball number adding process is performed when warning display preparation is not performed. Here, when warning display preparation is performed, the combination (relation ratio) / ratio related processing is ended as it is. In the winning ball number addition process, the general winning opening (sode), general winning opening (heso), ordinary electric winning ball (electric chew), special electric winning ball (attacker) in the 0th storage area shown in FIG. Add the number of each prize ball.

  In addition, in the prize ball number addition process, the general winning opening (sode), the general winning opening (heso), the ordinary electric winning ball (electric chew), and the special electric winning ball (attacker) in the 0th storage area in the active buffer. The total number of prize balls for each of the prize balls is calculated. Here, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area in the active buffer reaches a predetermined capacity of 6000, the numerical value stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is stored in the first storage area of the ring buffer. Move. Further, the numerical values stored in the first storage area to the ninth storage area of the ring buffer are moved to the second storage area to the tenth storage area, respectively. Further, the numerical value stored in the tenth storage area in the ring buffer is deleted.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the calculation timer has expired (calculation timer = 0) (step S108). As a result, if the calculation timer has not expired (step S108; NO), the combination (relation ratio) / ratio related processing is terminated as it is. If the calculation timer is up (step S108; YES), the calculation timer is set (calculation timer = 2000 ms) (step S109).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls (the prize ball total) obtained by addition in step S107 is the number of calculation executions (step S110). The calculation execution number can be an appropriate number, for example, a reference for moving numerical values stored in the 0th storage area to the 9th storage area in the ring buffer to the first storage area to the 10th storage area, respectively. The number may be slightly less than the total number of prize balls of 6000, for example, 5900. Further, it is preferable that the calculation execution number is slightly smaller than the number obtained by subtracting the maximum payout ball number from 6000.

  As a result, if the number of winning balls (the winning ball total) is not the calculated number of executions (step S110; NO), the combination (relation) / ratio related processing is terminated as it is. When the number of winning balls is the number of executions for calculation (step S110; YES), a combination of consecutive (continuous ratio) and a combined ratio is calculated (step S111). Here, the short-term roles (running ratio), the short-term roles ratio, the cumulative roles (running ratio) (total cumulative roles (running ratio)), and the cumulative roles ratio (total cumulative roles ratio) are calculated. For this reason, the short-term service group (run ratio), the short-term role ratio, the cumulative service group (run ratio), and the cumulative role ratio are all calculated within the same interrupt. After that, preparations for displaying the combination (relation ratio) / ratio are performed (step S112), and the processing related to the combination (relation ratio) / ratio ends.

  If it is determined in step S104 that it is not within business hours (step S104; NO), or if it is determined in step S105 that the door frame is not closed (step S105; NO), an attacker per unit time is determined in step S106. If it is determined that more than a predetermined number of game balls have been won (step S106; YES), preparation for abnormal count error display is performed (step S113).

  Next, a role combination (ream ratio) / ratio display control process will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the combination (relation ratio) / ratio display control process. As shown in FIG. 62, in the combination (relation) / ratio display control process, it is determined whether preparation for the combination (relation) / ratio display has been completed (step S201). If it is determined that the combination (continuation ratio) / ratio display preparation processing has not been completed (step S201; NO), it is determined whether or not preparation for displaying an abnormal count error has been completed (step S202).

  As a result, when it is determined that preparation for displaying an abnormal count error has been completed (step S202; YES), an abnormal count error is displayed (step S203). Abnormal count error display can be performed as appropriate. For example, “E” and “R” can be displayed in the upper two digits of the display monitor 29 and “0” and “1” can be displayed in the lower two digits. Further, when performing an abnormal count error display, a predetermined abnormal count error display may be performed on another display device, for example, the image display device 5, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, or the like. Then, the game effect lamp 9 may be turned on or blinked in an appropriate pattern. Alternatively, a predetermined alarm sound may be generated from the speakers 8L and 8R. Alternatively, an appropriate display may be performed on a 7-segment display for displaying an error of a gaming machine provided on the main board 11. Moreover, you may carry out combining these.

  When the abnormal count error display is performed, the role combination (ream ratio) / ratio display control processing is terminated. If it is determined in step S202 that it is not determined whether or not the abnormal count error display preparation is completed (step S202; NO), it is determined whether or not warning display preparation is completed (step S204).

  As a result, when it is determined that the warning display preparation is completed (step S204; YES), a warning display is performed (step S205). The warning display can be appropriately performed so as to be different from the display other than the warning display. For example, “E” and “R” can be displayed in the upper two digits of the display monitor 29 and “0” and “6” can be displayed in the lower two digits. At this time, the display monitor 29 may be blinked or displayed while changing the display color of the display monitor 29 in order to indicate that a warning is being given. Or you may display by raising the brightness of the display of the display monitor 29. FIG. In this way, it is preferable that the warning display is made more conspicuous than other displays. In addition, after performing an abnormal count error display, the process may proceed to determination (step S204) as to whether or not warning preparation has been completed. Here, when it is determined that warning preparation has been completed (step S204; YES), an abnormal count error display and a warning display are performed. In order to perform the abnormal count error display and the warning display on the display monitor 29, for example, the abnormal count error display and the warning display may be repeated for several seconds, for example, at intervals of 5 seconds. Moreover, you may display by another display method.

  In addition, when a warning is displayed, a predetermined warning may be displayed on another display device such as the image display device 5, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, etc. The effect lamp 9 may be turned on or blinked in an appropriate pattern. Alternatively, a predetermined warning sound may be generated from the speakers 8L and 8R. Alternatively, an appropriate display may be performed on a 7-segment display for displaying an error of a gaming machine provided on the main board 11. Moreover, you may carry out combining these.

  When the warning is displayed, the combination (relation ratio) / ratio control process is terminated. In addition, when it is determined in step S204 that the warning display preparation is not completed (step S204; NO), the combination (continuity ratio) / ratio control processing is also terminated.

  Further, when it is determined that preparations for combination (continuation ratio) / ratio display have been completed (step S201; YES), display restriction confirmation processing is performed (step S206). In the display restriction confirmation process, a process of determining whether or not to limit the display of the combination (relation ratio) / combination ratio is executed. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the display restriction confirmation process.

  As shown in FIG. 63, in the display restriction confirmation process, first, it is determined whether or not a door opening error is detected (step S301). The door opening required error is an error that requires opening the gaming machine frame 3 forward from the outer frame in order to cancel the error. Except for the abnormal count error, errors that occur in the gaming machine 1 include various errors shown in FIG. 65, for example. Each of these errors will be briefly described.

Error 1: Magnet error A magnet error (magnetic error) is an error caused by detecting a magnetic abnormality. When a magnet error is detected, for example, security information is output from the main board 11 to the hall computer. The magnet error is canceled by turning off the power switch. The security information is output until the power switch is turned off.
Error 2: Prize ball abnormality error The prize ball abnormality error is an error due to detection of a predetermined number, for example, 2000 or more abnormal prize balls. An abnormal prize ball is, for example, a prize ball that is paid out when a game ball is won beyond the number of counts of the big prize opening. The prize ball abnormality error is canceled by turning off the power switch.
Error 3: Prize ball error The prize ball error is an error that occurs when a prize ball is not paid out while detecting the winning of a game ball to the prize opening. The prize ball error is an error that occurs when a payout switch abnormality is detected or when a payout case abnormality is detected. The prize ball error is canceled by eliminating the generated error, such as by canceling the error.
Error 4: Out-of-ball error The out-of-ball error is an error that occurs when the out-of-ball is detected and the game ball to be paid out is not on the back side of the game board 2 when the winning of the game ball into the winning opening is detected. The ball-out error is an error that is canceled when the supply of the game ball is started.
Error 5: Radio wave error error The radio wave error is an error due to detection of a radio wave error. The radio wave error is an error that is canceled by turning off the power switch.
Error 6: Main board communication failure error The main board communication failure error is an error caused by a communication failure between the main board 11 and the payout control board. The main board communication failure error is an error that is canceled when communication between the main board 11 and the payout control board is recovered.
Error 7: Card unit error The card unit error is an error caused by a communication failure between the main board 11 and the card unit. The card unit error is an error that is canceled when communication between the main board 11 and the card unit is recovered.
Error 8: Full tank error The full tank error is an error that occurs when the tray (upper or lower tray) from which the game balls are paid out becomes full and the game balls cannot be paid out. The full tank error is canceled when the game ball is removed from the tray from which the game ball is paid out and is not in a full state.
Error 9: first-time-start-of-function error The first-time-start-up error of an accessory is an error that occurs when an abnormality is detected when the accessory is activated for the first time. The first-time startup error of the accessory is canceled by pressing the operation button 30.
Error 10: Unauthorized Winning Error Unauthorized winning error is an error that occurs when a game ball enters a large winning opening other than in operation. In the gaming machine 1, the special prize winning device is only the special variable winning ball device 7, so that an illegal winning error is not detected, and is an error that occurs in a gaming machine having two or more big winning prizes. When an illegal winning error is detected, for example, security information is output from the main board 11 to the hall computer. The illegal winning error is canceled after a predetermined time, for example, 3 minutes has elapsed since the output of the security information.
Error 11: RTC-SRAM error An RTC-SRAM error is an error that occurs when an RTC error is detected when a power switch is turned on, or when a backup failure is detected. The RTC-SRAM abnormality error is canceled after a predetermined time, for example, 60 seconds elapses from the occurrence.
Error 12: RAM clear error The RAM clear error is an error that results in a cold start when the power is turned on. When a RAM clear error is detected, for example, security information is output from the main board 11 to the hall computer. The time for which the security information is output is, for example, 30 seconds. The RAM clear error is canceled after a predetermined time, for example, 31 seconds has elapsed since the occurrence.
Error 13: Vibration detection device abnormality error The vibration detection device abnormality error is an error that is detected when vibration occurs in the gaming machine. The vibration detection device abnormality error is canceled after a predetermined time, for example, 60 seconds has elapsed since the occurrence.
Error 14: Door opening error The door opening error is an error that occurs when the glass door frame 3a is opened from the gaming machine frame 3 or when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened from the outer frame. The door opening error is canceled when the opened glass door frame 3a or the gaming machine frame 3 is closed.

  Among these errors, errors 1 to 7 are door opening required errors that require opening the gaming machine frame 3 from the outer frame in order to cancel the errors. On the other hand, error 8 to error 13 are errors that do not require opening of the gaming machine frame 3 from the outer frame in order to cancel the error, and are not door opening required errors. Since the error 14 is a door opening error, it is unnecessary to determine whether the gaming machine frame 3 needs to be opened.

  Returning to the flow shown in FIG. 63, it is determined whether or not a door opening required error has been detected, in other words, whether any one of the errors 1 to 7 has been detected (step S301). When the door opening required error is detected (step S301; YES), it is determined whether or not the door opening required error flag is set (step S302).

  Here, when the door opening required error flag is not set (step S302; NO), the door opening required error flag is set (step S303). If the door opening required error flag is set (step S302; YES), the process proceeds to step S304 as it is.

  Next, it is determined whether or not a measurement timer is set (step S304). The measurement timer is a timer that measures the time during which the restriction on the combination (relation ratio) ratio display is continued after the door opening error is canceled. The measurement timer is a timer that measures time in a set state, and is a timer that does not measure time in a reset state.

  The time for which the restriction of the role combination (relation ratio) role ratio display after the door opening required error is released can be, for example, a time required for releasing the door opening required error or a time longer than that time. Specifically, it may be 1 minute or 2 minutes, or 5 minutes or 10 minutes. Moreover, it is good also as long time of 30 minutes or more. Further, the time required for releasing the door opening required error may be uniform or set according to the type of the door opening required error. For example, errors 1, 2, 5, etc. that are cleared by turning off the power switch shorten the time required to clear the door opening error, and error 3 prize ball error that needs to be resolved May increase the time required to cancel the door opening error.

  If it is determined in step S304 that the measurement timer is set (step S304; YES), the measurement timer is reset (step S305). If it is determined that the measurement timer is not set (step S304; NO), the process directly proceeds to step S306. The state in which the measurement timer is set when the door opening required error is detected is a state in which the door opening required error occurs again after the door opening required error is once reset. For this reason, by resetting the measurement timer in step S305, if the door opening required error is detected again during the time measurement by the measurement timer, the door opening required error detected later is released. Time can be measured with a measurement timer.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the door opening required error flag is set (step S306). As a result, when the door opening required error flag is set (step S306; YES), the combination (relation ratio) combination ratio display restriction is executed (step S307), and the display restriction confirmation process is terminated. If the door opening required error flag is not set (step S306; NO), the display restriction confirmation process is terminated as it is. As the combination (relation ratio) ratio display restriction, for example, the display of the combination (relation ratio) ratio is stopped.

  If it is determined in step S301 that the door opening required error is not detected (step S301; NO), it is determined whether the door opening required error flag is set (step S308). As a result, when it is determined that the door opening required error flag is not set (step S308; NO), the process proceeds to step S306.

  If it is determined in step S308 that the door opening required error flag is set (step S308; YES), the door opening required error is once detected and then the door opening required error is released. (Step S309). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a measurement timer is set (step S310).

  When the measurement timer is not set (step S310; NO), it is immediately after the door opening error is canceled. In other words, this flow is in a state that flows only after the door opening error is canceled. At this time, the measurement time t (measurement timer = t) is set in the measurement timer (step S311). The measurement time t corresponds to the time for which the restriction of the combination (ream) ratio display is continued after the door opening error is canceled.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the measurement timer is up (t = 0) (step S312). If the measurement timer is set in step S310 (step S310; YES), it is determined whether or not the measurement timer is up (t = 0) (step S312).

  In the case of passing through step S311, the measurement timer is not 0 (time is not up) (step S312; NO), and the process proceeds to step S306 as it is. After the measurement timer is set, it is determined in step S310 that the measurement timer is set (step S310; YES). In this case, the measurement time decreases with the flow loop, and when the time t elapses after the measurement timer is set, it is determined that the measurement timer is up.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the measurement timer is up (t = 0) (step S312). If the measurement timer is up (step S312; YES), the measurement timer and the door opening required error flag are cleared (step S313). If the measurement timer has not expired (step S312; NO), the process proceeds to step S306 without clearing the measurement timer and the door opening required error flag.

  When not passing through step S313, since the door opening required error flag is not cleared, it is determined in step S306 that the door opening required error flag is set (step S306: YES). Therefore, the combination (relation ratio) combination ratio display restriction is executed. Further, when the process passes through step S313, the door opening required error flag is cleared, and therefore it is determined in step S306 that the door opening required error flag is not set (step S306; NO). Therefore, the combination display (relation ratio) combination display restriction is not executed. In this way, in the display restriction confirmation process, it is determined whether or not to execute the combination (relation ratio) combination ratio display restriction. In summary, in the display restriction confirmation process, the detection time (= time for continuing the restriction of the combination (relation) ratio display) has elapsed since the detection of the door opening required error and the release of the door opening required error. During this time, the display of the combination (relation ratio) ratio is limited, and the display of the combination (relation ratio) ratio is not limited at other times.

  Returning to the flow shown in FIG. 62, based on the determination made in the display restriction confirmation processing shown in step S206, it is determined whether or not display restriction is to be executed (step S207). As a result, when the display restriction is executed (step S207; YES), the display restriction is executed (step S208), and the display of the combination (continuous ratio) combination ratio is restricted. Then, the role combination (ream ratio) / ratio display control process is terminated.

  If the display restriction is not executed (step S207; NO), the display switching control process is executed (step S209), and the combination (continuation ratio) / ratio display control process is terminated. The display switching control process is executed according to the procedure shown in FIG. FIG. 64 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the display switching control process. As shown in FIG. 64, in the display switching control process, first, it is determined whether or not a short-term combination (continuous ratio) display is performed on the display monitor 29 (step S401). When the short-term combination (relation ratio) display is performed (step S401; YES), it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the short-term combination (relation ratio) display. (Step S402). Here, the predetermined time can be set to an arbitrary time, for example, 30 seconds (30000 ms). The predetermined time may be a time shorter than 30 seconds such as 5 seconds or 10 seconds, or may be a time longer than 30 seconds such as 1 minute (60 seconds) or 10 minutes (600 seconds).

  If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S402; NO), the display switching control process is terminated. With the end of the display switching control, the short-term combination (continuous ratio) display continues. When it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S402; YES), short-term role ratio display control is performed (step S403), and the display switching control process is terminated. In the short-term role ratio display control, the short-term role ratio is displayed on the display monitor 29, and a timer for measuring the elapsed time since the short-term role ratio display is started is set.

  If it is determined in step S401 that the short-term combination display (continuation ratio) is not displayed (step S401; NO), it is determined whether the short-term combination display is performed (step S404). . If the short-term role ratio display is being performed (step S404; YES), it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the short-term role ratio display (step S405).

  If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S405; NO), the display switching control process is terminated. With the end of the display switching control, the short-term role ratio display continues. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S404; YES), cumulative combination display (connection ratio) display control is performed (step S406), and the display switching control process is terminated. In the cumulative combination display (relation ratio) display control, the cumulative combination display (connection ratio) is displayed on the display monitor 29, and a timer for measuring the elapsed time since the start of the cumulative combination display (relation ratio) display is set. .

  When it is determined in step S404 that the short-term role ratio display is not performed (step S404; NO), it is determined whether or not the cumulative role display (continuous ratio) display is performed (step S407). . In the case where the cumulative combination (relation ratio) display is performed (step S407; YES), it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the cumulative combination (relation ratio) display. (Step S408).

  If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S408; NO), the display switching control process is terminated. With the end of the display switching control, the cumulative combination display (continuous ratio) display is continued. If it is determined that the predetermined time has passed (step S408; YES), the cumulative ratio display control is performed (step S409), and the display switching control process is terminated. In the cumulative ratio display control, the cumulative ratio is displayed on the display monitor 29, and a timer for measuring the elapsed time since the cumulative ratio display is started is set.

  If it is determined in step S407 that the cumulative combination display (connection ratio) is not displayed (step S407; NO), it is determined whether the cumulative combination display is performed (step S410). . If the cumulative role display is being performed (step S410; YES), it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the cumulative role display (step S411).

  If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S411; NO), the display switching control process is terminated. With the end of the display switching control, the cumulative combination display (continuous ratio) display is continued. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S411; YES), short-term combination (continuous ratio) display control is performed (step S412), and the display switching control process is terminated. In the short-term service group (run ratio) display control, the short-term service group (run ratio) is displayed on the display monitor 29, and a timer for measuring the elapsed time since the start of the short-term service group (run ratio) display is set. . Thus, the display switching control process ends.

  In the short-term role ratio display control in the above step S403, the digit output process 2 by the second program is executed. Similarly, the digit output process 2 by the second program is also executed in the cumulative combination display (link ratio) display control in step S406, the cumulative combination display display control in step S409, and the short-term combination display (link ratio) display control in step S412. Is done.

  In the above gaming machine 1, the digit output process 1 and the digit output process 2 are made common, and the digit output process 1 and the digit output process 2 are executed in one cycle of the interrupt process in the CPU 103. One cycle of the interrupt process in the CPU 103 is about 4 ms, and the time required for the game progress control process (game control program) is, for example, about 2 ms.

  FIG. 66A is a time chart showing the relationship between the signal flow when the third interrupt process is executed and the display state of the monitor and the like, and FIG. 66B is the signal flow when the first interrupt process is executed. It is a time chart which shows the relationship between display states, such as a monitor. Here, in the first cycle, a symbol (character) corresponding to “0” and “y” is displayed on the display monitor 29 (SEG2) on the first special symbol display device 4A (SEG1), and in the second cycle, the first special symbol display device 4A (SEG1). Assume that the symbol (character) corresponding to “1” on the symbol display device 4A and “6.” on the display monitor 29 is to be displayed.

  In the third interrupt process shown in FIG. 58 (C), a game progress process (a special symbol display output program) and a digit output process 2 (combined (combined) ratio display output program) A game control program is executed. For this reason, a difference of about 2 ms occurs between the digit output processing 1 (special symbol display output program) and the digit output processing 2 (combined (combined) role ratio display output program), as shown in FIG. 66 (A). Thus, there is a delay in the digit output (DG).

  As a result, in the first period, the symbol corresponding to “0” is clearly displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (SEG1), but the display monitor 29 (SEG2) has a display defect. The problem with the example in which the character corresponding to “y” is displayed on the display monitor 29 is specifically as follows. As shown in FIG. 67, the first display unit 29A to the fourth display unit 29D in the display monitor 29 include eight LEDs arranged in seven segments and a lower right dot. If these LEDs are a first segment SG1, a second segment SG2, a third segment SG3, a fourth segment SG4, a fifth segment SG5, a sixth segment SG6, a seventh segment SG7, and a dot SG8, the second segment SG2, the second segment SG2, The 3 seg SG3, the 4th seg SG4, the 6th seg SG6, and the 7th seg SG7 are thinly displayed. This defect occurs because, for example, control that does not turn on the display monitor 29 in the period before the first period has penetrated to the first period. For the characters corresponding to “6.” displayed in the second period, the second segment SG2, the fourth segment SG4, the sixth segment SG6, and the seventh segment SG7 are clearly displayed. SG1, the fifth segment SG5, and the dot SG8 are thinly displayed. This defect also occurs because, for example, the control that turned on the LED of the character corresponding to “y” on the display monitor 29 in the first cycle has penetrated to the second cycle.

  On the other hand, in the first interrupt process shown in FIG. 66 (B), the digit output process 1 (special symbol display output program) is executed following the digit output process 1 (special symbol display output program). . For this reason, there is almost no difference between the digit output processing 1 (special symbol display output program) and the digit output processing 2 (community (combined ratio) ratio display output program). FIG. 66 (B) As shown in FIG. 4, there is almost no delay in the digit output (DG).

  As a result, in the first period, the symbol corresponding to “0” was clearly displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (SEG1). In addition, the characters corresponding to “y” were clearly displayed on the display monitor 29 (SEG2). Thus, in the first interrupt process, it is possible to prevent display defects on the LEDs of the display monitor 29.

  Thus, in the gaming machine 1 described above, the short-term combination (ream), the short-term combination, the accumulated combination (ream), and the accumulated combination are displayed by the display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11. . The display monitor 29 is provided on the main board 11 for controlling the game so that the visibility is not hindered. For this reason, it is possible to recognize what adjustments have been made to game nails (fault nails), windmills and the like provided on the game board.

  The display monitor 29 is disposed on the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized. For this reason, it can prevent that the visibility with respect to the display monitor 29 is prevented. Further, the main board 11 is arranged at a position where the heat radiation holes provided in the board case 201 are not directly in front. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 from being obscured by the heat radiating holes. Therefore, the visibility with respect to the display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 can be prevented from being hindered.

  The main board 11 is arranged at a position that does not overlap with each peripheral board other than the main board 11. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 from being obscured by the peripheral board such as the effect control board 12. Therefore, the visibility with respect to the display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 can be prevented from being hindered.

  In addition, the display monitor 29 displays a combination (ratio) and a ratio regarding the relationship between a prize ball paid out by passing an electric chew or an attacker and a prize ball paid out by passing a general winning opening. can do. In addition, the display monitor 29 can switch and display predetermined information such as a short-term combination (ream) and a cumulative combination (ream) for each predetermined period. For this reason, there is no need to provide a display for displaying information about a plurality of periods, which can contribute to a reduction in the number of parts.

  In addition, since the display monitor 29 displays the combination (relation ratio) (short-term combination (relation ratio)) and combination ratio (short-term combination) every time the number of prize balls reaches 6000, the total prize balls It is possible to easily recognize the numerical value of the period corresponding to a certain unit, for example, the number is 6000. The period corresponding to the predetermined unit may be a period other than the number of prize balls of 6000. For example, a period in which the number of prize balls is 1000 or 10,000 may be used. Alternatively, time may be used instead of the number of prize balls. For example, the period corresponding to the predetermined unit may be an appropriate time such as 1 hour, 3 hours, or 10 hours.

  In addition, the display monitor 29 has a combination of consecutive roles (short-term role ratio) and a ratio (short-term role ratio) as well as a cumulative number of long-term roles (continuous ratio) for every 6,000 prize balls. And the cumulative role ratio is switched and displayed. For this reason, it is possible to easily compare the short-term combination (ream ratio) or short-term combination for each predetermined unit with the accumulated combination (ream) or the accumulated combination ratio. The display monitor 29 is provided on the main board 11 accommodated in the caulked board case. For this reason, it can contribute to prevention of fraud such as tampering with the display on the display monitor 29.

  In addition, the gaming machine 1 includes a detection unit that detects and detects fraud in which appropriate predetermined information cannot be displayed. The fraud here includes, for example, counting the number of prize balls outside the business hours of the game hall, counting the number of prize balls while the door frame is opened, and winning a game ball exceeding the allowable number of prizes. The gaming machine 1 operates within the business hours of the amusement hall, and the counting of prize balls at times other than business hours is highly likely to be fraudulent. In addition, the gaming machine 1 plays a game with the door frame closed, and the counting of prize balls while the door frame is open is highly likely to be an illegal act.

  Further, during the game of the gaming machine 1, the game ball cannot be fired beyond a certain speed. For example, game balls are fired at a maximum of 100 shots per minute. For this reason, the upper limit of the number of winning game balls per minute is approximately 100. Therefore, for example, when a winning of 100 gaming balls per minute or more than 20 gaming balls per 12 seconds is detected, the probability of fraud is extremely high.

  In the gaming machine 1, in order to detect fraud, when it is not within business hours, when the glass door frame 3a is not closed, a prize ball when a game ball wins a predetermined number of balls or more per unit time Eliminates the addition of numbers. Therefore, it is possible to suppress tampering of the role association (ream ratio), information on the role ratio, and the like due to these frauds. It should be noted that fraud may be detected based on the number of payout balls per unit time, instead of the number of prize balls when a predetermined number of game balls are won by the attacker per unit time.

  In the gaming machine 1 described above, when the 0th storage area of the active buffer included in the RAM 102 reaches a predetermined capacity of 6000, the numerical value stored in the 10th storage area in the ring buffer is deleted. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the ring buffer from becoming insufficient in capacity.

  The ring buffer is provided with the first storage area to the tenth storage area. When the data in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the first storage area of the ring buffer, the data in the 10th storage area is Erased. For this reason, since the data to be erased is set for each predetermined unit, it is possible to prevent the ring buffer from being insufficient in capacity. Further, it is possible to increase the data that remains without being erased.

  When the data in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the first storage area of the ring buffer, the data in the 9th storage area in the ring buffer is moved to the 10th storage area. At this time, the data in the tenth storage area may be erased and the data in the ninth storage area may be moved, or the data in the ninth storage area may be overwritten on the data in the tenth storage area. Even in this case, a lack of ring buffer capacity can be prevented.

  When the data in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the first storage area of the ring buffer, the data in the 10th storage area, which is a part of the storage area, is erased in the ring buffer. For this reason, since the data to be erased can be reduced, it is possible to prevent the ring buffer from being insufficient in capacity, and it is possible to calculate the combination (connection ratio) and the combination ratio with a large amount of data.

  When erasing the data in the ring buffer, not only a part of the data in the tenth storage area but also all of the data in the first storage area to the tenth storage area may be erased. Good. In this case, insufficient capacity of the ring buffer can be prevented more suitably. Further, some or all of the data in the ring buffer may be erased according to a predetermined condition. For example, at the beginning of business hours, all data in the ring buffer may be erased, and thereafter, part of the data in the ring buffer may be erased.

  In the above example, the movement of data in the ring buffer has been described. However, in the storage area for storing data other than the ring buffer, for example, the total accumulation, a part or all of the data is similarly deleted. May be.

  In the gaming machine 1 described above, the data of the short-term combination (ream ratio), the short-term combination, the accumulated combination (ream), and the accumulated combination are displayed every 30 seconds. For this reason, each data can be compared easily. Note that the period for displaying each data is not 30 seconds, but may be an appropriate period. For example, it may be every 10 seconds or every minute. Alternatively, it may be every hour. The displayed data may be data other than the data of the short-term service group (run ratio), the short-term role ratio, the cumulative service group (run ratio), and the cumulative role ratio, or only a part of these data. Good.

  In addition, when displaying each data of short-term officers (running ratio), short-term officers ratio, cumulative officers (running ratio), and cumulative officers ratio every 30 seconds, The display is different from the data of. Specifically, the short-term service group (run ratio) is displayed in red, and the other data is displayed in green. For this reason, it is possible to recognize that new data is displayed from the short-term service group (run ratio).

  In the gaming machine 1 described above, a warning is displayed when an abnormal operation is performed. Specifically, a warning is displayed as an abnormal operation when the clear switch is operated. The clear switch is an emergency switch that is operated when a failure occurs in the calculation of the combination (link ratio) or the combination ratio. When this switch is operated, it is possible to tamper with the combination data (relation ratio) and the data of the combination ratio, so that the operation of the clear switch is detected as an abnormal operation. Since the gaming machine 1 can warn of this abnormal operation by a warning display, fraud such as data tampering can be suppressed.

  In the above gaming machine 1, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the count switch 23, the first general winning port switch 24A, the second general winning port switch 24B, and the third general winning port switch 24C. Based on the number of winning balls obtained based on the detection signal from the fourth general winning opening switch 24D, the combination (community ratio) and the combination ratio are calculated. For example, a sensor (count switch 23) provided individually for an attacker and a sensor provided after a discharge passage through which a game medium won by an attacker and a game medium won by an electric chew merge are used, Based on the result of detection, when calculating the combination (relation ratio) and ratio by counting up the counter for winning the number of winning characters and the counter for acquiring the number of consecutive winning characters, specify which winning opening is to be paid out. It is difficult to calculate the ratio and the combination (link ratio). In this regard, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the count switch 23, the first general winning port switch 24A, the second general winning port switch 24B, the third general winning port switch 24C, and the fourth general winning port. Based on the winning of each winning mouth by detecting that the game medium has been won by the switch 24D, and calculating the winning combination (running ratio) and the winning ratio based on the number of winning balls obtained from the detection result. The number of winning balls can be judged. Therefore, it is possible to easily calculate the combination (continuity ratio) and the combination ratio, and to calculate with high accuracy.

  Further, when a door opening required error occurs, it is necessary to open the gaming machine frame 3 from the outer frame in order to cancel the error. When the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the main board 11 provided on the gaming machine frame 3 becomes visible from the outside of the gaming machine 1. For this reason, the display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 is also visible to, for example, a player located outside the gaming machine 1.

  Here, in the gaming machine 1 described above, when the door opening required error occurs, the display of the role combination (relation ratio) ratio on the display monitor 29 is limited. For this reason, even if the door opening required error occurs and the display monitor 29 becomes visible from the outside of the gaming machine 1, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the display of the role combination (relationship) ratio.

  In addition, the limitation of the display of the combination (relation ratio) ratio on the display monitor 29 is executed when a door opening required error occurs. For this reason, it is necessary to open the gaming machine frame 3 due to the occurrence of the door opening required error, so that even when the player can visually recognize the display monitor 29 from the outside of the gaming machine 1, It is possible to prevent the display of the role combination (ream) ratio display.

  In the gaming machine 1 described above, when the door opening required error occurs, the display of the role (relation ratio) role ratio on the display monitor 29 is executed, but after the door opening required error occurs, the game When the machine frame 3 is opened, the display of the combination (relation ratio) combination ratio on the display monitor 29 may be executed. Even after the door opening required error has occurred, when the display of the role (relation ratio) ratio on the display monitor 29 is executed when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the player is also connected to the ream (ream). Ratio) It is possible to prevent the display of the ratio display.

  In addition, the limitation of display of the role (running ratio) ratio on the display monitor 29 is measured by a measurement timer for a predetermined time after the door opening required error is released, specifically, after the door opening required error is released. It is executed until the continuation time elapses. For this reason, immediately after the door opening required error is released, the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state, even though the door opening required error is released. At this time, a player or the like can visually recognize the display monitor 29 from the outside of the gaming machine 1. In this regard, by continuing the restriction of the role combination display until the duration time measured by the measurement timer elapses after the door opening error is canceled, It is possible to prevent the display of the role combination (ream) ratio display.

  In the gaming machine 1 described above, the duration is measured after the door opening required error is released. However, after the door opening required error is released, the gaming machine frame 3 is closed and the duration is increased. You may measure. The continuation time in this case may be uniform regardless of the type of door opening required error, or may be set according to the type of door opening required error. Moreover, it is good also as time shorter than the continuation time measured after a door opening required error is cancelled | released.

  The above door opening required error is an example, and other modes may be adopted. For example, if the error canceling method is different and errors 1 to 7 can be canceled without opening the gaming machine frame 3, these may be errors other than the door opening required error. Conversely, if errors 8 to 13 are errors that cannot be canceled unless the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, these may be door opening required errors. Also, errors other than those shown in FIG. 65, such as an error that prevents the game ball from being launched from the ball striking device, an error that makes it impossible to lend the ball, an error that causes the game board to move, etc., are released by the release procedure. An error may be required. Further, even if it is necessary to open the gaming machine frame 3 to cancel the error, an error that is often detected outside the business hours of the amusement hall, for example, a display abnormality of the image display device 5 In the case of an error that normally requires repair outside of business hours, such as an error that becomes a check error, a ROM check screen error, or an electric chew or a big prize opening not opening, it may be treated as an error other than the door opening required error.

  Further, in the gaming machine 1 described above, the display restriction mode is set to stop display, but the display limit may be set to another mode. For example, the display of the combination (relation ratio) ratio may be thinned or made smaller, or the display monitor 29 may display different from the combination (relation ratio) ratio. As the display different from the combination (relation ratio) combination ratio, an error display may be displayed, for example, a display such as lighting all the segments may be used.

  In the above gaming machine 1, the main board 11 and the display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 are provided on the back side of the gaming machine frame 3, so that when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened ( Although the display of the connection ratio) role ratio is limited, other modes may be used. For example, the main board 11 may be provided on the surface of the game board 2 at a position where the glass door frame 3a is not visible from the outside of the gaming machine 1 when the glass door frame 3a is closed. In this case, the display monitor 29 may also be provided on the surface of the game board 2 at a position where the glass door frame 3a is not visible from the outside of the gaming machine 1 when the glass door frame 3a is closed. In the gaming machine of this mode, instead of the mode of restricting the display of the role (running ratio) role ratio when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the role (when the glass door frame 3a is opened) The ratio display may be limited. In addition, regarding the continuation of the restriction of the display of the role combination (relation ratio) role ratio, etc., instead of being conditional on the opening / closing of the gaming machine frame 3, the opening / closing of the glass door frame 3a may be a condition. Good.

  In the above gaming machine 1, the CPU 103 stores the special symbol display output program and the game control program in the use area program area in the built-in ROM area, and the combination (relationship) ratio display output program in the non-use area program area. In addition, a role combination (ream ratio) role ratio display program is stored. In this way, by storing the special symbol display output program and the game control program, the combination (relation ratio) ratio display output program, and the combination (relation ratio) role display program separately in different areas, This makes it easier to test a program related to a game. In the CPU 103, the digit output process 1 and the digit output process 2 are made common and executed in one interrupt process. For this reason, the digit output process can be simplified.

  Further, when the digit output process 1 and the digit output process 2 are made common, the digit output process 1 and the digit output process 2 are continuously executed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 58 (A), in the first interrupt process, the special symbol display output program → community (relationship) ratio display output program → game control program → community (relationship) ratio. The programs are executed in the order of the calculation program. In the second interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 58 (A), a game control program → a special symbol display output program → an association (relation ratio) ratio display output program → an association (relation ratio) ratio calculation program. The program is executed in the order. For this reason, in both the first interrupt process and the second interrupt process, the special symbol display output program (first interrupt process) and the combination (relationship) ratio display output program (second interrupt process) A game control program (game progress control process) or a combination (relation ratio) ratio calculation program (an association (relation ratio) ratio calculation process) is not sandwiched. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent delays in the digit output processing 2 and the like, there is a problem in LED display in the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, and the display monitor 29. It is possible to prevent the pattern and characters from being displayed clearly.

  When the digit output process 1 and the digit output process 2 are made common, the execution procedure of the first interrupt process shown in FIG. 58 (A) or the second interrupt process shown in FIG. 58 (B) is included. Just do it. For example, an arbitrary program may be executed before or after the execution order of the first interrupt process or the second interrupt process.

  Further, in the first interrupt process and the second interrupt process, after executing the game control program, the combination (relation ratio) ratio calculation program is executed. For this reason, before the calculation of the combination (relation ratio) combination ratio, processing related to the main part of the game such as lottery for the transition to the big hit gaming state is executed. Therefore, game delay can be suppressed.

  Further, in the first interrupt process and the second interrupt process, the combination (relation ratio) ratio display output program is executed after the special symbol display output program is executed. In addition, after the special symbol display output program is executed, a specific program such as a game control program or a combination (relation ratio) ratio calculation program is executed until the combination (relation ratio) ratio display output program is executed. Does not run. For this reason, the malfunction of the LED display in the display monitor 29 can be prevented.

  Further, the special symbol display output program and the game control program stored in the use area are called using “CALLF” having a short tone. On the other hand, a call using “CALLmn” is made to the combination (relation ratio) ratio display output program and the combination (relation ratio) ratio calculation program stored in the non-use area, and the tone is changed. Calls using the short “CALLF” are never made. For this reason, progress of a game can be performed smoothly.

  Further, the combination (relation ratio) ratio displayed on the display monitor 29 is determined by the combination (relation ratio) ratio calculation process in the non-use area. The association (relationship) ratio calculation program and the association (relationship) ratio display output program are programs that are not related to the progress of the game. Since “CALLmn” having a relatively long tone is used for a program that is not related to the progress of the game, waste in the processing of the program can be reduced.

  In the non-use area, a call with “CALLmn” having a relatively long tone is performed. Therefore, in the use area, a call with “CALLF” having a short tone can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to use a highly versatile instruction such as “CALLF” with a short tone for a program related to game control executed in the use area.

  In addition, since the CPU 103 includes a Q register and calls a program using the Q register, the program can be called without specifying an upper address. However, since the upper address is set as a fixed value, for example, even if it can be used in the use area program area, it may not be used in the non-use area program area, and the versatility may be lowered.

  In this regard, the upper address of the use area program area in the CPU 103 is “00”, the upper address of the non-use area program area is “01”, and the upper address of the non-use area program area is the upper address of the use area program area. It is different from the address. Further, when a program stored in the use area program area is called, the Q register is set to a fixed value “00”. For this reason, since the Q register can be used when calling a program stored in the use area program area, the program stored in the use area program area can be called only by specifying a lower address. Further, since the upper address of the non-use area program area is different from the upper address of the use area program area, the program stored in the non-use area program area by the Q register is prevented from being called. When a program stored in the non-use area program area is called, the Q register is set to a fixed value “01”. Therefore, since the Q register can be used also in the non-use area program area, the Q register can be used also in the non-use area program area while ensuring the versatility of the Q register.

  Further, in the gaming machine 1 described above, the display monitor 29 is disposed in the center on the back side of the main board 11 and on the front when the main board 11 is viewed, but the display monitor 29 is easily viewed from an oblique direction. May be arranged. Hereinafter, a plurality of examples will be specifically described with respect to an aspect (hereinafter referred to as “display monitor arrangement aspect”) in which the display monitor is disposed so as to be easily viewed from an oblique direction.

  The first display monitor arrangement mode is referred to as a first display monitor arrangement mode, the second display monitor arrangement mode is referred to as a second display monitor arrangement mode, and the nth display monitor arrangement mode is referred to as an nth display monitor arrangement mode. A main substrate 11 similar to the main substrate 11 shown in FIG. 51A is used in each display monitor arrangement mode, and all the main substrates 11 have the same structure. Similarly to the example shown in FIG. 51A, the main substrate 11 is accommodated in the substrate case 202. Further, in the description of the first display monitor arrangement mode to the ninth display monitor arrangement mode, the left and right are based on the direction when the main board 11 is viewed from the front. Therefore, the side where the gaming machine frame 3 opens from the outer frame is the left side.

[First display monitor arrangement mode]
FIG. 68 is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the first display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 68, in the first display monitor arrangement mode, a base member 129A is provided on the back side of the main substrate 11, and a display monitor 130A is provided on the base member 129A. The display monitor 130 </ b> A is housed in the substrate case 202 together with the base member 129 </ b> A and the main substrate 11.

  The base member 129A has a triangular prism shape whose bottom surface is a right triangle, and is arranged such that the height direction thereof is along the vertical direction. The side surface of the triangular prism including one side forming the right angle portion of the right triangle on the bottom surface of the triangular prism formed by the base member 129A is overlapped with the back surface of the main substrate 11, and other sides forming the right angle portion in the right triangle are formed. A side surface of the triangular prism including one side extends in a direction orthogonal to the back surface of the main substrate 11. A side surface (hereinafter referred to as an “inclined surface”) of a triangular prism including a side facing a right-angled portion in a right triangle is arranged in an inclined direction with respect to the back surface of the main substrate 11.

  The display monitor 130A is provided on the inclined surface of the base member 129A. The direction of the display monitor 130 </ b> A is arranged to be inclined with respect to the back surface of the main board 11. FIG. 69 is a perspective view showing a state in which the gaming machine frame to which the main board is attached is released from the outer frame. As shown in FIG. 69, when the display monitor 130A opens the gaming machine frame 3 to which the main board 11 is attached from the outer frame 3A, the display monitor 130A is located between the gaming machine frame 3 and the outer frame. It arrange | positions so that it may face the front seeing from an open part.

  When the gaming machine frame 3 is released from the outer frame, the display monitor 130A arranged in the first display monitor arrangement mode faces the front as viewed from the open portion between the gaming machine frame 3 and the outer frame. Is arranged. For this reason, when a clerk or the like conducts a confirmation work of a role ratio (relation ratio), the clerk or the like does not greatly open the gaming machine frame 3 but only slightly opens the role combination (relation ratio) role. The ratio can be confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to easily check the role combination (linkage) role ratio.

[Second Display Monitor Arrangement Mode]
FIG. 70A is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the second display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 70A, in the second display monitor arrangement mode, a base member 129B is provided on the back side of the main substrate 11, and a display monitor 130B is provided on the base member 129B. The display monitor 130 </ b> B is housed in the substrate case 202 together with the base member 129 </ b> B and the main substrate 11.

  As shown in FIG. 50, the main board 11 is attached to the back surface of the game board 2 (see FIG. 2) provided in the gaming machine frame 3. The base member 129 </ b> B has a plate shape and is erected on the back surface of the main substrate 11. The main board 11 and the base member 129B are substantially orthogonal to each other. The display monitor 130B is provided on the side surface of the base member 129B. For this reason, the display monitor 130B is arranged so that the surface on the opening portion side of the door frame in the standing portion standing on the main board 11 provided in the gaming machine frame 3 faces the opening portion of the door frame. Has been placed. Further, the display monitor 130 </ b> B is disposed at a position protruding from the back surface of the main substrate 11.

  The display monitor 130 </ b> B arranged in the second display monitor arrangement mode is arranged facing the direction orthogonal to the back surface of the main substrate 11 at a position protruding from the back surface of the main substrate 11. The main board 11 is attached to the back surface of the game board 2 provided in the gaming machine frame 3. For this reason, when a clerk or the like conducts a confirmation work of a role ratio (relation ratio), the clerk or the like does not greatly open the gaming machine frame 3 but only slightly opens the role combination (relation ratio) role. The ratio can be confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to easily check the role combination (linkage) role ratio.

  In the first and second display monitor arrangement modes, the base members 129A and 129B are accommodated in the substrate case 202, but the base members 129A and 129B may be formed so as to protrude to the outside of the substrate case 202. Good.

[Third display monitor arrangement mode]
FIG. 70B is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the third display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 70B, in the third display monitor arrangement mode, an embedded inclined surface 11 </ b> K is formed on the back surface of the main substrate 11. The embedded inclined surface 11 </ b> K is formed to be inclined with respect to the back surface of the main substrate 11.

  The embedded inclined surface 11 </ b> K is formed as a part of the print base material on the main substrate 11. A display monitor 130 </ b> C is provided on the embedded inclined surface 11 </ b> K of the main substrate 11. Since the display monitor 130C is provided on the embedded inclined surface 11K, when the gaming machine frame 3 is released from the outer frame, the display monitor 130C is viewed from the open portion between the gaming machine frame 3 and the outer frame. It is arranged to face. The main board 11 and the display monitor 130 </ b> C are accommodated in the case 202.

  When the gaming machine frame 3 is released from the outer frame, the display monitor 130C arranged in the third display monitor arrangement mode faces the front as viewed from the opening portion between the gaming machine frame 3 and the outer frame. Is arranged. For this reason, when a clerk or the like conducts a confirmation work of a role ratio (relation ratio), the clerk or the like does not greatly open the gaming machine frame 3 but only slightly opens the role combination (relation ratio) role. The ratio can be confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to easily check the role combination (linkage) role ratio.

[Fourth Display Monitor Arrangement Mode]
FIG. 71A is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the fourth display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 71 (A), in the fourth display monitor arrangement mode, four base members 129D from the first base member 129D1 to the fourth base member 129D4 are provided on the back surface of the main substrate 11. Each of the first base member 129D1 to the fourth base member 129D4 is provided with a first display monitor 130D1 to a fourth display monitor 130D4. A display monitor 130D is formed by the first display monitor 130D1 to the fourth display monitor 130D4. The display monitor 130 </ b> D is accommodated in the substrate case 202 together with the base member 129 and the main substrate 11.

  The first base member 129D1 to the fourth base member 129D4 have a common shape. This shape will be described using the first base member 129D1. The first base member 129D1 has a triangular prism shape whose bottom surface is a right triangle. The first base member 129D1 has the same shape as the base member 129A in the first display monitor arrangement mode, but is smaller than the base member 129A in the first display monitor arrangement mode.

  Specifically, the inclined surface of the base member 129A in the first display monitor arrangement form has a size equivalent to the size of four 7 segments and the lower right dot (see FIG. 51A). On the other hand, the inclined surface of the first base member 129D1 has a size equivalent to the size of one 7 segment and the lower right dot. On the first display monitor 130D1 provided on the inclined surface of the first base member 129D1, one 7 segment and the lower right dot can be displayed.

  The first base member 129 </ b> D <b> 1 is disposed at a position slightly to the left of the substantially central position in the height direction of the back surface of the main substrate 11. The second base member 129D2 is disposed on the right side of the first base member 129D1, and the third base member 129D3 is on the right side of the second base member 129D2 opposite to the left side on which the first base member 129D1 is disposed. Is arranged. The fourth base member 129D4 is disposed on the right side opposite to the left side on which the second base member 129D2 is disposed in the third base member 129D3. Thus, the first base member 129D1 to the fourth base member 129D4 are arranged in parallel along the substantially horizontal direction.

  A second display monitor 130D2 is provided on the inclined surface of the second base member 129D2. Similarly, a third display monitor 130D3 and a fourth display monitor 130D4 are provided on the inclined surfaces of the third base member 129D3 and the fourth base member 129D4. On the first display monitor 130D1 provided on the first base member 129D1, contents corresponding to the first display portion 29A of the display monitor 29 shown in FIG. 51A are displayed.

  On the second display monitor 130D2 provided on the second base member 129D2, contents corresponding to the second display portion 29B of the display monitor 29 shown in FIG. 51A are displayed. On the third display monitor 130D3 provided on the third base member 129D3, contents corresponding to the third display portion 29C of the display monitor 29 shown in FIG. 51A are displayed. On the fourth display monitor 130D4 provided on the fourth base member 129D4, contents corresponding to the fourth display unit 29D of the display monitor 29 shown in FIG. 51A are displayed.

  When the gaming machine frame 3 is released from the outer frame, the display monitor 130D arranged in the fourth display monitor arrangement mode faces the front as viewed from the open portion between the gaming machine frame 3 and the outer frame. Is arranged. For this reason, when a clerk or the like conducts a confirmation work of a role ratio (relation ratio), the clerk or the like does not greatly open the gaming machine frame 3 but only slightly opens the role combination (relation ratio) role. The ratio can be confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to easily check the role combination (linkage) role ratio.

[Fifth display monitor arrangement mode]
FIG. 71B is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the fifth display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 71B, in the fifth display monitor arrangement mode, four base members 129E from the first base member 129E1 to the fourth base member 129E4 are provided on the back surface of the main substrate 11. A first display monitor 130E1 to a fourth display monitor 130E4 are provided on each of the first base member 129E1 to the fourth base member 129E4. A display monitor 130E is formed by the first display monitor 130E1 to the fourth display monitor 130E4. The display monitor 130 </ b> E is housed in the substrate case 202 together with the base member 129 and the main substrate 11.

  Each of the first base member 129E1 to the fourth base member 129E4 has a shape common to the first base member 129D1 to the first base member 129D4 in the fourth display monitor arrangement mode. In addition, the first display monitor 130E1 to the fourth display monitor 130E4 are similar to the first display monitor 130D1 to the fourth display monitor 130D4 provided on the first base member 129D1 to the first fourth base member 129D4, respectively. The members 129E1 to the fourth base member 129E4 are provided.

  The first base member 129E1 is disposed above a substantially central position in the width direction on the back surface of the main substrate 11. The second base member 129E2 is disposed below the first base member 129E1, and the third base member 129E3 is disposed below the second base member 129E2. The fourth base member 129E4 is disposed below the third base member 129E3. Thus, the first base member 129E1 to the fourth base member 129E4 are arranged side by side along the substantially vertical direction. Thus, the first base member 129E1 to the fourth base member 129E4 are arranged in the vertical direction.

  A first display monitor 130E1 is provided on the inclined surface of the first base member 129E1. Similarly, a second display monitor 130E2, a third display monitor 130E3, and a fourth display monitor 130E4 are provided on the inclined surfaces of the second base member 129E2, the third base member 129E3, and the fourth base member 129E4, respectively. Yes. The first display monitor 130E1 to the fourth display monitor 130E4 provided on the first base member 129E1 to the fourth base member 129E4 include the first display portion 29A to the fourth display portion of the display monitor 29 shown in FIG. The contents corresponding to 29D are displayed. Since the first base member 129E1 to the fourth base member 129E4 are arranged in the vertical direction, the first display monitor 130E1 to the fourth display monitor 130E4 are also arranged in the vertical direction. For this reason, the four-digit displays on the first display monitor 130E1 to the fourth display monitor 130E4 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction. The four-digit display on the first display monitor 130E1 to the fourth display monitor 130E4 may be arranged in the horizontal direction.

  When the gaming machine frame 3 is released from the outer frame, the display monitor 130E arranged in the fifth display monitor arrangement mode faces the front as viewed from the open portion between the gaming machine frame 3 and the outer frame. Is arranged. For this reason, when a clerk or the like conducts a confirmation work of a role ratio (relation ratio), the clerk or the like does not greatly open the gaming machine frame 3 but only slightly opens the role combination (relation ratio) role. The ratio can be confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to easily check the role combination (linkage) role ratio.

[Sixth display monitor arrangement mode]
FIG. 72A is a perspective view of a main board on which display monitors are arranged in the sixth display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 72A, in the sixth display monitor arrangement mode, a base member 129F is provided on the upper surface of the substrate case 202 that accommodates the main substrate 11, and a display monitor 130F is provided on the upper surface of the base member 129F. Yes. The 4-digit display on the display monitor 130F is arranged side by side in the vertical direction. The four-digit display on the display monitor 130F may be arranged in the horizontal direction.

  The base member 129F has a horizontally long substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The display monitor 130F provided on the upper surface of the base member 129F includes four seven segments and a lower right dot (see FIG. 51A). The substrate case 202 includes a substrate case main body 202A and a lid 202B. The base member 129F is provided in the substrate case 202 across the substrate case main body 202A and the lid body 202B of the substrate case 202.

  The display monitor 130F arranged in the sixth display monitor arrangement mode is provided on the upper surface of the substrate case 202 and arranged along the left-right direction. For this reason, when the gaming machine frame 3 is released from the outer frame, the entire gaming machine frame 3 can be seen from the outside of the gaming machine 1 only by slightly opening the gaming machine frame 3. Therefore, when a store clerk or the like performs a check operation of the role ratio (relation ratio), the store clerk or the like does not greatly open the gaming machine frame 3 but only slightly opens the role ratio (relation ratio) ratio. Can be confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to easily check the role combination (relation ratio) role ratio.

[Seventh display monitor arrangement mode]
FIG. 72B is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the seventh display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 72B, in the seventh display monitor arrangement mode, a base member 129G is provided on the upper surface of the substrate case 202 that accommodates the main substrate 11, and a display monitor 130G is provided on the upper surface of the base member 129G. Yes. The 4-digit display on the display monitor 130G is arranged side by side in the vertical direction. The 4-digit display on the display monitor 130G may be arranged in the horizontal direction. Similarly to the base member 129F in the sixth display monitor arrangement mode, the base member 129G is provided in the substrate case 202 across the substrate case main body 202A and the lid 202B of the substrate case 202.

  The base member 129 </ b> G has a triangular prism shape whose bottom surface forms a right triangle, and the height direction of the base member 129 </ b> G is arranged along the depth direction of the gaming machine 1. A right-angle portion of a right-angled triangle that forms the bottom surface of the triangular prism is arranged on the right side that is the opposite side of the left side that is the side on which the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. Therefore, the upper surface of the base member 129G is an inclined surface that descends from the side (left side) opposite to the side (left side) where the gaming machine frame 3 is opened toward the side where the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. A display monitor 130G is provided on the inclined surface.

  The display monitor 130G arranged in the seventh display monitor arrangement mode is provided on the upper surface of the substrate case 202 and arranged along the left-right direction. For this reason, when the gaming machine frame 3 is released from the outer frame, the entire gaming machine frame 3 can be seen from the outside of the gaming machine 1 only by slightly opening the gaming machine frame 3. Therefore, when a store clerk or the like performs a check operation of the role ratio (relation ratio), the store clerk or the like does not greatly open the gaming machine frame 3 but only slightly opens the role ratio (relation ratio) ratio. Can be confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to easily check the role combination (relation ratio) role ratio.

  Further, the upper surface of the base member 129G provided with the display monitor 130G arranged in the seventh display monitor arrangement mode is directed from the side opposite to the side where the gaming machine frame 3 is opened to the side where the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. It is an inclined surface that descends. For this reason, when the display monitor 130G is viewed from the side where the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the display monitor 130G can be easily viewed. Therefore, it is possible to more easily check the role combination (relation ratio) ratio.

[Eighth display monitor arrangement mode]
FIG. 73A is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the eighth display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 73A, in the eighth display monitor arrangement mode, a base member 129H is provided on the left side surface of the substrate case 202 that accommodates the main substrate 11, and a display monitor 130H is provided on the left side surface of the base member 129H. It has been. The 4-digit display on the display monitor 130H is arranged side by side in the vertical direction. The 4-digit display on the display monitor 130H may be arranged in the horizontal direction.

  The base member 129H has a horizontally long substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The display monitor 130H provided on the left side surface of the base member 129H includes four seven segments and a lower right dot (see FIG. 51A). The substrate case 202 includes a substrate case main body 202A and a lid 202B. The base member 129H is provided in the substrate case 202 across the substrate case main body 202A and the lid 202B of the substrate case 202.

  The display monitor 130 </ b> H arranged in the eighth display monitor arrangement mode is provided on the left side surface of the substrate case 202 and is arranged along the vertical direction. For this reason, when the gaming machine frame 3 is released from the outer frame, the entire display monitor 130H can be viewed from the outside of the gaming machine 1 only by slightly opening the gaming machine frame 3. Therefore, when a store clerk or the like performs a check operation of the role ratio (relation ratio), the store clerk or the like does not greatly open the gaming machine frame 3 but only slightly opens the role ratio (relation ratio) ratio. Can be confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to easily check the role combination (relation ratio) role ratio.

[Ninth display monitor arrangement mode]
FIG. 73B is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the ninth display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 73 (B), in the ninth display monitor arrangement mode, a base member 129I is provided on the right regular surface of the substrate case 202 that accommodates the main substrate 11, and a display monitor 130I is provided on the right side surface of the base member 129I. Is provided. Similarly to the base member 129F in the sixth display monitor arrangement mode, the base member 129I is provided on the substrate case 202 across the substrate case main body 202A and the lid 202B of the substrate case 202.

  The base member 129 </ b> I has a triangular prism shape whose bottom surface forms a right triangle, and the height direction of the base member 129 </ b> I is arranged along the depth direction of the gaming machine 1. The right angle portion of the right triangle that forms the bottom surface of the triangular prism is arranged on the right side. For this reason, the left side surface of the base member 129I is an inclined surface that approaches the right side as it goes downward from above. A display monitor 130I is provided on this inclined surface. The 4-digit display on the display monitor 130I is arranged side by side in the vertical direction. The 4-digit display on the display monitor 130I may be arranged in the horizontal direction.

  The display monitor 130I arranged in the ninth display monitor arrangement mode is provided on the left side surface of the substrate case 202 and arranged along the vertical direction. Therefore, when the gaming machine frame 3 is released from the outer frame, the entire display monitor 130I can be visually recognized from the outside of the gaming machine 1 only by slightly opening the gaming machine frame 3. Therefore, when a store clerk or the like performs a check operation of the role ratio (relation ratio), the store clerk or the like does not greatly open the gaming machine frame 3 but only slightly opens the role ratio (relation ratio) ratio. Can be confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to easily check the role combination (relation ratio) role ratio.

  The left side surface of the base member 129I provided with the display monitor 130I arranged in the ninth display monitor arrangement mode is an inclined surface that approaches the right side as it descends. For this reason, when the display monitor 130I is viewed from the side where the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the display monitor 130I can be easily viewed. Therefore, it is possible to more easily check the role combination (relation ratio) ratio.

  In addition, the display monitors 130A to 130I arranged in the first display monitor arrangement mode to the ninth display monitor arrangement mode all have the display monitor installation angle with respect to the open part between the gaming machine frame 3 and the outer frame. You may provide in the adjustment means which makes adjustment possible. The adjusting means includes, for example, a fixing portion fixed to the base members 129A to 129I or the embedded inclined surface 11K, and an attachment portion that is movable with respect to the fixing portion, and the display monitors 130A to 130I are attached to the attachment portion. Any one may be attached. The adjusting means may be a manually operated type that allows a store clerk to operate by opening the gaming machine frame 3, or an electric type that operates a motor or actuator provided in the adjusting means. But you can. In the case of an electric type, a person who can operate from an office or the like via a communication device or the like may be used.

  The range in which the attachment portion can be moved may be, for example, a movement range associated with movement in the up / down / left / right directions, or a movement range associated with rotational movement around an arbitrary rotation axis. Moreover, the movement range which combined the movement range accompanying these movements may be sufficient. Amusement hall in which the gaming machine 1 is installed by providing the display monitors 130A to 130I in the adjusting means that can adjust the installation angle of the display monitor with respect to the open portion between the gaming machine frame 3 and the outer frame. You can make adjustments according to your wishes.

  In addition, in said 1st display monitor arrangement | positioning aspect-9th display monitor arrangement | positioning aspect, although the arrangement | positioning of the display monitor was shown, respectively, you may combine these arrangement | positioning aspects. For example, the display monitor may be arranged from the upper surface of the substrate case 202 to the left side by combining the eighth display monitor arrangement mode and the ninth display monitor arrangement mode.

[A gaming machine with a blade-type variable winning ball device]
In the above example, a variable display game (special game) that performs variable display is executed, and the so-called big hit game state is controlled when the display result of variable display in the variable display game (special game) is a big hit. A digital pachislot machine was explained. On the other hand, as a so-called honey-type gaming machine in which the big hit gaming state is controlled by passing the gaming ball through a specific area (V area) provided inside the openable / closable blade-type variable winning ball apparatus. Good. Hereinafter, an example in which the present invention is applied to a honey-type gaming machine will be described. Hereinafter, the differences between the game machine 1 and the game machine 1 will be mainly described, and common descriptions may be omitted.

  FIG. 74 is a front view of a gaming machine equipped with a blade-type variable winning ball device, and FIG. 75 is a front view of the variable winning ball device provided on the game board as viewed from the front. As shown in FIG. 74, the pachinko gaming machine 501 has a glass door frame 502 formed in a frame shape. A hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 503 is provided on the lower surface of the glass door frame 502. The lower part of the hitting ball supply tray 3 has a surplus ball receiving tray 504 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 503, and a speed at which the hitting ball launching device launches the game balls (that is, the strength of the spring that plays the game balls). And a hitting ball operating handle (operating knob) 505 for adjusting the height).

  The player can adjust the momentum of the game ball fired from the ball striking device by rotating the operation knob 505. Specifically, by rotating the operation knob 505 to the right, the speed of the game ball fired from the hitting ball launching device gradually increases. Enters the left area of the game area 507 from above through the hitting rail. When the operation knob 505 is further rotated to the right, the launched game ball enters the right area of the game area 507 from above. Therefore, by changing the rotation amount with the operation knob 505 rotated to the right, it is possible to adjust the momentum of the game ball fired from the ball striking device, and to adjust the area where the game ball is to be shot. .

  A game board is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 502. The game board is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board and various parts attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 507 partitioned by guide rails is formed on the front surface of the game board.

  A wing-type variable winning ball apparatus 520 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area 507. Below the blade-type variable winning ball device 520, a first winning winning port 511, a second starting winning port 512, and a variable winning ball device 515 that forms a third starting winning port 513 are provided. The winning ball that has entered the first starting winning opening 511 is detected by the first starting opening switch 511a, and the winning ball that has entered the second starting winning opening 512 is detected by the second starting opening switch 512a, respectively. Led to. Also, a winning ball that has entered the third starting winning opening 513 that can be awarded when the variable winning ball apparatus 515 is opened is detected by the third starting opening switch 513a and guided to the back of the game board. The variable winning ball device 515 is opened by a solenoid 515a. Hereinafter, the first start winning port 511, the second start winning port 512, and the third start winning port 513 may be collectively referred to as “start winning ports” or may be expressed as starting winning ports 511, 512, and 513. . Further, the first start port switch 511a, the second start port switch 512a, and the third start port switch 513a may be collectively referred to as “start port switches” or may be expressed as start port switches 511a, 512a, and 513a. . When a game ball wins the start winning opening, a predetermined number, for example, 5 game balls are paid out as a prize ball. The number of prize balls to be paid out by winning a game ball at the start winning opening may be common or may be different for each starting winning opening. For example, the number of payout balls when a game ball is won at the first start prize port 511 and the second start prize port 512 is 5, and the number of prize balls when a game ball is won at the third start prize port 513 is The number of payouts may be two.

  When the game ball wins the start winning opening and is detected by the start opening switch, the blade type variable winning ball apparatus 520 is controlled to open and close once or twice. By opening / closing control, the left open door 576A on the left side moves leftward from the initial position, and the right open door 576B on the right side moves rightward from the initial position, whereby the blade-type variable winning ball apparatus 520 is opened. When the left open door 576A and the right open door 576B return to the initial positions, the blade-type variable winning ball device 520 is closed. The state in which the blade-type variable winning ball apparatus 520 performs the opening operation in response to the winning detection of the start port switch is referred to as a starting operation state. Hereinafter, the blade-type variable winning ball apparatus 520 may be referred to as an accessory. The game board is provided with various kinds of bonuses. Hereinafter, the bonus means a blade-type variable winning ball apparatus 520.

  On the back side inside the blade-type variable winning ball apparatus 520, an effect display device 509 such as an LCD for effect display is provided. The effect display device 509 variably displays the effect symbol as identification information (variation display). In this embodiment, the effect display device 509 has, for example, three variable display portions (symbol display areas) of “left”, “middle”, and “right”.

  On the right side of the blade-type variable winning ball apparatus 520, a special symbol display 508 that variably displays a special symbol as identification information is provided. The special symbol display 508 is constituted by, for example, a 7 segment display.

  Above the special symbol display 508, there is provided a special symbol start memory display 518 composed of four LEDs for displaying the number of effective winning balls in which a game ball has entered the starting winning opening, that is, the starting memory number. The special symbol start memory display 518 displays up to four start memory numbers in the order of winning. The special symbol start memory display 518 increments the number of lit LEDs by 1 each time there is an effective start winning in the start winning opening 511, 512, 513. Then, each time variable display is started on the special symbol display 508, the number of LEDs that are lit is reduced by 1 (that is, one LED is turned off). In this example, the special symbol start memory display 518 shifts the lighting state every time variable display is started by the special symbol display 508. As will be described later, since the start memory number is also displayed on the effect display device 509, the special symbol start memory display 518 may not be provided.

  On the left side of the blade-type variable winning ball apparatus 520, a normal symbol display 510 that variably displays a normal symbol is provided. When the game ball passes through the gate 532 provided on the right side of the game area 507 and is detected by the gate switch 532a, the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display 510 (in this example, a numeric display with a 7-segment LED). Variable display starts. In this embodiment, “7” is stopped and displayed at the end of variable display in the case of winning, and other than “7” is stopped and displayed in the case of losing. In the case of winning, the variable winning ball device 7 is opened for a predetermined number of times. Note that the normal symbol hit probability is, for example, 12/13. Above the normal symbol display 510, a normal symbol start memory display 541 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of passing balls that have passed through the gate 532 is provided. Each time the gate 532 passes, the normal symbol start memory display 541 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Each time variable display on the normal symbol display 510 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one.

  On the right side of the variable winning ball apparatus 515, there is provided a big winning opening through which the opening / closing plate 516 is opened by the solenoid 521 in a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state). The opening / closing plate 516 is a means for opening and closing the special winning opening. A winning ball that has entered the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 523. When game balls win the big prize opening, a predetermined number, for example, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Decorative lamps blinking and displayed during the game are provided around the left and right sides of the game area 507, and an outlet 526 for collecting game balls that have not won a prize is provided at the bottom.

  In addition, two speakers 527 that emit sound effects are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 507. On the outer periphery of the game area 507, a top frame lamp 528a, a left frame lamp 528b, and a right frame lamp 528c are provided. Furthermore, a decoration LED is installed around each structure (such as the blade-type variable winning ball apparatus 520) in the game area 507. The top frame lamp 528a, the left frame lamp 528b, the right frame lamp 28c, and the decorative LED are examples of a decorative light emitter provided in the gaming machine.

  The game ball launched from the ball hitting device enters the game area 507 through the hit ball rail, and then falls in the game area 507. If the hit ball enters the start winning opening and is detected by the start opening switch, the special symbol will start variable display on the special symbol display 508 and the effect display device 509 will produce the effect symbol if variable symbol display can be started. Starts variable display. If it is not in a state in which the variable display of symbols can be started, the number of starting winning memories is increased by 1 when the number of starting winning memories which is the reserved storage of the variable display of special symbols on the special symbol display 508 is not the upper limit. That is, the number of LEDs to be turned on in the special symbol start memory display 518 is increased by one.

  The variable display of the special symbols (“0” to “9”) on the special symbol display 508 stops when a predetermined time has elapsed. If the special symbol at the time of stoppage is a big hit symbol (specific display result: specifically, for example, “3”, “7”), the first big hit gaming state (without starting operation state) of the big hit gaming state The game goes to the jackpot game state to be started. In addition, when the small hit symbol (specifically, “1”, “2”, “4”, “5”, “6”, “8”, “9”), it shifts to the starting operation state. To do. In the starting operation state, when a game ball wins a special area provided inside the blade-type variable winning ball apparatus 520, the state shifts to a second big hit gaming state (a big hit gaming state started after passing through the starting operation state). . Note that the gaming state before the transition to the big hit gaming state is a normal state. In addition, after the big hit gaming state is ended, the state shifts to a normal state or a short time state (a state in which the variable winning ball apparatus 515 is easily opened by shortening the average variation time of the special symbol and the production symbol). To do. The short-time state can be continued until the variable winning ball device 515 is released a predetermined number of times, for example, 100 times, and the transition condition to the big hit gaming state is satisfied until the variable winning ball device 515 is released 100 times. The gaming state shifts from the short-time state to the big hit gaming state. In addition, when the variable winning ball apparatus 515 is released 100 times without satisfying the transition condition to the big hit gaming state, the gaming state shifts from the short-time state to the normal state.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, in this embodiment, the gate 532 is provided on the right side of the game area 507. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the time is controlled to be short, it is preferable to launch the game ball (so-called right-handed) aiming at the right side of the game area 507 so that the game ball passes through the gate 532. It will be advantageous. As shown in FIG. 1, in this embodiment, the big prize opening is provided on the right side of the game area 507. Therefore, in this embodiment, during the big hit game, the game ball is fired (so-called right hit) aiming at the right side of the game area in order to win the game ball at the big prize opening. On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is assumed that a game ball is launched (so-called left-handed) aiming to the left of the game area 507 if the game is not in a short-time state or a big hit game (in a normal state).

  A left gate 517 is provided on the left side of the game area 507, and a game ball that has passed through the left gate 517 is detected by the left gate switch 517a. Further, a right gate 519 is provided to the right of the game area 507, and a game ball that has passed through the right gate 519 is detected by the right gate switch 519a.

  In this embodiment, when a transition of a predetermined gaming state is performed, control for shifting the gaming state is performed based on the passing of the game ball through the left gate 517 and the right gate 519. Specifically, in this embodiment, when a big hit symbol is derived and displayed, or when a game ball wins a specific winning slot 566 in the blade type variable winning ball apparatus 520, the big hit game is started immediately. Instead, the big hit game is started based on the game ball passing through the gate. In this embodiment, since the big winning opening is provided on the right side of the game area 507 (right-handed during the big hit game), the big hit is based on the game ball passing through the right gate 519. A game is started. The big hit game is not started based on the game balls passing through the left gate 517 and the right gate 519, but when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, or in the specific winning in the blade type variable winning ball device 520 The big hit game may be started immediately when a game ball is won in the mouth 566, or the big hit game may be started after a predetermined time has passed.

  Further, in this embodiment, even when the big hit game is finished, the state is shifted to a state where a new variation display can be started based on the passing of the game ball through the left gate 517 and the right gate 519. Specifically, in this embodiment, in the normal state, it is left-handed and right-handed in the short-time state, so that when the game is controlled to the normal state after the big hit game, the game ball has passed through the left gate 517. Based on this, the state is shifted to a state where a new variation display can be started. Transition to a state where display can be started. In addition, it is not shifted to a state where a new variation display can be started based on the passing of the game ball through the left gate 517 or the right gate 519, but when the big hit game is finished or the big hit game is finished. When a predetermined time elapses from the start, a transition to a state in which a new variable display can be started may be performed.

  Next, the blade-type variable winning ball apparatus 520 will be described. When the left open door 576A and the right open door 576B are opened by the driving of the opening / closing motor 575, the blade-type variable winning ball device (right) 520 is in a state where a game ball can enter. The game ball that has entered the accessory 520 passes through the passage port 57 and the like and flows down to the lower side of the accessory 520. In FIG. 75, a state in which the left open door 576A and the right open door 576B are closed and the game ball cannot enter the accessory 520 (is difficult to enter) is indicated by a solid line, and the left open door 576A and the right open door A state where 576B is opened and the game ball can enter the accessory 520 (easy to enter) is indicated by a virtual line.

  A left movable member 577 and a right movable member 578 are respectively provided on the left and right sides of the accessory 520. The moving part in the left movable member 577 is the left movable part 577A, and the moving part in the right movable member 578 is the right movable part 578A. The left movable part 577A is moved by the left movable part drive solenoid 577B, and the right movable part 578A is moved by the right movable part drive solenoid 578B. The left movable portion 577A and the right movable portion 78A move in the vertical direction.

  A special prize opening 566 that forms a specific area is provided at the bottom of the accessory 520. In addition, in the back of the position where the special winning opening 566 is provided in the accessory 520, there is provided an exit opening, and inside the accessory 520 there is a passage for distributing the game balls to the specific winning opening 566 or the exit opening. Is provided. The specific prize opening 566 is provided with a specific area switch 566A. A game ball that has won a prize in the specific prize opening 566 is detected by the specific area switch 566A, and a game ball that has won a prize is detected by the loss area switch. Is done. When a game ball wins the specific winning opening 566 and the outlier, a predetermined number, for example, 10 gaming balls are paid out as winning balls. It should be noted that the number of prize balls to be paid out when a game ball wins at the specific prize opening 566 and the extra opening may be the same or different. For example, the number of prize balls to be paid out by winning a game ball in the specific prize opening 566 may be set to 10, and the number of prize balls to be paid out by winning a game ball in the margin may be set to 3. Further, when a game ball enters the outlet, no prize ball may be paid out (the number of prize balls is 0).

  It is possible to shift to the second big hit gaming state on condition that the game ball that has entered the accessory 520 wins the specific prize opening 566 and is detected by the specific area switch 566A. In addition, when a game ball that has entered the accessory 520 wins a winning slot, it is not possible to shift to the second big hit gaming state.

  An example of how the game proceeds in the gaming machine 501 will be described. In the gaming machine 501, in a normal state, when a game ball wins any one of the first start winning opening 511, the second starting winning opening 512, and the third starting winning opening 513, one of the big win, the small win, and the off A lottery (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “hit lottery”) is executed. As a result of the big hit lottery, the big hit, the small hit or the out is determined. Then, the variation (variable display) of the special symbol and the effect symbol is started, and the symbol corresponding to the result of the big hit lottery is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 508.

  If the result of the big win lottery is determined to be a big win, after the special symbol display 508 stops and displays the symbol (the symbol corresponding to the big hit), the gaming state changes from the normal state to the big hit gaming state (first It is transferred to the jackpot game state. In the big hit gaming state, the big winning opening by the opening and closing plate 16 is controlled to be opened and closed 16 times (16 rounds, 1 round opening allowance time is 29 seconds). In this embodiment, the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state is fixed at 16, but the number of rounds (for example, any one of 2 rounds, 7 rounds, and 16 rounds) may be determined by lottery or the like. In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be a jackpot, the accessory 520 is not controlled to the open state. Further, when the result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be a jackpot, the accessory 520 may be controlled to be in an open state.

  When the result of the big hit lottery is determined to be a small hit, after the special symbol display 508 stops and displays the symbol (the symbol corresponding to the small hit), the accessory 520 is controlled to be in an open state. A starting operation is started. In the starting operation state, the accessory 520 is opened for 0.9 seconds. The number of times of opening (number of times of opening) is once, twice or three times. In the start-up operation state, when a game ball wins an accessory 520, and a game ball wins a specific winning slot 566 and is detected by the specific area switch 566A, a V winning is generated. When a V prize is generated, the gaming state is shifted to a big hit gaming state (second big hit gaming state). When the game ball enters the outlet and no V prize is generated, the game does not shift to the second big hit game state. In other words, they are disconnected and maintain the normal state.

  When the result of the big hit lottery is determined to be out of place, after the symbol (the symbol corresponding to the outage) is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 508, the accessory 520 is controlled to be in an open state. Absent. In this case, the gaming state does not shift to the big hit gaming state, and the normal state is maintained.

  There are two types of big hits: non-temporal and big hits. In any case, when the change of the special symbol is finished, the game goes directly to the 16 round big hit game state (first big hit game state) without going through the starting operation state. Later, the gaming state shifts to the short-time state (in the case of a non-temporal big hit, the gaming state after the big hit game is a normal state).

  There are three types of small hits, the first small hit to the third small hit. The first small hit is a small hit where the accessory 520 is opened once in the starting operation state, the second small hit is a small hit where the accessory 520 is opened twice, and the third small hit is an accessory. 520 is a small hit that opens 3 times. In addition, in the case of detachment, the accessory 520 does not perform the opening operation.

  In addition, when the winning combination V 520 is performed in the first small hit or the second small hit, the second big hit is a non-temporary big hit, and after the second big hit gaming state is finished, Transition to the state. In addition, when the winning combination 520 is performed in the third small hit and the winning combination V is won, the second big hit is a short-time big hit, and after the second big hit gaming state is finished, the state shifts to the short-time state.

  In addition, the gaming machine 501 is provided with a main board and a display monitor similar to the main board 11 and the display monitor 29 provided in the gaming machine 1 described above, and this main board serves as a combination (ratio) or role. The ratio is calculated, and the calculated role ratio is displayed on the display monitor. The display monitor is arranged in front of the main board on the main board so as not to hinder the visibility. This is the same as the gaming machine 1 described above. In addition, the calculation sequence, display procedure, and the like of the combination (relation ratio), the combination ratio, and the like are the same as those of the gaming machine 1 described above.

  The combination (ream ratio) and the combination ratio in the gaming machine 501 can be obtained by the above expressions (1) and (2). The prize winning ball number in the gaming machine 501 is determined by the winning of the game ball with respect to the large winning opening provided with the variable winning ball device 515, the specific winning port 566 and the off hole in the blade type variable winning ball device 520, and the opening / closing plate 516. The total number of game balls to be paid out.

  In addition, the number of consecutive prize winning balls in the gaming machine 501 is the number of game balls paid out by winning a game ball with respect to the big winning opening provided with the opening / closing plate 516 when the first big hit game state is executed. Refers to the total number. Further, when the second big hit game state is executed, the game balls paid out by winning the game ball with respect to the big winning opening provided with the opening / closing plate 516 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “big winning opening winning”). It may be the total number, or the game balls paid out by winning the big winning opening and the specific winning opening 566 in the blade-type variable winning ball apparatus 520 at the time of the V winning that triggered the transition to the second big hit gaming state. It may be the total number of game balls to be paid out by winning a game ball for the mouth (hereinafter sometimes referred to as an “opportunity win”).

  The “when winning the V win that triggered the transition to the second big hit gaming state” in the opportunity win may be when the blade-type variable winning ball apparatus 520 where the V win is generated or when the V win occurs. A series of opening due to winning at the start winning opening that triggered the opening of the blade-type variable winning ball apparatus may be included. For example, when the wing-type variable winning ball apparatus 520 is opened by the winning of a game ball to the third start winning opening 513 where the number of opening of the wing-type variable winning ball apparatus 520 is 3, and there is a V prize at the time of the opening. The opportunity prize may be a game ball prize for the specific prize opening 566 of the blade-type variable prize ball apparatus 520 and the off-season when the three times are opened.

  In addition, when the number of consecutive prize winning balls is the total number of game balls to be paid out by winning a grand prize winning and a winning prize, winning with respect to the specific winning slot 566 and the offending slot of the blade-type variable winning ball apparatus 520 becomes an opportunity prize. It depends on whether or not a V prize that triggers the transition to the second big hit gaming state occurs. For this reason, the total number of game balls to be paid out by winning for the specific winning slot 566 and the offending slot of the blade-type variable winning ball apparatus 520 (hereinafter referred to as “temporary memory opportunity winning ball number”) is temporarily stored, and the second big hit game When the V prize that triggers the transition to the state occurs, the temporary memory opportunity prize ball number may be added to the number of consecutive feature winning prize balls as the total number of game balls to be paid out by the opportunity prize. Good. The timing for adding the temporary storage opportunity winning ball to the number of consecutive winning character winning balls may be an appropriate timing. For example, the timing may be the timing of counting the number of game balls to be paid out by winning the grand prize winning prize by shifting to the second big hit gaming state, or counting the number of game balls to be paid out by winning the big prize winning prize. When starting, it is good also as a timing just before displaying a game combination (continuous ratio) on the display monitor 29 during or after counting the number of prize balls of the game ball paid out by the big prize opening prize.

  In addition, after storing the temporary storage opportunity winning ball, when the V winning that triggers the transition to the second big hit gaming state does not occur, the temporary storage trigger winning ball may be deleted. When a game ball wins at the specific winning opening 566, a V winning that has triggered the transition to the second big hit gaming state has occurred, so the blade-type variable winning ball device 520 is substantially disengaged. You may make it memorize | store once the total number of game balls paid out by the winning with respect to a mouth. For example, the determination that the V winning that triggered the transition to the second big hit gaming state does not occur is, for example, that no V winning has occurred after a predetermined time has elapsed since the opening of the blade-type variable winning ball device 520. can do.

  In addition, as with the gaming machine 1 described above, the short-term service group (ream ratio), the short-term service ratio, the cumulative service group (inter-ratio), and the cumulative service ratio are displayed on the display monitor. And so on. The display monitor may be attached to the main board in the same manner as the gaming machine 1 described above. Moreover, as an arrangement | positioning aspect of a display monitor, it is good also as the various arrangement | positioning aspect demonstrated with the attachment aspect with respect to the game machine 1. FIG.

  The gaming machine 501 described above is a gaming machine provided with a blade-type variable winning ball device 520. In a gaming machine equipped with such a blade-type variable winning ball device 520, a combination (community ratio) and a combination ratio are displayed on the main board. The display monitor is provided on the main board for controlling the game so that the visibility is not hindered. For this reason, it is possible to recognize what adjustments have been made to game nails (fault nails), windmills and the like provided on the game board.

  In addition, in the gaming machine 501 provided with the blade-type variable winning ball apparatus 520, the role combination (continuity ratio) and the role ratio are calculated in a manner different from that of the gaming machine 1. Also in the gaming machine 501 provided with such a blade-type variable winning ball apparatus 520, it is possible to calculate a combination (community ratio) and a combination ratio and display them on a display monitor attached to the main board.

  In the gaming machine 501, the variable winning ball device 515 is used as the third starting winning port 513 among the starting winning ports for opening and closing the blade-type variable winning ball device 520, but the starting winning port is the first starting prize. There may be only those that are not provided with variable winning ball devices such as the mouth 511 and the second start winning opening 512. Further, the start winning opening may be only a variable winning ball apparatus such as the third starting winning opening 513.

  Note that the number of prize balls paid out by winning a game ball in the third start prize opening 513 is added to the number of prize winning prize balls used for calculating the ratio, but the first start prize slot 511 and second The number of winning balls paid out by winning a game ball at the start winning opening 512 is not added to the number of winning winning balls and the number of winning winning consecutive consecutive winning characters.

  Also, in the gaming machine 501, a big hit lottery is executed by winning a game ball at the start winning opening, but even if winning at the start winning opening, the big win lottery is not executed, and the variable winning ball apparatus 520 is always opened. It is good also as a mode in which operation | movement is performed. In addition, instead of the big hit lottery, a lottery for the number of opening of the variable winning ball device 520 may be performed, or both of the big hit lottery and the lottery for the number of opening of the variable winning ball device 520 may be performed. . In addition, in the lottery for the number of times of opening, in addition to lottery of times such as once, twice, and three times, 0 may be included as an object of the number of times of opening.

  The gaming machine 501 is set to a big hit gaming state (a first big hit gaming state and a second big hit gaming state). There is a prize opening. On the other hand, it is good also as an aspect with which only the blade | wing type variable winning ball apparatus was provided, without providing a big winning opening, while having set the big hit game state. In this case, in the big hit gaming state, the blade-type variable winning ball device may perform an opening / closing operation or an opening operation for a certain time.

  Further, in an aspect in which only the blade-type variable winning ball device is provided, V winning may be set as the continuation condition of the big hit gaming state. For example, when shifting to the big hit gaming state, the maximum continuation round may be set, and the continuation of the next round may be determined when there is a V prize in one round.

(Modification regarding display control of winning information and display items)
(1) In the above embodiment, an example has been described in which items related to the number of winnings to the general winning opening, the first starting winning opening, and the second starting winning opening can be displayed in the first area α. For example, an item related to the number of times the game ball has passed through the gates 41A and 41B may be displayed in the first area α. When the game ball passes through the gates 41A and 41B, a pass gate designation command for designating which gate the game ball has passed through is sent from the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) to the production control board 12 (production). By transmitting to the control CPU 120), the effect control CPU 120 can count the number of times that the game ball has passed through the gates 41A and 41B and display it in the first area α.

  For example, the number of times the gate has passed today (corresponding to A1), today's gate, by the same method as the totaling process when receiving a general prize opening designation command designating which of the first to fourth general prize openings has been won Gate pass ratio (corresponding to A2), low base state gate pass count (corresponding to B1), low base state gate pass ratio (corresponding to B2), high base state gate pass count (corresponding to C1), high base The gate passage ratio in the state (corresponding to C2), the number of gate passages in the setting period (corresponding to D1), and the gate passage ratio in the setting period (corresponding to D2) can be totaled and displayed in the first area α. . Moreover, these items can be totaled for each gate (with respect to each of the gates 41A and 41B) and displayed in the first area α.

  (2) In addition, the production control CPU 120 receives the grand prize winning command from the game control microcomputer 100, so that it can count the number of winning prizes in the big prize winning slot and win the prize winning prize. The number of awarded prize balls based on the total number can be totaled and displayed in the first area α.

  For example, by the same method as the totaling process when receiving a general prize opening designation command for designating which of the first to fourth general prize openings has been awarded, Equivalent) ”,“ Today ’s winning prize ratio (corresponding to A2) ”,“ Today's winning ball award (corresponding to A3) ”,“ Today ’s total “Percentage of the number of prize balls awarded based on today's prize winnings with respect to the number of prize balls (corresponding to A4)”, “Number of winning prizes for the winning prizes during the set period (corresponding to D1)” , “Award ratio to the big prize opening in the setting period (corresponding to D2)”, “Number of winning balls awarded based on the winning in the big winning opening in the setting period (corresponding to D3)”, and “In the setting period Granted based on winning a prize in the winning period during the set period for the number of awarded balls The percentage of winning balls number (corresponding to D4) ", aggregates the can be displayed in the first area alpha.

  Here, “the ratio of the number of prize balls awarded based on today's prize winnings with respect to today's total prize balls (corresponding to A4)” or “the prize balls awarded during the set period” When the ratio of the number of winning balls awarded based on winning a prize winning in the set period with respect to the number (corresponding to D4) is higher than a predetermined ratio (for example, 60%), the fact is notified. You may make it do. For example, a message such as “the prize winning ball ratio exceeding the reference value (60%)” may be displayed in the first area α.

  In addition, the number of prize balls given based on winning in the second starting prize opening controlled to be opened / closed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B with respect to the total number of winning balls and the opening / closing control by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 are performed. When the total ratio with the number of winning balls awarded based on winning in the big winning opening is higher than a predetermined ratio (for example, 70%), the fact may be notified. For example, in the first area α, a message such as “the prize winning ball ratio exceeds the reference value (70%)” may be displayed.

  (3) In the above embodiment, together with the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11 side, the effect control CPU 120 receives each command received from the game control microcomputer 100 when the game ball enters each entry area. The example in which the number of game balls entering the respective entry areas is tabulated has been described. However, in the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11 side of the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11 side, each entry area is entered. The number of game balls entered is counted, or the effect control CPU 120 enters each entry area based on each command received from the game control microcomputer 100 when the game ball enters each entry area. It is also possible to count the numbers.

  It should be noted that the number of game balls that have entered each entry area (the value of the counter corresponding to each switch) counted by the game control microcomputer 100 or the effect control CPU 120 on the main board 11 side is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. Thus, the image can be displayed on the image display device 5. For example, by outputting a command designating the total number of entries to each entry area from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 can enter each entry area based on the command. The number of approaches can be specified and displayed in the first area α.

  It should be noted that the display devices provided on the main board 11 such as the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B indicate the number of entry into each entry area counted on the game control microcomputer 100 side. You may make it display on. Further, when the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening with respect to the number of winnings to the start winning opening does not reach a predetermined reference ratio, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B You may make it alert | report by performing the specific display different from the display result of the variable display of a special symbol. Note that the display device provided on the main board 11 on which the aggregated results are displayed is not limited to the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the like, and displays the aggregated results. It may be a display device provided exclusively for. Further, the display device may be in any form such as a lamp, LED, 7 segment, liquid crystal display device, EL panel, light guide plate.

  The value of each counter stored in the RAM 102 (the number of entries into each entry area) can be determined by, for example, the game state flag (probability change state, time reduction state, etc.) stored in the RAM 102 by the game control microcomputer 100. Display on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B when a reset operation for resetting the flag (according to the gaming state for playing) or the like is performed by the game hall side (for example, a store clerk). Alternatively, it may be output from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control board 12 and displayed on the image display device 5 for a certain period of time. The reset operation is an operation of a reset button (not shown) connected to the main board 11. The reset button is provided on the back side (game island side) of the game board 2 and rotates the game board 2 forward with respect to the game machine frame 3 using the hinge mechanism of the game machine frame 3. By doing so, the reset button provided on the back side of the game board 2 can be operated.

  (4) In the above embodiment, the example in which the winning number information (D1 to D4) in the counting period set by the player can be displayed in the first area α has been described. A counting period is set in the gaming machine (for example, a specific period (for example, 60 minutes) is stored or set by an operation on the game hall side), and the number of winnings in the set counting period Information (corresponding to D1 to D4) may be displayed in the first area α. For example, the number of winnings in the general winning opening per 60 minutes is totaled, the total value is displayed in the first area α, and the total value is less than a predetermined reference value (for example, 60 times / 60 minutes). In that case, you may make it alert | report that.

  (5) In addition, when a winning at a specific winning opening does not occur for a predetermined period, the fact may be notified to the first area α. For example, if the number of winnings in the general winning opening has not occurred for 10 minutes, a message “No general winning for 10 minutes” may be displayed in the first area α. The predetermined period may be set by an operation on the game hall side (for example, an operation using the display changeover switch 32 and the operation button 30), or an operation on the player side (for example, an operation using the operation button 30). It may be possible to set by.

  (6) It should be noted that the above embodiment is also applied to a gaming machine including a sorting device in which the winning ratio to the start winning opening and the general winning opening is a specific ratio (for example, 1: 1). The number-of-wins information related to the number of winnings at each winning opening can be displayed in the first area α. For example, a gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117434 has a configuration in which game balls received by a sorting device are alternately distributed to a first start winning opening and a second starting winning opening. By providing the distribution device, it is possible to alternately distribute the game balls received by the distribution device to the start winning port and the general winning port. The above embodiment is also applied to the gaming machine having a configuration in which the distribution device alternately distributes the game balls to the start winning opening and the general winning opening, and the first winning amount information related to the winning numbers to each winning opening is applied. It can be displayed in area α. However, since the number of wins to the general prize opening is automatically determined according to the number of wins to the start prize opening, the ratio of the number of wins to the general prize opening to the number of wins to the start prize opening is displayed as described above. There is no need to let them.

  (7) In FIG. 46, the counting period can be set according to the player's operation, but the winning number information is reset according to the player's operation, and the counting of the winning number information is started from the reset timing. You may do it. For example, when the player performs an operation to start counting, the number of winnings in the general winning opening displayed in the first area α is reset to 0, and thereafter, the production control CPU 120 issues a general winning opening specifying command. Each time it is received, the number of winnings in the general winning opening displayed in the first area α may be increased by one.

  Further, the aggregation period once set may be changed according to the player's operation before the set period elapses. For example, although the aggregation period is initially set to 30 minutes, in order to quickly know the aggregation result, the player may perform a resetting operation before the set period elapses to shorten the aggregation period to 10 minutes. In addition, although the aggregation period was initially set to 10 minutes, in order to know the aggregation results for a longer period, the player performs a resetting operation before the set period elapses and extends the aggregation period to 30 minutes. Also good. Further, the set aggregation period may be extended in accordance with the player's operation after the set period has elapsed. For example, after 10 minutes, which is the set counting period, has elapsed and the counting results for 10 minutes have been displayed once, the player performs an extension operation to grasp the counting results for a longer counting period, The totaling period may be extended by 50 minutes to 60 minutes (as a result, both a 10-minute totaling result and a 60-minute totaling result including 10 minutes may be obtained).

  (8) In the first area α in the demonstration screen displayed on the image display device 5 or in the state where the game is being performed (the state where the game end determination is not made and the demonstration screen is not displayed). The image explaining whether each winning opening provided on the game board surface is the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, or the general winning opening may be displayed. In addition, the number of winning balls at each winning opening may be notified.

  (9) In the above embodiment, the game hall setting has priority over the player setting, but conversely, the player setting may have priority over the game hall setting. That is, regardless of whether the operation part of the display changeover switch 32 is the first position (non-display position) or the second position (display position), the player setting screens of FIGS. When the operation button 30 is pressed while an icon including the characters “display” is selected on the selection screen of FIG. 5 (2) so that it can be displayed on the image display device 5, winning information is displayed on the image display device 5. (The display control in FIGS. 42 and 43 is executed), and when the operation button 30 is pressed in a state where an icon including the characters “do not display” is selected on the selection screen in FIG. You may make it not display on the apparatus 5 (display control of FIG. 44 is performed).

  In addition, it is also possible to determine whether or not to display the winning information according to the order of the accepted setting operation, with the game hall setting and the player setting being the same priority. In other words, it may be determined whether or not the winning number information is displayed with priority given to the setting operation (last setting operation) received last. For example, even when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the first position (non-display position), the winning number information is displayed on the player setting screens of FIGS. When set, the winning information is displayed (the display control in FIGS. 42 and 43 is executed). Moreover, even if it is a setting which does not display winning number information on the player setting screen of FIG. 5 (1)-(3), the operation part of the display changeover switch 32 is set to a 2nd position (display position) after that. In such a case, the number-of-wins information is displayed (the display control in FIGS. 42 and 43 is executed). On the other hand, even when the operation portion of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the second position (display position), the setting for not displaying the winning number information on the player setting screens of FIGS. 5 (1) to (3) thereafter. In such a case, the winning information is not displayed (display control in FIG. 44 is executed). Moreover, even if it is a case where it is set as the setting which displays winning number information on the player setting screen of FIG. 5 (1)-(3), the operation part of the display changeover switch 32 is set to 1st position (non-display position) after that. ) Is not displayed (the display control in FIG. 44 is executed).

  Further, in this embodiment, it is possible to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 5 by operating the display changeover switch 32 by the store clerk of the game hall, and the player can select the operation button 30. It is possible to set whether or not to display the number-of-wins information on the image display device 5 by operating, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and by operating the display changeover switch 32, While it is possible to set whether or not to display winning number information on the image display device 5, the player cannot set whether or not to display winning number information on the image display device 5 (for example, FIG. 5 (1) to FIG. 5). (There is no setting screen on the player side as shown in (3)). Thus, it may be possible to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 5 only on the game hall side.

  On the contrary, it is possible to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 5 by operating the operation button 30 by the player (and the store clerk of the game hall). There may be no means (for example, the display changeover switch 32 is not provided) that allows only the side to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 5. In the case of such a configuration, it is possible for the player and the game shop clerk to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 5 by a common setting operation (operation of the operation button 30). . Thus, it may be possible to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 5 by a common setting operation for the player and the game hall.

  (10) It should be noted that the winning number information relating to the number of winnings received at each winning mouth (general winning mouth, first starting winning mouth, second starting winning mouth, etc.) described with reference to FIG. A game in which the operation unit of the mode switch 31 is in the non-display position (first position) so that it is displayed on the image display device 5 only in the maintenance mode in which is the display position (second position). In the mode, it may not be displayed on the image display device 5. That is, it may be handled in the same way as the information in the winning number management table shown in FIG.

  As described above, the number-of-wins information relating to the number of winnings received at each winning mouth (general winning mouth, first starting winning mouth, second starting winning mouth, etc.) described with reference to FIG. It may be information that can be displayed on the image display device 5 only when it is performed and that the player cannot normally see. For example, a state where a player can play a game (for example, a state where a demo screen is displayed), a state where a game end determination is not performed (a state where a special game is being executed, a general game, etc.) In the state where the game is executed and the jackpot gaming state, etc., are information that is not displayed on the image display device 5, and for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute from the start of the power supply of the gaming machine, the demonstration screen is displayed. Display only before a game is performed), or when a manipulation for stopping the power supply of the gaming machine is performed, the display can be performed only for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute). good.

  (11) Also, the winning number information related to the number of winnings received at each winning opening (general winning opening, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, etc.) described in FIG. 45 and the like is either in the maintenance mode or the game mode. In this mode, display on the image display device 5 may be possible. In such a configuration, in the maintenance mode, the number-of-wins information can be displayed in the entire first area α and the second area β, whereas in the game mode, only in the first area α. The winning number information may be displayed. That is, the display area of the number-of-wins information may be different between a period in which no game is played and a period in which a game may be played.

  Also, in the maintenance mode, the total number of winning information is displayed for all items, whereas in the game mode, some items (items set by the operation of the game hall or the player, or Information on the number of winnings in a predetermined main item) may be displayed. That is, the items of the winning number information to be displayed may be different between the period in which the game is not performed and the period in which the game may be performed.

  (12) In the game mode, during the period in which the demonstration screen is displayed due to the game end determination being performed, the number-of-wins information can be displayed in the entire first area α and second area β. On the other hand, the number-of-wins information may be displayed only in the first area α during the period in which the game end determination is not performed and the game is determined to be in progress. In other words, the display area of the winning information may be different between the period in which it is determined that the game is not being performed and the period in which it is determined that the game is being performed.

  In addition, during the period when the demonstration screen is displayed due to the game end determination being performed, the total number of winning information is displayed for all items, whereas the game end determination is not performed and the game is not performed. During the period determined to be medium, the winning information of some items (items set by the operation of the game hall or the player or predetermined main items) may be displayed. That is, the items of the winning number information to be displayed may be different between the period in which it is determined that no game is being performed and the period in which it is determined that a game is being performed.

  (13) In the above embodiment, with respect to the display position and display range (image size) of a specific image (error message, 4th symbol, decorative symbol, and hold information), the setting for displaying the winning information ( 42 and 43) and the setting (FIG. 44) that does not display the winning number information are not changed (shared), while for other images (background images), the setting that displays the winning number information and the winning number The visible range is different depending on the setting for not displaying information. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and as shown in FIG. 47, the setting for displaying winning number information (FIG. 47 (a)) and The display position and display range (image size) of all the images including the background image other than the winning number information may be made common with the setting not displaying the winning number information (FIG. 47B). . Thereby, the control burden by the display / non-display setting of the winning number information can be reduced.

  (14) In the above embodiment, the display position and display range (size of the image) of the decorative symbols are set to display winning number information (FIGS. 42 and 43) and not to display winning number information (FIG. 44). However, the display position and display range of the decorative symbols may be made different according to the display / non-display setting of the winning number information. For example, as shown in FIG. 48, in the setting for displaying the winning number information (FIG. 48 (a)), the setting for not displaying the winning number information than the interval between the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The interval between the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in b)) may be widened. That is, when the winning number information is not displayed, variable display of decorative symbols may be executed using the entire screen. In this example, the decorative symbol display area 5L when the winning number information is not displayed is included in the first area α. As described above, when the winning number information is not displayed, variable display or stop display of the decorative symbols in the first area α may be allowed. Thus, you may make it raise interest by performing an effect using the whole screen.

  (15) In the above embodiment, as the gaming machine error, magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, and radio wave abnormality are exemplified, but not limited to these, the gaming machine error includes front door opening abnormality and payout mechanism abnormality. (Abnormal prize ball, etc.), illegal prize winning in the big prize opening (abnormality in which winning in the big prize opening is detected even though the big prize opening is not open), or malfunction of various members of the pachinko gaming machine 1 Etc.

[Other variations]
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. Note that the control and configuration of the gaming machine shown in each of the above-described production forms may be arbitrarily combined, and the control and configuration of the gaming machine shown in each of the above-described production forms and the following modifications are shown. You may make it combine arbitrarily the control and structure of a game machine which were made.

  In the above embodiment, the game balls that have not passed through the gate 41B due to the arrangement of the game nails on the game board surface and the flow direction of the game balls are placed in the third general winning port 50C and the fourth general winning port 50D. It shall be possible to win any one. By adopting such a configuration, even when the game ball does not pass through the gate 41B in the probability variation state or the short time state, it is possible to expect a prize to be placed in the general prize opening provided on the downstream side of the gate 41B. The decrease can be suppressed. In addition, the game balls that have not passed through the gate 41B may win a prize in either the third general winning port 50C or the fourth general winning port 50D at a higher rate than the game balls that have passed through the gate 41B. . By adopting such a configuration, even when the frequency of game balls passing through the gate 41B is low in the probability variation state or the short-time state, it is possible to expect winning in a general winning opening provided on the downstream side. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest. Furthermore, a specific production | presentation is performed based on the winning to a general winning opening, and a game entertainment interest can be raised more.

  In the above embodiment, executing a specific effect at a different rate depending on the gaming state includes executing the specific effect only in a certain gaming state, and not executing the specific effect in other gaming states. . Further, in the above embodiment, in order to execute the specific effect at a different rate depending on the game period, the specific effect can be executed only in a certain game period, and the specific effect is not executed in other game periods. included.

  In the above embodiment, in the first state, it is possible to execute the effect only in the first state in order to execute the effect at a higher rate than in the second state different from the first state. In the second state, not including the effect is also included. Here, the classification between the first state and the second state includes the classification according to the number of reserved memories, the classification according to the execution period of the special figure game (the special figure game), in addition to the classification according to the gaming state described above. Whether or not variable display is being executed), according to the type of variation pattern (for example, whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display being executed is a variation pattern with reach effect, or , Whether the variation pattern of the variable display being executed is a variation pattern with pseudo-continuous effects), a classification according to a specific performance timing (for example, before the reach state is established in the variation pattern with reach effects) Or whether it is before or after execution, or whether it is before or after execution of pseudo-continuous production in a variation pattern with pseudo-continuous production). .

  In the first effect form to the twelfth effect form, the specific effect may be executable only in any one of (1) the normal state and (2) the probability variation state or the short time state. For example, (1) the specific effect may be executed only in the normal state, and (2) the specific effect may not be executed in the probability variation state or the short time state. In the thirteenth effect form to the twenty-fourth effect form, any one of (1) a period after the reach state is established in reach change and (2) a period outside the reach change period or before the reach state is established in reach change. The specific effect may be executable only in one case. For example, (1) The specific effect can be executed only in the period after the reach state is established in the reach change, and (2) In the case of the period outside the reach change period or before the reach state is established in the reach change The production may not be executed.

  In the first effect form to the twelfth effect form, depending on whether the gaming state is (1) the normal state, or (2) the probability variation state or the short time state, the execution ratio of the specific effect or the execution state is executed. Although the type of the specific effect is different, when the big hit game state is controlled, whether or not the specific effect is executed and whether the specific effect to be executed is based on the same effect execution conditions as when the game state is the normal state. The type may be determined, and the presence / absence of execution of the specific effect and the type of the specific effect to be executed may be determined based on the common effect execution condition when the probability variation state or the time saving state is in effect. . In addition, the game state classification is not limited to (1) normal state, (2) probability variation state or time-short state, for example, (1) high base state, (2) It may be classified as being in a high base state, or may be classified as (1) a big hit gaming state or (2) a big hit gaming state.

  In the thirteenth effect form to the twenty-fourth effect form, the game period is (1) a period after the reach state is established in the reach change, or (2) outside the reach change period or before the reach state is established in the reach change. Depending on whether it is a period or not, the presence or absence of execution of a specific effect and the type of specific effect to be executed are determined, but not limited to such a game period classification, for example, (1) Number of reserved memories Or (2) the number of reserved storages is a period of 2 or more, (1) whether or not the variable display of decorative symbols is being executed, (2) It may be a section indicating whether or not the decorative symbol variable display is not executed.

  Also, (1) it is a period in which variable display without reach effect (non-reach fluctuation) is being executed, or (2) it is a period in which variable display with reach effect (reach fluctuation) is being executed, It may be a category. Further, it may be classified as (1) a period in which variable display without pseudo-continuous effects is being executed or (2) a period in which variable display with pseudo-continuous effects is being executed. . Further, even if the classification is (1) before execution of pseudo continuous effects in variable display with pseudo continuous effects, or (2) after execution of pseudo continuous effects in variable display with pseudo continuous effects. good.

  In the first to fourth effect forms and the thirteenth to sixteenth effect forms, only one of the specific effect A and the specific effect B can be executed as the specific effect. May be executable. That is, when the winning condition is established, one of the change result notice effect and the prefetch notice effect that matches a predetermined condition is executed (for example, the change result notice effect is executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 or less). In the case where the number of stored memories is 2 or more, a pre-reading notice effect may be executed), or both of them may be executed simultaneously. For example, when the pre-reading notice effect is an effect that changes the mode of the display information (display part) corresponding to the hold storage, the above-described change result notice effect (sound effect only, or sound effect and accessory effect) The pre-reading notice effect can be executed simultaneously, and the player can grasp that both the change result notice effect and the pre-reading notice effect have been executed. Further, the specific effect to be executed may be determined based on the display result of the variable display and the determination result at the time of starting winning. For example, when the display result of the variable display executed when the winning condition is satisfied becomes a big hit symbol, the change result notice effect is preferentially executed, and the display result of the variable display executed when the winning condition is satisfied If there is a hold memory that is determined to be a big hit in the determination at the time of starting winning, although it is a symbol that is off, it is preferable to preferentially execute the pre-reading notice effect.

  In the embodiment described above, it is set whether or not the number of winnings is displayed by the operation button 30 only in the period determined as the non-game state by the effect control CPU 120 (only when the demonstration screen is displayed). Although the example which becomes possible was demonstrated, it is not restricted to such a form, it does not depend on a game state (for example, a normal state, a probability change state, a time-short state, a big hit game state), and the execution situation (special symbol) Whether or not variable display is being executed, the number of reserved memories of special figure games), the execution status of ordinary figure games (whether or not variable display of normal symbols is being executed, and the number of reserved memories of ordinary figure games) Regardless of whether the winning number is displayed by the operation button 30 or not. That is, whether or not to display the winning number by the operation button 30 even during a period in which the game is performed, for example, a period in which the decorative symbol variable display is performed or a period in which the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state. It may be settable. In such a configuration, when it is set to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening, regardless of the gaming state (for example, normal state, probability change state, short-time state, jackpot gaming state) The execution status of the game (whether or not the special symbol variable display is being executed, the number of reserved memory of the special symbol game), the execution status of the normal game (whether or not the variable display of the normal symbol is being executed, The total number of winnings in the display control table is immediately displayed regardless of the number of reserved games stored in the usual game.

  In the above embodiment, there is no restriction on the period during which the display changeover switch 32 can be operated. Therefore, if the glass door frame 3a can be opened on the game hall side, the display changeover switch 32 is operated. It is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening. Not only in such a form, you may make it restrict | limit the period in which setting operation in the game hall side is possible. For example, as a configuration in which the display changeover switch 32 is not provided, when setting whether or not to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening on the game hall side, in the setting screens shown in FIGS. It is assumed that selection and determination are performed by the operation button 30. In such a configuration, depending on the game state (for example, normal state, probability change state, short-time state, jackpot game state), or the execution status of a special figure game (whether or not a special symbol variable display is executed) 5 (1) to 5 (1) to FIG. 5 (b) depending on the number of stored special figure games) and the execution status of ordinary games (whether or not variable display of normal symbols is being executed or the number of stored memories of ordinary games). The setting screen shown in (3) may not be displayed. For example, the period during which the jackpot gaming state is controlled, the period during which the probability change state or the short-time state is controlled, the period during which the special figure game is being executed, the period during which the number of reserved memories in the special figure game is not 0, etc. The setting screen shown in 5 (1) to (3) may not be displayed, and the setting operation on the game hall side may be prohibited.

  In the above-described embodiment, only when the game hall side displays the number of winnings to the general winning opening by setting the display changeover switch 32 that cannot be operated by the player (the operation unit is set to the second position). The setting screen (FIGS. 5 (1) to (3)) for enabling the player to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening is displayed. Not only in the form, but as a configuration in which the display changeover switch 32 that can be operated only on the game hall side is not provided, whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening can be set on both the player side and the game hall side Common setting screen (similar to FIGS. 5 (1) to 5 (3)), for selecting and deciding whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening by operating the operation buttons 30. Screen) may be displayed. In the configuration in which such a common setting screen is displayed, even if the game store clerk is set not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the player subsequently determines the number of winnings in the general winning opening. In the case of the setting to be displayed, the number received in the general winning opening may be displayed on the image display device 5 by applying the setting received later.

  In addition, the display change switch 32 that can be operated only by the game hall side is set to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening (the operation unit is set to the second position), and the operation button 30 is operated in general. Common information (for example, the number of winnings and the total number of winnings for each general winning slot stored in the display control table) is displayed on the image display device 5 when the number of winning prizes is set to be displayed. You may make it let it. In such a configuration, even when the setting is made so that the common information is not displayed by switching the display changeover switch 32, when the common information is set to be displayed by the operation of the operation button 30 after that, Common information may be displayed on the image display device 5 by applying the settings received later.

  In the above-described embodiment, a limit may be provided for a period (game state) in which the number of winnings to the general winning opening can be displayed. For example, in the period during which the decorative symbol variable display is executed, the number of winnings in the general winning opening may not be displayed during the period from when the reach state is established until the finalized decorative symbol is derived and displayed. . Further, in a predetermined gaming state such as a probability change state or a short time state, the number of winnings in the general winning opening may not be displayed. In such a form, the setting means (for example, the display changeover switch 32) on the game hall side determines whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening in any period (game state). It may be settable or may be settable by setting means (for example, the operation button 30) on the player side.

  In the above embodiment, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the player inputs the player ID (for example, the ID of the recording medium owned by the player or the personal identification ID registered on the website) by the operation button 30. As a result, game data including the number of winnings in the general winning opening after the player ID is entered can be tabulated, and the operation button 30 is operated when the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is finished. Thus, game data aggregated after the player ID is input may be output to the image display device 5 as a two-dimensional code. The player captures the two-dimensional code (information that can identify the player ID and the game data) with an information terminal having a two-dimensional code reading function, so that the information management server connected to the information terminal and the Internet And the game data specified from the two-dimensional code is added to the game data stored in the information management server in association with the player ID specified from the two-dimensional code. The game data managed in is updated. Since the player can access the information management server through the information terminal and check his / her stored game data (game data associated with the player ID), as a result, the player wins the general prize opening. The number can be grasped. In such a form, whether or not the two-dimensional code can be displayed on the image display device 5 may be set by a setting means on the game hall side (for example, the display changeover switch 32), and may be set by the player side. The setting may be made by (for example, the operation button 30).

  In the case of such a form, a privilege may be given to the player according to the number of winnings in the general winning opening stored for each player ID in the information management server. For example, when the number of winnings in the general winning award exceeds a predetermined number, a background image or application software that can be used on the information terminal is given as a privilege to the player with that player ID. Also good. In addition, points corresponding to the number of winning prizes in the general winning opening may be given to the player, and the information management server may manage the number of points owned by the player in association with the player ID. The player may be able to exchange part or all of the possession points for benefits.

  In the above embodiment, the example in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 displays the number of winnings in the general winning opening has been described. You may alert | report that it did. For example, a winning notification message may be displayed on the image display device 5 at the timing when a game ball wins a general winning opening, and a winning notification sound effect or sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Anyway. In the case of such a configuration, as in the above embodiment, whether or not to notify that the game ball has won the general winning opening is set by the setting means (for example, the display changeover switch 32) on the game hall side. It may be possible, or may be set by setting means (for example, operation button 30) on the player side.

(1) In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the winning situation at the general winning opening may be notified. Specifically, the image display device 5 receives the number of winnings for each general winning opening and the winning frequency (the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening with respect to the number of balls fired to the game area, or the general winnings per hour). (The number of winning prizes to the mouth) may be displayed, or the light emission mode of the game effect lamp 9 may be changed according to the number of winning prizes to the general winning mouth and the winning frequency. In addition, when a winning in the general winning opening occurs, the winning in the general winning opening may be notified by voice from the speakers 8L and 8R. By using such voice notification, it becomes easy for a game or the like to grasp the winning frequency at the general winning opening. Further, when a winning in the general winning opening occurs, the hitting operation handle, the operation button 30 or the like may be vibrated. By using such a bodily sensation notification, it becomes easy for a game or the like to grasp the winning frequency at the general winning opening.

  The number of winnings and the winning frequency at each general winning opening can be displayed on the image display device 5 and also output to a management device such as a hall computer that is communicably connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to manage the number of prizes received at each general prize opening for each machine. This information can be used for maintenance of the gaming machine, for example.

(2) In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a sound effect may be output when a game ball is won at a general winning opening, and a different sound effect from when winning at another winning opening such as a start winning opening. Should be output. In such a configuration, the sound effect at the time of winning may be made different for each general winning opening. Further, in such a configuration, the sound effect may not be output when a specific general winning opening is won.

(3) In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the execution ratio and the production mode of the notice effect may be changed based on the fact that the game ball has won the general prize opening. In such a configuration, for example, in the first decorative symbol variable display that is executed after the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening, the execution ratio and the effect mode of the notice effect change, and a predetermined variable, for example, a predetermined variable Until the number of times of display is executed, it is preferable that the changed execution ratio and effect mode are continued.

(4) In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the music (BGM) may be changed based on the game ball winning in the general winning opening. In such a configuration, for example, the music is changed from the start of the first decorative symbol variable display executed after the game ball has won the general winning opening, and a predetermined variable display number, for example, is executed for a predetermined period. Until then, it is better to continue the music after the change. In addition, when the number of winnings in the general winning award reaches a predetermined value, a specific music piece (for example, a big hit music piece) may be output. Also, based on the fact that a game ball has won the general prize opening or that the number of winning game balls to the general prize opening has reached a predetermined number, the player reproduces from a plurality of songs (BGM). The music (BGM) may be selectable.

  Further, based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening, the music being played may be continuously output. For example, when the game is controlled in the big hit game state, based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening, the music in the big hit game may be continuously output even after the big hit game state is finished. Moreover, based on the fact that a game ball has won a general winning opening, a stage change that changes the background image of the decorative design and the music (BGM) may be executed. Note that the stage (background image and music) of the transfer destination may be made different depending on which of the plurality of general winning awards is won.

(5) In the above embodiment, the specific effect executed based on the winning to the general winning opening is described as an example of the change result notice effect and the prefetch notice effect related to the display result of the special figure game. Not limited to such a form, the specific effect may be an effect not related to the display result of the special figure game. For example, an effect may be provided in which a general winning opening where a game ball is not winning among a plurality of general winning openings is displayed, and a character appears when a gaming ball wins the general winning opening.

(6) In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball has not been won at the general prize opening for a predetermined period even though the game ball has been launched into the game area, or the frequency of winning the prize at the general prize opening is less than the threshold value In some cases, a specific notification such as displaying on the image display device 5 that a winning in a general winning opening has not occurred may be executed. In addition, when a game ball is not fired only in a specific general winning slot among a plurality of general winning slots for a predetermined period, even though the game ball has been fired in the gaming area, or in a specific general winning slot When the frequency is less than the threshold value, a specific notification such as displaying that no winning for the specific general winning opening has occurred on the image display device 5 may be executed.

(7) In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a simultaneous performance is executed at a specific time (for example, every 60 minutes), depending on the number of prizes received in the general winning opening until the simultaneous performance is executed, or simultaneously You may make it perform a specific production | presentation according to the prize-winning to a general winning opening during a production period. In addition, the decorative design may be changed according to the winning in the general winning opening during the variable display of the decorative design, the stop design may be changed, or the sliding effect may be executed.

(8) In the pachinko gaming machine 1, every time a game ball wins a general winning opening, the object displayed on the image display device 5 is increased by one to recognize the winning and the number of winnings in the general winning opening. It may be easy. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, only the number of winning balls paid out based on winning in the general winning opening is cumulatively added, and the number of winning balls paid out based on winning in the general winning opening. When the number reaches the predetermined number, a specific effect such as displaying “100 breakthrough!” On the image display device 5 may be executed. In addition, when the timing when the number of prize balls paid out based on winning in the general winning opening reaches a predetermined number is a period in which a gaming machine error is reported based on fraud detection or failure detection, It is assumed that the notification of the gaming machine error is given priority over the specific effect, and the specific effect that has been put on hold after the notification of the gaming machine error is ended.

(9) In the pachinko machine 1, a winning sound is output every time a game ball wins a general winning opening, and during the notification of a gaming machine error, a notification sound of a gaming machine error is given rather than a winning sound. You may make it output preferentially. In addition, every time a game ball wins a general winning opening, a winning display is performed on the image display device 5, and during the notification of a gaming machine error, the display of the gaming machine error is given priority over the winning display. You may make it let it.

(10) In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the big prize opening and the winning of the game ball to the general prize opening when being controlled to the big hit gaming state The number of award balls paid out based on the above may be added to be displayed on the image display device 5 as [the number of prize balls paid out in the big hit gaming state]. In the case of such a configuration, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening is added to the displayed [number of prize balls paid out in the big hit gaming state]. At the same time, it is preferable that the number of prize balls to be paid out is added based on the winning of a game ball to the general prize opening. That is, the increase in the number of prize balls per display update may be apparently increased. In addition, the [number of winning balls paid out in the jackpot gaming state] is updated according to the winning timing of the game ball at the winning jackpot, and [in the jackpot gaming state according to the winning timing of the game ball at the general winning mouth] The display may be updated according to the individual winning timing, such as updating the number of prize balls paid out.

(11) In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the number of prize balls may be varied according to the general winning opening. For example, when a game ball wins the first general winning opening 50A and the second general winning opening 50B in the left gaming area 10A, ten winning balls are paid out, but the third general winning opening in the right gaming area 10B. When a game ball wins the 50C and the fourth general winning opening 50D, five prize balls may be paid out.

(12) In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to execute an effect of hitting a game ball to win a general winning opening. For example, in a form in which a specific effect is executed by winning a game ball in each of a plurality of general winning openings as in the sixth effect form, the seventh effect form, and the fourteenth effect form, A general winning opening where a game ball has not won among the general winning holes is notified by the image display device 5, and an effect that suggests to the player to aim at the general winning opening where the game ball has not been won is executed. It is good to make it. Moreover, in the form in which the specific effect is executed based on the fact that the game balls have won in a specific order in the plurality of winning holes as in the eighth effect form and the sixteenth effect form, It is preferable to notify the player of the order of winning by the image display device 5 so that the player can grasp the order. For example, in order to execute the specific effect A of the eighth effect form, first, “Aim at the first general prize opening!” Is displayed, and after the winning to the first general prize opening 50A is confirmed, the next "Aim for the first start prize opening!" Is displayed, and after the winning to the first start prize opening is confirmed, finally "Aim for the second general prize opening!" After winning the general winning opening 50B is confirmed, the specific effect A is executed.

(13) In addition, when the game area 10 is provided with a guide path for a game ball toward the general winning opening, and the entrance sensor can detect that the game ball has entered the guide path. Based on the fact that the game ball has been detected by the entry sensor, it is possible to execute an effect of informing in advance that the game ball will win the general winning opening. Thereby, the possibility that the player misses the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening can be reduced. In addition, a certain period is secured from the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening until the payout of the winning ball is executed, and the production based on the winning of the gaming ball to the general winning opening is executed within that period. You may do it.

(14) When a stage on which the game ball can roll is provided below the image display device 5, a general winning opening and an entrance to a guiding path connected to the general winning opening are provided on the stage. It may be configured so that the player is interested in whether or not the game ball enters the general winning opening or the entrance to the guide route.

(15) You may make it perform the production | presentation in which the display mode of the object displayed on the image display apparatus 5 is updated for every prize-winning to a general winning opening. For example, when the character grows up for each prize winning in the general winning opening and reaches a predetermined number of winnings (when the character grows up to the final stage), a predetermined completion effect (giving a privilege etc.) is executed. You may do it. In addition, an effect that increases the gauge is executed every time a prize is awarded to the general winning opening, and when a predetermined number of winnings is reached (when the gauge reaches the maximum), a predetermined completion effect (giving a privilege) Etc.) may be executed. In this form of presentation, different objects are displayed according to the general winning opening, and when the game ball wins the general winning opening, only the display mode of the object corresponding to the general winning opening is updated. You may be made to do.

(16) In the above embodiment, the type of specific effect (variation result notice effect, prefetch notice effect) to be executed differs depending on the gaming state when the winning conditions are established, and is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Although the example in which the sound is different has been described, the light emission mode of the game effect lamp 9 may be varied depending on the game state without being limited to such a form. In the probabilistic state and the short-time state, there are many cases where the effect by the game effect lamp 9 and the music to be played are flashy to improve the interest compared to the normal state. You may make it a flashy aspect which is easy to understand for a player.

(17) When a certain number of game balls are fired in the game area 10 but the number of winnings and the winning frequency at the general winning opening are less than the reference value, the player is usually informed. Information on gaming machines that are difficult to perform, such as a latent probability change state, a limiter, etc., may be notified.

(18) In the above embodiment, the example in which the specific effect is executed immediately after the winning condition is satisfied has been described. However, the variable display of the special figure is not executed and the number of reserved memories (first reserved memory) If the winning condition is satisfied when the total number of the number and the number of the second reserved storage) is 0, neither the fluctuation result notice effect nor the prefetch notice effect can be executed. In this case, it is preferable to execute an effect not related to the display result of the special figure game (for example, the appearance of a specific character or the reproduction of specific music) as the specific effect.

(19) In addition, when the variable display of the special figure is not executed and the winning condition is satisfied when the number of reserved memories (the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number) is also 0 Alternatively, the execution of the specific effect may be suspended, and then the specific effect may be executed at the timing when the variable display of the special figure is executed, or at the timing when the number of stored memories becomes 2 or more. In other words, the specific effect is not immediately executed based on the establishment of the winning condition, and the specific effect that has been suspended based on the start condition of the special game or the start condition of the special game is satisfied. You may make it perform.

(20) In the above embodiment, when the number of winnings in the general winning award in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number, the game ball is not won in the general winning opening (for example, “the number of winnings in the general winning opening is small. Message ”) may be displayed on the image display device 5. Here, based on the setting of the mode changeover switch 31, only in the period when the information for the store clerk (winning number information stored in the winning number management table) is set to the maintenance mode in which the image display device 5 is displayed. It may be displayed on the image display device 5 that the game ball does not win at the winning opening. A game shop clerk can confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the winning status of the game ball in the general winning opening by firing the game ball in the game area 10 for a predetermined period in the maintenance mode. Note that, regardless of the setting of the mode changeover switch 31, when the number of winnings in the general winning award for a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number, the image display device 5 displays that the game ball does not win in the general winning award. Anyway. Similarly to the display control of the number of winnings to the general winning a prize, based on the setting by the display changeover switch 32 and the operation button 30, when the number of winnings to the general winning award in a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number, You may make it display on the image display apparatus 5 that a game ball does not win a winning opening.

(21) In the above embodiment, when the number of winnings in the general winning award in the predetermined period is larger than the predetermined number, the game ball is excessively won in the general winning opening (for example, “ The message “There are too many winnings” may be displayed on the image display device 5. Here, based on the setting of the mode changeover switch 31, only in the period when the information for the store clerk (winning number information stored in the winning number management table) is set to the maintenance mode in which the image display device 5 is displayed. It is good to display on the image display device 5 that the game ball has won too much in the winning opening. A game shop clerk can confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the winning status of the game ball in the general winning opening by firing the game ball in the game area 10 for a predetermined period in the maintenance mode.

(22) In the above embodiment, the winning information stored in the winning number management table of the effect control board 12 is transmitted from the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the gaming information management device that manages the gaming information, and the gaming information The management device manages the winning number information of each gaming machine. The game control microcomputer 100 outputs a general winning signal when the gaming control microcomputer 100 detects a winning of a game ball in the general winning opening (for example, outputs one pulse signal for each winning). By doing so, the game information management device may manage the number of winnings in the general winning opening for each gaming machine based on the reception of the general winning signal. In addition, the game information management device, as game information, the number of winnings in a general winning opening per predetermined period (for example, 1 hour) or the number of winnings in a general winning opening per predetermined number of balls (for example, 6000 shots). Alternatively, the winning rate for the general winning opening (the number of winnings for the general winning opening ÷ the number of shots) may be calculated and managed for each gaming machine.

(23) In the above embodiment, the production control CPU 120 has been described with respect to an example in which the number of objects to be displayed on the image display device 5 is increased every time a general winning opening is won. You may make it the aspect of the object currently displayed on the image display apparatus 5 change for every winning prize to a winning opening. For example, the facial expression of the character displayed on the image display device 5 may be changed according to the number of winnings in the general winning opening.

(24) In the above embodiment, when in the maintenance mode, the information in the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device 5 as information for the store clerk (for example, the number of winnings and the number of payouts to each winning award). However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the notification is made by voice notification using the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9, the decoration LED, and the 7 segment lighting / extinguishing control. May be. Further, the present invention is not limited to the form of notifying all the information of the winning number management table, and only the information on winning mouths in which the number of payouts, winning ratios, etc. are not in a predetermined reference range (or within the reference range) is notified. You may do it.

(25) In the above embodiment, when in the maintenance mode, the information in the winning number management table is displayed as information for the store clerk (for example, the number of winnings and the number of payouts to each winning mouth) as shown in FIG. Although an example of notification (display) in a manner unrelated to the performance performed in the game has been described, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the notification may be performed in a form according to the aspect of the performance performed in the game. good. By notifying in the mode according to the mode of production, it is only necessary to confirm the notification mode as to which type of model information compared to the case of notifying only by table data as shown in FIG. Can be easily grasped. The effect executed in the game may be any effect such as a demonstration screen effect, a notice effect, a reach effect, or a big hit effect, and is not limited to an effect displayed on the image display device 5, but a sound. Or an effect by a lamp. In addition, informing in a manner according to the production mode, for example, a character appearing during a notice production or reach production reads out information in the winning number management table, outputs a sound, Regardless, the resident character that is displayed on the image display device 5 and provides a notice or explanation of the game may read out the information in the winning number management table or output the sound. Further, the information in the winning number management table may be displayed together with the background image displayed in the game without being limited to the character image.

(26) In the above embodiment, the operation means such as the mode changeover switch 31 operated to display the information in the winning number management table as information for the store clerk (for example, the number of winnings and the number of payouts to each winning mouth). However, although an example in which the player is inoperable and is provided at a position where only the game shop clerk can operate, the present invention is not limited to this form, and the player and the game shop clerk are inoperable. Thus, the game machine may be provided at a position that can be operated only by related persons such as an inspector, an inspector, and a manufacturer. Further, it may be provided at a position where it can be operated by a person other than the above-mentioned player.

(27) In the above embodiment, a ring buffer provided with 10 counters with a maximum of 2 bytes is used as a storage area for storing information related to game winning. However, a counter with a maximum of 3 bytes or a counter of 4 bytes at maximum Can also be provided. At this time, the above-mentioned role ratio (%) and role combination (continuity ratio) (%) are displayed on the above-described display monitor 29 based on the total number of acquired balls of game media (prize balls) paid out from the gaming machine. The calculation method for this is not limited to the method described above, and may be as follows. As shown in FIG. 76, when counting each of the total number of acquired balls, the number of acquired bonus balls, and the number of consecutive acquired bonus balls using a counter composed of a maximum of 4 bytes, the calculation is performed using the upper 16 bits. You may go. By the way, if it is assumed that the number of acquired balls is 30000 per day by a 4-byte counter, 429483225 (4 bytes) / 30000 (number of acquired balls per day) = 1431611.2075, 143161.2075 / 365 days = 392, which is a calculation that can cover the total for 392 years.

(28) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51A, the example in which the display monitor 29 is provided in the central portion on the main substrate 11 accommodated in the substrate case 201 has been described. May be provided at other positions.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 77A, a main board 11C not provided with a display monitor and a display board 11D are provided separately from the main board 11C, and the main board 11C and the display board 11D are connected by a harness 11E. The display monitor 29 may be provided on the display substrate 11D. In this case, the main board 11 </ b> C receives the combination (relation ratio) displayed on the display monitor 29, the calculation of the combination ratio, and the reception of data for use in the calculation. The main board 11C transmits the calculated combination (relation ratio), the combination ratio, and information related to control for displaying them to the display board 11D via the harness 11E. The display substrate 11D may display the combination (community ratio) and the combination ratio on the display monitor 29 based on the data transmitted from the main substrate 11C.

  The main substrate 11C and the display substrate 11D are housed in a substrate case 201A that is a caulking substrate case. Caulking pins 11B are attached to the substrate case 201A in the same manner as the substrate case 201 shown in FIG. Since the caulking pins 11B are provided, the main substrate 11C and the display substrate 11D are completely enclosed in the substrate case 201A, thereby preventing an illegal act on the main substrate 11C. Also in the substrate case 201A, as with the substrate case 201 shown in FIG. 51A, holes and heat dissipation holes are provided, and a predetermined seal is provided. These holes, heat dissipation holes, and seals are arranged so as not to block the display on the display monitor 29.

  As shown in FIG. 77B, the display substrate 11D may be provided outside the substrate case 201B which is a caulking substrate case, and the main substrate 11C may be enclosed in the substrate case 201B. In this example, the display substrate 11D is connected to the main substrate 11C by a harness 11E.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 77C, the display substrate 11D may be sealed in the substrate case 201C, and the main substrate 11C may be sealed in the substrate case 201B. In this example, the display substrate 11D is connected to the main substrate 11C by a harness 11E. Also in the substrate case 201C, as with the substrate case 201 shown in FIG. 51A, holes and heat dissipation holes are provided, and a predetermined seal is provided. These holes, heat dissipation holes, and seals are arranged so as not to block the display on the display monitor 29. The substrate case 201C enclosing the display substrate 11D may not be a caulking substrate case or may be a caulking substrate case.

  As shown in FIG. 77 (D), a label is attached to the surface of the substrate case 201 shown in FIG. 50 (A), and a caulking use record is written on the label 11R. Also good. Here, the label 11R may be disposed at a position where a part of the display monitor 29 is hidden. As described above, since a part of the display monitor 29 is hidden by the label 11R, for example, when the glass door frame 3a is opened, the player cannot easily visually recognize the combination (unit ratio) or the combination ratio. Can be. Even when the label 11R is pasted, it may be pasted at a position where the display monitor 29 is not hidden.

  In the above-described embodiment, as the movable accessory, an electrical accessory such as a large winning opening (attacker) that is opened and closed by a solenoid or a second starting winning opening (electric chew) is used. Instead, a so-called mechanical accessory that opens and closes by its own weight may be used as a movable accessory. Further, although the 7-segment LED is used as the display monitor 29, a dot display, a display screen, or the like may be used instead of the 7-segment. Moreover, it is good also as a liquid crystal display device, organic EL, a fluorescent display tube, etc. instead of LED. Further, the display monitor 29 is provided with a four-digit display unit of the first display unit 29A to the fourth display unit 29D, but the number of digits is not limited to four digits, and may be another number of digits. For example, it may be 2 digits, or 8 digits or 10 digits.

  In addition, as shown in the above-described embodiment, the glass door frame 3a or the gaming machine frame 3 is opened regardless of the contents displayed on the display monitor 29, for example, the display of the combination (continuity ratio) or the combination ratio. There is a case to deal with error cancellation. For example, a replenishment mechanism for replenishing game balls (supplement balls) may be provided on the back side of the game board 2 in order to pay out game balls. In this replenishment mechanism, when a ball clogging occurs, the glass door frame 3a or the gaming machine frame 3 may be opened to eliminate the ball clogging and perform error cancellation. When the error is released by opening the glass door frame 3a or the gaming machine frame 3 regardless of the content displayed on the display monitor 29, the combination (relationship) or ratio of the display monitor 29 is not limited. Etc. may not be displayed.

  In addition, at this time, in order to prevent the display monitor 29 from displaying the combination (relation ratio), the combination ratio, and the like, there is no error in the display of the combination (relation ratio), the combination ratio, etc. As a condition. Here, the error with respect to the display of the role combination (ream ratio), the role ratio, etc. is, for example, the detection of abnormal operation determined in step S101 shown in FIG. 63 or the winning information within business hours determined in step S104. Acquisition or detection of a predetermined number of winnings or more per unit time determined in step S106 may be used. Players can see information such as association (ratio), ratio etc. on the condition that there is no error in the display of such association (link ratio), ratio, etc. The situation can be suppressed.

  Also, regardless of the content displayed on the display monitor 29, the glass door frame 3a or the gaming machine frame 3 is opened to cancel the error. Alternatively, it may wait for a predetermined period of time, for example, 1 minute, until the ratio is displayed, and display it after the predetermined time has elapsed. After canceling the occurrence of an error, the cause of the error cannot be completely removed, and the same error often occurs. By displaying the combination (relation ratio), the combination ratio, etc. on the display monitor 29 after a predetermined time has elapsed, even when such an error occurs, the player can receive information such as the combination (relation ratio), the combination ratio, etc. The situation where it is seen can be suppressed. The predetermined period here can be arbitrarily set, and may be a time longer than 1 minute such as 5 minutes or 10 minutes, or may be a time shorter than 1 minute such as 30 seconds. Further, a predetermined time may be set according to the cause of the error. For example, in the case of a ball clogging in the replenishment mechanism and in the case of a failure of the image display device 5, the predetermined period of the ball clogging in the replenishment mechanism may be set longer.

  The main board 11 is provided with a display device other than the display monitor 29, for example, a 7-segment display (hereinafter referred to as “error display”) for displaying an error. This error indicator is preferably arranged at a position away from the display monitor 29. Specifically, the display monitor 29 may be arranged at the position 1/3 on the right side of the main board 11, and the error indicator may be arranged at the position 1/3 on the left side of the main board 11. Further, in order to make the display monitor 29 easy to understand, the position of the display monitor 29 on the main board 11 may be printed on the board case 201 with characters, or a sticker may be attached to the board case 201. You may keep it. The display monitor 29 may be provided on a payout control board that is a part of the main board 11.

(29) In the above embodiment,
We explained that the ratio (%) and the combination (linkage) (%) were calculated using a pachinko machine as an example and displayed on the display monitor. However, in the slot machine, the ratio (%) and combination in the pachinko machine Values corresponding to ream (ream ratio) (%) may be calculated, and these values may be displayed on a display monitor provided in the slot machine. The display monitor can be provided on the main board of the slot machine, for example, similarly to the above gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine) 1.

  For example, the role ratio or the combination (interaction ratio) in the slot machine is a combination of a game value (game value, also referred to as “medal” hereinafter) paid out as the slot machine game progresses. It is calculated by whether or not the machine is in operation and whether or not the slot machine is equipped with an accessory other than the first type special accessory as an accessory.

  For example, Type 1 Special, Type 2 Special, and Normal are set as an accessory, and Type 1 Special is not installed in the slot machine. When only other items such as objects are mounted, the combination ratio is calculated by the number of medals paid out during the operation of the item with respect to the total number of medals paid out. In addition, if the slot machine is equipped with only the first type special character as a character and no character other than the first type special character is loaded, the combination of the medal is the total payout of medals. It is calculated by the number of medals to be paid out during the operation of the bonus item.

  Hereinafter, an example of a method for calculating the combination (run ratio) (%) in the slot machine will be described. Here, an example will be described in which the first type special combination is in the special gaming state and only the first type special combination is mounted as the combination. The slot machine can start changing the symbol by setting the number of bets, and a winning occurs according to the result of the changing symbol. For winnings in slot machines, shift to a special game state that increases the probability of occurrence of a prize-winning with the addition of gaming value, a re-game winning that allows the change of symbols to be started without setting the number of bets, and a prize-winning There is a bonus prize. Here, the combination (%) of slots in the slot machine is the cumulative value of gaming value obtained by awarding a prize based on the result of the change in the symbol during the period in which the symbol is changed a predetermined number of times ( The total amount of gaming value obtained as a result of the awarding of winnings as a result of changes in symbols during the period of transition to the special gaming state (corresponding to the total number of balls acquired in the pachinko gaming machines mentioned above) It is expressed as a ratio of the number of consecutive winning balls in a pachinko machine). For example, in a period in which 6000 symbols are changed, if the number of medals, which is an example of the gaming value obtained in the period, is 16000, the prize is awarded in the period when the game state is shifted to the special gaming state. When the number of medals obtained by the above is 9000, 0.56 obtained by dividing 9000 by 16000 is the consecutive (relation ratio) (%).

  In addition, the main board in the slot machine is provided, for example, at the back of the outer frame. For this reason, when the main frame is viewed from the outside of the slot machine when the door frame (front door) of the slot machine is opened, the main board is different from the gaming machine 1. Since the reel and the like are stored in the outer frame of the slot machine, the outer frame of the slot machine is often larger than the pachinko gaming machine. Further, due to its structure, the main board in the slot machine is often attached to the back of the outer frame (the inner side surface of the back plate). For this reason, when the door frame of the slot machine is opened, there is a possibility that there is not enough light reaching the main board. Therefore, when a display monitor is attached to the main board, information displayed on the display monitor ( For numerical values and characters, it is preferable to display brightly with a large amount of light.

  Further, in the slot machine, a display monitor is arranged so that it can be easily seen from an oblique direction with respect to the main board provided in the back of the outer frame. For example, when the door frame is opened from the outer frame, the arrangement that is easy to visually recognize from an oblique direction is an arrangement that faces the front as viewed from the open portion between the door frame and the outer frame. By arranging the display monitor in this way, the store clerk and the like do not open the gaming machine frame 3 greatly when the store clerk or the like performs the checking operation of the role combination (linkage) ratio. It is possible to confirm the role ratio (relation ratio) by simply doing. Therefore, it is possible to easily check the role combination (linkage) role ratio.

  When the door frame is opened from the outer frame, the arrangement facing the front as viewed from the open portion between the door frame and the outer frame has an inclined surface like the base member 129A shown in FIG. What is necessary is just to set it as the aspect which attached the display monitor to the inclined surface of the base member in which the surface faced the open part between a door frame and an outer frame. Alternatively, the inclined surface may be a buried inclined surface formed on the main substrate. In addition to these, a display monitor may be provided on a base member such as one of the base members 129A to 129I on which the display monitors 130A to 130I are provided. When a display monitor is provided on the main board, the display monitor may be provided directly on the main board so that the main board and the display monitor are accommodated in the board case, or the display monitor is provided outside the board case containing the main board. May be provided.

  In addition, these display monitors may be provided in an adjustment unit that can adjust the installation angle of the display monitor with respect to the open portion between the door frame and the outer frame. By adjusting the display monitor to the adjustment means that can adjust the installation angle of the display monitor with respect to the open part between the door frame and the outer frame, it is possible to adjust according to the desire of the game hall where the slot machine is installed. It can be carried out. The adjusting means may be a manual type or an electric type.

  The main board of the slot machine is provided at the back of the outer frame, but may be provided at other positions. For example, it may be provided on the right side as viewed from the player side inside the outer frame, or may be provided on the left side. When it is provided on the right side of the outer frame, it is provided on the side corresponding to the open part between the door frame and the outer frame. be able to.

  Also, in the slot machine, a main board may be provided on the back side of the door frame, similarly to the pachinko gaming machine. However, there is no slot machine equivalent to a game board of a pachinko machine, and the door frame is provided with a visual window for visually recognizing the reel. What is necessary is just to provide. Also, in a pachinko gaming machine, instead of providing a main board on the back side of the game board, a main board may be provided in the back or left and right sides of the outer frame as in a slot machine.

  In addition, although the example which displays on the display monitor (for example, 7 segments) provided in the main board | substrate was shown the calculated combination ratio (%) and continuous combination (continuous ratio) (%), not only this but payout control You may make it provide a display monitor in other board | substrates, such as a board | substrate, a game board surface, and the frame (base frame) for game machines. Further, the display device is not limited to a dedicated display monitor for displaying the role ratio (%) and the role combination (connection ratio) (%), but an existing display device (for example, the image display device 5 for displaying an error). 7-segment display, a credit display in a slot machine, a payout number display, etc.) may be used to display predetermined information such as a winning ratio (%) and a winning combination (continuous ratio) (%).

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the slot machine described above, the predetermined information is the combination (linkage ratio) and the combination ratio (cumulative combination (linkage ratio) and cumulative combination ratio), but may be other information. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the predetermined information may be the number of game balls to be paid out (= the number of prize balls). Further, in the slot machine, the machine discount (= (medal payout number / medal insertion number) × 100) or the difference between the medal insertion number and the medal payout number may be used. Further, these numerical values may be information calculated for each predetermined number of games and each predetermined number of medals. Further, predetermined information such as a combination (continuity ratio), combination ratio, and machine discount may be calculated for a predetermined period, for example, 400 games or 6000 games, and the predetermined information for each number of games may be displayed. In this case, the predetermined period may be displayed together.

  Some slot machines have so-called settings. The setting means a numerical value obtained by dividing the probability in the slot machine according to the stage. For example, six stages from setting 1 to setting 6 are provided. Information such as the role (ratio) and role ratio displayed on the display monitor as the predetermined information may be displayed for each setting, or the setting may be displayed when displaying for each setting. Also good.

  Some slot machines can execute one game with different numbers of inserted medals (number of bets). For example, one game can be executed by selecting the number of inserted sheets (the number of bets) for executing one game from one to three and inserting the selected number of medals. In such a slot machine, information such as a combination (competition ratio) and a combination ratio displayed on the display monitor as predetermined information may be displayed for each inserted number (number of bets). There are also slot machines in which the required number (the number of bets) varies depending on the game state. For example, there is a slot machine in which the required number of inserted cards is 2 when the gaming state is in bonus, and the required number of inserted cards is 3 when the gaming state is not in bonus. In such a slot machine, it is possible to display information such as a combination (community ratio) and a combination ratio displayed on the display monitor as predetermined information for each relationship between the gaming state and the number of inserted games.

  Also, in the slot machine, as the predetermined information, in addition to the combination (combined ratio) and ratio calculated based on the normal bonus, special bonus, etc., for example, the slot machine gaming status is advantageous other than during bonus. When sections and unfavorable sections are set, the ratio between the number of medals paid out in these advantageous sections and the number of medals paid out in the advantageous sections and non-favorable sections is displayed. Also good. In addition, the display monitor includes, as predetermined information, the number of continuous games in the advantageous section (hereinafter referred to as “the number of advantageous section games”) and the number of games in the advantageous section and the non-advantageous section, in addition to the combination ratio. A ratio (hereinafter referred to as “advantage / non-advantage ratio”) may be displayed. The number of continuation games and the advantageous / non-advantage ratio of the advantageous section may be displayed on a dedicated display monitor different from the combination ratio (continuous ratio), or may be displayed with a time difference using a common display monitor. Good. For example, using a common display monitor, the number of advantageous section games → advantageous / non-advantage ratio → short-term role association (continuous ratio) → short-term role ratio → cumulative combination (continuous ratio) → cumulative role ratio → number of advantageous section games → It may be displayed in the order of.

  The number of advantageous section games may be the number of games in the advantageous section being continued during the advantageous section, or may be the predetermined number of games, for example, the number of games per 3000 G in the past. Or it is good also as the number of games of the advantageous section performed on the predetermined period, for example, the day. The advantageous / non-advantage ratio may be a predetermined number of games, for example, the number of games per 3000 G in the past, or may be an advantageous / non-advantage ratio for a predetermined period, for example, that day.

  Further, the ratio between the number of inserted medals and the number of paid out medals in the advantageous section and the ratio of the number of inserted medals and the number of paid out medals in the non-advantaged section may be displayed. In short, the ratio between medals paid out in the advantageous section and medals paid out in the non-favorable section may be calculated and displayed. There are various ways of thinking about the relationship between the advantageous section and the non-favorable section. By reducing the medal payout ratio in the advantageous section, fluctuations in increase / decrease in medals can be reduced. Further, in order to prevent the advantageous section from being too long, a predetermined restriction may be provided on the advantageous section, for example, a predetermined number of games, an upper limit of medals paid out in the advantageous section, a machine discount in the advantageous section, and the like. .

  The advantageous section is a section in which the ratio of the number of paid-out medals to the number of inserted medals (machine discount) is higher than that of the non-favorable section. Since the machine discount is high, this is an advantageous section for the player. Advantageous sections include normal bonuses and special bonuses in action, as well as during replay time (RT), assist time (AT), and assist replay time (ART). Can do. The machine discount in the advantageous section often exceeds 100%, but may be less than 100% (so-called reduced RT, etc.). If the machine discount in the advantageous section is less than 100%, the medals will be consumed as the game continues, but the player will be able to compete against the unfavorable section in that the medal consumption rate will be lower. It will be advantageous.

  The term “during replay time” means, for example, a state in which the winning probability (winning probability) of replay is higher than in a state other than during the replay time. During the replay time, the replay probability is higher than during the non-replay time, so that the consumption of medals can be reduced, so that the player is in a relatively advantageous state.

  During the assist time, for example, when a condition device that displays a winning combination on the active line when a predetermined condition such as a predetermined operation procedure is satisfied, the operation procedure is navigated. . The navigation of the operating procedure includes, for example, navigation of the stop order when stopping the three reels in a predetermined stop order, or navigating the pattern when stopping and displaying a predetermined pattern. There is. During the assist time, the operation procedure is not navigated in any state other than during the assist time, so it is uncertain whether or not the operation procedure is executed, but during the assist time, the operation procedure navigates. Therefore, as long as the player follows the navigation, the winning combination can be aligned with the active line. Therefore, the player is in a relatively advantageous state.

  During the assist replay time is a state in which the replay time and the assist time are executed simultaneously. The slot machine is designed so that the game progresses by increasing / decreasing medals by combining these advantageous sections and non-advantage sections. Here, for each advantageous section such as during the bonus, during the replay time, during the assist time, and during the assist replay time, although there are advantages over the non-advantageous sections, there are cases where the degree of advantage is small.

  The advantageous sections for calculating the ratio displayed as the predetermined information may be all or part of them. For example, in a slot machine in which a plurality of advantageous sections are provided as the advantageous sections, the advantageous sections for calculating the ratio displayed as the predetermined information may be only the advantageous sections in which the machine discount exceeds 100%. Moreover, even if it is an advantageous section of the same kind, you may make it change whether it is set as the advantageous section for calculating the ratio displayed as predetermined information by transition conditions. For example, in a slot machine that shifts during the replay time immediately after the bonus is ended and after a predetermined number of games, for example, 1000 games have elapsed after the bonus is ended, the replay that has shifted immediately after the bonus is ended An advantageous interval for calculating the ratio displayed during the time as the predetermined information is used, and the ratio displayed as the predetermined information is calculated during the replay time after 1000 games have passed since the bonus period ended. For this reason, it may not be an advantageous section.

  During the replay time shifted to immediately after the bonus is over, the player who has won many medals in the bonus is in a so-called chance replay time that gives him a chance to acquire further medals. On the other hand, during the replay time after 1000 games have passed since the bonus time ended, the player who lost many medals is given a relief replay time that gives relief of the lost medals. An advantageous interval for calculating the ratio displayed as the predetermined information during such a chance replay time, and an advantageous interval for calculating the ratio displayed as the predetermined information during the relief replay time You may make it not.

  Further, when calculating other values such as a combination (continuity ratio), a combination ratio, or a machine discount in the slot machine, a predetermined number of medals, for example, three medals are inserted and one game is executed. Calculation may be performed on the assumption that three medals have been paid out. Alternatively, the re-game may be regarded as a game that has not been played, and other numerical values such as a combination (continuity ratio), a combination ratio, or a machine discount in the slot machine may be performed.

  In addition, the ring buffer provided in the RAM 102 in the pachinko gaming machine stores the number of winning balls by winning in each winning mouth for every 6000 winning balls. On the other hand, the ring buffer in the slot machine may store, for example, the number of medals to be paid out in the advantageous section and the non-advantageous section for each predetermined number of medals paid out. The number of medals to be paid out between the section and the non-advantage section may be stored. The predetermined number here may be, for example, 500 or 1000. Other appropriate numbers may be used. Further, the predetermined number of games may be 100 games or 400 games. If the maximum payout number of medals paid out in one game is 15, the maximum payout number of medals paid out in 400 games is 6000. Therefore, the maximum payout number in 400 games can be stored with a margin in a 2-byte storage area.

  In the above embodiment, in order to notify the effect control board (sub-side) of the change pattern indicating the change mode such as the change time, the type of reach effect, the presence / absence of the pseudo-ream, etc., one change is made when the change is started. Although an example in which a pattern designation command is transmitted has been shown, a variation pattern may be notified to the effect control board by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the main board (main side) is so-called in the case where the first command is not reached, such as the presence or absence of pseudo-continuous, the presence or absence of a sliding effect, etc. A command (for example, a previous variation pattern designation command) indicating the variation time and variation mode (for example, the previous variation pattern) of the second stop) is transmitted, and in the second command, the type of reach, the presence / absence of a redrawing effect, etc. A command (for example, a post-variation pattern designation command) indicating a variation time or a variation mode (for example, a post-variation pattern) after reaching reach (after the so-called second stop when the reach is not reached) may be transmitted. .

  In this case, the effect control board may perform the effect control in the change display based on the change time derived from the combination of the two commands. The main board may notify the change time by each of the two commands, and a specific change mode executed at each timing may be selected by the effect control board. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After sending the first command, a certain period of time has passed (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. Thus, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern designation command can be reduced.

  Only one type of out-of-order symbol (for example, a symbol indicating “-”) is displayed during variable display of the special symbol, and variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinction of the symbol. . Further, in the case where the symbol is displayed during variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (a symbol indicating “−” may not be displayed as a display result).

  In addition, the image display operation in the image display device for executing the device configuration and data configuration of the gaming machine, the processing shown in the flowchart, the sound output operation in the speaker, and the lighting operation in the game effect lamp and the decoration LED Various rendering operations including, etc. can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, and is scored based on the occurrence of winnings by enclosing gaming media It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that gives

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to a computer device included in the gaming machine such as the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. Alternatively, it may be distributed in a pre-installed manner in a storage device such as a computer device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a removable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  Also, in the above embodiment, the number of prize balls (general prize balls) and the number of ordinary electric prize balls (electric chew prize balls) by winning at the first start opening (heso) and the general prize opening (sode) to be counted. Number), special electric role award ball number (attacker ball number) is recorded in the ring buffer, has a recording capacity of at least 11 sets, and is updated every set. However, instead of this format, the present invention can adopt a format having only two types of total totals as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. Specifically, it has a total cumulative storage RWM 10000 and a total cumulative storage RWM 10001, and is related to a game winning prize in order to display a connection ratio (synonymous with “community (relation ratio)” in the above embodiment) Information (the number of award balls (general award ball number) by winning a prize at the first start gate (heso) and the general prize opening (sode)) Number (attacker ball number)) is accumulated and stored in RWM10000 and 10001. Furthermore, by deleting the information related to game winnings at a predetermined opportunity in the total cumulative storage RWM10000, the ratio and role calculated based on the total from the timing of deletion to the present are the short-term ratio and It can be displayed as a short-term role ratio, and the link ratio and role ratio calculated based on the total of the total cumulative storage RWM 10001 can be displayed as a cumulative link ratio and a cumulative role ratio. With this configuration, it is only necessary to have a plurality of storage areas for accumulating and storing information related to game winnings, and a process for storing and updating a certain amount of information like a ring buffer is unnecessary. This is preferable.

  As a predetermined trigger, for example, power ON / OFF can be triggered. According to this, it is possible to tabulate information related to winning a game from power ON, that is, it is possible to display a daily run ratio and a role ratio as a short-term run ratio and a short-term role ratio. In this case, if the RWM 10002 is provided to save the accumulated value of the total accumulated storage RWM 10000 when deleted, the accumulated value of the RWM 10002 is displayed as a short-term linkage ratio and a short-term role ratio. It is preferable because the short-term consecutive ratio and short-term role ratio for one day before the introduction can be displayed. By using a real time clock or the like as a predetermined opportunity, for example, it is possible to accurately total short-term continuous ratio and short-term role ratio such as one day or one hour.

Moreover, as a predetermined opportunity, it can be set as the opportunity regarding a game, such as a setting change, a door opening, or a touch sensor detection of a handle | steering-wheel. According to this, even if it is not a period of one day as when the power is turned on, it is summarized (for example, between setting change and setting change or between door opening and door opening). It is preferable because the role ratio can be displayed. Further, the same effect can be obtained even if the predetermined trigger is triggered when the number of times the demo screen is displayed or the number of big hits reaches the predetermined number.
Instead of the configuration having two RWMs such as RWM10000 and 10001, two regions may be formed in the RWM region of the memory space.

  Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the format shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 79 can be used instead of the ring buffer format. Specifically, in the RWM area of the memory space, an area 20000 for collecting information related to game winnings, an area B1 for storing cumulative results of information relating to winning games for the 6000th game, and a cumulative result for 12000th games are stored. Region B2, 18000... A region B10 is provided for storing a cumulative result of information related to winning of the 60000th game. In the area 20000, information related to winning a game is added and updated, and on the condition that the number of award balls is 6000th, it is related to the winning of a game accumulated and stored in the area 20000. Information (the number of award balls (general award ball number) by winning a prize at the first start gate (heso) and the general prize opening (sode), the number of ordinary electric award balls (the number of electric chew award balls), the special electric role award ball Number (attacker ball number)) is stored in the area B1. Further, on the condition that the number of winning balls is 12000, the information stored in the area B1 is moved to the area B2, and the information on the game winnings accumulated in the area 20000 is stored in the area B1. Remember. In this way, the information of the area 20000 is put into the area B1 every 6000th, and the information of the other areas is shifted. In addition, after the number of prize balls reaches the 66,000th, control is performed so that the information related to winning a game stored in the area B10 is erased and the information in the area B9 is transferred to the area B10.

  By configuring in this way, the connection ratio and role ratio calculated based on the total of the area 20000 can be displayed as the cumulative connection ratio and the cumulative role ratio. Further, by subtracting the value of the area B10 from the area 20000, the latest 60000 pieces (that is, approximately 10 hours) can be displayed as the short-term continuous ratio and the short-term winning ratio. Further, by subtracting the value of the area B1 from the area 20000, the most recent 6000 pieces (that is, approximately one hour) of the connection ratio and role ratio can be displayed as the short-term connection ratio and the short-term role ratio.

  Further, instead of the configuration as shown in FIG. 79, only the region B10 may be provided as shown in FIG. According to this, it is not possible to obtain a detailed connection ratio and role ratio of about one hour, but since the latest 60000 pieces (approximately 10 hours) of short-term connection ratio and short-term role ratio can be displayed, the capacity is also increased. Less is preferable.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the format shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 81 can be used instead of the ring buffer format. Specifically, it has a total cumulative storage RWM30000 and a total cumulative storage RWM30001, and displays information related to game winnings (first start port (heso) and general winning port (sode) ) Are awarded to RWM30000 and 30001. The number of award balls (general award balls), the number of ordinary electric award balls (the number of electric chew award balls), and the number of special electric award balls (the number of attacker award balls)) Try to remember.
The total cumulative storage RWM30000 accumulates and stores the number of prize balls from the first, whereas the total cumulative storage RWM30001 waits without storing the first to 60000 prize balls. In addition, the cumulative number of prize balls from the 60001th is stored. According to this, the difference between the total cumulative storage RWM30000 and the total cumulative storage RWM30001 is 60000, and by subtracting the total cumulative storage RWM30001 from the total cumulative storage RWM30000, the connection ratio and role ratio for 60000 units are increased. It can be displayed as a short-term ratio or a short-term ratio. Further, the run ratio and the role ratio calculated based on the total of the total cumulative storage RWM30000 can be displayed as the cumulative run ratio and the cumulative play ratio.

  In the above embodiment, the format shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 82 can be used instead of the ring buffer format. Specifically, it includes a cumulative counter 40000, 40001, and a total cumulative counter 40002. In the total cumulative counter 40002, information on the winning of a game (the first start port and the general) in order to display the linkage ratio and the role ratio The number of award balls (general award balls), normal electric role award balls (electric chew award balls number), special electric role award balls (attacker award number))) Accumulate and store from the first number. The run ratio and role ratio calculated based on the total of the total cumulative counter 40002 can be displayed as a cumulative run ratio and a cumulative play ratio.

On the other hand, by using the two counters of the cumulative counters 40000 and 40001, the continuous ratio and the winning ratio for 60000 pieces are displayed as the short-term consecutive ratio and the short-term winning ratio. More specifically, first, the cumulative counter 40000 starts counting from the first number of prize balls, and clears when the number of prize balls reaches 60000. On the other hand, the cumulative counter 40001 starts counting from the 30,000th and clears when the number of prize balls reaches the 90000th. Then, when calculating the short-term run ratio and the short-term role ratio for 60000 pieces, for example, the 30001-th 60000th piece is calculated based on the total of the cumulative counter 40000, and the 60001-th 90000th piece. Is calculated based on the total of the cumulative counter 40001.
Thus, since the cumulative counters 40000 and 40001 are tabulated so that the number of prize balls is shifted by 30,000, when trying to display the short-term run ratio and the short-term role ratio, at least within 30000 pieces, That is, it is possible to display the short-term consecutive ratio and short-term role ratio within five hours. This is preferable because it is possible to suppress an increase in capacity and to display a relatively short-term continuous ratio and short-term role ratio.

(Performance display)
Further, in the gaming machine 1, performance information (described later) can be displayed instead of or in addition to the display of the combination (relation ratio) and the combination ratio. Hereinafter, displaying performance information is also referred to as performance display. In the gaming machine 1, for example, performance display is performed on a display monitor (such as the display monitor 1130 shown in FIG. 110, which will be described later) provided on the main board 11.

  83 and 84 are explanatory diagrams related to performance information. FIG. 83A shows an example of performance information items displayed by the gaming machine 1. The gaming machine 1 can display the real-time base value and the previous cumulative base value as performance information, as shown in the item name column of FIG. The real-time base value of the item number “bL” is a base value (real-time value during measurement) for every 60000 outs in a normal state. More specifically, the real-time base value is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of game balls being measured until the number of game balls used (launched) in the normal state reaches 60,000 (0 to 59999) ( %). The previous cumulative base value of the item number “b6” is a base value for every 60000 outs (cumulative value measured last time) in the normal state. More specifically, the previous cumulative base value is the number of game balls used (launched) in a normal state and is a value indicating the ratio (%) of the number of prize balls to the previously measured number of 60000 game balls. .

  The normal state in the performance display is a state managed or controlled by the game state flag described above. Specifically, it is a state in which both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are off (except that the round gaming flag is on). That is, in the performance display, a state in which all of the probability variation flag, the time reduction flag, and the round game flag are off is called a normal state. The probability variation flag is a flag indicating whether or not the probability variation state. The time reduction flag is a flag indicating whether or not the time reduction state is set. The round gaming flag will be described later.

  In addition, although the normal state in the performance display has been explained that all of the probability variation flag, the time reduction flag, and the round game flag are in an off state, the other display (the number of winning balls on the main board 11 side or the presentation control board side 12 The display when the probability variation flag, the time reduction flag, and the round game flag are all off may be set as the normal state. For example, the items B1 to B4 in FIG. 45 may be counted when all of the probability change flag, the time reduction flag, and the round game flag are in an off state. Further, for example, in connection with FIG. 51 (B), it has been described that the combination (run ratio) and the combination ratio may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the normal state (probability change flag, time reduction flag, You may make it calculate and display a combination (continuity ratio) and a combination ratio in the case where all of the round gaming flags are off).

  FIG. 83B shows values that are aggregated (updated) on the game control microcomputer 100 side for performance display. The base value shown in FIG. 83 (A) is calculated based on the value shown in FIG. 83 (B). Specifically, the base value is based on the number of winning balls for all winning holes (the number of winning balls by winning the first general winning opening 50A, the winning number of the second general winning opening 50B) with respect to the number of shots (60000). The number of winning balls, the number of winning balls by winning the third general winning opening 50C, the number of winning balls by winning the fourth general winning opening 50D, the number of winning balls by the first starting winning opening, the number of winning balls by the second starting winning opening, This is the ratio (%) of the number of winning balls from the big prize opening. That is, in the gaming machine 1, each value shown in FIG. 83B is totaled in the normal state, and the real-time base value and the previous cumulative base value shown in FIG. Calculate and display.

  FIG. 83C shows a display mode of performance information. In the gaming machine 1, performance information is displayed on the display monitor provided on the main board 11 in the display mode shown in FIG. Specifically, when displaying the real-time base value, the gaming machine 1 displays “bL.” Indicating that it is the real-time base value in the upper two digits out of all four digits (flashing or lighting). , Numbers (%) or “-” in the range of “00” to “99” are displayed (lighted) in the lower two digits of all four digits. The lower two digits of the total four digits are the original real-time base value, but the real-time base value may be displayed by displaying all four digits including the upper two digits. In addition, when displaying the previous cumulative base value, the gaming machine 1 displays “b6.” Indicating that it is the previous cumulative base value in the upper two digits among all four digits (flashing or lighting), Numbers (%) or “-” in the range of “00” to “99” are displayed (lit) in the lower two digits of all four digits. The lower 2 digits of the total 4 digits are the original previous cumulative base value, but the previous cumulative base value may be displayed by displaying all 4 digits including the upper 2 digits.

  FIG. 84 (A) shows sections (total section, evaluation section) corresponding to the total number of outs (total number of fired parts). The “factory shipment test section” in FIG. 84A is a section with a total number of outs of less than 300. The “first section” is the first section among the sections managed for each total out number of 60000 pieces (0 to 59999 pieces). The “second section” is the second section among the above sections. The “third section” is the third section among the above sections. In FIG. 84A, the subsequent sections are omitted.

  84 (B) to 84 (F) show a display mode of performance information corresponding to each section (and the number in the section). In each of FIGS. 84 (B) to 84 (F), the display mode of the real-time base value is on the left side, the display mode of the previous cumulative base value is on the right side, and the real-time base value and the previous cumulative base value are indicated in the center in both directions. It shows that it will be switched.

  FIG. 84B shows a display mode of performance information displayed in the factory shipment test section shown in FIG. In the factory shipment test section, as shown in FIG. 84 (B), a real-time base value in which the upper two digits are “bL. (Flashing)” and the lower two digits are “-(lit)”, The previous cumulative base value in which the two digits are “b6. (Flashing)” and the lower two digits are “-(lit)” is displayed alternately every 5 seconds. Note that the radial highlight shown in the upper two digits “bL.” On the left side and the upper two digits “b6.” On the right side in FIG. It shows that. The same applies to FIG. 84C, FIG. 84D, FIG. 84E, FIG. 105, and FIG.

  FIG. 84 (C) shows a display mode of performance information displayed when the total number of outs is 0 to 5999 in the first section shown in FIG. 84 (A). When the total number of outs is 0-5999 in the first section, as shown in FIG. 84 (C), the upper 2 digits are “bL. (Flashing)” and the lower 2 digits are numerical values. (%) Is lit (“32 (lit)” in the example of FIG. 84C), the upper 2 digits are “b6. (Flashing)”, and the lower 2 digits are “-( The previous accumulated base value that is “lit” is displayed alternately every 5 seconds.

  FIG. 84D shows a display mode of performance information displayed when the total number of outs is 6000 to 59999 in the first section shown in FIG. 84A. When the total number of outs in the first section is 6000 to 59999, as shown in FIG. 84 (D), the upper 2 digits are “bL. (Lit)” and the lower 2 digits are numerical values. (%) Is lit (“33 (lit)” in the example of FIG. 84D), the upper two digits are “b6. (Flashing)”, and the lower two digits are “-( The previous accumulated base value that is “lit” is displayed alternately every 5 seconds.

  FIG. 84 (E) shows a display mode of performance information displayed when the total number of outs is 0 to 5999 in the second and subsequent sections shown in FIG. 84 (A). When the total number of outs in the second and subsequent sections is 0 to 5999, as shown in FIG. 84 (E), the upper 2 digits are “bL. (Flashing)” and the lower 2 digits are Real-time base value that is lighting of the numerical value (%) (“34 (lighting)” in the example of FIG. 84E) and the upper two digits are “b6. (Lighting)” and the lower two digits are numerical values (% ) Is lit (“33 (lit)” in the example of FIG. 84E) and the previous cumulative base value are alternately displayed every 5 seconds.

  FIG. 84 (F) shows a display mode of performance information displayed when the total number of outs is between 6000 and 59999 in the second and subsequent sections shown in FIG. 84 (A). When the total number of outs in the second and subsequent sections is from 6000 to 59999, as shown in FIG. 84 (F), the upper 2 digits are “bL. (Lit)” and the lower 2 digits are Real time base value that is lighting of numerical value (%) (“34 (lighting)” in the example of FIG. 84F) and upper 2 digits are “b6. (Lighting)” and lower 2 digits are numerical values (% ) Is lit (“33 (lighted)” in the example of FIG. 84F) and the previous cumulative base value are alternately displayed every 5 seconds.

  Hereinafter, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 when performing performance display will be described. FIG. 85 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 86 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards mounted on the pachinko gaming machine shown in FIG. The gaming machine 1 when performing the performance display described above may have the configuration shown in FIGS. 85 and 86, for example.

  In FIG. 85, reference numeral 700 in the vicinity of the tip end of the guide rail (near the exit of the game ball) is a shot ball detector including a shot detection sensor 700A (see FIG. 86). FIG. 85 shows an example in which the firing ball detector 700 is arranged near the exit of the guide rail. However, other positions of the guide rail (for example, near the center of the guide rail (for example, at the same height as the normal symbol display 20) Position), a position closer to the guide rail hitting device (in the vicinity of the entrance), etc.) may be arranged. Although the appearances of the game effect lamp 9 and the operation buttons 30 are partially different, in FIG. 85, the same components as those in FIG. 1 are denoted by the same reference numerals as those in FIG. ) Will be omitted.

  In FIG. 86, reference numeral 1130 denotes a display monitor that displays performance information. Reference numeral 700A denotes a firing detection sensor. 86, the same components as those in FIG. 49 are denoted by the same reference numerals as those in FIG. 49, and description of the components (the same components as those in FIG. 49) is omitted.

  Subsequently, the operation of the gaming machine 1 in the case of performing performance display will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 94.

  FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing an example of special figure processing (also referred to as special symbol process). In the special drawing process shown in FIG. 87, the CPU 103 executes a state control process (step S1101A). The state control process will be described later. Subsequently, the CPU 103 executes a start winning determination process (step S1102). In the start winning determination process, for example, the CPU 103 determines the presence / absence of the start winning based on the detection signal from the first start opening switch 22A or the second start opening switch 22B, and the execution determination of the pre-reading notice effect. The transmission setting of various commands (holding memory number notification command, start winning determination result specifying command, etc.) is performed.

  Following the start winning determination process in step S1102, the CPU 103 selects one of the processes in steps S1110 to S1117 in accordance with the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102 (game control flag setting unit in the RAM 102). And run.

  The special symbol normal process in step S1110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In the special symbol normal process, whether or not to start the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is determined based on the presence or absence of the hold data (holding storage). Also, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the variable display result is set to “big hit” using the random number for determining the special figure display result, and if it is determined to be “big hit”, the random number for determining the big hit type is used. Which jackpot type is to be determined, and a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game is determined. In the special symbol normal process, when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit”, the big hit flag provided in the RAM 102 (game control flag setting unit in the RAM 102) is set to the on state, and “big hit” is set. Then, when determined, the value corresponding to the determined jackpot type is stored in the jackpot type buffer provided in the RAM 102 (game control buffer setting unit in the RAM 102). In the special symbol normal process, for example, when a confirmed special symbol is determined, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1”.

  The variation pattern setting process of step S1111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In the variation pattern setting process, processing for determining a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types using a random number for variation pattern determination is performed. In the variation pattern setting process, for example, when a variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”.

  The special symbol variation process in step S1112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In the special symbol change process, a process for changing the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, a process for measuring an elapsed time after the special symbol starts changing, and the like are performed. . In the special symbol variation process, when the elapsed time since the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process in step S1113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In the special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop and display the fixed special symbol that is the variable symbol display result for a predetermined time (special symbol fixed display time). Etc. are performed. In the special symbol stop process, when the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0” or “4” with reference to the jackpot flag. Specifically, when the big hit flag is on (when the confirmed special symbol is a big hit symbol), the big hit flag is cleared and turned off, and the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off (when the confirmed special symbol is a missing symbol), the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S1114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. In the big hit release pre-processing, a process of waiting until the end of the execution time of the fanfare effect (also called the big hit start time effect) executed on the side of the effect control board 12 elapses (the big hit start time effect waiting time) elapses. In addition, after the elapse of the big hit start production waiting time, the setting for making the big winning opening open is performed. In the pre-opening process, the special figure process flag value is updated to “5” when a setting is made to open the big winning opening.

  The big hit release process in step S1115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In the big hit opening process, a process for determining whether or not a condition for returning the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state is established (elapse of the big prize opening opening upper limit time or the upper limit number of prizes), or after the condition is established Settings are made to return the grand prize opening to the closed state. When the setting for returning the big prize opening to the closed state is performed in the big hit opening process, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”.

  The big hit release post-processing in step S1116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In the post-hit-opening process, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round in which the big winning opening is opened reaches a predetermined number is performed. In the processing after the big hit release, when the number of round executions has not reached the predetermined number, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, and when the predetermined number has been reached, the value of the special figure process flag is set to “7”. Update to

  The big hit end process in step S1117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In the jackpot end process, a process of waiting until the end of the execution time of the ending effect (also referred to as a jackpot end effect) executed on the side of the effect control board 12 (a jackpot end effect waiting time) elapses. Is done. In the big hit end processing, when the big hit end presentation waiting time elapses, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing an example of the state control process executed in step S1101A of FIG. In the state control process shown in FIG. 88, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the value of the special figure process flag is 4 (step S2001). When the value of the special figure process flag is 4 in step S2001 (step S2001; YES), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the round gaming flag provided in the RAM 102 (game control flag setting unit in the RAM 102) is on. Is determined (step S2002). As described above, the round game flag is one of the flags that define the normal state. If the round game flag is on in step S2002 (step S2002; YES), the state control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the round game flag is off in step S2002 (step S2002; NO), the CPU 103 determines whether the state change switching wait flag provided in the RAM 102 (game control flag setting unit in the RAM 102) is on. It is determined whether or not (step S2003). The state change switching waiting flag is a flag provided for setting the state change switching waiting time (described later) only once when the round game flag is off.

  If the state change switching wait flag is off in step S2003 (step S2003; NO), the CPU 103 sets a state change switching waiting time (step S2004). Specifically, the CPU 103 uses a predetermined value as a timer initial value of a state change switching waiting time timer value that is a stored value of a state change switching waiting time timer provided in the RAM 102 (game control timer setting unit in the RAM 102). Set the state change switching wait time. The state change switching waiting time set in the process of step S2004 is shorter than the big hit start production waiting time set in step S2299 of the special symbol stop process (FIG. 89). As will be described in detail later, time T1 in FIG. 95 is a big hit start production waiting time, and time T2 in FIG. 95 is a state change switching waiting time.

  Subsequent to step S2004, the CPU 103 sets a state change switching waiting flag to an on state (step S2005). Then, the state control process ends.

  If the state change switching wait flag is on in step S2003 (step S2003; YES), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the state change switching waiting time has elapsed (step S2006). In the process of step S2006, for example, it is determined whether or not the state change switching waiting time timer for which the timer initial value is set in step S2004 has timed out (whether or not the state change switching waiting time timer value has become 0). That's fine. If the state change switching waiting time has not elapsed in step S2006 (step S2006; NO), the state control process is terminated.

  If the state change switching waiting time has elapsed in step S2006 (step S2006; YES), the CPU 103 clears the state change switching wait flag to turn it off (step S2007), and turns the round game flag on. Set (step S2008).

  Subsequent to step S2008, the CPU 103 performs setting for ending the time reduction state or the probability variation state (step S2009). In the process of step S2009, the CPU 103 executes a process of clearing the time reduction flag and the probability variation flag to turn it off. Further, in the process of step S2009, when a value (a value other than 0) is set to the probability variation count value which is a stored value of the probability variation counter provided in the RAM 102 (game control counter setting unit in the RAM 102). May execute a process of initializing the probability variation count value to “0”. Further, in the process of step S2009, when a value (a value other than 0) is set to the short-time count value that is the stored value of the short-time counter provided in the RAM 102 (game control counter setting unit in the RAM 102). May execute a process of initializing the count value of time reduction to “0”. Note that the time reduction counter is a counter for counting the number of times (the number of executions or the remaining number of times) of a special game in which time reduction control or high opening control is performed. The probability variation counter is a counter for counting the number of times (the number of executions or the remaining number of times) of the special figure game for which probability variation control is performed.

  Subsequent to the process of step S2009, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a game state designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S2015). Thereby, the change (transition) of the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be notified to the effect control board 12 side. Then, the state control process ends.

  In the state control process shown in FIG. 88, a game state designation command is transmitted regardless of whether the game state has changed or not. However, when the game state has changed (for example, a time-saving state or The gaming state designation command may be transmitted only when the probability changing state changes to the normal state. On the side of the effect control board 12, the current gaming state is specified based on the gaming state designation command transmitted from the main board 11, but instead, the current gaming state is based on the hit start designation command or the like. May be specified. The same applies to the state control process shown in FIG.

  When the value of the special figure process flag is not 4 in step S2001 (step S2001; NO), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the special figure process flag is 7 (step S2010). If the value of the special figure process flag is not 7 in step S2010 (step S2010; NO), the state control process is terminated.

  When the value of the special figure process flag is 7 in step S2010 (step S2010; YES), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the round gaming flag is on (step S2011). If the round game flag is off in step S2011 (step S2002; NO), the state control process is terminated.

  If the round game flag is on in step S2011 (step S2011; YES), the CPU 103 clears the round game flag and turns it off (step S2013).

  Subsequent to step S2013, the CPU 103 performs setting for starting the time reduction state or the probability variation state (step S2014). In the processing of step S2014, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag to the on state according to the jackpot type (value stored in the jackpot type buffer; the jackpot type buffer value), and counts the number of times of probability variation according to the jackpot type. Set the initial value to the value and the count value for the short time count. For example, in the case of a probabilistic big hit in which the probability change state and the short time state continue until the next big hit, after the end of the big hit, the probability change flag and the short time flag are set to the on state. In addition, for example, in the case of a probabilistic big hit where the probable change state and the short time state continue until the next big hit or the 100th special game is over, the probable change flag and the short time flag are turned on. The initial value is set to 100 as the probability variation count value and the initial value is set to 100 as the short time count value. Also, for example, after the big hit, until the next big hit or until the 30th special drawing game is over, the probabilistic state and the short time state continue, and after the 31st special drawing game, until the next big hit In the case of a probable big hit where the time-saving state continues until the special game is completed 100 times, the probability-changing flag and the time-saving flag are set to the on state, the initial value of 30 is set as the probability changing number count value, and the number of time reductions The count value is set to 100 as an initial value. Also, for example, after the big hit, the time-short flag is set to ON in the case of a non-probable big hit where the time-saving state continues until the next big-hit or the 100-time special game is over. The count value is set to 100 as an initial value. Also, for example, after the big hit is completed, nothing is done in the case of a non-probable big hit that is neither in the probability variation state nor in the time reduction state (the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are not set to the ON state, and the probability variation count value is also shortened. No value is set for the count value).

  Subsequent to step S2014, the CPU 103 executes the process of step S2015 described above, and ends the state control process.

  FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop process executed in step S1113 of FIG. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 89, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not a special figure fixed display flag provided in, for example, a game control flag setting unit is on (step S2291). Here, the special figure fixed display flag is set to the ON state by the process of step S2295 in response to the fixed special symbol that is the variable display result in the special figure game being derived and displayed.

  When the special figure fixed display flag is OFF in step S2291 (step S2291; NO), the CPU 103 performs setting for deriving and displaying the fixed special symbol (step S2292). Subsequently, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting the symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control board 12 (step S2293). Subsequently, the CPU 103 sets a special figure fixed display time which is a fixed special symbol stop display time (step S2294). Specifically, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined initial value as a timer initial value of a special figure fixed display time timer value which is a stored value of a special figure fixed display time timer provided in the RAM 102 (game control timer setting unit in the RAM 102). Set the special figure confirmation display time.

  Subsequent to the process of step S2294, the CPU 103 sets the special figure confirmation display flag to the on state (step S2295), and ends the special symbol stop process.

  If the special figure confirmation display flag is ON in step S2291 (step S2291; YES), it is determined whether or not the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed (step S2296). In the process of step S2296, for example, it is determined whether or not the special figure fixed display time timer in which the timer initial value is set in step S2294 has timed out (whether or not the special figure variable time timer value has become 0). Good. If the special figure confirmation display time has not elapsed in step S2296 (step S2296; NO), the special symbol stop process is terminated.

  When the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed in step S2296 (step S2296; YES), after clearing the special figure confirmation display flag to turn it off (step S2297), it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is on. Determination is made (step S2298). If the big hit flag is on (step S2298; YES), a big hit start production waiting time is set (step S2299). Specifically, the CPU 103 sets a timer initial value of the jackpot start presentation waiting time timer value, which is a stored value of the jackpot start presentation waiting time timer provided in the RAM 102 (game control timer setting unit in the RAM 102), as a timer initial value. Set a predetermined big hit start production waiting time. Subsequent to the processing in step S2299, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S2300). Subsequently, the CPU 103 clears the big hit flag to turn it off (step S2301), and sets the big hit start time flag provided in the RAM 102 (game control flag setting unit in the RAM 102) to the on state (step S2302). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “4” which is a value corresponding to the big hit release pre-processing (step S2305), and the special symbol stop processing is ended.

  If the big hit flag is off in step S2298 (step S2298; NO), it is determined whether or not to end the short-time state or the probability variation state (step S2306). In the process of step S2306, the CPU 103 updates each count value according to whether or not a value (a value other than 0) is set for the probability variation count value or the time variation count value, and displays the time variation state or the probability variation state. It is determined whether or not to end. For example, when a value is set for the short-time count value (for example, a special game that has been digested after the end of a non-probable big hit in which the short-time state continues until the next big hit or 100 special figure games have been consumed. Is less than 100 times, etc.), the time count count value is decremented by 1 and updated. Further, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the updated short time count value matches a short time end determination value (for example, “0”), and when the updated short time count value does not match the short time end determination value. Determines that the time-short state is not terminated. Also, for example, when the probability variation count value and the short time count count value are set (for example, the probability variation state where the probability variation state and the time reduction state continue until the next big hit or 100 special game games are completed. For example, when the special-figure game digested after the big hit is less than 100 times, etc., the probability variation count value is decremented by 1 and updated, and the short-time count count value is decremented by 1 and updated. Further, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the updated probability variation count value matches the probability variation end determination value (for example, “0”), and when the updated probability variation count value does not match the probability variation end determination value. Determines that the probability variation state is not to be ended, and determines that the probability variation state is to be terminated if they match, and whether or not the updated time count count value matches a time reduction end determination value (for example, “0”). If the updated time reduction count value does not match the time reduction end determination value, it is determined not to end the time reduction state. If the CPU 103 determines that the probability variation state is to be terminated, the CPU 103 clears the probability variation flag to turn it off, and if it is determined to terminate the time variation state, the CPU 103 clears the time variation flag to turn it off.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S2306, settings are made to transmit a game state designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S2307). Thereby, the change (transition) of the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be notified to the effect control board 12 side. Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated (initialized) to “0” (step S2308), and the special symbol stop process is terminated.

  Note that, in the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 89, the game state designation command is transmitted regardless of whether the game state has changed or not, but when the game state has changed (for example, the time reduction state) The gaming state designation command may be transmitted only when the probability changing state changes to the normal state. On the side of the effect control board 12, the current game state is specified based on the game state designation command transmitted from the main board 11, but instead of this, effect control is performed independently of the main board 11 side. The current gaming state may be specified by counting the number of executions of variable display on the substrate 12 side.

  FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit release pre-processing executed in step S1114 of FIG. In the big hit release pre-processing shown in FIG. 90, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit start flag is on (step S2131). Here, the big hit start flag is set to the on state in response to the big hit flag being on in the special symbol stop process (step S2302 in FIG. 89).

  If the big hit start flag is not turned on in step S2131 (step S2131; NO), a big prize opening determination process (see FIG. 92) is executed (step S220), and the process proceeds to step S2138. In this way, in addition to the big hit opening process in step S1115, the big winning opening determination processing is also executed in the processing after the big hit release in step S1114, so that a winning (over winning) exceeding the winning upper limit determination value is suitably detected. be able to. For example, over-winning can be suitably detected while waiting for the next opening (during step S2138 (YES)). The special winning opening determination process will be described later.

  Although it has been described that the addition of the number of prize balls when a game ball is won at a predetermined number or more per unit time is over a predetermined number of balls, over-winning is not excluded. In other words, even if there is a win exceeding the above-mentioned “winning upper limit judgment value”, if the excess number of wins is within a range generally assumed as an over win (for example, up to about +3), a prize ball (actual payout) , Reflected in performance information). Exclusion from the addition of the number of winning balls is due to fraud, and the excess winning number is outside the range generally assumed as an over winning.

  If the big hit start time flag is ON in step S2131 (step S2131; YES), it is determined whether or not the big hit start time production waiting time has elapsed (step S2132). In the process of step S2132, for example, whether or not the jackpot start stage waiting time timer for which the timer initial value was set in step S2299 of the special symbol stop process has timed out (the jackpot start stage waiting time timer value becomes 0). Whether or not) may be determined.

  If the big hit start production waiting time has not passed (step S2132; NO), the big hit release pre-processing is terminated.

  If the big hit start time waiting time has elapsed (step S2132; YES), the CPU 103 clears the big hit start time flag (step S2134). Subsequently, the CPU 103 clears the special winning opening opening number counter (step S2135). Specifically, the special winning opening opening count value is initialized to “1”. Subsequently, the CPU 103 reads the jackpot type buffer value (step S2136), and sets an opening control pattern corresponding to the read jackpot type buffer value (step S2137). That is, the opening control pattern of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 (big winning opening) is set according to the big hit type determined in the special symbol normal process. In the opening control pattern, for example, a big winning opening opening upper limit time for each round is set.

  Following the process of step S2137 or the process of step S220, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is waiting for next opening (step S2138). That is, it is determined whether or not it is during the interval period until the next winning round is opened. In the process of step S2138, for example, whether or not the round start waiting time timer in which the timer initial value was set in step S2366 of the big hit release post process has timed out (whether or not the round start waiting time timer value has become 0). Can be determined. If it is waiting for the next opening (step S2138; YES), that is, if the interval period has not ended, the big hit pre-release processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is not waiting for the next opening (step S2138; NO), that is, if the interval period has ended, the CPU 103 controls the opening of the big prize opening (step S2139). For example, the CPU 103 sets the opening time for opening the grand prize opening based on the opening control pattern set in step S2137 and the count value in the big prize opening number counter, and the big prize opening is in the open state. Set as follows. Specifically, in the process of step S2139, for example, the CPU 103 steps as a timer initial value of an opening time timer value that is a stored value of an opening time timer provided in the RAM 102 (game control timer setting unit in the RAM 102). In the opening control pattern set in S2137, the maximum winning opening opening upper limit time for the corresponding round (upper limit time for opening state) is set. Further, in the process of step S2139, a solenoid drive signal may be transmitted via the solenoid circuit 111, and so on, so that the solenoid 28 for the special prize opening door may be set to be in the ON state. In the case of the first round (when the special jackpot release pre-processing is executed following the special symbol stop processing), since the round start waiting time (interval period) is not set (because it is zero), the step In the processing of S2138, it is immediately determined that the device is not waiting for the next opening.

  Subsequent to the process of step S2139, the CPU 103 performs a setting for transmitting a large winning opening open notification command to the effect control board 12 (step S2140). Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5” (step S2141), and the big hit release pre-processing is terminated.

  FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit release process executed in step S1115 of FIG. In the big hit opening process shown in FIG. 91, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big winning opening opening upper limit time has elapsed (step S2121). If the big winning opening opening upper limit time has not elapsed (step S2121; NO), the big winning opening judgment processing is executed (step S220).

  92 shows the big hit release pre-processing (step S1114) of FIG. 90, the big hit open processing (step S1115) of FIG. 91, the big hit release after processing (step S1116) of FIG. 93, and the big hit end processing of FIG. 94 (step S1117). It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening determination process performed by.

  In the special winning opening determination process shown in FIG. 92, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the detection signal transmitted from the count switch 23 has been turned on (step S221). If the count switch 23 is not on (step S221; NO), the big prize opening determination process is terminated.

  When the count switch 23 is on (step S221; YES), transmission setting of a big prize opening prize notification command for notifying the effect control board 12 of the winning of a game ball to the big prize opening is performed. (Step S222). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure process flag is “5”, which is a value corresponding to the big hit release processing (step S223). If the value of the special figure process flag is not “5” corresponding to the big hit release process (step S223; NO), the big prize opening determination process is terminated.

  If the value of the special figure process flag is “5” corresponding to the big hit release process (step S223; YES), the winning number counter stored in the RAM 102 (game control counter setting unit in the RAM 102) is stored. The winning number count value, which is a value, is updated so as to be incremented by 1 (step S224). Then, the special winning opening determination process is terminated. When the process of step S244 is performed in the special winning opening determination process, a prize ball payout process is executed in the prize ball process. Also, as shown in FIG. 83 (B), if any of the probability variation flag, the hourly flag, and the round game flag are in an off state, the number of winning balls by the big prize opening is updated in relation to the performance display. . However, as shown in FIG. 88, at least during the period from the start of the first round (closing the big prize opening door → opening) to the end of the final round (opening the big opening entrance door → closing) Since the flag is in the on state, not the off state, the number of prize balls by the special winning opening is not updated during the period.

  Returning to FIG. Following the big winning opening determination process shown in FIG. 92, it is determined whether or not the winning number count value has reached a predetermined winning upper limit determination value (for example, “10”) (step S2126). If the winning upper limit determination value has not been reached (step S2126; NO), the big hit release process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the big winning opening opening upper limit time has passed in step S2121 (step S2121; YES), or when the winning upper limit determination value is reached in step S2126 (step S2126; YES), the big winning opening is opened. Is controlled (step S2127). That is, the CPU 103 determines that the current round game is to be ended, and sets the big prize opening to be closed. For example, what is necessary is just to set so that transmission of the drive signal with respect to the solenoid 82 may be stopped. Subsequently, the CPU 103 clears the winning number counter and initializes the winning number count value to “0” (step 2128). Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6” (step S2129), and the big hit release process is terminated.

  FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit release post-processing executed in step S1116 of FIG. In the post-hit-opening processing shown in FIG. 93, the CPU 103 first executes the big winning opening determination processing shown in FIG. 92 (step S220). In this way, in addition to the big hit opening process of step S1115, the big winning opening determination processing is also executed in the post-hit opening process of step S1116, thereby suitably detecting a winning (over winning) exceeding the winning upper limit determination value. be able to.

  After executing the big prize opening determination process shown in FIG. 92, the CPU 103 updates the value so that the big prize opening number-of-times count value is incremented by 1 (step S2364). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the updated big winning opening opening count value has reached the maximum value (step S2365).

  In step S 2365, the “maximum value” to be compared with the updated winning prize opening number count value is a number obtained by adding 1 to the upper limit number of rounds. In other words, the big winning opening opening count value to be compared with the “maximum value” is the updated one (step S2364), and the initial value of the big winning opening opening count value is “1” (FIG. 90). S2135) The “maximum value” needs to be a number obtained by adding 1 to the upper limit number of rounds. For example, in the case of a big hit of 6 rounds (when the upper limit number of rounds is 6), the “maximum value” is “7”, and in the case of a big hit of 16 rounds (when the upper limit number of rounds is 16), The “maximum value” is “17”. It should be noted that instead of the updated large winning opening opening count value, it may be compared with the maximum winning opening opening count value before updating and the “maximum value”. In this case, the “maximum value” may be set as the upper limit number of rounds.

  If the winning prize opening opening count value is other than the maximum value (step S2365; NO), a round start waiting time (interval time) is set (step S2366). Specifically, for example, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined value as a timer initial value of a round start waiting time timer value that is a stored value of a round start waiting time timer provided in the RAM 102 (game control timer setting unit in the RAM 102). Set the round start waiting time.

  Subsequent to step S2366, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a notification command after opening the big prize opening to the effect control board 12 (step S2367). Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4” (step S2368), and the processing after the big hit release is ended. In this manner, by repeatedly executing the processing of steps S1114 to S1116 shown in FIG. 87 and the like until it is determined by the processing of step S2365 that the updated winning prize opening number count value is the maximum value, A plurality of rounds can be executed in which the big winning opening is opened in the big hit gaming state. Further, by setting the round start waiting time in the process of step S2366, the next open waiting is performed in the process of step S114 shown in FIG. 87 and the like until the round start waiting time elapses (in FIG. 90). Step S2138; YES), the next round can be started after a desired interval period.

  If the winning prize opening opening count value is the maximum value in step S2365 (step S2365; YES), a big hit end presentation waiting time is set (step S2369). Specifically, for example, the CPU 103 sets the initial value of the big hit end presentation waiting time timer value, which is a stored value of the big hit end presentation wait time timer provided in the RAM 102 (game control timer setting unit in the RAM 102). As described above, a waiting time at the end of a predetermined jackpot is set.

  Subsequent to step S2369, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a hit end designation command to the effect control board 12 (step S2370). Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “7” (step S2371), and the big hit release post-processing is terminated. In this way, by setting the effect waiting time at the end of jackpot in the process of step S2369, according to the end of the ending effect executed on the effect control board 12 side (step S2321 in FIG. 94; YES), FIG. The special symbol normal process of step S1110 shown in 87 can be executed.

  FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit end process executed in step S1117 of FIG. In the jackpot end process shown in FIG. 94, first, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the big hit end presentation waiting time has elapsed (step S2321). In the process of step S2321, for example, whether or not the big hit end presentation waiting time timer for which the timer initial value was set in step S2369 of the big hit release post-processing has timed out (the big hit end presentation waiting time timer value becomes 0). Whether or not) may be determined. If the big hit end presentation waiting time has not elapsed in step S2321 (step S2321; NO), the big winning opening determination processing shown in FIG. 92 is executed (step S220), and the big hit end processing is ended. In this way, in addition to the big hit opening process in step S1115, in the big hit end process in step S1117, the big winning opening determination process is executed, so that it is possible to suitably detect a winning (over winning) exceeding the winning upper limit determination value. Can do.

  When the big hit end presentation waiting time has elapsed in step S2321 (step S2321; YES), the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0” (step S2325), and the execution of the big hit end processing is ended.

  The operation of the gaming machine 1 when performing performance display has been described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 94. According to the flowcharts shown in FIGS. After the symbol is stopped and displayed, the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state, but the round gaming flag is turned on before the first round is released. This will be described in detail below.

(A) End of fanfare production → First opening of special variable winning ball apparatus After the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined time (special symbol confirmation display time), the CPU 103 performs the execution time of the fanfare production in the special symbol stop processing. Is set (step S2299 in FIG. 89), and the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”. Further, in the pre-hit release pre-processing, after the waiting time has elapsed (step S2132 in FIG. 90; YES), the CPU 103 opens the big prize opening (step S2139 in FIG. 90). That is, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in a closed state before the end of the fanfare effect, and is in the first open state after the end of the fanfare effect.

(B) Set round game flag to ON state → end of fanfare effect When the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”, the CPU 103 sets a state change switching waiting time (see FIG. 88). Step S2004) After the elapse of the state change switching waiting time (step S2006 in FIG. 88; YES), the round gaming flag is set to the on state (step S2008 in FIG. 88). Then, as described above, the state change switching waiting time is a time shorter than the big hit start production waiting time (fanfare production execution time). That is, the round game flag is turned on before the end of the fanfare effect.

  From (A) and (B) above, the round game flag is set to ON, the end of the fanfare effect, and the first opening of the special variable winning ball device 7. That is, the round game flag is turned on before the first round is released.

  In addition, as described above, a gaming state in which the number of winning balls and the number of balls to be thrown for performance display is referred to as a normal state. Specifically, the normal state includes a probability variation flag, a time-short flag, a round game, and the like. All of the middle flags are in a gaming state in an off state (see FIG. 83). Accordingly, at least when the round game flag is in the on state, the normal state is not met. Therefore, at least when the round game flag is in the on state, the number of winning balls and the number of balls to be thrown are not collected for performance display. That is, at least when the round game flag is in the ON state, the number of winning balls and the number of shots are not reflected in the performance display.

  According to (A) and (B) above, since the round game flag is on at the stage before the opening of the first round, the number of winning balls and the hit balls from the stage before the opening of the first round at the latest. The number is not reflected in the performance display (more accurately, it is not reflected). It should be noted that the expression “at the latest” means that the game state during the execution of the special figure game prior to the special figure game in which the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed is a probabilistic state or a short time state (that is, at least the probability variation flag or the short time flag). If one of them is on), a stage prior to the above "a certain stage before the opening of the first round" (for example, a stage during execution of a special figure game before the special figure game in which the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed) This is because the number of award balls and the number of shots are not already reflected in the performance display.

  FIG. 95 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state change switching waiting time and the like. In the figure, the direction from left to right indicates the passage of time, and the direction from top to bottom indicates the flow of the game ball. The upper part of the figure shows the display of the image display device 5. The lower side of the display of the image display device 5 is, in order from the top, the detection timing of the game ball by the firing ball detector 700 (launch detection sensor 700A), the state of the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning mouth door) (open state) , Closed state), and the winning timing (game ball detection timing by the count switch 23) to the big winning opening.

  As shown in FIG. 95, a jackpot symbol (illustrated as a confirmed ornament symbol “777” in the image display device 5 in the figure) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game (more specifically, as shown in FIG. 89). When the special figure confirmation display time elapses) and when the big hit start waiting time (shown as fanfare effect in the figure) is finished, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened for the first time (the 1R opening in the figure). As shown in FIG. Note that the jackpot effect in the image display device 5 is an effect performed during execution of the big hit opening process (FIG. 91). In addition to the effect performed during the execution of the big hit release process (FIG. 91), the effect performed during the execution of the big hit release post-process (FIG. 93) may also be referred to as a big hit effect.

  The timing t1 shown in the lower part of FIG. 95 is a timing when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game. The timing t3 is a timing at which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened for the first time after the big hit start production waiting time ends. A time T1 between the timing t1 and the timing t3 is a big hit start production waiting time set in step S2299 of the special symbol stop process (FIG. 89). The timing t2 and the like will be described later.

  FIG. 95 schematically shows a state where three game balls (game ball a, game ball b, game ball c) launched by the hitting ball launching device are detected by the firing detection sensor 700A. The game ball a is detected by the firing detection sensor 700A at a timing slightly earlier than the timing t1 (for example, during reach production), and is not detected by the count switch 23 (for example, a closed prize winning door of the closed winning entrance door). A game ball that has flowed down the front side). The game ball b is a game ball that is detected by the firing detection sensor 700A at the timing t2, picked up by the big winning opening door at the timing t3 (the moment when it is opened), and detected by the count switch 23. The game ball c is a game ball that is detected by the firing detection sensor 700A at a timing slightly later than the timing t2, picked up by the winning opening door at a timing slightly later than the timing t3, and detected by the count switch 23.

  A time T2 between the timing t1 and the timing t2 is a state change switching waiting time set in step S2004 of the state control process (FIG. 88). The game ball b detected by the firing detection sensor 700A at the timing t2 flows down the game area 10 at the slowest possible flow speed after being detected by the launch detection sensor 700A, and the winning prize door immediately after opening. It is assumed that the game ball is picked up by the player and detected by the count switch 23. In other words, the game ball detected by the firing detection sensor 700A at a timing earlier than the timing t2 is not detected by the count switch 23. That is, the timing t2 is the earliest timing at which the game ball picked up by the big winning door at the moment of opening can be detected by the firing detection sensor 700A.

  That is, the game ball detected by the count switch 23 is present in the game balls detected by the firing detection sensor 700A before the grand prize opening door is opened (for example, during the execution time of the fanfare effect) (for example, game) A game ball detected by the firing detection sensor 700A at any timing of the time T3, such as a ball c), or a game ball detected by the launch detection sensor 700A before the grand prize opening door is opened by the count switch 23. In order to prevent the game balls that can be detected from being reflected in the performance display, the round game flag is set to ON at timing t2 (at the time T2 has elapsed) (step S2008 in FIG. 88).

  If the round game flag is set to ON at timing t3 (when it is not reflected in the performance display from the opening timing of the grand prize opening door), for example, at time T3 like the game ball c. The game ball detected by the firing detection sensor 700A at any timing is reflected in the performance display as the number of balls to be hit, but is not reflected in the performance display as the number of winning balls when winning the big winning opening. Inconsistency occurs and accurate performance display cannot be performed. On the other hand, if the round gaming flag is set to the ON state at the timing t2 (at the time T2 has elapsed), the above-described problem is solved.

  Although the timing t2 has been described as the earliest timing at which the game ball picked up by the big winning door at the moment of opening can be detected by the firing detection sensor 700A, the timing t2 is not limited to this. For example, the timing t2 may be an average timing at which the game ball picked up by the big winning door at the moment of opening is detected by the firing detection sensor 700A, or a timing later than the average timing. May be. In other words, the state change switching waiting time (time T2) set in step S2004 of the state control process (FIG. 88) takes into account the flow time of the game ball (launching ball detector 700 → special variable winning ball device 7). If it is. However, in order to perform performance display more accurately, it is preferable to set the above-mentioned earliest timing as the timing t2. The same applies to FIG.

[Modified example of the launch ball detector]
FIG. 96 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 97 is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine shown in FIG. For example, the gaming machine 1 for displaying performance may have the configuration shown in FIGS. 96 and 97.

  In FIG. 96, reference numeral 701 above the first passage gate 41A is a first firing ball detector including a first firing detection sensor 701A (see FIG. 97). All the game balls passing through the left game area 10A pass through the first firing ball detector 701. That is, the first launch ball detector 701 (first launch detection sensor 701A) detects all the game balls passing through the left game area 10A. Reference numeral 702 above the second passage gate 41B is a second firing ball detector provided with a second firing detection sensor 702A (see FIG. 97). All the game balls passing through the right game area 10B pass through the second shot ball detector 702. That is, the second launch ball detector 702 (second launch detection sensor 702A) detects all game balls that pass through the right game area 10B.

  FIG. 96 shows an example in which the shot ball detectors 701 and 702 are arranged above the pass gates 41A and 41B. However, if all the game balls can be detected, other positions (for example, pass gates 41A and 41B) are shown. , Etc.) may be arranged in the lower part of the projection ball detectors 701, 702. 96, the same components as those in FIG. 85 are denoted by the same reference numerals as those in FIG. 85, and description of the components (the same components as those in FIG. 85) is omitted.

  In FIG. 97, reference numeral 701A denotes a first launch detection sensor. Reference numeral 702A denotes a second firing detection sensor. In FIG. 97, the same components as those in FIG. 86 are denoted by the same reference numerals as those in FIG. 86, and the description of the components (the same components as those in FIG. 86) is omitted.

  The operations shown in FIGS. 87 to 94 are also applied to the gaming machine 1 configured as shown in FIGS. 96 and 97. In other words, special chart processing for performance display in the gaming machine 1 configured as shown in FIGS. 85 and 86, and special processing for performance display in the gaming machine 1 configured as shown in FIGS. 96 and 97. This is the same as diagram processing.

  FIG. 98 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state change switching waiting time and the like in the gaming machine 1 configured as shown in FIGS. In FIG. 98, the direction from left to right indicates the passage of time, and the direction from top to bottom indicates the flow of the game ball. The upper part of the figure shows the display of the image display device 5. The lower side of the display of the image display device 5 is, in order from the top, the detection timing of the game ball by the launch ball detectors 701 and 702 (launch detection sensors 701A and 702A), the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning mouth door). The state (open state, closed state), winning timing to the big winning opening (game ball detection timing by the count switch 23) is shown.

  In FIG. 98, three game balls (game ball a, game ball b, game ball c) launched by the hit ball launching device are detected by the first launch detection sensor 701A (or the second launch detection sensor 702A). The state of being done is shown schematically. The game ball a is detected by the first launch detection sensor 701A (or the second launch detection sensor 702A) at a timing slightly later than the timing t1, and is not detected by the count switch 23 (for example, in a closed state). A game ball that has flowed down the front door of the grand prize opening door). The game ball b is detected by the first launch detection sensor 701A (or the second launch detection sensor 702A) at the timing t2, picked up by the big prize opening door at the timing t3 (the moment when it is opened), and detected by the count switch 23. Game balls to be played. The game ball c is detected by the first launch detection sensor 701A (or the second launch detection sensor 702A) at a timing slightly later than the timing t3, and is picked up by the winning opening door at a timing slightly later than the timing t3. A game ball detected by the count switch 23.

  The first launch ball detector 701 (first launch detection sensor 701A) and the second launch ball detector 702 (second launch detection sensor 702A) can simultaneously detect a game ball, but simultaneously detect a game ball. Even in this case, each game ball detected at the same time can be captured (counted) as the number of balls to be shot. For example, each game ball detected at the same time may be captured as the number of shot balls, for example, by shifting the execution timing of the process executed after detection (the process of counting).

  The disposition position of the launch ball detector 700 shown in FIG. 85 is different from the disposition position of the first launch ball detector 701 and the second launch ball detector 702 shown in FIG. As described above, the time until the game ball launched by the ball striking device in the configuration of FIGS. 96 and 97 is detected by the first launch ball detector 701 (or the second launch ball detector 702) is shown in FIG. In the configuration of FIG. 86, it is longer than the time until the game ball launched by the hit ball launching device is detected by the launch ball detector 700. 96 and 97, the time until the game ball detected by the first launch ball detector 701 (or the second launch ball detector 702) reaches the arrangement position of the special variable winning ball device 7 is as follows. 85 and 86, the time required for the game ball detected by the shot ball detector 700 to reach the arrangement position of the special variable winning ball device 7 is short.

  Therefore, the state change switching waiting time (time T2 in FIG. 98) set in the case of the configuration of FIGS. 96 and 97 is the state change switching waiting time (in FIG. 95) set in the case of the configurations of FIGS. Longer than the time T2).

  The first launch ball detector 701 and the second launch ball detector 702 (or the parts including the first launch ball detector 701 and the second launch ball detector 702 (referred to as part A)) are connected to the game board 2. On the other hand, it may be detachable. Further, the game board 2 is configured by a part A and one or more parts other than the part A, and the part A may be detachable from one or more parts other than the part A. For example, in FIG. 96, a portion including the first firing ball detector 701 and the second launching ball detector 702 (a portion above the broken line P in FIG. 96) may be removable.

[Modification using out-sphere detector]
FIG. 99 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 100 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine shown in FIG. For example, the gaming machine 1 for displaying performance may have the configuration shown in FIGS. 99 and 100.

  In FIG. 99, a reference numeral 710 in a broken line is an out sphere detector provided with an out sphere detection sensor 710A. The out-sphere detector 710 is arranged at a position where it cannot be visually recognized from the front side, but for convenience of explanation, in FIG. 99, it is illustrated using a broken line. Reference numeral 52 denotes an out port. Enter the winning entrances (first general winning port 50A, second general winning port 50B, third general winning port 50C, fourth general winning port 50D, first starting winning port, second starting winning port, large winning port). The game balls that did not exist are taken into the out port 52.

  The out ball detector 710 detects all the game balls that have been launched into the game area 10 by the hitting ball launching device. In other words, the game balls launched into the game area 10 are the winning ports (first general winning port 50A, second general winning port 50B, third general winning port 50C, fourth general winning port 50D, first start winning port, The second start winning opening, the big winning opening), or is taken into the out opening 52 without entering the winning opening. The game balls that have entered the winning opening and the game balls that have been taken into the out slot 52 are finally collected in one path on the back surface (or inside) of the game board 2. Since the out-ball detector 710 is disposed on the above-described path, it detects all the game balls that have been launched into the game area 10 by the hitting ball launching device.

  FIG. 99 shows an example in which the out ball detector 710 is arranged at the center in the left and right direction (below the out port). However, if all the game balls can be detected, other positions (for example, the right side in the left and right direction). The out-sphere detector 710 may be disposed on the left side or the left side in the left-right direction. 99, the same components as those in FIG. 85 are denoted by the same reference numerals as those in FIG. 85, and description of the components (the same components as those in FIG. 85) is omitted.

  In FIG. 100, reference numeral 710A denotes an out sphere detection sensor. In FIG. 100, the same components as those in FIG. 86 are denoted by the same reference numerals as those in FIG. 86, and the description of the components (the same components as those in FIG. 86) is omitted.

  In the gaming machine 1 configured as shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, the state control process (FIG. 101) in step S1101B is executed instead of the state control process (FIGS. 87 and 88) in step S1101A. The other special drawing processes (the processes shown in FIGS. 89 to 94) are also applied to the gaming machine 1 configured as shown in FIGS.

  FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing an example of a state control process executed in the gaming machine 1 having the configuration shown in FIGS. In the state control process shown in FIG. 101, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the value of the special figure process flag is 7 (step S2021). When the value of the special figure process flag is 7 in step S2021 (step S2021; YES), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the round gaming flag is on (step S2022). If the round game flag is off in step S2022 (step S2022; NO), the state control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the round game flag is on in step S2022 (step S2022; YES), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the state change switching waiting flag is on (step S2023).

  If the state change switching wait flag is OFF in step S2023 (step S2023; NO), the CPU 103 sets a state change switching waiting time (step S2024). Specifically, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined state change switching waiting time as a timer initial value of the state change switching waiting time timer value that is a stored value of the state change switching waiting time timer. The state change switching waiting time set in the process of step S2024 is shorter than the big hit end production waiting time set in step S2369 of the big hit release post-processing (FIG. 93). As will be described in detail later, time T4 in FIG. 102 is a big hit end production waiting time, and time T5 in FIG. 102 is a state change switching waiting time.

  Subsequent to step S2024, the CPU 103 sets a state change switching waiting flag to an on state (step S2025). Then, the state control process ends.

  If the state change switching wait flag is ON in step S2023 (step S2023; YES), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the state change switching waiting time has elapsed (step S2026). In the process of step S2026, for example, it is determined whether or not the state change switching waiting time timer for which the timer initial value is set in step S2024 has timed out (whether or not the state change switching waiting time timer value has become 0). That's fine. If the state change switching waiting time has not elapsed in step S2026 (step S2026; NO), the state control process ends.

  If the state change switching waiting time has elapsed in step S2026 (step S2026; YES), the CPU 103 clears the state change switching waiting flag to turn it off (step S2027), and clears the round gaming flag. The off state is set (step S2028).

  Subsequent to step S2028, the CPU 103 performs setting for starting the time reduction state or the probability variation state (step S2029). Note that the process of step S2029 is the same as the process of step S2014 of the state control process (step S1101A) shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S2029, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a game state designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S2035). Thereby, the change (transition) of the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be notified to the effect control board 12 side. Then, the state control process ends.

  When the value of the special figure process flag is not 7 in step S2021 (step S2021; NO), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the special figure process flag is 4 (step S2030). When the value of the special figure process flag is not 4 in step S2030 (step S2030; NO), the state control process is terminated.

  When the value of the special figure process flag is 4 in step S2030 (step S2030; YES), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the round gaming flag is on (step S2031). If the round game flag is on in step S2031, the state control process ends.

  If the round game flag is off in step S2031 (step S2031; NO), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the big hit start stage waiting time has elapsed (step S2032). In the process of step S2032, the jackpot start in which the timer initial value is set in step S2299 of the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 89 is the same as the process of step S2132 in the jackpot release pre-process (step S1114) shown in FIG. It may be determined whether or not the hour production waiting time timer has timed out. If the big hit start production waiting time has not elapsed in step S2032 (step S2032; NO), the state control process is terminated.

  If the big hit start production waiting time has elapsed in step S2032 (step S2032; YES), the CPU 103 sets the round gaming flag to the on state (step S2033).

  Subsequent to step S2033, the CPU 103 performs setting for ending the time-shortening state or the probability variation state (step S2034). Note that the process of step S2034 is the same as the process of step S2009 of the state control process (step S1101A) shown in FIG.

  Following the process of step S2034, the CPU 103 executes the process of step S2035 described above, and ends the state control process.

  FIG. 102 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state change switching waiting time and the like in the gaming machine 1 configured as shown in FIG. 99 and FIG. In FIG. 102, the direction from left to right indicates the passage of time, and the direction from top to bottom indicates the flow of the game ball. The upper part of the figure shows the display of the image display device 5. The lower side of the display of the image display device 5 is, in order from the top, the state of the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening door) (open state, closed state), the winning timing to the large winning opening (game by the count switch 23) Sphere detection timing), and the game ball detection timing by the out sphere detector 710 (out sphere detection sensor 710A).

  As shown in FIG. 102, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, the final opening (illustrated as the final R opening in the figure) is finished, and the big hit end effect (illustrated as the ending effect in the figure) is performed.

  The timing t4 shown in the lower part of FIG. 102 is the timing at which the final opening in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 ends (timing at which the big prize opening door is closed). Timing t4 is also the start timing of the ending effect. Timing t6 is the end timing of the ending effect. The time T4 between the timing t4 and the timing t6 is a big hit end presentation waiting time set in step S2369 of the big hit release post-processing (FIG. 93). The timing t5 and the like will be described later.

  FIG. 102 schematically shows a state where three game balls (game ball d, game ball e, game ball f) launched by the hit ball launching device are detected by the out ball detection sensor 710A. . The game ball d is picked up by the grand prize opening door at a timing slightly earlier than the timing t4, detected by the count switch 23 at a timing slightly later than the timing t4, and an out-ball detection sensor at a timing earlier than the timing t5. It is a game ball detected by 710A. The game ball e is picked up by the grand prize opening door at timing t4 (moment of closing), detected by the count switch 23 at timing later than timing t4, and detected by the out ball detection sensor 710A at timing t5. It is a game ball. The game ball f is a game ball that is not detected by the count switch 23 (for example, a game ball that has flowed down on the front side of the closed prize winning door), and more than timing t5 (further than timing t6). A game ball detected by the out ball detection sensor 710A at a later timing.

  A time T5 between the timing t4 and the timing t5 is a state change switching waiting time set in step S2024 of the state control process (FIG. 101). Note that the game ball e picked up by the big winning door at timing t4 moves to the position detected by the out ball detecting sensor 710A at the slowest possible speed after being picked up by the big winning door (while moving) The game ball is detected by the count switch 23) and detected by the out ball detection sensor 710A. In other words, a game ball detected by the out ball detection sensor 710A at a timing later than the timing t5 is not detected by the count switch 23. That is, the timing t5 is the latest timing at which the game ball picked up by the big winning opening door at the moment of closing can be detected by the out ball detection sensor 710A.

  In other words, the game balls detected by the count switch 23 exist among the game balls detected by the out ball detection sensor 710A after the grand prize opening door is closed (for example, during the ending effect execution period) (for example, A game ball detected by the out-ball detection sensor 710A at any timing of the time T5, such as a game ball d), even if it is a game ball detected by the out-ball detection sensor 710A after the grand prize opening door is closed. In order to prevent the game balls that can be detected by 23 from being reflected in the performance display, the round gaming flag is cleared to OFF at timing t5 (when time T5 has elapsed) (step S2028 in FIG. 101). That is, until the timing t5 (time T5), the in-round game flag is maintained in the ON state and is not reflected in the performance display.

  If, however, the round game flag is cleared to OFF at timing t4 (when the performance display is reflected from the closing timing of the grand prize opening door), the prize winning opening will be given before timing t4. When the game ball detected by the out-ball detection sensor 710A after the timing t4 (a game ball launched at a timing slightly earlier than the game ball d) wins the grand prize opening, the number of prize balls is displayed in the performance display. Although not reflected in the above, there is a mismatch that the number of shot balls is reflected in the performance display, and the accurate performance display cannot be performed. On the other hand, if the round game flag is cleared to the OFF state at the timing t5 (at the time T5 has elapsed), the above-described problem is solved.

  In addition, although timing t5 demonstrated that the game ball picked up by the big winning opening door at the moment of closing was the latest timing which can be detected by the out ball detection sensor 710A, timing t5 is not limited to this. For example, the timing t5 may be an average timing at which the game ball picked up by the big winning door at the moment of closing is detected by the out ball detection sensor 710A, or at an earlier timing than the average timing. There may be. That is, the state change switching waiting time (time T5) set in step S2024 of the state control process (FIG. 101) is based on the moving time of the game ball (special variable winning ball device 7 → out ball detector 710). If it is. However, in order to display the performance more accurately, it is preferable that the latest timing is the timing t5.

  FIG. 103 shows a configuration example of the out sphere detector. The out-sphere detector 710 described above may be, for example, as shown in FIG. An out-sphere detector 710 illustrated in FIG. 103A includes a main body 720 and a harness 730. The main body 720 detects an opening ball (passing portion) 721 through which a game ball that has entered one of the winning holes or a game ball taken into the out port 52 passes, and an out ball detection that detects a game ball that passes through the opening 721 A sensor 710A and a connection portion 722 are provided. The harness 730 includes a signal line 734 having connection portions (connection portions 732 and 733) connected to both ends, a connection portion (connector) 732 for connecting to the connection portion 722 on the main body 720 side, and the main board 11 side. A connection portion (connector) 733 for connecting to a predetermined connection portion (not shown) provided is provided. Note that FIG. 103A (also in FIG. 103B) shows a state where the main body 720 and the harness 730 are connected. In addition, in the connection part (connection part 733, connection part of the main board | substrate side 11), the out ball | bowl detector 710 (harness 730) and the main board | substrate 11 are detachable. Further, the main body 720 and the harness 730 may be detachable at the connection portions (connection portions 722 and 732).

  The game balls that have entered one of the winning holes or the game balls that have been taken into the out-port 52 are finally collected in one path and all pass through the opening 721. When the game ball that has passed through the opening 721 is detected by the out ball detection sensor 710 </ b> A, a detection signal indicating that the game ball has been detected is output to the main board 11 side via the harness 730. Since the game balls detected by the out ball detector 710 are counted (counted) as the number of balls to be hit, the out ball detection sensor 710A may be referred to as a count switch.

  In addition, the out-ball detector 710 has the harness 730 when the harness 730 is disconnected from the main body 720 (when the connection portion 722 on the main body 720 side and the connection portion 732 on the harness 730 side are not properly connected). Etc. are disconnected (such as a break in the middle of the signal line 734, a break between the signal line 734 and the connection portion 732, a break between the signal line 734 and the connection portion 734). It is configured to output to the substrate 11 side. Therefore, the CPU 103 can detect a missing harness or the like by monitoring a signal input from the out ball detector 710 in the error detection process described above. For example, the CPU 103 may determine that the harness is disconnected or disconnected when an ON signal is input for a predetermined time or longer.

  Further, at least a part of the detection signal output from the out-ball detector 710 when the game ball passes through the opening 721 may be configured by a predetermined on / off pattern. When at least a part of the detection signal is composed of a predetermined on / off pattern, the CPU 103 can detect signal corruption due to noise or the like by monitoring a signal input from the out-sphere detector 710.

  Further, the out-sphere detector 710 may be provided with a clasp 740 having a screw hole 741 as shown in FIG. 103 (B). Alternatively, the out ball detector 710 (main body 720) may be capable of being attached with a clasp 740. The clasp 740 is an example of a fixing member for fixing the main body 720 to the gaming machine 1 or the like, and any clasp can be used as long as the main body 720 can be fixed to the gaming machine 1 or the like. Also good.

  Further, the harness 730 (at least a part of the connection portions 732, 734, and the signal line 734) may be protected by a cover or the like. Moreover, the main body 720 and the harness 730 may be separate. That is, the main body 720 of the out-ball detector 710 may be connectable to a separate harness 730.

  FIG. 104 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an error notification process for errors related to performance display. FIG. 105 is an example of a display mode for notifying an error related to the performance display. In the error notification process shown in FIG. 104, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a reception abnormality related to reception of the detection signal output from the out-sphere detector 710 has been detected (step S1200).

  If there is an abnormality in the out ball detector 710 (for example, missing harness, disconnection, garbled signal, etc.), the CPU 103 detects out ball detection in a process (error detection process described above) different from the error notification process. A reception abnormality related to reception of the detection signal output from the device 710 is detected. For example, the CPU 103 may determine that the harness is disconnected or disconnected when the ON signal continues for a predetermined time. Further, at least a part of the detection signal output from the out-sphere detector 710 is configured to have a predetermined on / off pattern, and the CPU 103 receives an input of a received signal different from the predetermined on / off pattern. If there is, it may be determined that the signal is garbled.

  If no reception abnormality is detected in step S1200 (step S1200; NO), the CPU 103 determines whether or not a reception error flag provided in the RAM 102 (for example, a game control flag setting unit) is on ( Step S1201). If the reception error flag is on in step S1201 (step S1201; YES), the CPU 103 clears the reception error flag to turn it off (step S1202), and proceeds to step S1205. If the reception error flag is OFF in step S1201 (step S1201; NO), the process of step S1202 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S1205.

  If reception abnormality is detected in step S1200 (step S1200; YES), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the reception error flag is on (step S1203). If the reception error flag is off in step S1203 (step S1203; NO), the CPU 103 sets the reception error flag to the on state (step S1204), and proceeds to step S1205. If the reception error flag is on in step S1203 (step S1203; YES), the process of step S1204 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S1205.

  Following any of the processes of step S1201 (NO), step S1202, step S1203 (YES), and step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception error flag is on (step S1205).

  If the reception error flag is off in step S1205 (step S1205; NO), the CPU 103 performs control so that the performance display is performed in the normal mode (normal mode) (step S1206). In the process of step S1206, the CPU 103 performs control so that the performance display is performed according to the display modes shown in FIGS. 84 (B) to 84 (F). Then, the error notification process ends.

  If the reception error flag is on in step S1205 (step S1205; YES), the CPU 103 controls to display the error notification mode (step S1207). In the process of step S1207, for example, the CPU 103 performs control so that display according to the display mode of FIG. In the display mode of FIG. 105 (A), the upper two digits are “-(flashing)” and the lower two digits are “-(lit)”. Then, the error notification process ends.

  In the case of a reception abnormality related to reception of the detection signal by the out ball detector 710, the number of balls to be hit (FIG. 83 (B)) is not naturally updated, but the number of winning balls ( Also, FIG. 83 (B)) is not updated. That is, the CPU 103 performs the same as in the case of the combination (relation ratio) / ratio-related processing (FIG. 61, etc.), the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the first switch. Each winning information is acquired (received) by detecting a game ball by any of the general winning opening switch 24A to the fourth general winning opening switch 24D, but in a situation where the number of hit balls is not updated, the winning is achieved. The prize ball number adding process based on the information is not performed.

  According to the error notification process shown in FIG. 104, the upper two digits are normally displayed as “bL. (Blinking, lighting)” or “b6. (Blinking, lighting)” (FIG. 84B). (FIG. 84 (F)), “-(lighting)” is displayed when reception is abnormal (FIG. 105 (A)). That is, when reception is abnormal, the upper two digits are displayed in a display mode that is not displayed in normal times. Therefore, it can be easily recognized that it is not normal by looking at the display of the upper two digits.

  Note that the display mode illustrated in FIG. 105A is an example. For example, in the process of step S1207, control may be performed so that the display in FIG. 105B is performed instead of the display in FIG. Similar to FIG. 105 (A), the upper two digits of FIG. 105 (B) are display modes that are not normally displayed. Therefore, it can be easily recognized that it is not normal by looking at the display of the upper two digits.

  Further, for example, in the process of step S1207, control may be performed so that the display according to the display mode of FIG. 105 (C) or FIG. 105 (D) is performed. The upper two digits “E. (blinking)” in FIG. 105 (C) and the upper two digits “Er. (Blinking)” in FIG. 105 (D) are reminiscent of “Err”. Therefore, it can be easily recognized that there is an abnormality by looking at the display of the upper two digits (or the upper second digit).

  Further, in FIGS. 105A to 105D, the lower two digits are “-(lit)”, but the lower two digits may be “-(flashing)” or other display. An aspect may be sufficient.

  When the display is normal, that is, in the display by the processing of step S1206, the display contents are as shown in FIGS. 84 (B) to 84 (F) according to the section shown in FIG. 84 (A) and every 5 seconds. However, in the display by the processing in step S1207, it is always 5 seconds from the start of the display even if a reception abnormality occurs in any section shown in FIG. The display content does not change even after elapses. That is, the display when it is abnormal is simpler than the display when it is normal. Accordingly, it is possible to accurately recognize that it is not normal (or abnormal) without causing confusion or extra burden.

  FIG. 106 is an example of a display mode for notifying an error related to the performance display. 105 (A) to 105 (D) are displayed regardless of whether reception abnormality occurs in any section shown in FIG. 84 (A) or 5 seconds have elapsed since the start of display. Even when the content does not change but is abnormal, according to the section shown in FIG. 84A and every 5 seconds, for example, as shown in FIGS. The display content may be changed. The display modes of FIGS. 106 (A) to 106 (E) differ from the display modes of FIGS. 84 (B) to 84 (F) in that the lower two digits are blinking. According to the error notification mode of FIG. 106, since the display content changes according to the section, in addition to being not normal, the section at the time of occurrence of an abnormality (immediately before the occurrence) (the section shown in FIG. 84A), The real-time base value at the time of occurrence of an abnormality (immediately before the occurrence) and the previous cumulative base value can also be recognized.

  In order to prevent the player from showing the real-time base value or the previous cumulative base value when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the lower two digits indicating the real-time base value in FIGS. 106 (B) to 106 (E) 106 (D) and 106 (E), the lower two digits indicating the previous cumulative base value may be, for example, “Er. (Blinking)”. That is, in FIGS. 106 (A) to 106 (E), the lower two digits may be “-(flashing)” or “Er. (Flashing)”. According to the display mode, in addition to being not normal, it is possible to recognize a section at the time of occurrence of an abnormality (immediately before the occurrence) (section shown in FIG. 84A).

  In the flowchart shown in FIG. 104, when the error (abnormality) is resolved, the display returns to the normal mode display (step S1206), but when the error is resolved, the error notification is performed without returning to the normal mode display. The mode display (step S1207) may be continued. In addition, when the error is resolved, the display is returned to the normal mode, but the notification that the error has occurred may be continued.

  As a first example, after the error is resolved, the dot at the lowest (fourth digit) blinks (or lights up) in the display of the normal mode (FIG. 84 (A) to FIG. 84 (F)). Also good. As a second example, a display monitor different from the display monitor 1130 (for example, one digit) is arranged on the main board 11, and after the error is resolved, the display monitor 1130 returns to the normal display. In addition, a display monitor different from the display monitor 1130 may continue to notify that there is an error (for example, “E. (blink)”).

  The first example is exactly the same as the normal mode display when the error has been resolved (except for the blinking (lighting) of the lowest dot informing that an error has occurred). In the display mode of the first example, in order to provide the information provided (displayed) in the display of the normal mode (except for the lowest dot, the display of the normal mode) Because it is the same), it is expressed that the display is restored to the normal mode. Further, the display monitor (display monitor different from the display monitor 1130) for notifying that there has been an error in the second example, as with the display monitor 1130, does not clear the display when the power is cut off. To do. In other words, information indicating that an error has occurred is prevented from being cleared due to a power failure such as a power failure.

  Note that, in the mode of displaying performance information, the clear switch is connected to the main board 11, and the clear switch is operated to operate the clear switch and stored in the RAM 102 in the same manner as the above-described mode of displaying the role (run ratio) and role ratio. The data used for the performance display may be cleared. The clear switch in the mode for displaying the performance information is operated when the performance display calculation has to be performed again, such as when a failure occurs in the performance information calculation. When the clear switch is operated, the clear switch operation signal is transmitted to the main board 11 in addition to clearing the data, as in the mode of displaying the ratio) and the role ratio.

  When the clear switch is operated in the mode for displaying the performance information, the error display is performed in the same manner as when the clear switch is operated in the mode for displaying the role (link ratio) and the mode for displaying the role (FIGS. 61 and 62). The warning table may be displayed in a display mode different from the display mode (display mode shown in FIGS. 105 and 106). When the clear switch is operated when there is a reception abnormality, both error display and warning display may be performed. For example, an error display and a warning display may be displayed in order. When performance display is performed according to the display mode shown in FIG. 106, for example, error display (real-time base value), error display (previous cumulative base value), and warning display may be displayed in order.

  Further, in the aspect of displaying the performance information as in the above-described aspect of displaying the combination (ream ratio) and the combination ratio, an error indicator may be provided on the main board 11 separately from the display monitor 130. Good. When an error indicator is provided on the main board 11 in addition to the display monitor 130, the error indicator is preferably arranged at a position away from the display monitor 29. In the configuration in which the display monitor 130 and the error indicator are provided on the main board 11, when a reception abnormality occurs, information indicating the reception abnormality is displayed on the error indicator, and the display monitor 130 displays FIG. You may display by the display mode shown in FIG.

In addition, when a reception abnormality occurs, for example, a predetermined error display may be performed on the first special symbol display device 4A on the second special symbol display device 4B or the like so that the reception abnormality can be recognized. It may be. In addition, a predetermined error display may be performed on the image display device 5 by transmitting an abnormality detection designation command for designating that a reception abnormality has occurred, or the game effect lamp 9 is lit and blinks in a predetermined pattern. Alternatively, predetermined sounds (including voices) may be generated from the speakers 8L and 8R.
Further, by transmitting information indicating that a reception abnormality has occurred, an information display device (for example, a card unit display device provided on the side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a call lamp provided above the pachinko gaming machine 1) Device) or an information management device (such as a hall computer) may recognize that there is a reception abnormality.

  Other devices, etc. (error display, first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5, game effect lamp 9, speakers 8L and 8R, information display device, information management device Etc.), the display may be erased on the display monitor 130 regardless of whether or not the reception abnormality can be recognized. In other words, when reception abnormality occurs, for example, all four digits of the display monitor 130 are all turned off (the “off” means not always displayed but not displayed in “flashing”). Alternatively, any one digit (or two digits or three digits) of all four digits of the display monitor 130 may be turned off. That is, the display at the time of reception abnormality (display by the process of step S1207) at least restricts the display at the time of normal (display by the process of step S1206) (display to recognize that the reception is abnormal). As long as the performance display is limited, or the display is limited by deleting part or all of the performance display).

  FIG. 107 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing (game control timer interrupt processing) performed by the CPU 103. In the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 107, the CPU 103 first executes an error detection process (step S10), and notifies an error when an error (abnormality) is detected (step S11). In the processing of steps S10 and S11, for example, the CPU 103 monitors a signal output from the out sphere detector 710, detects an abnormal reception of the signal output from the out sphere detector 710 (step S10), and receives an abnormal reception. Is detected on the display monitor 1130 or the like (step S11).

  Subsequent to step S11, the CPU 103 executes a random number update process (step S12). In the random number update process in step S12, the CPU 103 updates, for example, a game random number (for example, a big hit determination random number, a big hit type determination random number, a variation pattern determination random number, etc.) used on the main board 11 side. Subsequent to step S12, the CPU 103 executes special symbol processing (special symbol process) (step S13). In the special drawing process of step S13, the CPU 103 executes various processes shown in FIGS. 87 to 94, FIG.

  Subsequent to step S13, the CPU 103 executes performance information update processing (steps S14A and S14B). Details of the performance information update processing will be described later. Subsequently, the CPU 103 executes performance information display processing (step S15). In the performance information display process of step S15, for example, the CPU 103 displays the performance information updated in the performance information update process (steps S14A and S14B) on the display monitor 1130 as shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S15, the CPU 103 executes prize ball processing (step S16). In the prize ball processing in step S16, for example, the CPU 103 calculates the number of prize balls based on detection signals from various switches, and controls the payout mechanism so that the calculated number of game balls are paid out. Subsequent to step S16, the CPU 103 executes a general symbol process (ordinary symbol process) (step S17). In the normal symbol process at step S17, the CPU 103 controls, for example, the variable symbol display on the normal symbol display 20 and the operation of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. Subsequent to step S17, the CPU 103 executes information output processing (step S18). In the information output process of step S18, the CPU 103, for example, an information display device (for example, a card unit display device provided on the side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a call lamp device provided above the pachinko gaming machine 1), Various information such as jackpot information, start-up information, probability variation information, abnormality information, etc. is output to an information management device (such as a hall computer). Then, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  Note that the processing in steps S10 to S18 shown in FIG. 107 has explained a part of the processing executed in the game control timer interrupt processing, and the CPU 103 performs steps S10 to S18 in the game control timer interrupt processing. (For example, a switch process for inputting (determining) the state of a detection signal input from various switches, a process for transmitting an effect control command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side, etc.) can be executed. is there.

  In the case of the configuration of FIG. 86, in the above switch processing, the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, the count switch 23, the first general winning port switch 24A to the fourth general winning port switch 24D, and the firing detection. Detection signals from the sensor 700A and the like are output to the CPU 103. In the case of the configuration in FIG. 97, instead of the firing detection sensor 700A, detection signals from the first launch detection sensor 701A and the second launch detection sensor 702A are output to the CPU 103. In the case of the configuration in FIG. 100, a detection signal from the out-sphere detection sensor 710 </ b> A is output to the CPU 103 instead of the firing detection sensor 700 </ b> A.

  Moreover, the execution order of each process of step S10-S18 of the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 107 is an example. Therefore, for example, the CPU 103 may execute the information output process prior to the random number update process, or may execute the normal process immediately after the special figure process.

  The grouping (units of each process) of each process such as the error detection process (step S10) and the error notification process (step S11) is an example. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 104, the CPU 103 may execute the error notification process (step S11) and the performance information display process (step 15) as one process. In the error notification process of FIG. 104, the process of step S1206 (the process of controlling the performance display according to the normal mode) is replaced with the performance information display process (step S15) in the game control timer interrupt process of FIG. Equivalent to.

  The relationship between the error notification process (step S11) and the performance information display process (step 15) in the game control timer interrupt process of FIG. 107 and the error notification process of FIG. 104 will be supplemented. As described above, the error notification process of FIG. 104 may be regarded as a combination of the error notification process (step S11) and the performance information display process (step 15) of FIG. , For reasons of convenience of explanation (for the purpose of explaining that the display mode (normal mode, error notification mode) of the display monitor 1130 differs depending on whether there is an abnormality) .

  FIG. 107 shows the game control timer interrupt process when performance information is displayed, but the game control timer interrupt process when displaying a combination (continuity ratio) and role ratio is the same. That is, the performance information update process (step 14A) in FIG. 107 is a process for updating the role (relation ratio) and the role ratio, and the performance information display process (step 15) is for the role (relation ratio) and the role ratio. What is necessary is just processing. The relationship between the error notification process (step S11) and the performance information display process (step 15) in the game control timer interrupt process of FIG. 107 and the processes shown in FIGS. 61 to 64 is similar to the game of FIG. The relationship between the error notification process (step S11) and the performance information display process (step 15) in the control timer interrupt process and the error notification process of FIG. 104 is the same.

  FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing an example of the performance information update process (step S14A) executed in the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing an example of the performance information update process (step S14B) executed in the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

  The CPU 103 executes the performance information update process (S14A) in FIG. 108 in a mode in which the state control process (step S1101A) in FIG. 88 is executed. That is, the performance information update process (S14A) in FIG. 108 is performed by the firing ball detector 700 (launch detection sensor 700A), or the first launch ball detector 701 (first launch detection sensor 701A) and the second launch ball detector. Executed in a configuration comprising 702 (second firing detection sensor 702A). On the other hand, the CPU 103 executes the performance information update process (S14B) in FIG. 109 in a mode in which the state control process (step S1101B) in FIG. 101 is executed. That is, the performance information update process (S14B) in FIG. 109 is executed in a configuration including the out sphere detector 710 (out sphere detection sensor 710A).

  In the performance information update process (S14A) of FIG. 108, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is on (step S20). If the probability variation flag is not on in step S20 (step S20; NO), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time reduction flag is on (step S21).

  If the time flag is not on in step S21 (step S21; NO), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the round game flag is on (step S22). In the case of the start of the big hit gaming state shown in FIGS. 95 and 98, the round game in-progress flag is the state change switching waiting time (in FIGS. 95 and 98) set in step S2004 of the state control process (FIG. 88). In step S2008 after the elapse of time T2), the state changes from the off state to the on state. Therefore, whether or not the process of step S22 is after the elapse of the state change switching waiting time (time T2) at the start of the big hit gaming state. It can be said that it is judged.

  If the round game flag is not on in step S22 (step S22; NO), that is, before the state change switching waiting time (time T2) has elapsed, the CPU 103 determines the number of winning balls and the number of balls to be hit. The base value, which is performance information, is calculated (step S23). In the process of step S23, for example, the CPU 103 adds the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning opening specified from the detection results (detection signals) of the various switches of the various winning openings (FIG. 83 (B)), and the firing detection sensor. Based on the detection result (detection signal) such as 700A, the number of shot balls is added (FIG. 83B), and then the real-time base value and the previous cumulative base value are calculated (FIG. 83A). Then, the performance information update process (step S14A) is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the probability variation flag is turned on in step S20 (step S20; YES), the time reduction flag is turned on in step S21 (step S21; YES), or if the round game flag is turned on in step S22 ( Step S22; YES), the performance information update process (Step S14A) is terminated without performing the process of Step S23.

  In the performance information update process (S14B) of FIG. 109, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is on (step S30). If the probability variation flag is not on in step S30 (step S30; NO), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time reduction flag is on (step S31).

  If the time flag is not on in step S31 (step S31; NO), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the round game flag is on (step S32). In the case of the end of the jackpot gaming state shown in FIG. 102, the round gaming flag is set after the elapse of the state change switching waiting time (time T5 in FIG. 102) set in step S2024 of the state control process (FIG. 101). Since the on state is changed to the off state in step S2028, it is determined whether or not the process in step S32 is before the elapse of the state change switching waiting time (time T5) at the end of the big hit gaming state. I can say that.

  In step S32, if the round game flag is not on (step S32; NO), that is, after the state change switching waiting time (time T5) has elapsed, the CPU 103 determines the number of winning balls and the number of balls to be hit. The base value, which is performance information, is calculated (step S33). In the process of step S33, for example, the CPU 103 adds the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning opening specified from the detection results (detection signals) of the various switches of various winning openings (FIG. 83 (B)), and detects the out ball. Based on the detection result (detection signal) of the sensor 710A, the number of shot balls is added (FIG. 83B), and then the real-time base value and the previous cumulative base value are calculated (FIG. 83A). Then, the performance information update process (step S14B) ends.

  On the other hand, if the probability variation flag is turned on in step S30 (step S30; YES), the time-short flag is turned on in step S31 (step S31; YES), or the round game flag is turned on in step S32 ( Step S32; YES), the performance information update process (step S14B) is terminated without performing the process of step S33.

  According to the performance information update process (step S14A) in FIG. 108 and the performance information update process (step S14B) in FIG. 109, when the probability variation flag, the time reduction flag, and the round game flag are all off, the performance The number of prize balls and the number of balls to be a base for display are added. As shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, the performance information update process (step S14A) of FIG. 108 and the performance information update process (step S14B) of FIG. It is the same in that the base value, which is performance information, is calculated by referring to the flag state, adding the number of winning balls and the number of balls to be hit, but both are in the state of the round game flag and waiting for a change in state. Since the relationship with time is different (specifically, in the performance information update process (step S14A) in FIG. 108), the round gaming flag is off before the time T2 has elapsed, and the performance information update process (step S14B) in FIG. Then, after the elapse of time T5, the round game flag is in the off state), which is described with separate drawings.

  The processing shown in FIGS. 107 to 109 is based on the detection results (output results of various switches of various winning awards, firing detection sensors) when the probability variation flag, the short time flag, and the round game flag are all off. (Output result of 700A, etc.) is reflected (added) as performance information, and if at least one of the probability variation flag, the short time flag or the round game flag is on, the detection result by the switch processing is not reflected as performance information. This is the process. In other words, the game ball is detected in the switch process regardless of the state of the flag, but it is determined whether to reflect the detection result as performance information according to the state of the flag. However, if both the probability variation flag, the hourly flag, and the round game flag are in the off state, the number of winning balls and the number of shots are reflected as performance information, and the probability variation flag, the time flag, and the round game flag are reflected. If at least one is in the ON state, other processes may be used as long as the number of winning balls and the number of balls to be hit are not reflected as performance information. For example, when all of the probability variation flag, the time reduction flag, and the round game flag are in the off state, the switch processing related to the number of shots (the firing detection sensor 700A, the first firing detection sensor 701A, the second firing detection sensor 702A, the out ball detection) (Detection by the sensor 710A) is executed, and when at least one of the probability variation flag, the time reduction flag, or the round game flag is in an on state, the switch processing relating to the number of shots may not be executed. That is, it may be a process of determining whether or not to execute a switch process related to the number of shot balls according to the state of the flag. Note that the switch processing related to the number of winning balls (detection by the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B, the count switch 23, the first general winning port switch 24A to the fourth general winning port switch 24D, etc.) is actually Therefore, the switch processing relating to the number of winning balls is executed regardless of the flag state, and whether the detection result is reflected in the performance information as in the processing shown in FIGS. You may determine according to a state.

  FIG. 110 is an example of an arrangement position of the out-sphere detector. FIG. 110A is a perspective view showing a state in which the gaming machine frame 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2 is released from the outer frame 3A. A main board 11 and the like are mounted on the back side of the game board 2. A base member 1129 is provided on the main board 11, and a display monitor 1130 is provided on the base member 1129. The display monitor 1130 is accommodated in the substrate case 202 together with the base member 1129 and the main substrate 11.

  Note that the display monitor 1130 shown in FIG. 110A (and the display monitor 1130 in FIG. 110B) is the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and the vertical direction is the upper side, as shown. Although it is arranged, the display monitor 1130 may be arranged at another position on the back surface. For example, the rear surface of the main substrate 11 may be arranged in the center in the left-right direction and in the lower side in the up-down direction. In addition, when it arrange | positions on the upper side of the back surface of the main board | substrate 11, when a display clerk etc. stand and confirms the display content, it is convenient to see the display content. Moreover, when it arrange | positions under the back surface of the main board | substrate 11, when a store clerk etc. sits down or bends and confirms display content, it is easy to see display content conveniently. In addition, various wirings (signal lines) may exist above the main board 11 of the game board 2. Then, it is assumed that such wiring is bent or a bundle is removed and covers the main substrate 11. When the display monitor 1130 is arranged on the lower side of the back surface of the main board 11, it is more convenient that a bent wiring is not covered with the display monitor 1130 as compared with the case where the display monitor 1130 is arranged on the upper side. Further, although related to the above, the display monitor 1130 shown in FIG. 110A (same as the display monitor 1130 in FIG. 110B) is similar to the display monitor 130A shown in FIG. The mode of arrangement is the same. However, the appearance of the display monitor 1130 and the manner of arrangement on the main board 11 are not limited to those shown in FIG. For example, the display monitor 1130 may have an appearance such as the display monitors 130B, 130C, 130D, 130E, 130F, 130G, 130H, and 130I shown in FIGS.

  In FIG. 110 (A), the game board 2 (for example, the bottom, lower part, etc. of the game board) has a winning opening (first general winning opening 50A, second general winning opening 50B, third general winning opening 50C, fourth. An opening (a hole at the exit of the game ball) that discharges the game ball that has entered the general winning port 50D, the first starting winning port, the second starting winning port, or the big winning port) or the game ball taken into the out port 52 to the outside. ) 2A is provided. In addition, passages a, b, and c indicated by broken lines are passages (ball collection passages) through which game balls that have entered the winning opening and game balls that have been taken into the out opening 52 pass. Whether it is a game ball that has entered the winning port or a game ball that has been taken into the out port 52, it passes through one of the passages a, b, and c, and is finally discharged from the opening 2A to the outside. Is done.

  The out ball detector 710 is provided on the game board 2 side as shown in FIG. 110 (A). Specifically, the out ball detector 710 is provided at a position where the game ball discharged from the opening 2A can be detected. That is, as with the opening 2A, the out ball detector 710 is provided in a flow path for discharging game balls that have entered the winning opening and game balls that have been taken into the out port 52.

  The game balls detected by the out ball detector 710 are collected by a ball receiving member 1700 provided on the outer frame 3A side (game island side). Further, the signal line 734 of the out-sphere detector 710 is connected to the main board 11. That is, the game ball discharged from the opening 2 </ b> A of the game board 2 passes through the opening 721 of the out-ball detector 710 and is collected on the game island by the ball receiving member 1700. Further, the game ball passing through the opening 721 is detected by the out-ball detection sensor 710 </ b> A, and a detection signal is output to the main board 11.

  An opening (game ball outlet hole) 1701 is provided at the bottom of the ball receiving member 1700 (portion where the game ball rides). Although not shown, the bottom is inclined toward the opening 1701. doing. That is, the game ball that has reached the ball receiving member 1700 from the gaming machine 1 (opening 721) passes through the opening 1701 and is discharged to the outside (lower side) of the ball receiving member 1700.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 110 (B), the out ball detector 710 may be provided on the outer frame 3A side (game island side). 110B, the out-ball detector 710 is provided at a position where a game ball discharged from the opening 1701 of the ball receiving member 1700 can be detected. That is, like the opening 1701, the out-ball detector 710 is provided in the flow path for discharging the game ball that has entered the winning opening and the game ball taken into the out-port 52, and the opening of the ball receiving member 1700 is provided. A game ball discharged from 1701 is detected. Note that the clasp 740 is not shown in FIG. 110 (B).

  110A is an example in which the out ball detector 710 is installed using the clasp 740, but the out ball detector 710 may be installed using a fixing member other than the clasp 740. The same applies to the example of FIG. 110 (B).

  110A and 110B, the out ball detector 710 is an external component, but the game board 2 or the like may include the out ball detector 710 from the beginning. For example, in FIG. 110A, an out ball detector 710 may be provided below the opening 2A of the game board 2 (the same position as in FIG. 110A). Further, an out ball detection sensor 710A may be provided in the opening 2A of the game board 2 (the opening 2A of the game board 2 corresponds to the opening 721 of the main body 720). The same applies to the example of FIG. 110 (B).

  110A shows three passages (passages a, b, and c), but the game ball that has entered the winning opening and the game ball that has been taken into the out opening 52 eventually reach the opening 2A. If it is a thing, the number and shape of a channel | path are not limited to the example shown to FIG. 110 (A). The same applies to the example of FIG. 110 (B).

  Note that the state change switching waiting time (time T5 in FIG. 102) set in the process of step S2024 in FIG. 101 is the time required until the game ball picked up by the big prize opening door is detected by the count switch 23, The time required for the game ball detected by the count switch 23 to be detected by the out-ball detection sensor 710A is affected. Specifically, as the required time is shorter, the state change switching waiting time (time T5) can be shortened (not necessarily shortened).

  Therefore, for example, in order to shorten the state change switching waiting time (time T5), in the configuration of FIG. 110A, the time until the game ball detected by the count switch 23 is discharged from the opening 2A is shortened. You may do it. Specifically, the length of the passage (for example, the passage a) through which the game ball detected by the count switch 23 passes is shortened or the game ball that has passed through the passage is immediately inclined to enter the opening 2A. And guidance may be provided. 110B, instead of or in addition to the above, the time until the game ball discharged from the gaming machine 1 (opening 721) reaches the opening 1701 of the ball receiving member 1700 is short. What should I do. As an example, the inclination of the bottom of the ball receiving member 1700 may be increased.

  It should be noted that the opening 2A of the game board 2 and the opening 1701 of the ball receiving member 1700 may be widened so that the game ball does not get clogged and so that the game ball flows quickly. A plurality of openings may be provided, or the ball receiving member 1700 may be provided with a plurality of openings.

  When the opening 2A of the game board 2 is widened, a plurality of out ball detectors 710 (out ball detection sensors 710A) are provided so that the game balls discharged from the widened opening 2A can be detected without omission. It may be. The same applies to the case where the opening 1701 of the ball receiving member 1700 is widened. Further, when a plurality of openings are provided in the game board 2, a plurality of out-ball detectors 710 (corresponding to the respective openings) so that the game balls discharged from the respective openings can be detected without omission. An out-sphere detection sensor 710A) may be provided. The same applies to the case where a plurality of openings are provided in the ball receiving member 1700.

  When a plurality of out-ball detectors 710 (out-ball detection sensors 710A) are provided, a game ball can be detected at the same time. For example, by shifting the execution timing of processing executed after detection for one of the simultaneously detected balls. Each of the game balls detected at the same time may be captured as the number of shot balls.

As described above, the gaming machine 1 performing the performance display described with reference to FIGS.
A launching device (for example, a hitting ball launching device or the like) for launching a game medium (for example, a game ball or the like) to a game area (for example, the game region 10 or the like) is provided, and an advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, first or second) The special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are used for deriving and displaying a definite special symbol that will be a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol, deriving and displaying a definite decorative symbol that will be a big hit combination in the image display device 5, and passing a game ball in a specific area). A game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state, a probability variation state, a short-time state, etc.) advantageous to the player based on
Detecting means capable of detecting game media launched into the game area (for example, a fire ball detector (FIG. 85) provided on the guide rail, and fire ball detectors 701 and 702 (FIG. 96) provided in the game area) Etc.) and
Variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball apparatus 7 or the like) that can be changed to an open state in which the game medium launched into the gaming area can win a prize;
Predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, a normal winning ball device 6A serving as a first starting winning port, a normal variable winning ball device 6B serving as a second starting winning port, general winning ports 50A to 50D serving as general winning regions, A payout means (for example, a ball payout device, a payout mechanism, etc.) for paying out a game medium based on winning a special variable winning ball device 7)
Determination means capable of determining whether or not the player is in the advantageous state (for example, the CPU 103 that determines whether or not the gaming state is based on a probability change flag, a time-shortage flag, etc.);
The number of game media detected by the detection means in a predetermined state different from the advantageous state (for example, a normal state or the like, specifically, a probability variation flag, a time reduction flag, a round game flag is all off, etc.) For example, predetermined information (for example, the number of balls to be struck) and the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state (for example, the number of winning balls by winning in each winning mouth) 83. For example, it is provided with information display means (for example, display monitor 1130 in FIG. 110) capable of displaying (for example, performance display is possible).
The variable winning means is
Change to the open state based on the establishment of the advantageous condition (for example, as shown in FIG. 95 and FIG. 98, based on the fact that the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed at timing t1, The door changes from closed to open)
The determination means includes
A predetermined period before the variable winning means changes to the open state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 95 and 98, a time T3 before the timing t3 at which the big prize opening door changes from the closed state to the open state). From the timing t2 etc.), it is determined that the player is in the advantageous state (for example, as shown in the state control processing of FIG. 88), the round game flag is turned on at the timing t2 when the state change switching waiting time (time T2) elapses. Etc.).

  Thereby, accurate predetermined information (performance information) can be calculated. Specifically, a game ball (for example, a game ball in FIG. 95) detected by the launch detection sensor 700A or the first launch ball detector 701 (second launch ball detector 702) at any timing of the time T3. c)) is not included in the performance display calculation, an accurate base value can be calculated.

Also, the above gaming machine 1 is
Variable display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the image display device 5, etc.) for performing variable display and deriving and displaying the display results;
The state (for example, the state at the timing t2) before the predetermined period from the change to the open state is
A special state after the display result of the variable display executed by the variable display means is derived and displayed (for example, a state where a fanfare effect is executed in the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. 95 and 98, etc.) It is.

  Thereby, accurate predetermined information (performance information) can be calculated. That is, the predetermined information is not included without including a game ball (such as the game ball c shown in FIGS. 95 and 98) that is fired after the change stop (after the stop display) and may win the special variable winning ball apparatus 7. (Performance information) can be calculated.

  In the above embodiment (FIGS. 88, 95, 95, etc.), the round game flag is turned on from the off state during execution of the fanfare effect after the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. The round game flag may be changed from the off state to the on state before the execution of (such as during the execution of the reach effect). For example, if the execution time of the fanfare effect is short (for example, 2, 3 seconds, etc.), a game ball that may win the special variable winning ball device 7 is detected before the start of the fanfare effect. Since it may be detected by 700A or the first launch ball detector 701 (second launch ball detector 702), a game ball that may win the special variable winning ball device 7 is not included in the performance display. In addition, the round game flag may be changed from the off state to the on state before the fanfare effect is executed. Specifically, for example, the special game variation time may be referred to and the round game flag may be set to the on state at a timing before the special symbol is stopped and displayed. The round game flag may be changed from the off state to the on state at the start of execution of the fanfare effect.

In the above gaming machine 1,
The detection means is detachable (for example, as shown in FIG. 96, the first launch ball detector 701 and the second launch ball detector 702 include the first launch ball detector 701 and the second launch ball detector 702, respectively. The portion above the broken line P is detachable.

  Thereby, even if it does not have a detection means, it can respond. In addition, maintenance becomes easy.

In the above gaming machine 1,
The detection means includes
It is configured as a unit that can be placed on a game board (for example, game board 2 or the like) that forms a game area (for example, the first launch ball detector 701 and the second launch ball detector 702 are shown in FIG. 96). The portion above the broken line P is configured as a unit).

  This facilitates maintenance. In addition, different models can be used in common.

In the above gaming machine 1,
The game area includes
There are a left game area (for example, the left game area 10A, etc.) and a right game area (for example, the right game area 10A, etc.) as areas through which the game medium launched by the launching device can pass,
The unit (for example, a part above the broken line P in FIG. 96)
Left-side detection means (for example, the first launch ball detector 701) that detects game media that passes through the left game area, and right-side detection means (for example, second launch) that detects game media that passes through the right game area. Sphere detector 702).

  As a result, it can be detected regardless of where the game area is fired.

In the above gaming machine 1,
The detection means includes
It is provided upstream of any winning area provided in the gaming area in the flow path of the game medium (for example, as shown in FIG. 85, the launch ball detector 700 includes the normal winning ball apparatus 6A, It is provided above the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B, the general winning ports 50A to 50D, and the special variable winning ball device 7. Also, as shown in FIG. The detector 702 is provided above the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the general winning ports 50A to 50D, and the special variable winning ball device 7).

  Thereby, it can detect reliably.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 that performs the performance display described with reference to FIGS.
A launching device (for example, a hitting ball launching device or the like) for launching a game medium (for example, a game ball or the like) to a game area (for example, the game region 10 or the like) is provided, and an advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, first or second) The special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are used for deriving and displaying a definite special symbol that will be a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol, deriving and displaying a definite decorative symbol that will be a big hit combination in the image display device 5, and passing a game ball in a specific area). A game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state, a probability variation state, a short-time state, etc.) advantageous to the player based on
Variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball apparatus 7 or the like) that can be changed to an open state in which the game medium launched into the gaming area can win a prize;
Variable winning control means (for example, the CPU 103 for executing the special figure processing shown in FIG. 87) capable of performing a round game for changing the variable winning means to the open state a predetermined number of times;
Game media that have passed through any of the winning areas provided in the gaming area (first general winning port 50A, second general winning port 50B, third general winning port 50C, fourth general winning port 50D, first start winning prize) The game balls won in any of the mouth, the second start winning opening, or the big prize opening) and the game media that did not pass through any of the winning areas (game balls taken into the out port 52, etc.) 110 (A), for example, as shown in FIG. 110 (A), a position where a game ball discharged from the opening 2A of the game board 2A can be detected, or as shown in FIG. A detection means (for example, an out ball detector 710 or the like) provided at a position where a game ball discharged from the opening 1701 can be detected) and capable of detecting a game medium passing through the flow path;
Predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, a normal winning ball device 6A serving as a first starting winning port, a normal variable winning ball device 6B serving as a second starting winning port, general winning ports 50A to 50D serving as general winning regions, A payout means (for example, a ball payout device, a payout mechanism, etc.) for paying out a game medium based on winning a special variable winning ball device 7)
Determination means capable of determining whether or not the player is in the advantageous state (for example, the CPU 103 that determines whether or not the gaming state is based on a probability change flag, a time-shortage flag, etc.);
The number of game media detected by the detection means in a predetermined state different from the advantageous state (for example, a normal state or the like, specifically, a probability variation flag, a time reduction flag, a round game flag is all off, etc.) For example, predetermined information (for example, the number of balls to be struck) and the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state (for example, the number of winning balls by winning in each winning mouth) 83. For example, it is provided with information display means (for example, display monitor 1130 in FIG. 110) capable of displaying (for example, performance display is possible).
The variable winning control means is
The round game is started based on the fact that the advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, the big winning opening door is controlled from the closed state to the open state based on the fact that the big hit symbol is stopped),
The determination means includes
Until a predetermined period elapses after the predetermined number of round games are finished and the variable winning means is changed to the closed state (for example, as shown in FIG. 102, the big prize opening door is changed from the open state to the closed state). When the time T5 elapses until the time t5 when the time T5 elapses), it is determined that the state is advantageous (for example, as shown in the state control process of FIG. 101, the time when the state change switching waiting time (time T5) elapses). For example, the round game flag is cleared to the off state at t5).

  Thereby, accurate predetermined information (performance information) can be calculated. Specifically, the game ball detected by the out-ball detector 710 at any timing in the time T5 (for example, the game ball d in FIG. 102) is not included in the calculation of the performance display, so that A simple base value can be calculated.

In the above gaming machine 1,
The state when the predetermined period elapses (for example, the state at the timing t5) is
A special state after the predetermined number of round games have been completed (for example, a state where an ending effect is being executed in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 102).

  Thereby, accurate predetermined information (performance information) can be calculated. In other words, even for a game ball detected by the out ball detector 710 during the ending effect, a game ball (such as the game ball d shown in FIG. 102) that may win the special variable winning ball device 7 may be used. Since it is not included in the calculation of the predetermined information (performance information), accurate predetermined information can be calculated.

  In the above embodiment (FIGS. 101, 102, etc.), the round gaming flag is changed from the on state to the off state during execution of the ending effect after the final round. The round game flag may be changed from the on state to the off state during the first variable display in the big hit. For example, when the execution time of the ending effect is short (for example, 2, 3 seconds, etc.), a game ball that may win the special variable winning ball device 7 is detected as an out ball detector 710 after the end of the ending effect. Therefore, after executing the ending effect, the round gaming flag is changed from the on state to the off state so that the game balls that may win the special variable winning ball device 7 are not included in the performance display. May be. Specifically, for example, the state change switching waiting time set in step S2024 in FIG. Note that the round game flag may be changed from the on state to the off state at the end of execution of the ending effect.

In the above gaming machine 1,
The detection means is detachable (for example, the out-sphere detector 710 is detachable by a clasp 740 as shown in FIG. 103B).

  Thereby, even if it does not have a detection means, it can respond. In addition, maintenance becomes easy.

In the above gaming machine 1,
The detection means includes
It is configured as a unit that can be placed on a game board (for example, game board 2 or the like) that forms a game area (for example, game board 2 for out ball detector 710 as shown in FIG. 110 (B)). It is configured as a unit that can be placed in).

  This facilitates maintenance. In addition, different models can be used in common.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 that performs the performance display described with reference to FIGS.
A gaming machine that can execute a game and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit gaming state, a probability variation state, a short-time state, etc.)
Detection means (for example, the out ball detector 710 shown in FIG. 103, FIG. 110, etc.) capable of detecting game media (for example, the game area 10) used in the game;
A signal line (for example, a signal line 734 shown in FIG. 103) through which a detection signal from the detection means is transmitted;
Receiving means for receiving the detection signal (for example, main board 11, a predetermined connection provided on the main board 11 side, etc.);
An abnormality detection means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the error notification process in FIG. 104) capable of detecting an abnormality in the reception state of the detection signal;
Predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, a normal winning ball device 6A serving as a first starting winning port, a normal variable winning ball device 6B serving as a second starting winning port, general winning ports 50A to 50D serving as general winning regions, A payout means (for example, a ball payout device, a payout mechanism, etc.) for paying out a game medium based on winning a special variable winning ball device 7)
The number of game media detected by the detection means in a predetermined state different from the advantageous state (for example, a normal state or the like, specifically, a probability variation flag, a time reduction flag, a round game flag is all off, etc.) For example, predetermined information (for example, the number of balls to be struck) and the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state (for example, the number of winning balls by winning in each winning mouth) 83. For example, it is provided with information display means (for example, display monitor 1130 in FIG. 110) capable of displaying (for example, performance display is possible).
When an abnormality in the reception state is detected by the abnormality detection unit, the display by the information display unit is restricted (for example, an error is notified as shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, and the performance display is restricted).

  Thereby, it is possible to prevent the information display means from performing inaccurate display. Note that, for example, if an illegal act such as removing the harness 730 (connection portions 732 and 733) is performed to show the performance display value well, at least the performance display by the display monitor 1130 is limited. It is possible to prevent a situation in which numbers due to fraudulent acts are displayed as if they were valid.

In the above gaming machine 1,
When a reception state abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection unit, the display state by the information display unit is changed to indicate that the reception state abnormality is detected (for example, as shown in FIGS. 105 and 106) For example).

  Thereby, it can confirm, without providing a new display means.

In the above gaming machine 1,
The abnormality detection means can detect disconnection of the signal line (for example, can be detected by monitoring a signal input from the out-sphere detector 710),
It is possible to notify the outside (for example, game effect lamp 9, speakers 8L and 8R, a card unit display device, a call lamp device, a hall computer, etc.) that the disconnection of the signal line has been detected.

  Thereby, it can recognize, without performing door opening operation | work.

In the above gaming machine 1,
The detection means is configured as a unit (for example, the out-ball detector 710 is configured as a unit that can be arranged on the game board 2 as shown in FIG. 110B).

  This facilitates maintenance. In addition, different models can be used in common.

  In addition, in FIGS. 83 to 110, pachinko gaming machines are shown as performance machines for displaying performance, but a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types of symbols are set according to the operation of the operation lever by the player. Is a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of the stop symbols becomes a specific symbol combination when the symbols are rotated according to the player's stop button operation. (For example, a slot machine equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter referred to as a bonus)).

  For example, a slot machine that displays performance is a slot machine that can execute a game and can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a bonus) that is advantageous to the player, and a game medium (for example, a medal) used in the game And a detection line (for example, a inserted medal sensor that detects a inserted medal) and a signal line (for example, a detection signal from the inserted medal sensor) that transmits a detection signal from the detection unit. A signal line to be output to the main board side of the machine), receiving means for receiving the detection signal (for example, the main board of the slot machine, a predetermined connecting portion provided on the main board side), and the detection signal An abnormality detection means (for example, a CPU on the main board of the slot machine) and a predetermined condition are satisfied (for example, a combination of specific symbols on each reel (a role) In a predetermined state different from the advantageous state, and a payout means (for example, a hopper motor for paying out a medal stored in a hopper tank from a medal payout outlet) Predetermined information calculated based on the number of game media detected by the detection means and the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state (for example, information indicating the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of payouts, etc.) ) Can be displayed (for example, a display unit provided on the main board of the slot machine), and when the abnormality detection unit detects an abnormality in the reception state, the information display unit displays the information. It may be a slot machine that restricts (for example, notifies an error and restricts display of information indicating the ratio).

1 ... Pachinko machine
2… Game board
3 ... Frame for gaming machines
3a ... Glass door frame
3A ... Outer frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device
5 ... Image display device
6A ... Ordinary winning ball device
6B ... Ordinary variable winning ball device
7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker
9 ... Game effect lamp
11 ... Main board
12 ... Production control board
13 ... Voice control board
14 ... Lamp control board
15… Relay board
20 ... Normal symbol display
21 ... Gate switch 22A, 22B ... Start-up switch
23 ... Count switch
29 ... Display monitor
30 ... Operation buttons 100 ... Game control microcomputers 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for effect control
123 ... Display control unit 1000 ... Movable accessory

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising a launching device for launching a game medium to a game area, which can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on the establishment of an advantageous condition,
Detection means capable of detecting a game medium launched into the game area;
Variable winning means capable of changing into an open state in which the game medium launched into the gaming area can be won;
A payout means for paying out game media based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
Determination means capable of determining whether or not the advantageous state;
Information capable of displaying predetermined information calculated based on the number of game media detected by the detection means in a predetermined state different from the advantageous state and the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state Display means,
The variable winning means is
Change to the open state based on the establishment of the advantageous condition,
The determination means includes
A gaming machine, characterized in that it is determined to be in the advantageous state from a predetermined period before the variable winning means changes to the open state.

Images